Home

Lucent Technologies Marine Radio 6.1 User's Manual

1. g N N Lo 8 mo ES 8 1 Assignment of outside trunks to console buttons begins with number 3 Form 5b 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 5c 99 E MFM Adjunct DLC Extension No Person or Location Connected to MLX extension No Copied from Master Extension No Centralized Programming Requirements Adjuncts Disable Voice Announce change button 2 Q FAX machine assignment to System Access Originate Only Answering machine and remove button 3 assignment Used as delay announcement device for calling groups Ext No Enable Ringing Idle Line Preference Change Automatic Line Selection order to 1 System Access Ring 2 System Access Originate Only 3 outside trunks assigned to buttons 3 through 10 Data terminal Set Ringing Option to No Ring for each personal line on which calls are not received Q Alert device type Use as Calls in Queue Alarm device for calling groups Ext No
2. Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations Page H 7 SESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 6 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT gt 106 BFGN 109 FEATURE LIST FL A A A A ROW FEATURE A P CR FEATURE AP CR FEATURE APCR FEATURE AP CR 1 LIDLXA Y NN 10 19 28 2 CPCPFA Y NN 11 20 29 3 CFDBLAC Y _ N N 12 21 30 4 13 22 31 5 14 23 32 6 15 24 33 7 16 25 34 8 17 26 35 9 18 27 36 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 7 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT HIGH RUNNER FEATURE PARAMETERS gt 134 TG GRPID 0 146 ACSR GRP 158 QALWD E 135 MOH ALW 147 EDS GRPN 159 PRIORITY Q 136 IDP NAME 148 BCLID GRP 160 ARSSI E 137 DPAT CAT 0 149 PFA VGRP 161 DIALPLN DD 138 ICR SFG 0 150 PFA DGRP 162 ALWMDR 139 5 151 163 ACSR PINREQ _ 140 5 15 152 ATH DGRP 164 DRING 141 2 153 MDR GRPN 165 DRING 142 SC2S z 154 ACCT GRP 166 CWO DRING 143 CPUO SELQ1 0 155 5 167 MWY DRING 144 CPUO SELO2 0 156 ARS DGRP 145 CPUT TPREDQ 0 157 FRL SESS SWITCH 5 SCREEN 8 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT HIGH RUNNER FEATURE PARAMETERS gt 172 MESSAGE SERVICE MSS 175 MW DCNDN ROW FEATURE GRPNM
3. Form 2b 3 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 2b Continued System Numbering Digital Adjuncts Make additional copies of this form as needed Maximum 127 Adjuncts Set Up Person Location Space Renumber Adjuncts 2B Ext No Function and Equipment 7420 7421 7422 7423 7424 7425 7426 7427 7428 7429 7430 7431 7432 7433 7434 7435 7436 7437 7438 7439 7440 7441 7442 7443 7444 7445 7446 7447 7448 7449 7450 7451 7452 7453 7454 7455 7456 7457 7458 7459 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 2b Continued System Numbering Digital Adjuncts Make additional copies of this form as needed Maximum 127 Adjuncts T Set Up Person Location Space Renumber to Adjuncts 2B Ext No Function and Equipment 7460 7461 7462 7463 7464 7465 7466 7467 7468 7469 7470 7471 7472 7473 7474 7475 7476 7477 7478 7479 7480 7481 7482 7483 7484 7485 7486 7487 7488 7489 7490 7491 7492 7493 7494 7495 7496 7497 7498 7499 Form 2b 5 MERLIN LEGEND Comm
4. 1 amp 18 e 5 2 ek ie 5 8 je je e un undc pod e N N gt g F SES Coe e Sox Soc 22 eo A dev nE 25 L Zos Form 4d 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 4d Continued Button Diagram Q See Master Extension SA Orig Only SA Icom E a SA Icom Ring Button Diagram for MLX 16DP Telephone Form 4d 3 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 4e C MFM Adjunct MLX Telephone Extension No Person or Location Connected to MLX extension No Copied from Master Extension No Centralized Programming Requirements Disable Voice Announce change button 2 Adjuncts Gi assignment to System Access Originate Only and remove button 3 assignment Answering machine Used as delay announcement device for calling groups Change Automatic Line Selection order to Ext No 1 System Access Ring 2 System Access Originate Only 3 outside trunks assigned to buttons 3 through 10 Q Data t
5. SCREEN 3 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT USER INFO gt 28 USPID 0122287000 29 MAXB CHL1 30 ACT USERY 31 PPB1 USRN 32 PPB2 USRN 33 AGI 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 4 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT CKT gt 34 CKT T 2228700 CIRCUIT VOICE CSV CIRCUIT DATA CSD 35 CKT DSL 46 CSV 1 55 CSD 1 36 1 47 CSV CHL ANY 56 CSD CHL ANY 37 CKT MLHG 48 CSV ACO 57 CSD ACO 38 CKT TERM 49 CSV LIMIT 1 58 CSD LIMIT 1 39 NEW 50 CSV NBLIMIT __ 59 CSD NBLIMIT __ 40 CONFIG GRP NI17507B 51 SP DNA E 60 K56 DNA 41 TERMTYP TYPEA 52 SP DNA QTY __ 61 K56 DNA QTY __ 42 DISPLAY Y 53 AU DNA 62 K64 DNA BEN 43 EKTS 54 AU DNA QTY 63 K64 DNA QTY __ 44 CA E 45 CA QTY 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 5 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT CKT gt 64 TKSN 72 SAR QTY 82 BUSY MONITORN 65 TAUTON 73 SAR ORIGN 83 ATT MLHG 66 SHAREDN 74 SAR TERMN 84 RBV TGN 67 SAUTON 75 INCOMINGN 85 ERCO ASGNN 68 PRIVACYN 76 INTERCOMN 86 ERCO ACTN 69 ICPN 77 ORIG CWN 87 SERHLN2228701 70 SUSON 78 PPN 88 BCK LNKN 71 SUSTN 79 CA PREFI 89 ACD POS NUM 80 AUTO HOLDN 90 CIDIALALLOW 81 ONE TOUCHN 91 PIC 92 PIC 95 E911 PSAPN MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Issue 1 August 1998
6. Table 7 2 Planning Forms Continued 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 6 1 6 1 Form Title 6a 6a 6a 6a Optional Operator Features 6b 6b 6b 6b Optional Extension Features 6c 6c 6c 6 Principal User of Personal Line 6d 6d 6d 6d Message Waiting Receivers 6e 6e 6e 6e Allowed Lists ef 6f 6f 6f Disallowed Lists 6g 6g 6g Call Restriction Assignments and Lists 6h 6h 6h 6h Authorization Codes 6i 6i 6i Pool Dial Out Code Restrictions 6b 6b Call Pickup Groups Group Paging 6d 6d Group Coverage Group Calling 6f 6f System Features 6g 60 Allowed Lists 6h 6h Disallowed Lists 6i Call Restriction Assignments and Lists 7a 7a Night Service Group Assignment 7a 7a 7a _ Call Pickup Groups 7b 7 Night Service Outward Restriction 7b 7b 7b 7b Group Paging 7c 7C Night Service Time Set 7c 7 7c 7c Group Coverage 7d 7d 7 Group Calling 8a 1 0 form Label Form Trunks now included on Form 2c 8a 8a 8a 8a System Features 8b 1 0 form Label Form Stations and Calling Groups now included on Form 2a 8c 8a Label Form Posted Message 8d 8b System Speed Dial Continued on next page MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 7 Upgrading Release 6 1 Forms August 1998 Page 7 7 Table 7 2 Planning Forms Continued 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 6 1 6 1 Form Title 9a 9a Aut
7. 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 Disallow to Disallow to Disallow to Ext Nos Ext Nos Ext Nos Form 6f 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 6f Continued uz E AIIN Disallow to Disallow to Ext Nos Ext Nos Factory Setting Form 6f 3 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 6g Call Restriction Assignments and Lists Copy Restriction Type Restriction Type Allowed Disallowed E Levels From List No List No 3 Tei Unrest ii ist Hybrid PBX mode only Form 6g 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 6g Continued ARS Restriction Levels List No List No FRL
8. Before adding to a calling group when programming you must first remove trunks from the QCC T Ifthe system has AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant System fill in only the Group Number and Group Name here then fill in the rest of the Group Calling information on Forms B amp C of the AUDIX Voice Power planning forms Form 7d 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 7d Continued TO _ Group Number Group ID Ext No Calling Group Options Hunt Type Overflow Coverage Q Circular No Q Linear Yes Calling Group No Q Most Idle Yes QCC LDN queue Extension No Primary Delay Announcements Nod y Overflow Threshold 1 call Q calls 2 99 Q Yes Extension No Overflow Threshold Time 0 seconds Secondary Delay Announcement a seconds 1 900 QO No Q Yes Extension No Group Type Delay Interval 0 900 sec Q Auto Login Q Disabled Auto Logout Q Enabled Integrated VMIt Q Generic VMIt Message Waiting Receiver Prompt Based Overflow No Disabled es Extension No Enabled First Calls in Queue Alarm Threshold Queue Control 1 call 99 calls a calls 2 99 Q calls 0 98 Second Calls in Queue Alarm Threshold O 1 call If the system has AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant Q calls 2 99 System you do not need to fill in this information Settings
9. Telephony Server CTI Link Public g Network Figure 1 1 System Configuration for Support of CTI Applications MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 1 Before You Begin Requirements for Supporting CTI Applications Page 1 8 For this configuration you must have the following equipment and software An Intel i386 Intel i486 or Pentium Class computer with at least 16 megabytes of RAM Additional memory may be needed if additional applications will be running on the server machine Refer to the MERLIN LEGEND Network Manager s Guide form more information One of the following configurations Novell NetWare Version 3 12 4 1 or 4 11 m MERLIN LEGEND PassageWay Driver Version 1 1 or later installed m Telephony Services for NetWare software Release 2 2 1 or later installed m An Eicon SCOM ISDN BRI card for the CTI link m A free 8 or 16 bit ISA slot for the ISDN BRI card m 5 megabytes of disk space on the SYS system volume m Either Interrupt 2 or Interrupt 3 available Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Server or Windows NT 4 0 Workstation m MERLIN LEGEND NT PBX Driver Version 1 0 or later installed m Computer Telephony Release 3 1 or later installed m An Eicon DIVA Version 2 0 ISDN BRI card for the CTI link m 5 megabytes of disk space available m Afree 16 bi
10. Required fields for presale 4ESS 5ESS tt DMS 250 or DEX600 DMS 100 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Page of T1 PRI Planner Continued Non Complex Configuration Module of Slot No PRI Identification Service Will SID ANI be used No Q Yes Incoming calls ANI SID Both Prefer then Outgoing calls ANI SID ANIPrivacy SID ExtensionBased UO SID Line Based Channel Service Unit Q Mfr AT amp T Paradyne Model 3150 REG AW2USA 74673 DD E If a CSU other than the one listed AT amp T models is used AT amp T will not accept the responsibility for its installation connection or testing Required fields for presale MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Page of T1 PRI Planner Continued Tee EEO i Non Complex Configuration Module of Slot No Services Subscribed To Channels Assigned to Service Ground start T1 only Loop start T1 only Tie Trunk T1 only Q MultiQuest 900 w wo DNIS T1 or AT amp T Toll C Megacomt OUTWATS 1 or AT amp T Tol C Megacom 800 Q INWATSt w wo DNIS t T1 or AT amp T Tol Megacom Q OUTWATS 800T INWATS T1 or AT amp T Tol SDNt VPNT T1 or AT amp T Toll ACCUNET Switched Q 56 64 Digital Digital Service AT amp T Toll only ACCUNET Switched 56 Digital Data Service T1 only Q DID T1 only Call
11. WIJO T O asvapoy WASS suongorunumuo sCNHOST NITIAN MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3d 80 Incoming Trunks DID Make copies for each block Block Number 1 or 2 Type Add Digits Immediate Start Q O0 digits Q Wink Start Add these digits Expected Digits any number from 1 9999 1 Signaling 2 Q Rotary 3 Q Touch tone 4 Invalid Destination Delete Digits Send to backup position aoe Q Return to fast busy 1 2 4 Trunks Included Block Trunk Telephone ID No No Other 500 ms 10 to 2550 Factory Setting Hybrid PBX mode only Form 3d 1 TPE woy Trunks Included in Block Logical Trunk Telephone Disconnect Time Logical Trunk Telephone ID Number Number 500 ms apt ID Number Number 500 ms Other 10 to 10 to 5550 2550 aid squnzg Sururoou Factory Setting Hybrid PBX mode only 1 0 asvapoy waisks suongorunumuo sCNHOST NITIAN MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1
12. BZ 1 0 eseo oy urojs s suonveorunurmuo NITWAIA Lez D Mod Log Jack Type ext Set Up Renumber Old Wire Person Location Ring Type ID A D B Equipment nee Space to Label Ext or Function Freq Appl ia 1 xxl Shaded lines indicate possible operator positions Factory Setting The system capacity for Personal Directories is decreased by one whenever an MLX 20L telephone is connected to an MLX port t Use Form 2b for adjuncts connected via MFM Ringing Frequency is programmable on the 016 T R module only The maximum number of VMI ports is 24 The maximum number of CTI links is 1 quinn 6 SUIIO syoef uorsu21Xq penunuoD WIOA 1 0 asvapoy waisks suonvoruNWWOD sCINHOST NITHAIA g ez D Mod Log Jack Type pd te Set Up Renumber Old Wire Person Location Ring Type ID A D Equipment to Label Ext or Function Freq Appl Ln 169 Shaded lines indicate possible operator positions Factory Setting The system capacity for Personal Directories is decreased by one whenever an MLX 20L telephone is connected to an MLX port Use Form 2b for adjuncts connected via MFM Ringing Frequency is programmable on the 016 T R modu
13. Form 6b 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 6c Do u Principal User of Personal Line Factory Set Extension Factory Set Extension Factory Set Extension Factory Set Extension Trunk No No Trunk No No Trunk No No Trunk No No 801 821 841 861 802 822 842 862 803 823 843 863 804 824 844 864 805 825 845 865 806 826 846 866 807 827 847 867 808 828 848 868 809 829 849 869 810 830 850 870 811 831 851 871 812 832 852 872 813 833 853 873 814 834 854 874 815 835 855 875 816 836 856 876 817 837 857 877 818 838 858 878 819 839 859 879 820 840 860 880 Note Lines must be assigned to the principal user s extension before the principal users can be programmed 2c page1 for telephone numbers and extension numbers assigned to trunks Form 6c 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 6d moo Message Waiting Receivers System Notification Threshold 0 30 seconds factory setting is 10 seconds Receivers Fax Machine Extension No Form 6d 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN
14. NITIAN QOT UJ04 Dial Name Display Code 11 characters maximum Telephone Number 40 digits maximum No Factory Setting If you select No display this indicates a Marked System Speed Dial number which can override calling restrictions poods urajs g penunuoD 401 T O asvajay urojs g suonvotuNWWIOD ANADAI NITHAIN qOL uuo Dial Name E Display Code 11 characters maximum Telephone Number 40 digits maximum Ves No Factory Setting If you select No display this indicates a Marked System Speed Dial number which can override calling restrictions penunuoD GOT 1 0 asvapoy urojs s suonvoruNWUWOD sCNHOST NITIAN 40 S NES Display Code 11 characters maximum Telephone Number 40 digits maximum No Factory Setting I
15. MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Issue 1 August 1998 Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations Page H 8 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 9 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT HIGH RUNNER FEATURE PARAMETERS gt 176 CALL FORWARDING FEATURE PARAMETERS CF ROW FEATURE FWD TO DN TIMEOUT BSRING SIMINTER SIMINTRA 1 CFDBLAC2228701 0 N 99 2 0 T 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 _ 0 0 5 0 _ 0 0 6 0 E 0 0 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 10 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT DPKT gt 183 DPKT IN 192 IECP DNIC 198 H PVC LCN 184 LCC 193 PB GRP 199 L IN LCN E 185 RAX 194 NOTIF NO 200 H IN LCN __ 186 MLHG 195 TCP N 201 L 2W LCN I 187 TERM 196 HUNT NOTIF 202 H 2W LCN _ 188 LNR HNT TN 197 TCID 203 L OUT LCN 189 HUNT DEACT _ 204 H OUT LCN __ 190 CHL SEL N 205 BUSY LIMIT 191 NEW TN 206 PMDR GRP 207 PMDR ACT 208 DNA p 209 DNA QTY 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 11 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT ODB 210 ODB TN 222 RATE 234 L IN LCN 211 LCC M 223 N2 235 H IN LCN 2 212 RAX 0 224 n 236 L 2W LCN _ 21
16. iii MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Page of Data Form 2 a Data Hunt Groups Make a copy for each group Group Number 1 32 Factory Set Ext No _______ Purpose of Group Group ID Renumber To example Local Host Computer Access Workstation or LAN Access etc Stations Ext Person or Ext Person or Ext Person or Ext Person or No Location No Location No Location No Location Trunks or Pools Form 2 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Page of Data Form 2 Continued Group Number Group ID Ext No Calling Group Options Hunt Type Overflow Coverage Q Circular No Q Linear Q Yes Calling Group No __ EE Q Yes QCC LDN queue Extension No Delay Announcement 7 No Yes Extension No 0 Overflow Threshold 1 call Message Waiting Receiver d calls 2 99 No O Yes Extension Group Type Q Auto Login Calls in Queue Alarm Threshold do eH 1call4 Q Integrated VMI n 22 1 calls 2 99 Q Generic VMI Coverage Group Receiver External Alert for Calls in Queue Alarm Q No a No Yes Group No 2 Yes Extension No See Form 2 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Page of Data Form 3 Digital Data Video
17. Calls to Unassigned Extensions Q QCC Queue 5 Extension No primary operator extension Q Calling Group Extension No default is the Call Park Return Time 180 seconds a seconds 30 300 Recall Timer Automatic Callback Interval 350 ms 3rings 450ms Q rings 1 6 650 ms Extension Status 1sec QO Hotel Rotary Assign to operator positions Delay E GELS Q No Delay Group Calling CMS Note f you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted material you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay license fees to a third party such as the American Society of Composers Artists and Producers ASCAP or Broadcast Music Incorporated BMI Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system which does not require you to obtain such a license from Lucent Technologies or an authorized representative Factory Setting Beginning with Release 2 1 calls received on personal lines with Do Not Disturb on will go immediately to Coverage instead of waiting for the Cover Delay Interval T If the system has AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant System Integrated Administration will automatically set the Return Time Interval to 6 t For systems where the majority of lines are PRI the SMDR Call Length should be one second Transfer features and any feature that requires more than one SA button can be disabled on single line te
18. system has sent a RELease message for call clearing increments of 1 second If this system is installed outside of the U S continue to the Otherwise skip to the following section Assigning Lines Trunks next section MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 49 Compensating for Slow Dial Tone International If this system is being installed outside of the US problems can arise because of slow dial tone from local telephone companies due to the limitations of their switching equipment If this is the case be aware of the following m Users should be instructed to wait for dial tone before they dial Due to changes made to internal timers the system will allow the delay m The following features cannot be used Automatic Route Selection Remote Call Forwarding Remote Access outgoing Tie trunks configuration dependent Delay option on rotary lines Autodial Last Number Dial Saved Number Dial and Callback queue Also the slow dial tone may cause problems with transferring a call joining a call and end to end signaling m Additional touch tone receiver TTR boards may be needed for the system The number of TTRs can be increased by adding 400 GS LS or 016 T R modules each of which provides four TTRs or by adding 008 OPT 012 T R 800 GS LS ID or 800 DID modules ea
19. m Module 2 in slot 05 is connected to an ACCULINK 3150 CSU that is approximately 160 cable feet from the control unit The far end is another communications system m The primary clock synchronization source is the PRI network connected to Module 1 Its path is shown by a line and the letter F m secondary clock synchronization path shown by a line and the letter 5 is the system internal clock DS1 Planning Map CONTROL UNIT Clock 100D 100D 100D MODULE 1 MODULE2 MODULE 3 SLOT O4 SLOT O5 SLOT Approximate Approximate Approximate Distance 10O ft Distance 160 ft Distance CSU CSU CSU E Acculink 3150 Rf Acculink 3150 O Acculink 3150 Other Other Other None None None Connection 1 Connection 2 Connection 3 ogo BX PBX L1 PBX PRI PRI PRI T1 Emulated Trunks T1 Emulated Trunks T1 Emulated Trunks Tie Ti LI Ti LS O Gs O DID O S56 Data O S56 Data O S56 Data O Services Services O Services Key Digital Transmission Other model numbers Facility Primary Synchronization Source Secondary Synchronization Source The switching equipment Tertiary Synchronization of the service provider Source y must be 4ESS Generic 13 or later or 5ESS G6 or later Figure D 1 Sample DS1 Planning Map MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 D Planner
20. All Ground Start All Loop Start All Tie All Unequipped DID All DID S56 Data Q Robbed Bit Signaling RBS Common Channel Signaling CCS Line Compensation Cable Feet All S56 Data NOTE Do not configure 100D modules to do trunk to trunk transfers between DS1 and LS lines trunks Factory Setting The factory setting of T1 is not automatically selected if you enter nothing it must be entered T PRI must be selected as the Type of DS1 connectivity before PRI options are entered t AT amp T Toll and 5ESS local PRI service for Release 2 0 and later requires service provider switching equipment to be either 4ESS Generic 13 through Generic 16 5ESS Generic 6 or a 5ESS serving the FTS2000 network PRI service on Release 1 0 or 1 1 requires 051 facility from a 4ESS Generic 13 through Generic 16 or 4ESS Generic 16 switch Clock Synchronization Priority Q Primary Q Secondary Tertiary None Source Loop C Local Activation Active Q Not Active Channel Service Unit Q Foreign Exchange Special Access Form 3b 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3b Continued Module 3 Slot No Type of Service Q T1 T1 Trunks Switch PRIService Only Q 4 55 Q 5ESst Q DMS 250 DEX600E C Legend PBX DMS 100 Q Legend NTWK Trunk Type Channel
21. DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT USER INFO USPID0122287010 MAXB CHL1 ACT USERY 1 USRN PPB2 USRN AGI MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Issue 1 August 1998 Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations Page H 11 5ESS SWITCH 5 SCREEN 4 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT CKT gt 34 CK 2228701 CIRCUIT VOICE CSV CIRCUIT DATA CSD 354 CKT LCG DSL 46 CSV 1 55 CSD 1 36 1 47 CSV CHL ANY 56 CSD CHL ANY 37 CKT MLHG 48 CSV ACO 57 CSD ACO 38 CKT TERM 49 CSV LIMIT 1 58 CSD LIMIT 1 39 NEW 50 CSV NBLIMIT __ 59 CSD NBLIMIT __ 40 CONFIG GRP NI17507A 51 SP DNA a 60 K56 DNA _ 41 TERMTYP TYPEA 52 SP DNA QTY __ 61 K56 DNA QTY __ 42 DISPLAY Y 53 AU DNA Lo 62 K64 DNA 2 2 43 5 54 AU DNA QTY __ 63 K64 DNA QTY __ 44 CA zu 45 CA QTY 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 5 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT CKT gt 64 TKSN 72 SAR QTY 82 BUSY MONITORN 65 TAUTON 73 SAR ORIGN 83 ATT MLHG 66 SHAREDN 74 SAR TERMN 84 RBV 67 SAUTON 75 INCOMINGN 85 ERCO ASGNN 68 PRIVACYN 76 INTERCOMN 86 ERCO ACTN 69 ICPN 77
22. For Tie All Tie Number s Tie PBX Toll S56 Ground Start Loop Start Tie Unequipped All Ground Start All Loop Start All Tie All Unequipped DID All DID 556 Data Frame Format Q D4 Compatible Extended Superframe ESF Suppression Line Code AMI ZCS B8ZS Signaling Mode Robbed Bit Signaling RBS Q Common Channel Signaling CCS Line Compensation Cable Feet All S56 Data Clock Synchronization Priority Q Primary Secondary Q Tertiary Q None Source Loop Q Local Activation Active Q Not Active Channel Service Unit Foreign Exchange Special Access NOTE Do not configure 100D modules to do trunk to trunk transfers between DS1 and LS lines trunks Factory Setting The factory setting of 1 is not automatically selected if you enter nothing it must be entered PRI must be selected as the Type of DS1 connectivity before PRI options are entered 3 AT amp T Toll and 5ESS local PRI service for Release 2 0 and later requires service provider switching equipment to be either 4ESS Generic 13 through Generic 16 5ESS Generic 6 or a 5ESS serving the FTS2000 network PRI service on Release 1 0 or 1 1 requires a DS1 facility from a 4ESS Generic 13 through Generic 16 or 4ESS Generic 16 switch Form 3b 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form
23. Other data equipment that may be connected to the system include analog data terminals using modem connections such as the following m A local host computer m Group III G3 fax machine m An output only device m Aninput only device A PC containing an internal modem card can also be connected to a T R interface Other digital data terminals may be connected using ISDN terminal adapters including the following Group video conferencing system m Group IV G4 fax machine Other Resource Groups You can create the following types of special groups m Modem Only Group Provides access to multiport data equipment for example a caller at a data station calling an online database system at an outside number over analog lines trunks m ISDN Terminal Adapter Only Group Provides access to multiport equipment for example a host computer by assigning the MLX ports interfacing with the ISDN terminal adapters in the pool to a DHG Data Hunt Groups A data hunt group DHG is similar to a voice extension calling group except that the group in this case is a group of modems or a group of ISDN terminal adapters not both The group can be used to communicate with a local host computer or workstation gateway on a LAN All modems or ISDN terminal adapters in a DHG are assigned to a single extension number that is used both by inside and outside callers to reach the group Users are given the DHG number that corresponds to the p
24. SUBSCRIBER VIEW DN NPA 215 DN 6853219 EQN 40 0 02 04 BCHDN 2 BCDN SP BCDN 3 BCDN C56 BCDN 64 BCHCT 2 BCHCT 2 CMD BCHCT 0 PMD IBCHCT 2 IBCHCT 2 CMD IBCHCT 0 PMD OBCHCT 2 OBCHCT 2 CMD OBCHCT 0 PMD CT CMD INTERRUPTION JOB 0959 1 August 1998 Page H 45 96 01 18 16 23 27 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 23 30 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations CONTINUATION TEXT 0027 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DNCT NPA 215 DN 6853219 EQN 40 0 02 04 CT LCC PKGSV RAX 1 COS ICND COS RND COSDAT SERCOMP 6851 189 PIC 222 SP 288 AU3 CRBLIM 1 INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0028 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 50071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DNCT NPA 215 DN 6853219 EQN 40 0 02 04 CT CMD CAT LCC PKGSD RAX 1 COS ICND COS RND COSDAT SERCOMP 6851 189 PIC 222 C56 PIC 288 C64 CRBLIM 1 INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 Issue 1 August 1998 Page H 46 96 01 18 16 23 34 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 23 37 MASKNO 04328
25. Secondary Clock Synchronization Tertiary Clock Synchronization Primary Clock Synchronization Slot No Slot No Slot No DSL No BRI DSL No BRI DSL No BRI only only only Source Source Source Loop Loop Q Loop Local 100D only Local 100D only Q Local 1000 only Timers T200 Timer T305 Timer 1 000 ms Q 30 seconds _ ms 500 to 5 000 ms Q seconds 2 to 60 seconds in increments of 500 ms T203 Timer Q 33 seconds Q seconds 10 to 255 seconds in increments of 1 second T303 Timer Q 4seconds Q seconds 2 to 10 seconds in increments of 1 second Factory Setting in increments of 1 second T308 Timer 4seconds Q seconds 2 to 10 seconds in increments of 1 second If the system includes both 800 NI BRI modules 100D modules sychronization planning should be completed at the same time Refer to Form 3b while completing this form Form 31 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 4a Extension Copy Analog Multiline Telephone Template Make a copy of this form for each Master Extension Master Extension Template Extension Master Ext No Person Location Extensions Copied to Form 4a 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 4a Continued Button Diagram 34 BUTTON Mm 22 BUTTON 1
26. Trunk to Trunk Transfer Set for Each Extension This enhancement to the Transfer feature enables the system manager to allow or disallow trunk to trunk transfer on a per extension basis In Release 3 1 and later systems the default setting for all extensions is restricted Programmable Second Dial Tone Timer The system manager can assign a second dial tone timer to lines trunks in order to help prevent toll fraud for example when star codes are used After receiving certain digits dialed by a user the CO may provide a second dial tone prompting the user to enter more digits If this second dial tone is delayed and the user dials digits before the CO provides the second dial tone there is a risk of toll fraud or misrouting the call The second dial tone timer enables the system manager to make sure that the CO is ready to receive more digits from the caller Security Enhancements The sections below outline security measures that are implemented in Release 3 1 and later systems Disallowed List Including Numbers Often Associated with Toll Fraud A factory set Disallowed List 7 contains default entries which are numbers frequently associated with toll fraud By default Disallowed List 7 is automatically assigned to both generic and integrated VMI voice messaging interface ports used by voice messaging systems The system manager can manually assign this list to other extensions MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 I
27. 1 INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0017 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DNCT NPA 215 DN 6852299 EQN 20 0 05 00 CT CMD CAT LCC PKGSD RAX 1 COS ICND COS RND COSDAT SERCOMP 68531 19 PIC 222 C56 PIC 288 C64 CRBLIM 1 INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 Issue 1 August 1998 Page H 41 96 01 18 16 22 58 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 23 01 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations CONTINUATION TEXT 0018 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 TERMINAL SERVICE PROFILE DATA VIEW TSP EQN 20 0 05 00 USID 1 TSPID 2156852199 TERMLIM 1 TSPCOS CHDBCHR INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0019 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 TERMINAL SERVICE PROFILE DATA VIEW TSPDNCT EQN 20 0 05 00 TSPID 2156852199 NPA 215 DN 6852199 CT VI INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0020 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 TERMINAL SERVICE PROFILE DATA VIEW TSPDNCT EQN 20 0 05 00 TSPID 2156852199 NPA 215 DN 6852199 CT CMD INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 Issue 1 August 1998 Page H 42 9
28. 2 5 cm of space on the right and left sides of the control unit and 12 in 30 5 cm above and below the control unit to prevent overheating A CAUTION The AC outlet for the control unit should not be switch controlled Plugging the control unit into an outlet that can be turned on and off by a switch can cause accidental disconnection of the system The AC outlet must be properly grounded by using an AC receptacle for a 3 prong plug Do not install the control unit outdoors Do not place the control unit near extreme heat furnaces heaters attics or direct sunlight Do not expose the control unit to devices that generate electrical interference such as arc welders or motors MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 1 Before You Begin Confirming the Location of the Control Unit Page 1 3 Do not expose the control unit to moisture corrosive gases dust chemicals spray paint or similar material Do not place anything on top of the carriers Do not install under any device that may drip fluid such as an air conditioner In addition a backboard is needed to mount the system on the wall One can be made locally from 0 75 in 1 9 cm plywood The dimensions depend on the number of carriers as shown in Table 1 2 A newly designed pre drilled light weight plastic backboard may be ordered COMCODE 847007523 In some areas fire or electrical codes require a flame r
29. Assigning the QCC operator to receive calls on a line trunk determines whether incoming calls on the line trunk ring into the QCC queue and which QCC operator position answers the calls This applies to Hybrid PBX mode only gt NOTES 1 If an operator presses the programmed Backup On or Position Busy button on the console any incoming calls are directed to other operator positions regardless of whether they normally receive such calls or to the programmed backup extension number For more information see Position Busy Backup in the Queued Call Console Hybrid PBX Mode Only section of Chapter 4 2 Trunks assigned to ring into the QCC queue cannot be assigned as Group Calling lines pools Planning Form Instructions For each ground start loop start and automatic in tie line trunk on Form 2c write one of the following in the QCC Operator to Receive Calls column m f you do not want the calls received on the line trunk to ring into the QCC queue write No factory setting m If you want all QCC operators to receive incoming calls on a line trunk write All m f you want to specify one or more QCC operators to receive incoming calls on a line trunk write any combination of the extension numbers for up to four operator positions If you wrote All or specified extension numbers in this procedure then proceed to the next section QCC Queue Priority Level Otherwise skip to the following section Pools Hybrid
30. Code used to associate incoming and outgoing calls with corresponding accounts employees projects and clients AT amp T s switched digital service for 56 kbps 64 kbps restricted and 64 kbps clear circuit switched data calls A coded representation of the destination of data or of the data s originating terminal such as the dialed extension number assigned to the data terminal Multiple terminals on one communications line must each have a unique address Automated Document Delivery System Computer based application that stores documents in a database and automatically faxes them on request Optional equipment used with the communications system such as an alerting device or modem that connects to a multiline telephone or to an extension jack Automatic Line Selection Programmed order in which the system makes outside lines available to a user Numbering of extension ranges remote access codes or other system components that causes conflicts in network operations These numbers can be unique and still be ambiguous For example Extension 441 is different from Extension 4410 However for UDP routing purposes the two numbers are ambiguous and a call intended for Extension 4410 is misrouted on the first three digits sent to Extension 441 See also unambiguous numbering MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Issue 1 August 1998 transmission ANI application ARS ASCAP
31. Numbering the System Page 2 33 Labels This section contains instructions to associate alphanumeric labels with extension numbers so that both the name of the caller and the extension number appear on display telephones Planning Form Instructions On the appropriate line in the Label column on Form 2a write the label maximum 7 characters to be displayed for each telephone Proceed to the next section System Renumbering System Renumbering The selection of a numbering plan depends on the customer s needs Each of the systems numbering plans 2 digit 3 digit and Set Up Space allows you to renumber all or selected extensions If you do not need to renumber extensions skip to the last section of this chapter Updating Planning Information In Release 6 0 and later systems Hybrid PBX mode only the Uniform Dial Plan UDP allows you to choose non local dial plan numbering to specify the numbering of extensions connected to remote systems in a private network and allow users on your system to access those extensions as if they were connected to your own system When renumbering a system that is part of a private network see the Network Reference for information A CAUTION Before programming the private network ranges set up the local dial plan If the ranges are programmed in the network and then 2 digit 3 digit or Set Up Space factory settings are used all network ranges on that switch are erased Before the syst
32. TableNo 42 Type of Table 6 Digit Area Code Exchange Q 1 7 dialing from within area code not within area code Area Code Exchanges 001 901 021 041 061 002 0686 022 042 062 003 028 O43 063 004 024 044 064 005 05 045 006 026 OO7_ 027 008 093 078 210 079 040 060 080 Subpattern of Day Subpattern B Time of Day FRL Call FRL Other Pool 3 Digits Absorb Both 3 Digits 1295 4 081 082 083 084 097 098 099 100 Issue 1 August 1998 Page 4 71 Absorb 1 Call Both 2 Factory Setting Hybrid PBX mode only Select Voice only Data only or Both Local Tables Default FRL is 2 Figure 4 6 Digit Absorption Example MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 72 6 complete the Call Type column enter one of the following m For voice only calls write V m For data only calls write D m For both voice and data calls write Both gt NOTE Pools should be labeled as Voice unless they can support digital data Both can be used for BRI PRI and private network PRI pools Data can be used for T1 Switched 56 pools and to reserve lines for data in BRI PRI and private network PRI pools 7 If you have worked on only one of your planned
33. i e TEHO Consult with the assigned engineer MERLIN LEGEND R6 DESIGN IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE CONTINUED Customer Name Node Is Remote Access used or planned to be used in this system Does this customer intend when MERLIN LEGEND R6 1 becomes available target August 1998 to install a Centralized Voice Messaging System on this all Legend Network Yes If yes which VMS is to be used INTUITY MERLIN LEGEND Mail Messaging 2000 AUDIX Voice Power NOTE Centralized Voice Mail within DEFINITY to MERLIN LEGEND network is not supported Is customer planning to use Auto Attendant to route calls across the network to non local UDP stations Yes No If yes which Voice Mail or Automated Attendant system do you plan to use MERLIN LEGEND R6 DESIGN IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE CONTINUED Customer Name Node Public Switched Telephone Network lines Loop Start Ground Start COMMENTS DID Are DIDs connected to this system routing calls to non local extensions Y N If yes Local DID number range Non Local DID number range Are DIDs connected to another system routing calls to this system Y N If yes on what Node are the DIDs connected COMMENTS Tie Trunks Analog or Digital OutType 1 InMode OutMode DialTone NOTE Jf analog E amp M Tie Lines are used to interconnect systems calls can only go
34. m The voice messaging system fails to transfer calls m Calls fail to ring or go to coverage prematurely m Reorder tone on UDP ARS calls using tandem tie trunks m Delay in MWL tie trunks when tie trunks are available MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Issue 1 August 1998 Page 2 17 Table 2 2 lists the modules that supply TTRs to the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Table 2 2 Module Modules with Touch Tone Receivers Number of TTRs 008 OPT 2 012 T R 016 T R 400 GS LS TTR 400 LS 800 DID 800 GS LS ID MERLIN LEGEND Mail Module ro po po A voice messaging system VMS requires a certain number of TTRs in addition to any system requirements for TTRs The number of TTRs depends on the number of ports used by the voice messaging system see Table 2 3 TTRs are also required in private networks using E amp M T1 tie and tandem tie trunks gt NOTE A VMS cannot be directly connected to the 008 OPT module However the TTRs supplied by the 008 OPT module can be used by the VMS Table 2 3 Number of VMS Ports Number of TTRs Required Touch Tone Receivers Required by Voice Messaging Systems 1 HR oo N 8 12 1 18 CO MD BR OW If a 12 port MERLIN LEGEND Enhanced Service Center is used
35. m To indicate Enhanced Service Center write ESC m indicate CONVERSANT write CONV m To indicate MERLIN MAIL voice messaging system write Mail m Toindicate Lucent Technologies Attendant write Lucent A m AUDIX Voice Power IS II or IS III write AVP m To indicate Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant IS II write m indicate no applications write None If the system has Messaging 2000 or AUDIX Voice Power also write port in the Appl column for any logical IDs that are being used for fax ports If the system is to be part of a Centralized Voice Messaging system Release 6 1 and later systems only check Yes under the Centralized Voice Messaging heading Also check Yes on page 4 of the MERLIN LEGEND R6 Design Implementation Guide form located in Appendix I If not part of a Centralized Voice Messaging system check No on both forms gt NOTE For more information on Centralized Voice Messaging see the Network Reference For each 016 T R module if applicable indicate the Ringing Frequency for that module Enter 20 Hz or 25 Hz in the Ring Freq column for all ports on the 016 T R module When configuring a system in the United States or Canada generally the 20 Hz setting is applicable The factory setting is 20 Hz Proceed to the next section MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration
36. 01 1 pJ E B C V S LEN HOST CUSTGRP LINE CLASS CODE MAXKEYS 64 DN IS ASSIGNED HUNT GROUP 22 OPTIONS SFC NON PILOT DN 22571 GROUP OPTIONS CIR RCVD DEFAULT LOGICAL TERMINAL N N RESTRICTIONS NOPMD ONAL 01 10 02 MDCSCA ISDNKSET ISSUE 2 TEI DYNAMIC SUBGRP O NCOS O RING Y AS A DNH HUNT MEMBER HUNT MEMBER NOT PILOT 5 2257142 41 DN 2257143 TYPE MEMBER OF SNPA 201 SIG HUNT GROUP 22 LTID PSATS LTCLASS BRAFS LINE CLASS CODE KEY 1 CUSTGRP OPTIONS SFC PILOT DN 22571 GROUP OPTIONS CIR RCVD DNH HUNT GROUP N A LNATTIDX N A HUNT MEMBER 4 143 ISDNKSET MDCSCA SUBGRP NCOS O RING Y 41 LTID PSATS 143 SNPA 201 DIRECTORY NUNBER 2257143 LT GROUP NO 13 LTCLASS BRAFS DEFAULT LOGICAL TERMINAL N 5 BEARER SERVICE RESTRICTIONS NOPMD CS Y PS N V S ERSION FUNCTIONAL ISSUE 2 LINE CLASS CODE ISDNKSET MAXKEYS 64 HUNT GROUP 22 HUNT MEMBER 4 OPTIONS SFC KEY DN 1 DN 2257143 KEY FEATURE NONE PILOT DN 2257141 GROUP OPTIONS CIR RCVD PID SUFFIX 01 HOST 01 0 07 01 TEI DYNAMIC CUSTGRP MDCSCA SUBGRP NCOS RING Y DN IS ASSIGNED AS A DNH HUNT MEMBER NOT PILOT ODN 2257144 QLT PSATS 144 DN 2257144 TYPE MEMBER OF DNH HUNT GROUP SNPA 201 SIG N A LNATTIDX N A HUNT GROUP 22 HU
37. 28 29 30 31 32 3 3 MAXB CHL1 ACT USERY 1 USRN PPB2 USRN AGI_ USPID0122287030 DSL BRCS ASSIGNM ENT USER INFO MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Issue 1 August 1998 Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations Page H 14 5ESS SWITCH 5 SCREEN 4 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT CKT gt 34 CK 2228703 CIRCUIT VOICE CSV CIRCUIT DATA CSD 354 CKT LCG DSL 46 CSV 1 55 CSD 1 36 1 47 CSV CHL ANY 56 CSD CHL ANY 37 CKT MLHG 48 CSV ACO 57 CSD ACO 38 CKT TERM 49 CSV LIMIT 1 58 CSD LIMIT 1 39 NEW 50 CSV NBLIMIT 59 CSD NBLIMIT 40 CONFIG GRP 51 SP DNA NEN 60 K56 DNA 41 TERMTYP TYPEA 52 SP DNA QTY __ 61 K56 DNA QTY __ 42 DISPLAY Y 53 AU DNA 62 K64 DNA 43 EKTS 54 AU DNA QTY __ 63 K64 DNA QTY __ 44 CA T 45 CA QTY 5ESS SWITCH LABNSCI SCREEN 5 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT CKT gt 64 TKSN 72 SAR QTY 82 BUSY MONITORN 65 TAUTON 73 SAR ORIGN 83 ATT MLHG 66 SHAREDN 74 SAR TERMN 84 RBV TGN 67 SAUTON 75 INCOMINGN 85 ERCO ASGNN 68 PRIVACYN 76 INTERCOMN 86 ERCO
38. Ascend Pipeline 25PX 75PX ASN asynchronous data transmission AT amp T Attendant Glossary Page GL 2 AMI alternate mark inversion Line coding format in which a binary one is represented by a positive or negative pulse a binary zero is represented by no line signal and subsequent binary ones must alternate in polarity otherwise a bipolar violation occurs AMI is used in the 051 interface Analog data See modem data station station analog multiline Also known as the MERLIN multiline telephone A telephone telephone that transmits and receives analog signals and has a number of line buttons analog Mode of transmission in which information is represented in continuously variable physical quantities such as amplitude frequency phase or resistance See also digital transmission Automatic Number Identification Process of automatically identifying a caller s billing number and transmitting that number from the caller s local central office to another point on or off the public network Software and or hardware that adds functional capabilities to the system For example MERLIN Identifier is an application that provides caller identification information if available in the local area or jurisdiction Automatic Route Selection System feature that routes calls on outside facilities according to the number dialed and line trunk availability To initiate ARS the user dials a dial out code also called an ARS a
39. Form 3e Automatic Route Selection Worksheet Number of exchanges in the calling area_ Type of Dial Number of Area Codes Exchanges or Network Destinations for which Trunk Poot No Pool No Trunk Type Trunk Pool is Used Preferred Trunk Pools For toll calls Table 17 For local calls Table 18 Hybrid PBX mode only Form 3e 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3f Automatic Route Selection Tables Maximum 16 Tables Make a copy for each table Table No Type of Table 6 Digit Area Code Q Exchange Q 1 7 dialing from within area code not within area code Area Code Exchanges 001 021 041 061 081 002 022 042 062 082 003 023 043 063 083 004 024 044 064 084 005 025 045 065 085 006 026 046 066 086 007 027 047 067 087 008 028 048 068 088 009 029 049 069 089 010 030 050 070 090 051 c 091 012 032 052 072 092 013 033 053 073 093 187577 _ 054 094 015 035 055 075 095 016 036 056 076 096 017 037 057 077 097 018 038 058 078 098 019 039 059 079 099 020 040 060 080 100 Subpattern Time of Day Subpattern B Time of Day Other Call Type Other Call Type Digits Both Digits Both Factory Setting Select Voice only Data only or Both Hybrid PBX mode only t Local t
40. INWATS w wo DNIS t T1 or AT amp T To Megacom OUTWATS 8007 INWATS T1 or AT amp T Toll SDNT Q VPNT T1 or AT amp T Toll ACCUNET Switched Q 56 64 Digitalt Digital Service AT amp T Toll only ACCUNET Switched 56 Digital Data Service T1 only Q DID T1 only Q Call by Call Service Selection AT amp T Toll only MCI PRISM MCI Vnet MCI Toll MCI 800f MCI 900 MCI Toll Q DMS Private DMS INWATS DMS Local DMS OUTWATS Q DMS FX DMS Local DMS Tie Trunk Digital Service PRI only i RM S ds Ton d 1 1 A 1 A J 1 A i xj amp m P Es i ur 5 i ABM AM HRMS i E n O Sj i i wo A n oO 1 C2 iN sd n i O N 1 wo A R 1 C2 1 n 1 C2 ed R 1 wo A
41. Intuity CONVERSANT device IROB protector IS 11 111 ISDN ISDN 7500B Data Module ISDN terminal adapter ISDN terminal adapter data station Page GL 16 See ICOM buttons Hardware and or software that links systems programs or devices In a private network calls between a local extension and a local or non local dial plan extension A set of integrated applications that provides voice mail fax messaging automated attendant call accounting and system programming Voice response application that automatically answers and routes calls and executes telephone transactions input output device Equipment that can be attached to a computer internally or externally for managing a computer system s input and output of information In Range Out of Building protector Surge protection device for off premises telephones at a location within 1000 feet 305 m of cable distance from the control unit Integrated Solution II or Integrated Solution III Set of UNIX System based applications that augments and provides additional services using the system IS and are no longer available Integrated Services Digital Network Public or private network that provides end to end digital connectivity for all services to which users have access by a limited set of standard multipurpose user and network interfaces provides digital circuit switched or packet switched connections within the network and to oth
42. MTERM lt 2 gt 42 USPID lt enter value gt 43 MAXBCHL lt 2 gt 44 ACT USER lt Y gt MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations Page H 3 Fields that must be populated on Screens 4 5 and 6 48 CKT TN lt enter TN gt 49 CKT LCC lt enter LCC gt 50 CKT RAX lt enter RAX value gt 55 TERMTYP lt TYPEA gt 56 DISPLAY lt Y gt 60 CSV 1 61 CSV CHL lt ANY gt 63 CSV LIMIT lt 1 gt 69 CSD lt 2 gt 70 CSD CHL lt ANY gt 72 CSD LIMIT lt 2 gt 126 CPN SCRN lt Y gt 140 PIC lt enter PIC gt The Calling Number Identification feature is assigned using the standard BRCS preconstructed features LICNDA and CPCOFA If it is possible request CPCPFA for the Calling Number Identification feature as it provides a clearer display of the CPN information The Redirecting Number Delivery RND feature is assigned using the preconstructed RND feature RND These features are assigned to the user in View 23 8 Field 109 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations Page H 4 DN2 Translations Note DSL information was built with DN1 Fields that must be populated on Screens 1 2 3 and 4 1 DSL TN lt C plus second Telephone number gt 9 ASSOC lt U gt 1
43. ORIG CWN 87 SERHLN2228703 70 SUSON 78 PPN 88 BCK LNKY 71 SUSTN 79 CA PREFI 89 ACD POS NUM 80 AUTO HOLDN 90 CIDIALALLOW 81 ONE TOUCHN 91 PIC 92 95 E911 PSAPN 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 6 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT gt 106 BFGN 109 FEATURE LIST FL A A A A ROW FEATURE A P CR FEATURE AP CR FEATURE AP CR FEATURE AP CR 1 CPCPFA Y 10 19 28 2 LIDLXA Y NN 11 20 29 3 CFDBLAC Y _ N N 12 21 30 4 13 22 31 5 14 23 32 6 1 5 24 33 7 16 25 34 8 17 26 25 9 18 27 36 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations Page H 12 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 7 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT HIGH RUNNER FEATURE PARAMETERS 2134 TG GRPID 0 146 ACSR GRP 158 QALWD 135 MOH ALW _ 147 EDS GRPN 159 PRIORITY OQ 136 IDP NAME 148 BCLID GRP 160 ARSSI E 137 DPAT CAT 0 149 PFA VGRP 161 DIALPLN ___ 138 ICR SFG 0 150 PFA DGRP 162 ALWMDR 139 5 151 ATH VGRP 163 ACSR PINREO _ 140 5 15 152 ATH DGRP 164 DRING 141 SC2NAME 153 MDR GRPN 165 DCW DRING 142 5 25 _ 154 ACCT GRP 166 CWO DRING 143 CPUO SELQ1 0 155 ARS VGRP 167 MWY DRING 144 CPUO SELO2 0 156 ARS DGRP 145 CPUT TPREDOQ 0 157 FRL 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 EN 8 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23
44. Power Automated Attendant Call Answer Information Service Message Drop Voice Mail and optionally Fax Attendant System for use with the system Automated IS III MERLIN LEGEND Mail and Lucent Technologies Attendant Attendant application that automatically answers incoming calls with a recorded announcement and directs callers to a department an extension or the system operator Automated See ADDS Process that occurs in private network when all available routes for a call specify systems with matching switch identifiers The call is routed from the originating system to the destination system and back to the originating system in a continuous loop Switch identifiers labelling systems must be unique across a network See ALS See ANI See automatic start tie trunk See AHS Tie trunk on which incoming calls are routed to an operator or other designated destination without a start signal as soon as the trunk is seized the destination is specified during programming Also called automatic ringdown or auto in tie trunk Device that provides additional power to the system 875 backup bandwidth bipolar 8 zero substitution Line coding format that encodes a string of eight zeros in a unique binary sequence to detect bipolar violations Procedure for saving a copy of system programming onto a floppy disk or memory card See Difference expressed in hertz between the highest and lowest frequencies
45. SMDR nside Dial Tone 5 10 eminder Service Cance edirect Calls to Unassigned Extension Numbers ecall Timer nterdigit Timers otary Dial Dela llowed Lists isallowed Lists ight Service abeling E E E E E E E E E NH E E E utomatic Route Selection Forms Needed orm 3e Automatic Route Selection Worksheet orm 3f Automatic Route Selection Tables orm 3g Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Numbers Tables orm 6e Allowed Lists orm 6f Disallowed Lists orm 6g Call Restriction Assignments and Lists orm 8a System Features orm 9a Night Service Group Assignment orm 9b Night Service Outward Restriction orm 9c Night Service Time Set orm 10a Label Form Posted Message orm 10b System Speed Dial 7A MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 42 Transfer Options This section contains instructions for setting the following Transfer feature options to allow users to transfer outside or inside calls to another telephone m Transfer Return Interval m One Touch Transfer m Transfer Audible m Type of Transfer gt NOTES 1 Transfer features and any other feature that requires more than one SA button can be disabled on Single line telephones by removing all but one SA button through centralized programming Refer to Equipment 2 If customers with CTI applications will frequently use the Confere
46. System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations Issue 1 August 1998 Page H 2 For the Lucent Technologies 5ESS switch Capability Package S includes alternate voice circuit switched data on two B channels It also supports Calling Number Identification on data and voice connections Please note that in order to have simultaneous calls on the two B channels two Directory Numbers DNs must be assigned with this package The Lucent Technologies 5ESS switch also allows alternate voice and data hunting on one DN using the Series Completion feature ISDN Capability Package S The information listed below provides the DN translations that define Capability Package 5 and the screens and fields that must be programmed The information provided shows the translations for one Digital Subscriber Line DSL and two DNs For multiple DSLs DNs the CO will duplicate these screens and enter the applicable DSL and DN values as needed ISDN Ordering Code Capability S VIEW 23 2 DN1 Translations Fields that must be programmed on Screens 1 2 3 and 4 1 DSL TN C plus Telephone number 9 ASSOC lt U gt 11 lt enter OE type gt 14 D ISCN enter value 15 DSERV SX 16 B1SERV lt DMD gt 17 B2SERV lt DMD gt 18 NT1 TYPE enter NT1 type 20 DSL CLS STD 21 RSTR MP lt N gt 22 MDPKT lt 0 gt 23
47. ad i L i A lt j n N co 1 C2 x 1 1 n wo A R 1 19 x O PO AP IAM AMIHRMI HRM AP i E i O i N Required fields for presale 4ESS 5ESS tt DMS 250 or DEX600 DMS 100 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Page of T1 PRI Planner Continued Non Complex Configuration Module of Slot No PRI Identification Service Will SID ANI be used No Yes Incoming calls QO ANI QO SID Both Prefer then Outgoing calls ANI SID ANI Privacy OSID ExtensionBased SID Line Based Channel Service Unit Q Mfr AT amp T Paradyne Model 3150 REG AW2USA 74673 DD E If a CSU other than the one listed AT amp T models is used AT amp T will not accept the responsibility for its installation connection or testing Required fields for presale 10 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning
48. and their associated DNs are grouped together with one main telephone number When an incoming call arrives at the main number the CO searches through the DNs until an available line is found gt NOTE Each DN in the MLH group can be dialed directly but hunting may not be initiated depending on the CO switch For the Siemens SSD EWSD switch each MLH group must be assigned as either voice or data alternate voice data is not supported as mixing the two types in one group could create call interference This constraint does not apply to the Lucent Technologies 5ESS or the Northern Telecom DMS 100 switches MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Review 11 Page G 4 The programming for Multiline Hunt is CO switch dependent The Lucent Technologies 5ESS and Siemens SSC EWSD switches provide hunting through the Series Completion feature The Northern Telecom DMS 100 switch provides hunting through the Multiline Hunt Group MLHG feature Contact the local service provider to determine what type of switching equipment is in use and check the appropriate box under the MLH subheading of the Service Configurations section on page 2 of the form The MERLIN LEGEND has currently been tested with each switch type in the following configurations Lucent Technologies 5ESS in a linear hunt group Northern Telecom DMS 100 in a circular hunt group Siemens SS
49. extension without assistance from the system operator Representation of information in discrete elements such as off and on or zero and one See also analog transmission See See ISDN terminal adapter data station See DSO See DS1 See DsL See DSE Mode of transmission in which the information to be transmitted is first converted to digital form and then transmitted as a serial stream of pulses See also analog transmission dual in line package Switch on a 400EM module used to select the signaling format for tie line transmission Also used on other equipment for setting hardware options DFT See personal line See DID See See DSS MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary display buttons DLC DNIS door answering unit DOS drop and insert equipment DSO DS1 DSL DSS DTE DTMF signaling August 1998 Page GL 11 Buttons on an MLX display telephone used to access the telephone s display Direct Line Console Telephone used by a system operator to answer outside calls not directed to an individual or a group and inside calls transfer calls make outside calls for users with outward calling restrictions set up conference calls and monitor system operation Dialed Number Identification Service Service provided by AT amp T and MCI it routes incoming 800 or 900 calls according to customer selected parameters suc
50. lt BRAFS gt CS Y PS N MAXKEYS lt 64 gt TEI DTEI ABS lt NOPMD gt ABS lt gt EKTS lt N gt MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Northern Telecom DMS 100 Switch Translations Page H 21 SPIDSFX option SPID_SUFFIX lt enter spid suffix value gt PVC option VERSION lt FUNCTIONAL gt ISSUE lt 2 gt Associate new DN with LTID using the NEW command SONUMBER lt lt cr gt or gt DN lt enter DN gt LCC lt ISDNKSET gt GROUP lt enter group name gt SUBGRP lt enter subgrp value gt NCOS lt enter ncos value gt SNPA lt enter NXX value gt KEY lt gt RINGING lt Y gt LATANAME lt enter value gt LTG lt enter value gt LEN OR LTID enter assigned value DMS 100 normally delivers the Calling Party Number and the Redirecting Number if available Attach LTIDs to LEN using the SLT command SONUMBER cr or gt LTID enter value FUNCTION lt gt lt enter LEN to which LTID will attached gt MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Northern Telecom DMS 100 Switch Translations Page H 22 Multiline Hunt Group Feature Translations The sample screens shown below illustrate the translations for alternate voice and data hunting on three Digital Subscriber Lines DSLs and six Directory Nu
51. ne ron ne enden 5 2 5 Lar pio de m e o d 2 gt 3 Factory Setting T Hybrid PBX mode only Maximum 11 pools with up to 80 trunks per pool Factory settings 70 main 891 dial in tie 892 automatic in tie penunuoD WIJO T O asvajay suongorunumuo 4CNHOSI NITIAN e LN 3 N Q Qe Module Type and Slot No Incoming Line Trunk Type Main Toll Type No Personal Telephone Hold Disc Line WATS Number Interval number FX NI BRI or 2 5 2 2 B 2 2 2 9 T 3 Factory Setting T Hybria PBX mode only Maximum 11 pools with up to 80 trunks per pool Factory settings 70 main 891 dial in tie 892 automatic in tie penunuo WIJO 1 0 asvapoy WASS suongorunumuo sCNHOST NITIAN 2 WO Module Type and Slot Log DID Tie No Re number to Incoming Line Trunk Type Main Toll Type c Hold Disc Line WATS Number Interval FX NI BRI or fer Equipment Function Factory Setting Hybrid PBX mode only Maximum 11 pools with up to 80 trunks per pool Factory settings 70 main 891 dial in tie 892 automatic in tie Surioquimnyw 093845 Syoef xyunJ 2urT penunuoD WIJO 1 0
52. of Service Switch Type PRIService Only O 11 PRI T1 Trunks 4 55 Q 5ESS Q DMS 100 Q DMS 250 Q DEX600E Q Legend PBX Q Legend NTWK Trunk Type Channel For Tie All Tie Number s Tie PBX Toll S56 Ground Start Loop Start Tie Unequipped All Ground Start All Loop Start All Tie Incoming Trunks DS1 Connectivity 100D Module Frame Format Q D4 Compatible Extended Superframe ESF Suppression Line Code AMI ZCS B8ZS Signaling Mode Q Robbed Bit Signaling RBS Q Common Channel Signaling CCS Line Compensation Cable Feet Clock Synchronization Priority Q Primary Secondary Tertiary None Source Loop Local Activation Active C Not Active All Unequipped DID All DID S56 Data Channel Service Unit Q Foreign Exchange Special Access All S56 Data Module 2 Slot No Type of Service Switch Type PRIServiceOnly QTr1 Q T1 Trunks Q 4ESS 5ESS Q DMS 100 Q DMS 250 Q DEX600E Q Legend PBX Q Legend NTWK Trunk Type Channel For Tie All Tie Number s Toll S56 Ground Start Frame Format Q D4 Compatible Extended Superframe ESF Suppression Line Code AMI ZCS Q B8ZS Signaling Mode Loop Start Tie Unequipped
53. or 54 if a 391 1 or 391A2 power supply is installed Remember that the 100D 800 NI BRI 400 LS 400 GS LS 800 and 800 GS LS modules have unit loads of 0 0 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 to recalculate unit loads for the new configuration NOTES Empty slots are not permitted between modules m If the exchange reduces the unit load to below the rated maximum for your power supply module no further calculation is required m If your system has a 391A1 or 391A2 power supply and the exchange does not reduce the unit load to 54 replace the 391A1 or 391A2 power supply with a 391C1 power supply If your system has a 391C1 or 391A3 power supply and the exchange does not reduce the unit load to 75 continue to Step 8 8 Calculate the unit load for slots 5 and 6 of the carrier using the table on the m If the unit load for slots 5 and 6 is less than or equal to 27 power is sufficient for the carrier m If the unit load for slots 5 and 6 is more than 27 continue to Step 9 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 F Unit Load Calculation Unit Load Worksheet Page F 7 Module Qty x Unit Load Total Hybrid PBX Equipment ot Modified Key Network Access Lines DID 1 0 0 0 DS1 0 0 0 0 1 BRI 0 0 0 0 GS LS 0 0 0 0 Tie 1 4 1 4 Telephones MLX 10 0 9 1 2 MLX 10D 0 9 1 2 MLX 10DP 0 9 1 2 MLX 28D 1 2
54. over two hops due to call setup time and transmission issues 100D DS1 T1 PRD Type Format Supp Signal T1 PRI D4 esf zcs b8zs rbs com AE 4ESS 5 5 55 100 DMS100 250 DMS250 DEX DEX600E LN Legend NTWK LP Legend PBX NOTE When ordering point to point parameters must be designated We recommend ESF framing and BSZS zero code suppression MERLIN LEGEND R6 1 DESIGN IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE CONTINUED Customer Name Node 1000 DSI TI PRD continued PRI Assignments Channels Trunk IDs Provide Circuit Numbers of T1 PRI circuits Who is the Service Provider Who is providing the CSU MUX CSU MUX Type NOTE IF 3160 CSU DSU IS USED CHECK WITH ENGINEER ON CHANNELIZATION AND TIMING SYNCH PRIOR TO SUBMITTING FORMS TO DATA GROUP FOR CSU TRANSLATIONS MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary Glossary August 1998 Page GL 1 Italics The use of italics in the glossary denotes multiple usage of the italicized text throughout the glossary Numerics 2B data 7500B data module Digital information carried by two B channels for better performance and quality the bit rate is twice that of one B channel used alone See SDN 7500B Data Module A account code ACCUNET address ADDS adjunct ALS ambiguous numbering
55. page 4 as follows If there is more than one 100D module set up for PRI service or you have more than eight B channel groups assigned to a module make copies of Form 3b page 4 as necessary a Inthe Module Slot No space write the number of the control unit slot that contains the module as noted on pages 1 and 2 of this form b Under the B Channel Group No heading copy the B Channel group numbers from Form 3b page 3 c Write the services to be associated with each group under the Outgoing Services and Incoming Services headings Select from the following services AT amp T Toll for 4ESS or 5ESS see page 1 Megacom WATS Megacom 800 ACCUNET SDS Software Defined Network SDN MultiQuest and Long Distance m 5ESS Local For switch type 5 55 see Form 3b page 1 OUTWATS 56 64 Digital Virtual Private Network and INWATS m MCI Toll for DMS 250 or DEX600E see Form 3b page 1 MCI Prism MCI VNet MCI 800 and MCI 900 DMS 100 Local for a DMS 100 see Form 3b page 1 DMS Private Network DMS INWATS Inward Wide Area Tele phone Service DMS OUTWATS Outward Wide Area Tele phone Service DMS FX Foreign Exchange DMS Tie Trunk m Other Call by Call Other gt NOTE If a B channel group has more than one outgoing service then enter Call by Call on Form 3b page 4 under the Outgoing column instead of itemizing the services Form 3b page 8 is where you enter specific services with specifi
56. paging groups park zones Hemote Access and lines trunks T1 T1 emulated data T1 emulated voice T1 Switched 56 service tandem switching tandem trunk tandem tie trunk tandem PRI trunk TAPI telephone power supply unit terminal adapter tie trunk timed flash Type of digital transmission facility that in North America transmits at the DS1 rate of 1 544 Mbps A T1 tie trunk programmed for S56DATA for use by data calls at speeds up to 56 kbps These trunks may be used for tandem and non tandem operation A T1 tie trunk programmed for Tie PBX or Tie Toll for use by voice calls T1 digital data transmission over the public network or over a private network at 56 kbps See Switched 56 service The capability of private network communications systems that allows them to direct outside calls from one facility to another facility rather than just to an extension Calls may be sent for example from a PSTN facility to a tandem trunk or vice versa An private outside facility as opposed to an inside system line that connects two communications systems in a private network and can carry calls to another outside facility through tandem switching The trunk is not connected to the PSTN A tandem trunk that is an analog delay start tie trunk providing a single line trunk per facility and allowing analog transmission of voice and low speed data or a T1 facility offering 24 channels on emulated tie trunks and p
57. then do the following gt NOTE Allowed List Class of Restriction assignments apply to all remote access users and cannot be assigned on an individual basis a Form page 3 Incoming Trunks Remote Access in the Class of Restrictions without Barrier Codes section write the list numbers under the Allowed List Access heading for either or both tie and non tie trunks b copies of Form 3a page 4 Class of Restriction with Barrier Codes write the list numbers under the Allowed List Access heading for each barrier code assigned Disallowed Lists This section contains instructions for using Disallowed Lists to prevent people from making calls to specific numbers whether or not restrictions are specified for an extension and for Remote Access You can use this feature instead of restricting telephones totally from making toll or local calls A SecurityAlert Be sure to review the toll fraud information with regard to Disallowed Lists in Customer Support Information Use a wild card character to indicate that you want calls to an exchange restricted in every area code During system programming a Pause entered using the Hold button indicates a wild card character therefore use the letter p to indicate on the form that a wild card character should be programmed MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 5
58. write the logical ID for each extension b Inthe Extension No space write the extension number for each extension c Inthe Person or Location space write the name of the person or the location of the data equipment d Under the Data Station Use heading indicate the purpose of the data station by checking one of the following boxes Individual use Local host computer or LAN workstation Assigning Line Buttons in Hybrid PBX Mode The line buttons you can assign to data stations are as follows System Access Ring SA Ring Used to make and receive inside and outside data calls To make outside calls the user selects an outside line trunk by dialing either the code for Automatic Route Selection ARS or the dial out code for the trunk pool Users at ISDN terminal adapter data stations and video endpoints can also dial the line trunk number 801 880 to select an outside line trunk Personal Line Used to make and receive outside data calls from a data station on a specific outside line trunk A personal line is an outside line trunk assigned to a line button on one or more data or voice stations The outside line trunk cannot be a member of a pool To dedicate an outside line trunk for data calls and have the calls automatically answered by data equipment do not assign the same outside line trunk to both data equipment and telephones because modems answer voice calls as data calls On analog voice and modem data stations a p
59. 0 no no yes yes yes yes yes no no 6 15 2 0 no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no 6 25 2 0 no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Continued on MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 7 Upgrading Upgrading to Release 6 1 Page 7 4 Table 7 1 Programming Compatibility Continued SPM Program Restore on Version Backup from 10 11 2 0 2 1 3 0 31 40 4 1 4 2 50 6 0 6 1 2 16 2 1 no no no no no no no no no no 3 18 2 1 no no no yes yes no no no no no 4 15 2 1 no no no yes yes yes no no no no 4 25 2 1 no no no yes yes yes yes no no no 5 15 2 1 no no no yes yes yes yes yes no no 6 15 2 1 no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no 6 25 2 1 no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes 3 18 3 0 no no no no no no no no no no 4 15 3 0 no no no no no yes no no no no 4 25 3 0 no no no no no yes yes no no no 5 15 3 0 no no no no no yes yes yes no no 6 15 3 0 no no no no no yes yes yes yes no 6 25 3 0 no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes 3 18 3 1 no no no no no no no no no no 4 15 3 1 no no no no no no no no no no 4 25 3 1 no no no no yes yes yes no no no 5 15 3 1 no no no no yes yes yes yes no no 6 15 3 1 no no no no yes yes yes yes yes no
60. 085 gen 006 516 026 046 066 007 518 027 047 055 008 914 028 076 096 ND 057 077 097 009 717 058 078 098 010 201 059 079 099 060 080 100 Subpattern A Time of Day amp 00 am Subpattern B Time of Day 11 00 pm FRL Other Call FRL Other Call Pool 3 Digits Absorb Both Pool 3 Digits Absorb Both 1 891 0 1_70 2 890 4 2290 4 3 3 4 5 6 Factory Setting Hybrid PBX mode only Select Voice only Data only or Both Local Tables Default FRL is 2 Figure 4 4 Subpattern Example MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 69 Form 3f Automatic Route Selection Tables Maximum 16 Tables Make a copy for each table TableNo 2 Type of Table 6 Digit Area Code Exchange 1 7 dialing from within area code not within area code Area Code Exchanges 001 604 021 041 061 081 002 403 022 042 062 082 003 306 023 043 063 083 004 204 024 044 064 084 005 907 025 045 006 705 026 007 519 027 008_ 46 097 009 6153 078 098 010 079 099 040 060 080 100 Subpattern of Day Subpattern B Time of Day FRL Other Call FRL Other Call Pool 34 Digits Absorb Both 3 Digits Absorb Both 1_70 905012 2 Factory Set
61. 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Group Assigned Features Page 4 37 to the Overflow receiver If the Overflow Threshold Time is the primary source for overflow set the Overflow Threshold to a large number of calls for example 99 calls If you want calls to overflow based on the number of calls in the queue disable the Overflow Threshold Time by setting it to 0 seconds In Release 6 0 and later systems Prompt Based Overflow allows callers waiting in the queue and listening to delay announcements to press the pound key in order to reach the overflow receiver for the group which may be the QCC queue to another calling group including a calling group assigned for a voice mail system gt NOTE One TTR is allocated while the announcement unit is playing the message if Prompt Based Overflow is enabled for a group In Release 6 0 and later systems the system manager can control the number of calls allowed into the primary calling group queue Subsequent callers will receive a busy signal as long as the call was received on the following types of lines trunks DID PRI facilities programmed for dial plan routing and all calls that are transferred from a VMI port to a local extension gt NOTE Remote Access calls to a calling group coverage calls directed to a calling group and calls directed to a calling group through a QCC Position Busy backup are not eligible for queue control Planning Form Instru
62. 1 7 MLX 20L 1 1 1 6 BIS 10 0 9 1 1 BIS 22 1 0 1 3 BIS 22D 1 0 1 3 BIS 34 1 1 1 5 BIS 34D 1 1 1 5 MLC 5 0 0 0 0 MDC 9000 0 0 0 0 MDW 9000 0 0 0 0 10 Button Basic 0 9 1 1 10 Button HFAI 1 0 1 2 34 Button Basic 0 9 1 1 34 Button DLX 1 2 1 7 34 Button BIS 1 2 1 4 34 Button BIS DIS 1 2 1 4 Single Line Telephone 0 6 0 7 Optional Equipmentt Direct Station Selectort General Purpose Adapter Hands Free Unit Headset Adapter 0 8 Total Actual Unit Loa Oo NI O o Unit loads are computed for each trunk for trunk type network access lines T The MFM has its own wall power unit located at the telephone and therefore is not added to the unit load calculation t Up to 0555 one DSS for each MLX 28D MLX 20L be powered from each control unit carrier For example a three carrier system can have six system operator positions each with one DSS powered from the control unit MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 F Unit Load Calculation Unit Load Worksheet Page F 8 9 Try to exchange modules between carriers to reduce the unit loads for slots 5 and 6 through 27 Remember that the 100D 800 NI BRI 400 LS 400 GS LS 800 and 800 GS LS modules have unit loads of 0 0 Repeat Steps 1 through 8 to recalculate unit loads for each new configuration NOTES Empty slots are not permitted between modules m
63. 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 18 Remote Access A SecurityA lert The Remote Access feature of your system if you choose to use it permits off premises callers to access the system from a remote telephone by using an 800 number or a 7 or 10 digit telephone number The system returns an acknowledgment signaling the user to enter his or her barrier code which is selected and programmed by the system manager After the barrier code is accepted the system returns dial tone to the user If you do not program specific egress restrictions the user will be able to place any call normally dialed from a telephone associated with the system Such an off premises network call is originated at and will be billed from the system location The Remote Access feature as designed helps the customer through proper programming to minimize the ability of unauthorized persons to gain access to the network Most commonly phone numbers and codes are compromised when overheard in a public location through theft of a wallet or purse containing access information or through carelessness writing codes on a piece of paper and improperly discarding it Additionally hackers may use a computer to dial an access code and then publish the information to other hackers See Appendix A l Customer Support Information for more information about security Use these instructions only if remote users need access to the sy
64. 13 0 PS0071 000 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DN NPA 215 DN 6853119 EQN 40 0 02 04 BCHDN 2 BCDN SP BCDN 3 BCDN C56 BCDN 64 BCHCT 2 BCHCT 2 CMD BCHCT 0 PMD IBCHCT 2 IBCHCT 2 CMD IBCHCT 0 PMD OBCHCT 2 OBCHCT 2 CMD OBCHCT 0 PMD CT VI CT CMD INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0024 M NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DNCT NPA 215 DN 6853119 EQN 40 0 02 04 CT VI CAT LCC PKGSV RAX 1 COS ICND COS RND COSDAT SERCOMP 6853219 PIC 222 SP 288 AU3 CRBLIM 1 INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 Issue 1 August 1998 Page H 44 96 01 18 16 23 20 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 23 23 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations CONTINUATION TEXT 0025 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DNCT NPA 215 DN 6853119 EQN 40 0 02 04 CT CMD CAT IBA LCC PKGSD RAX 1 COS ICND COS RND COSDAT SERCOMP 6853219 PIC 222 C56 PIC 288 C64 CRBLIM 1 INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0026 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 50071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328
65. 20 Special Number 411 611 811 911 Pool 3 Other Digits Pool 3 Other Digits 1 _ 1 70 Factory Setting Hybrid PBX mode only T Select Voice only Data only or Both t Always set to the first pool in the system cannot be changed Form 3g 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3g mmm ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3h LS ID Delay Note Only for lines attached to 800 GS LS ID module O o INIo CO N Factory Setting Form 3h 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee TI wo Logical Line Directory Service Profile Service Configuration Hunt Pattern ID Number Number Identifier IOC 5 MLHG Linear CPN BN Calling Party Number Billing Number MLHG Multi Line Hunt Group wog 1 0 asvapoy waisks suongorunumuo NITIAN CINPON 008 suondo nig syunsy MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 31 Continued mmm eee Clock Synchronization 100D or BRI Modules
66. 4 21 Elevate Priority This section contains instructions to arrange the QCC queue so that important business calls are answered first gt NOTE During high volume calling periods this means that only high priority calls are delivered to a QCC within a reasonable amount of time and low priorit calls go unanswered To review call priority assignments Queue Priority Lever in Chapter 3 Lines Trunks The setting for the Elevate Priority option determines the length of time in seconds before the calls waiting in the QCC queue are automatically assigned a higher level of priority Although the priority of every call in the queue is then increased to a higher level a call is never increased to the highest priority 1 because priority 1 calls are those that must reach the operator as quickly as possible Planning Form Instructions Under the Elevate Priority heading on Form 6a do one of the following m To indicate that the order of priority is not changed check the 0 Seconds box the factory setting m To indicate that call priority is reordered check the second box and write the number of seconds in the space provided Select any number from 5 through 30 depending on the number of priority levels assigned to calls ringing into the queue and the volume of incoming calls The recommendation for typical systems is 8 seconds Message Center This section contains instructions to assign this feature when there i
67. 517G13 28 and 016 T R modules Apparatus Code 517434 have built in ring generators and can be mixed in carriers with the older modules that already have a generator in place MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 6 Modifications Adding to the System Page 6 5 5 Do one of the following gt NOTE Placing additional modules in the control unit requires a recalculation of unit loads See Appendix F Unit Load Calculation m If the control unit has an available slot to the right and the guidelines permit placement there proceed to Step 6 m If you must rearrange existing modules to accommodate the new one skip to Step 7 6 Revise or complete the required planning form s according to the directions shown in Table 6 2 Table 6 3 and Table 6 4 7 Ifyou rearrange modules in the control unit the numbering plan reverts to the factory set 2 digit plan You must then reprogram the system a Obtain a blank set of planning forms copy them from Appendix Blof this book or order them separately b Locate the Equipment List if available the local telephone company line trunk information list the floor plan and the Employee Communication Survey forms If any of these materials have been revised find both the original and revised versions c Work through System Planning beginning with Chapter 2 Control Unit Configuration When you have completed modi
68. 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 39 Tie Trunks Use these instructions only if the system has tie trunks including tie trunks emulated through a DS1 connection Otherwise skip to the next section DID Trunks Hybrid PBX Mode Only If configuring T1 Tie trunks including those with Switched 56 digital data service complete the instructions in the T1 Service section first Tie trunks must be configured to match central office requirements or the configuration of the system to which they tie Review tie trunk operations and make the following decisions about the way each tie trunk operates Direction Signaling type E amp M Signaling Dial mode Dial tone Answer supervision time Disconnect time Private network tandem trunks gt NOTE See the Network Reference for information on private networking This section contains instructions for each of these options Planning Form Instructions 1 Transfer the trunk identification from Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks to Form 3c Incoming Trunks Tie Write the logical ID and trunk number for each tie trunk connected to the system Under the Direction heading on Form 3c check the direction for each tie trunk next to its trunk number m If the tie trunk is two way check the Two Way factory setting column Use this option for private networks m If the trunk is one way check either the Outgoing column or th
69. 56 facilities including T1 Tie trunks using T1 Switched 56 service are assigned to the MLX port that port may be configured as a 1B Data or 2B Data port In a 1B configuration only one of the assigned B channels is used by the ISDN terminal adapter data station The 2B configuration allows the simultaneous use of both B channels The ISDN terminal adapter adapts the DTE to the MLX environment Instead of converting digital signals to analog signals as a modem does the ISDN terminal adapter maintains a digital data format that allows transmission to another inside ISDN terminal adapter station or over the PRI NI 1 BRI or T1 Switched 56 telephone network The ISDN terminal adapter can provide dialing and answering capabilities to the data station and can share the MLX extension jack with an MLX telephone An ISDN terminal adapter data station can be used to make data calls either over digital telephone facilities PRI NI 1 BRI or T1 Switched 56 facilities or to an ISDN terminal adapter data station inside the system There are different types of ISDN terminal adapter data stations depending on the data station s capabilities voice and ISDN terminal adapter data digital voice and data ISDN terminal adapter data only MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications About Data and Video Communications Page 5 12 MLX Voice and ISDN Terminal Ada
70. 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 13 Numbering the System This section describes the assignment of numbers to extensions gt NOTE Assigning numbers to calling groups paging groups park zones and remote access is described later in this book The process of numbering extensions consists of the following tasks Identifying Extension Jacks Using the placement of modules in the control unit as a guide see the Control Unit Diagramlon Form 1 determine the order in which to connect telephones and other equipment to the control unit To do this identify the extension jack types available by module and then match system components for example operator positions or telephone types with the jacks that support them Renumbering If the system assigned extension numbers are not appropriate for the customer s business change them The system offers two automatic numbering plans 2 digit and 3 digit numbers as well as the option of creating a unique numbering plan with extension numbers of 1 to 4 digits Each of these three plans allows renumbering of all or selected extensions Updating Planning Information Add information to Form 1 and to the floor plan as appropriate This section contains instructions for completing each of these tasks The Feature Reference provides detailed information about system numbering and the three numbering plans
71. 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information FCC Notification and Repair Information Page A 3 The facility interface code FIC and service order code SOC For tie line connection the FIC is and the SOC is 9 0F For connection to off premises stations the FIC is OL13C and the SOC is 9 0F For equipment to be connected to DID facilities the FIC is O2RV2 T and the SOC is AS 2 For equipment to be connected to 1 544 Mbps digital service the SOC is 6 0P and the FIC is 04DU9 BN for D4 framing format with AMI zero code suppression 04DU9 DN for D4 framing format with bipolar 8 zero code suppression B8ZS 04DU9 IKN for extended superframe format ESF with AMI zero code suppression 04DU9 ISN with ESF and B8ZS For equipment to be connected to 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps digital facilities the FIC is 02155 and the SOC is 6 0Y The quantities and USOC numbers of the jacks required For each jack the sequence in which lines are to be connected the line types the FIC and the REN by position when applicable m Ringer Equivalence Number REN The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENS on the line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may
72. 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT HIGH RUNNER FEATURE PARAMETERS SCR Gl gt 172 MESSAGE SERVICE MSS 175 MW DCNDN ROW FEATURE GRPNM 1 2 3 4 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 9 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT HIGH RUNNER FEATURE PARAMETERS 2176 CALL FORWARDING FEATURE PARAMETERS CF ROW FEATURE FWD TO DN TIMEOUT BSRING SIMINTER SIMINTRA 1 CFDBLAC2228703 0 N 1 99 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 _ 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 RE 0 0 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCR EEN 1 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT 1 DSL TN C 2228703SERVICES AND FEATURES SCREENS 4 MLHG 5 TERM BRCS FEATURE LIST 6 6 DSL OE _ BRCS FEATURE PARAMETERS 7 to 9 9 ASSOC U CKT 4 amp 5 DELFEAT LIST 14 DPKT 10 DSL INFO 2 ODB 11 12 2 T3 USER INFO 3 5 55 SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 2 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT DSL INFO gt 11 00101221 25 DGTS2228 14 D ISCN 007105 26 ACSR GRP 15 D SERV SX 27 DFLT SRV 16 Bl SERV DMD 17 B2 SERV DMD 18 TYPE 19 20 DSL CLS STD 21 RSTR MP N 22 ACSR INH Y 23 MDPKT 8 24 MTERM 2 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 3 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 gt
73. 8 TTRs are required MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 18 Table 2 4 estimates the total number of TTRs required in the system based call volume and whether the system uses account codes The call volume per hour in this table includes all calls originating from single line telephones calls on tie lines incoming remote access and Direct Inward Dial DID calls gt NOTE You must consider the call traffic across a private network when estimating the number of required TTRs This includes calls on analog tandem tie trunks and T1 emulated tandem tie trunks In addition if your private network includes Centralized Voice Messaging you must consider the call traffic coming across the private network for the voice messaging system and the TTRs required for the updating of Message Waiting lights Release 6 1 or later systems For this updating a TTR is required at the sending end and the receiving end If the systems in the private network are connected by PRI trunks no additional TTRs are needed Table 2 4 System Requirements for Touch Tone Receivers TTRs Required Calls Hour No Account Codes Account Codes Used 110 2 4 180 4 6 350 4 8 420 6 8 610 6 10 710 8 10 In Release 6 0 and later systems the use of the Prompt Based Overflow setting which allows callers to request overflow c
74. 87 SERHLN 70 5950 78 PP N 88 BCK LNK Y 71 SUST 79 CA PRE T 89 ACD POS NUM 80 AUTO HOLD N 90 CIDIAL ALLOW 81 ONE TOUCH N 91 PIC 92 PIC 95 E911 PSAP N 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 6 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT 2106 BFGN _ 109 FEATURE LIST FL A A A A ROW FEATURE AP CR FEATURE AP CR FEATUREAPCR FEATURE AP CR 1 CPCPFA Y NN 10 19 28 2 LIDLXA Y NN 11 20 29 3 12 21 30 4 13 22 31 5 14 23 32 6 15 24 33 7 16 25 34 8 17 26 35 9 18 27 36 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Issue 1 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations Page H 18 5ESS SWITCH LABNSCI SCREEN 7 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT HIGH RUNNER FEATURE PARAMETERS gt 134 TG GRPID 0 146 ACSR GRP 158 QALWD _ 135 ALW 147 EDS GRPN 159 PRIORITY Q 136 IDP NAME 148 BCLID GRP 160 ARSSI 137 DPAT CAT 0 149 PFA VGRP 161 DIALPLN 138 ICR SFG 0 150 PFA DGRP 162 ALWMDR _ 139 SCINAME 151 ATH VGRP 163 ACSR PINREQ _ 140 5 15 _ 152 ATH DGRP 164 DRING _ 141 SC2NAME 153 MDR GRPN 165 DCW DRING 142 SC2S _ 154 ACCT GRP 166 CWO DRI
75. Adapters 770 791 Groups 7300 7499 7920 7929 793 799 8 800 Trunks Park 8891 Pools 801 880 881 888 890 899 ARS Access Hybrid PBX mode Idle Line Access 9 Listed Directory Number QCC t Remote Access NOTE 0 and 7001 are the same station Figure 2 4 Extension Numbers for Set Up Space Numbering Plan MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 36 Planning Form Instructions Use Figure 2 2 through as you record extension number information 1 Form 2 and 2b if this switch is part of a private network check Yes under the Networked Switch heading If the switch is not part of a private network check No gt NOTE For more information see the Network Reference 2 Identify the 2 digit 3 digit or Set Up Space numbering system you will be using under the Factory Set column on Form 2b by circling the name of the appropriate numbering system 3 Do one of the following m If you do not need to renumber any of the factory set extension numbers a Check the 2 Digit 3 Digit or Set Up Space box under the Renumber System heading on Form 2a to indicate the numbering plan you re using b Skipto the next section Updating Planning Information m If you want to renumber only a few of the extensions and there are enough numbers available for 2 and 3 digit numbering plans a Chec
76. Additionally hackers may use a computer to dial an access code and then publish the information to other hackers Substantial charges can accumulate quickly It is your responsibility to take appropriate steps to implement the features properly evaluate and administer the various restriction levels and protect and carefully distribute access codes Under applicable tariffs you will be responsible for payment of toll charges Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit resulting from unauthorized access MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Remote Administration and Maintenance Page A 22 To reduce the risk of unauthorized access through Remote Administration and Maintenance please observe the following procedures The System Administration and Maintenance capability of a Hybrid PBX or Key system is protected by a password Change the default password immediately Continue to change the password regularly Give the password only to people who need it and impress upon them the need to keep it secret If anyone who knows the password leaves the company change the password immediately If you have a special telephone line connected to your Hybrid PBX or Key system for Remote Administration and Maintenance you should do one of the following Unplug the lin
77. CFDBLAC The 5ESS limits the number of members of a series completion group to 16 DNs and the number of lines forwarded using CFDBLAC to the value specified on Screen 9 Field 176 SIMINTRA This value is currently set to 99 series completion groups but can be changed 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 1 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT 1 DSL 2228700 SERVICES AND FEATURES SCREENS 4 MLHG 5 TERM BRCS FEATURE LIST 6 6 DSL OE _ BRCS FEATURE PARAMETERS 7 to 9 9 ASSOC U CKT 4 amp 5 DELFEAT LIS 14 DPKT 10 DSL INFO 2 ODB 11 PPB1 12 PPB2 13 USER INFO 3 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 2 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT DSL INFO gt 11 00101209 25 CUT DGTS 2228 14 D ISCN 007096 26 ACSR GRP 15 D SERV SX 27 DFLT SRV 16 Bl SERV DMD 17 B2 SERV DMD 18 TYPE AULC 19 PMDEF 20 DSL CLS STD 21 RSTR MP N 22 ACSR INH Y 23 MDPKT 8 24 MTERM 2 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations Page H 6 August 1998 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1
78. Copy Restriction Restriction Type Allowed Disallowed From Hybrid PBX mode only Form 6g 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 6h Authorization Codes Note Keep this form in a secure place Option for SMDR Account Code Field Extension Authorization Number Code Authorization Code Home Extension Extension Authorization Number Code Factory Setting Form 6h 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 6h Continued Authorization Codes Note Keep this form in a secure place Option for SMDR Account Code Field Extension Authorization Number Code Authorization Code Home Extension Extension Authorization Number Code Factory Setting Form 6h 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 6i SSS Pool Dial Out Code Restrictions Pool Dial Out Codes Extension Number 892 893 894 Factory
79. Cover Ring Delay Q 2 Rings Q rings 1 6 Group Coverage Ring Delay Q 3 Rings Q rings 1 9 Factory Setting Form 4b 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 4b Continued Button Diagram See Master Extension 34 BUTTON CO 22 BUTTON 10 BUTTON m 5 BUTTON OO L 27 I4 1610 28 1710 29 N co OO Note Lines 1 through 8 only default on telephone when the system is in Key mode Form 4b 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 4c Extension Copy MLX Telephone Template Make a copy of this form for each Master Extension Master Extension Template Extension Master Ext No Person Location Extensions Copied to Form 4c 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 4c Continued U es Button Diagram 20 Note Lines 1 through 8 on
80. Defined Network special character outside calls In a private network a communications system that is directly connected to and located within 200 miles of the local system Refers to a computer telephony software application that takes caller information for example provided by Caller ID service queries a database and displays a screen with information about the caller onto a user s PC screen Screen pop requires that an identifying number or code be available to identify the calling party See also CT link Software Defined Network AT amp T private networking service created by specialized software within the public network A private network arrangement where either two or four or more communications systems are connected in a line with no particular system acting as the hub system See also star configuration A feature available in Release 6 1 and later systems that allows one extension to listen in on observe calls that arrive at another extension station extension identification Sending of information between devices to set up maintain or cease a connection such as a telephone call Transmission of signals in one direction only across a telecommunications channel Industry standard touch tone or rotary dial telephone that handles one call at a time and is connected to the system via an extension jack on a 012 016 T R or 008 OPT module Position in a carrier for a module numbered from
81. Enterthe total number of different area codes or exchanges that the pool should serve in the Number of Area Codes or Exchanges for which Trunk Pool Is Used column gt NOTE If you do not know the exact number of exchanges or area codes write a note such as All area codes in the U S except the 15 served by the regional WATS lines trunks Keep in mind that you are recording how many different area codes or exchanges the pool should access not the area codes or exchanges themselves This step helps identify the preferred trunk pools for toll and local calls Preferred pools are the trunk pools in which the system places each call unless a different route has been specified for that particular type of call MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 61 5 Under the Preferred Trunk Pools heading a Determine which of the toll trunk pools is used for calls to the greatest number of different area codes Write the number of that trunk pool in the space next to For toll calls Table 17 Table 17 is explained later in this chapter b Determine which of the local trunk pools is used for calls to the greatest number of different exchanges Write the number of that trunk pool in the space next to For local calls Table 18 Table 18 is explained later in this chapter Figure 4 1 shows the completed Automatic Route Selection Worksheet for the ficti
82. Features and Enhancements Release 4 2 Enhancements June 1997 Page xxvii Release 4 2 Enhancements June 1997 Release 4 2 includes all Release 4 1 functionality plus the enhancements listed below There are no hardware changes for Release 4 2 Additional Network Switch and Services Options for ISDN Primary Rate Interface PRI Release 4 2 of the system supports connectivity to MCI or local exchange carrier LEC PRI services and to the following central office switch types in addition to the 4ESS and 5ESS switch types that carry for AT amp T Switched Network services NORTEL DMS 100 BCS 36 for local exchange carrier services m NORTEL DMS 250 generic 07 serving the MCI network m Digital Switch Corporation DEX600E generic 500 39 30 serving the MCI network Beginning with Release 4 2 the following MCI PRI and PRI local exchange carrier LEC services along with AT amp T Switched Network Services can be provided to users of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System m MCI Toll Services for DMS 250 DEX600E switch type MCI Prism service for domestic outgoing long distance and international voice calls for domestic outgoing 56 kbps restricted 64 kbps unrestricted and 64 kbps restricted circuit switched data calls MCI VNe service for incoming and outgoing domestic and voice calls for 56 kbps restricted 64 kbps restricted and 64 kbps unrestricted circuit switched data calls MCI 800 for d
83. Group Assigned Features Page 4 32 Group Calling This section contains instructions to group the telephones of people such as ticketing agents who handle the same type of call Through the Group Calling feature all telephones in the group are assigned to a single extension number that is used by both inside and outside callers to reach the group The individual extension numbers of the telephones are still used by callers who need to reach a specific member of the calling group gt NOTES 1 The Extension Status feature must be set for the Group Calling CMS configuration which is the factory setting in order for calling groups to be available See the Extension Status instructions later in this chapter for details 2 In Release 6 1 and later one non local member may be in a calling group A calling group cannot contain both local and non local members See the Network Reference for information 3 If calling groups are to be used in conjunction with Centralized Voice Messaging see the Network Reference for information The system automatically reserves extension numbers 770 791 and 7920 7929 for calling groups these may be changed If operators with DSSs need one touch Group Calling renumber the extensions that fall within the Page button ranges If the system has AUDIX Voice Power Fax Attendant System certain extension numbers are reserved as follows 7924 Fax Response 7925 Voice Mail 7926 Call Answer 7927
84. ID ICLID information LS ID delay must be set to On factory setting is Off To use a CTI application for Call Control features Hold Hold retrieve Consult Transfer or Conference the call must be on an SA button A monitored extension is one that is connected to a CTI application that can handle the call the application should be used to handle the calls An unmonitored extension is not connected to a CTI application MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 29 To receive ANI or Caller ID if available information for incoming alerting calls calls must m Arrive SA button or be transferred by an unmonitored DLC or a m After a call has been answered the call may arrive at any type of facility button For calls that arrive on a personal line and are first answered by a DLC transfers must be activated manually using the telephone The CTI Client PC Transfer function only works with calls received on SA buttons In this situation the following holds true m lfaDLCisan unmonitored extension and the DLC transfers call to a monitored extension it sends Caller ID ICLID ANI information to and initiates a screen pop at the transfer receiver s Client PC m Ifthe DLC is a monitored extension the DLC receives screen pop but does not send this information to the transfer receiver If an unmo
85. Ifthe unit load for slots 5 and 6 is less than or equal to 27 power is sufficient for the carrier m If the exchange does not reduce the unit load for slots 5 and 6 to 27 install wall power units for the appropriate number of telephones to reduce the unit load to 27 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Review Page G 1 NI 1 BRI Review This appendix contains instructions for completing the NI 1 BRI Planner Form If you have questions while completing the form prior to the sale contact the Sales and Design Support Center SDSC engineers Once the contract has been signed and the forms are completed make a photocopy of the forms for your records and forward the forms to the technician who will do the installation The technician will then fax a copy to the National Service Assistance Center NSAC if any questions or problems occur at the customer site The NI 1 BRI Planner form should be used in conjunction with System Form 3i Incoming Trunks BRI Options 800 NI BRI Module Form Needed 1 BRI Planner Planning Form Instructions gt NOTE Prior to completing any of the steps below you should first verify that the customer s local service provider offers National ISDN 1 BRI service with ISDN Ordering Code IOC standardized capability package S and separate Multi Line Hunt MLH service depending on the customer s requirements If the Centra
86. Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 25 Planning Form Instructions On Form 3b page 1 Incoming Trunks DS1 Connectivity 100D Module for each 100D module in the system 1 Inthe Module Slot No space write the number of the control unit slot that contains the module see the Control Unit Diagramjon Form 1 gt NOTE If more than one 100D module is used complete the first box Module 1 to show the options assigned to the 100D module in the lowest number control unit slot Use the second box for the second lowest numbered slot and the last box for the highest numbered slot 2 Under Type of Service check T1 the factory setting gt NOTES 1 For T1 or T1 Switched 56 service the T1 box must be checked on the form If you leave this blank and T1 is not specified during programming the 100D module will not be programmed 2 Steps 3 4 5 and 6 must match the service provider settings Check with the provider if necessary See Obtaining Telephone Company Information in Chapter 1 for more information 3 Inthe table under the T1 Trunks heading write the channel number s for each trunk type and or for Tie or All Tie check the Tie PBX Toll or S56 boxes 4 Under the Frame Format heading do one of the following a the factory setting check D4 Compatible b To change the factory setting check Extended Superframe ES
87. LS 408 GS LS 408 GS LS MLX 400EM 800 DID 100D 800 GS LS ID 800 NI BRI A 8 4 4 8 4 4 4 8 N k O Extension Capacity Physical Physical Total Module Number of Jacks per Jacks by Extensions Extensions Type Modules Module Module Type Assigned Assigned 008 MLX 008 ATL 4081 408 GS LS 408 GS LS MLX 012 016 008 OPT MERLIN LEGEND Mail N A System capacity for Personal Directories is decreased by one whenever an MLX 20L telephone is connected to an MLX port t Hybrid PBX mode only The 100D module has one physical jack that supports 24 trunks The 008 OPT module is assigned 12 extension numbers although there are only 8 physical extension jacks 17 Although this MERLIN II module is supported the 400 GS LS TTR the 408 GS LS and the 408 GS LS MLX are the recommended modules The 800 NI BRI module has 8 physical jacks that support 16 trunks Up to five 800 NI BRI modules or any combination of LINE TRUNK modules up to the system maximum of 80 trunks may be placed in the system However due to limitations in the 391A 391A1 391A2 power supplies the number of 800 NI BRI modules plus 100D modules cannot exceed 3 per carrier tt The MERLIN LEGEND Mail module has 7 dedicated internal ports but assigns 12 total extensions Form 1 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 1 Continued System Plannin
88. Local For switch type 5ESS see Form 3b page 1 OUTWATS 56 64 Digital Virtual Private Network and INWATS m MCI Toll for DMS 250 or DEX600E see Form 3b page 1 MCI Prism MCI VNet MCI 800 and MCI 900 m DMS 100 Local for a DMS 100 3b page 1 DMS Private Network DMS INWATS Inward Wide Area Telephone Service DMS OUTWATS Outward Wide Area Telephone Service DMS FX Foreign Exchange DMS Tie Trunk m Other Call by Call Other d If the system will need to delete digits write the number of digits to delete 0 8 The system deletes from the first digit onward 8 On Form 3b check the appropriate box for the information that will be sent to the network for outgoing PRI calls Check Extension Only Base Number with Extension or Line Telephone Number If you check Line Telephone Number do the following m Identify the trunk number m Write the telephone number up to 12 digits that identifies the company as the caller in the Telephone Number to Send column gt NOTE There is no factory assigned telephone number If you assign a number it does not have to be unique Also the availability of caller identification information may be limited by your local serving jurisdiction by availability or by central office equipment MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 38 9 If avai
89. MASKNO 00000 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations CONTINUATION TEXT 0029 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 TERMINAL SERVICE PROFILE DATA VIEW TSP EQN 40 0 02 04 USID 1 TSPID 2156853119 TERMLIM 1 TSPCOS CHDBCHR INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0030 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 TERMINAL SERVICE PROFILE DATA VIEW TSPDNCT EQN 40 0 02 04 TSPID 2156853119 NPA 215 DN 6853119 CT VI INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0031 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 TERMINAL SERVICE PROFILE DATA VIEW TSPDNCT EQN 40 0 02 04 TSPID 2156853119 NPA 215 DN 6853119 CT CMD INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 Issue 1 August 1998 Page H 47 96 01 18 16 23 40 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 23 43 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 23 46 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 CONTINUATION TEXT 0032 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 M TERMINAL SERVICE PROFILE DATA VIEW TSP EQN 40 0 02 04 USID 2 TSPID 2156853219 TERMLIM 1 TSPCOS CHDBCHR END JOB 0959 EXEC D 96 01 18 16 23 49 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 Sy
90. MCI Toll or DMS Local selected for the module b Circle the channel s to which each emulated trunk or service will be assigned gt NOTE No channel should show more than one trunk or service and the 24th channel cannot be used if the signaling type is common channel MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 D Planner Issue 1 August 1998 Page D 6 4 Ifthe type of service is PRI complete the PRI Identification Service section by doing one of the following m If you are not planning to use the number identification service check the No box and proceed to Step 5 m If you are planning to use the identification services check the Yes box and check the service planned For incoming calls check one of the following boxes ANI SID or Both If both automatic and extension identification service are planned indicate the order in which the informa tion should be displayed ANI then SID or SID then ANI For outgoing calls check either ANI SID ANI Privacy SID Extension Based or SID Line Based to indicate the service planned gt NOTE The availability of the caller identification information may be limited by local serving caller s jurisdiction availability or central office equipment 5 Inthe Channel Service Unit section a Check the box that describes the channel service unit used If you are not using the model listed check the s
91. MERLIN Analog 0 Provides MERLIN LEGEND Mail LEGEND Mail No longer orderable T When using the 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module for data or video you must use Version 28 of the module ISDN terminal adapters include such devices as Ascend Pipeline 25PX or 50 t The system uses 12 logical IDs for an 008 OPT module even though only eight will have equipment attached to them Do not use an 008 OPT module for applications such as MERLIN LEGEND Mail Messaging 2000 or Intuity AUDIX VS Be sure to leave the extra four ports blank on Form 2a The MERLIN LEGEND Mail module has 7 dedicated internal ports but assigns 12 total extensions MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 16 Planning Form Instructions Refer to the completed Control Unit Diagram Form 1 and Table 2 1 above to mark the extension jack types on Form 2a 1 For each extension module noted in the Control Unit Diagram beginning with Slot 01 write in the type of module in the Mod Type column of Form 2a and after the appropriate logical ID Log ID number draw a line to indicate the end of that module For example if the first module in the control unit is an 008 MLX module that has eight jacks write 008 MLX in the Mod Type column and draw a line after Logical ID 8 gt NOTE If your list includes an 008 OPT module draw a line after
92. MLX 5 and MLX 10 Nondisplay Telephones User s Guide 555 660 126 Single Line Telephones User s Guide 555 660 138 MDC and MDW Telephones User s Guide 555 630 150 MLX 10D Display Telephone Tray Cards 5 cards 555 630 155 MLX 16DP Display Telephone Tray Cards 5 cards 555 630 152 MLX 28D and MLX 20L Telephone Tray Cards 5 cards 555 630 151 MLX 10 and MLX 5 Nondisplay Telephone Tray Cards 6 cards System Operator Support 555 660 132 Analog Direct Line Consoles Operator s Guide 555 660 134 MLX Direct Line Consoles Operator s Guide 555 660 136 MLX Queued Call Console Operator s Guide Miscellaneous User Support 555 661 130 Calling Group Supervisor and Service Observer User Guide 555 640 105 Data Video Reference 555 025 600 BCS Products Security Handbook Documentation for Qualified Technicians 555 661 140 Installation Programming amp Maintenance IP amp M Binder Includes Installation System Programming amp Maintenance SPM and Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 1 The Customer Documentation Package consists of the paper versions of the System Manager s Guide Feature Reference and System Programming 2 The Customer Reference CD ROM contains the System Manager s Guide Feature Reference System Programming and Network Reference MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 About This Book How to Comment on This Book Page xliii How to Comment on This Book We we
93. NLM m Fora Windows NT installation the required DLLs and drivers will be provided on a CD ROM For more information on setting up the system see the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Network Manager s Guide Environmental Specifications If the Telephony Server platform and the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System are to share an equipment room the room s environment temperature humidity contaminants EMI AC power and grounding must meet the more demanding set of environmental specifications for the two units Refer to the specifications for each hardware platform for details MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 1 Before You Begin Obtaining Telephone Company Information Page 1 10 Obtaining Telephone Company Information To fill out many of the forms especially forms involving incoming lines trunks you need to obtain information from the local telephone company Before you speak with the local telephone company make sure you understand your customer s company requirements regarding the communications system Some of the information you will need to know includes m Which incoming line trunk connects to each channel on each 100D module and the order in which the lines trunks are assigned m The Service Profile Identifier SPID and Directory Number DN associated with each channel on each 800 NI BRI module m Whether the disconnect signals for loop start l
94. Programming Equipment Two types of equipment can be used for system programming AnMLX 20L telephone identified as a system programming console The telephone is connected to the first lowest extension jack which is factory set for system programming on the first MLX module m Apersonal computer with System Programming and Maintenance SPM software The PC connects to the lowest jack on the processor module Planning Form Instructions 1 Under the Programming Equipment heading in the System Operating Conditions section on Form 1 page 2 do one of the following m If the system will use a system programming console check the System Programming Console box m If the system will use a PC with SPM software check the PC with SPM Software box gt NOTES In conjunction with the MLX 20L telephone and the PC a PCMCIA card is required for Release 3 0 and later of the communications system Check the box labeled PCMCIA Memory Card The first lowest extension jack on the first MLX module is factory set for system programming and as the primary operator position Since the primary operator position cannot be reassigned you may want to change the system programming assignment to ensure that future programming sessions do not interfere with the operator s work i N MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Recording System Operatin
95. Publications Center Voice 1 800 457 1235 International Voice 317 322 6791 Fax 1 800 457 1764 International Fax 317 322 6699 Write BCS Publications Center 2855 North Franklin Road Indianapolis IN 46219 1385 Order Document No 555 661 110 Comcode 108289000 Issue 1 August 1998 For more information about Lucent Technologies documents refer to the section entitled on page xlix Support Telephone Number In the continental US Lucent Technologies provides a toll free customer helpline 24 hours a day Call the Lucent Technologies Helpline at 1800 628 2888 or your Lucent Technologies authorized dealer if you need assistance when installing programming or using your system Consultation charges may apply Outside the continental US contact your local Lucent Technologies authorized representative Lucent Technologies Fraud Intervention If you suspect you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical support or assistance call BCS National Service Assistance Center at 1 800 628 2888 Year 2000 Compliance The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is certified to be Year 2000 compliant Additional information on this certification and other issues regarding Year 2000 compliance is available online at http www lucent com enterprise sig yr2000 Warranty Lucent Technologies provides a limited warranty on this product Refer to Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability in Appendix A Customer Support Information MERLIN
96. Release 6 1 Form 3b Continued Number to Send Extension Only Base Number with Extension up to 12 digits Line Telephone Number Maximum 69 telephone numbers Telephone Number to Send Telephone Number to Send Trunk No up to12 digits Trunk No to12 digits Form 3b 9 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3b Continued Test Telephone Numbers Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 PRI Protocol Timers and Counters od Factory Setting Change to T200 Timer 1 second 1000 3000 ms T203 Timer 30 seconds 1 60 seconds N200 Counter 3 transmissions 1 5 transmissions N201 Counter 260 octets 16 260 octets K Counter 7 frames 1 15 frames T303 Timer 4 seconds 4 12 seconds T305 Ti 4 seconds 4 30 seconds T308 Ti 4 seconds 4 12 seconds T309 Ti 90 seconds 30 120 seconds T310 Ti 60 seconds 2 120 seconds T313 Ti 4 seconds 4 60 seconds T316 Ti 120 seconds 3 120 seconds Terminal Equipment Identifier TEI 10 1 63 Factory Setting Form 3b 10 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3b Continued T1 Switched 56 Options Maximum 3 Modules Make additional
97. Releases Features and Enhancements Release 5 0 Enhancements June 1997 Page xxiv HotLine Feature The Release 5 0 HotLine feature is designed for retail sales catalogue sales and other types of businesses and organizations and is available in all three modes of system operation It allows a system manager to program a single line telephone extension connected to an 008 OPT 012 or 016 module as a HotLine When a user lifts the handset at the HotLine extension the telephone automatically dials the inside extension or outside telephone number programmed as the first Personal Speed Dial number code 01 for the extension The system does not permit calls to be transferred put on hold or conferenced A user can press the telephone s Hold button if it has one to put a call on local hold but the call cannot be redirected in any way Switchhook flashes are ignored Personal Speed Dial codes can be programmed from the extension prior to HotLine assignment a system programming function Alternatively a Personal Speed Dial code can be programmed from the single line telephone after HotLine operation is assigned However because of security considerations this is a one time opportunity Once the Personal Speed Dial number is programmed any changes to it or any other extension programming must be performed using centralized telephone programming Any type of inside or outside line that is normally available to a single line telephone ca
98. Reporter MERLIN LEGEND Reporter provides basic call accounting system reports for all incoming calls to Auto Login or Auto Logout type calling groups MERLIN LEGEND Reporter assists in determining the effectiveness of calling group agents assessing the level of service provided to callers and ascertaining whether adequate incoming phone lines and agents are available to handle peak call load The SMDR Talk Time option sets up special call records used by MERLIN LEGEND Reporter The default is Off in which case the Release 4 0 SMDR reports are available If the option is set to On the following new reports are provided Organization Detail Report Organization Summary and Trends Report Selection Detail Report Account Code Report m Traffic Report m Extension Summary Report Data Report m Talk and Queue Time Distribution Report m Time of Day Report m ICLID Call Distribution Report m Facility Grade of Service Report Maintenance Enhancements Change to Permanent Error Alarm Beginning with Release 4 2 the most recent permanent error alarm is not shown on the System Error Log menu screen but is available as an option from that screen For details refer to the Maintenance section of the technician guide Installation Programming and Maintenance Enhanced Extension Information Report Beginning with Release 4 2 the Extension Information Report includes the Extension Status ESS and supervisory mode of each exten
99. Restriction Level do one of the following m Check to keep the factory setting m To change the setting write the value 0 6 for the ARS Facility Restriction level you want to assign to each data station System Speed Dial Codes To avoid giving the telephone number of a remote computer to modem pool users assign a System Speed Dial code to the telephone number Users can dial this 3 digit code to place data calls to the remote computer For data calls the telephone number programmed for a System Speed Dial code must include the access code the dial out code or the ARS dial out code if required To specify that the remote computer s telephone number does not appear on call reports use the System Speed Dial instructions in Chapter 4 of this book MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Creating Data Hunt Groups Page 5 40 Creating Data Hunt Groups Use these instructions if the system has a group of modems or ISDN terminal adapters DHGs are data calling groups that provide uniform call distribution among a group of modems or a group of ISDN terminal adapters Such as the Ascend Pipeline 25PX or 50 DHGs support the following Modem pools Dedicated lines for data service m A local host computer m Aworkstation that functions as a gateway on a LAN For more information see the earlier in this chapter For information on modem pools
100. Set Renumber To Factory Setting Restricted for all codes Enter unrestricted codes on this form Hybrid PBX mode only Form 61 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 7a Call Pickup Groups Maximum 30 groups Make additional copies if more than 8 groups are assigned Group Number Group Number Group ID Group ID Ext No Person or Location Ext No Person or Location L L L Oy BR OINI 1 amp Group Number Group Number Group ID Group ID Ex No Person or Location Ext No Person or Location Form 7a 1 L 1 L 1 i aA OINI 0 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 7 Continued Group Number Group Number Group ID Group ID Ext No Person or Location Ext No Person or Location L L i L G
101. Station Data Video Digital Equipment Location MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Data Form 3 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 D 11 PRI Planner Page D 1 T1 PRI Planner To ensure compatibility with the system all local offerings of DS1 configurations must be reviewed by Lucent Technologies Sales and Design Support Center SDSC personnel This review begins when SDSC receives the T1 PRI Planner form This appendix contains instructions for completing the planner including a blank form You should make copies of the form pages and use the copies keeping the originals for future use gt NOTE In Release 6 0 and later systems T1 trunks are ordered for private networks The MERLIN LEGEND System programs the T1 trunks as PRI trunks between the switches See the Network Reference for more information on configuring a system in a private network The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 4 2 and later are capable supporting the services listed below for each type of central office switch AT amp T Toll Services for 4ESS or 5ESS Megacom WATS Megacom 800 ACCUNET SDS Software Defined Network SDN MultiQuest and Long Distance 5ESS Local OUTWATS 56 64 Digital Virtual Private Network and INWATS MCI To
102. TheMERLINLEGEND Communications System requires a supplementary ground m Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it Slots and openings in the module housings are provided for ventilation To protect this equipment from overheating do not block these openings Never push objects of any kind into this product through module openings or expansion slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts which could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock Never spill liquid of any kind on this product Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning Use a damp cloth for cleaning Do not use cleaners or aerosol cleaners m Auxiliary equipment includes answering machines alerts modems fax machines To connect one of these devices you must first have a Multi Function Module MFM m not operate telephones if chemical gas leakage is suspected in the area Use telephones located in some other safe area to report the trouble A WARNING m For your personal safety DO NOT install an MFM yourself m ONLY an authorized technician or dealer representative shall install set options on or repair an MFM m Toeliminate the risk of personal injury due to electrical Shock DO NOT attempt to install or remove an MFM from your MLX telephone Opening or remo
103. Trunks BRI Options 800 NI BRI module MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 12 Loop Start Reliable Disconnect Disconnect signals on incoming calls on loop start trunks are classified as one of the following Reliable A disconnect signal is sent to the system by the local telephone company shortly after a caller hangs up Loop start trunks must be reliable for remote call forwarding and trunk to trunk transfer Also reliable disconnect is strongly recommended for remote call transfers and VMSs such as MERLIN LEGEND Mail gt NOTE If the local telephone company uses a short hold disconnect interval do not specify a reliable disconnect signal Also to ensure proper voice messaging operation and for private network systems the system must have ground start or loop start trunks with reliable disconnect m Unreliable A disconnect signal is not sent by the local telephone company on every call A SecurityA lert Toll fraud can occur when loop start lines trunks are used with unreliable disconnect If the calling party stays on the line after the called party hangs up the central office will return a dial tone at the conclusion of the call enabling the caller to place another call as if it were being placed from your company Since the disconnect signal on most loop start trunks is unreliable the factory setting fo
104. USER INFO gt 28 USPID0122287040 29 MAXB CHL1 30 ACT USERY 31 1 USRN 32 PPB2 USRN 33 AGI MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations Page H 17 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 4 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT CKT gt 34 2228704 CIRCUIT VOICE CSV CIRCUIT DATA CSD 38 CKT LCC DSL 46 CSV 1 55 CSD 1 36 RAX 1 47 CSV CHL ANY 56 CSD CHL ANY 37 CKT MLHG 48 CSV ACO 57 CSD ACO 38 CKT TERM 49 CSV LIMIT 1 58 CSD LIMIT 1 39 NEW 50 CSV NBLIMIT __ 59 CSD NBLIMIT 40 CONFIG GRP 51 SP DNA mE 60 K56 DNA 41 TERMTYP TYPEA 52 SP DNA QTY __ 61 K56 DNA QTY __ 42 DISPLAY Y 53 AU DNA E 62 K64 DNA DAN 43 EKTS 54 AU DNA QTY __ 63 K64 DNA QTY __ 44 CA EN 45 CA QTY 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 5 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT CKT gt 64 TKS 72 SAR QTY __ 82 BUSY MONITOR N 65 TAUTO 73 SAR ORIG N 83 ATT MLHG 66 SHARED N 74 SAR TERM 84 RBV TGN 67 SAUTO 75 INCOMING N 85 ERCO ASGN N 68 PRIVACY 76 INTERCOM N 86 ERCO ACT N 69 ICP 77 ORIG CW N
105. analog multiline telephone by the user s name location or function Jacks for the CTI Link Application Use these instructions only if the system has 008 MLX and 408 GS LS MLX modules and users will be using CTI applications and a CTI Server PassageWay Telephony Services for NetWare or CentreVu Computer Telephony Services for Windows NT Otherwise skip to the next section The CTI link allows the computer users to interact directly with the communications system and obtain access to features through the use of a computer Once installation is completed the CTI port does not need feature programming but the port and extension information must be recorded to be used when programming the network features If an MLX or analog multiline telephone extension is going to have a CTl capable program installed on the extension s worktop PC then you need to identify both the CTI link extension the MLX port extension that connects to the CTI Server and the MLX or analog multiline telephone extensions that will have the CTl capable program installed Single line telephones cannot make use of CTI If the CTI link is on the first MLX module in the system then perform administration for the CTI link using SPM If the CTI link is not on the first MLX module then you can use the system programming console to do the programming CTI can be used only on Release 5 0 and later communications systems in Hybrid PBX mode To get the Incoming Caller
106. area code check the not within area code box factory setting f users need to dial a 1 to reach numbers within their own area code check the within area code box 4 Complete the Area Code Exchanges section by doing one of the following m If this is a 6 digit table write the area code on the blank line next to entry 001 Then write each exchange to be called in that area code Use the numbered lines beginning with entry 002 Up to 99 exchanges can be listed in any order If you need to list another area code with exchanges prepare another 6 digit table m is an Area Code Exchange or 1 7 table write the area codes or exchanges on the numbered lines beginning with entry 001 Up to 100 area codes or exchanges can be listed in any order but area codes and exchanges cannot be on the same table Example 1 If a business plans to use Table 1 to route calls to exchanges 333 444 and 523 in area code 816 the upper section of the completed Form 3f will look similar to Example 2 If the business plans to use Table 7 to route calls to the northeastern band 1 WATS lines trunks as entries 001 through 015 the upper section of the completed form will look similar to the one shown in Figure 4 3 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 4 Features System Features Maximum 16 Tables Type of Table 6 Digit Area Code Q Exc 1 hange 7 dialing from Q
107. asvapoy urojs s suongorunumuo sCNHOST NITIAN MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers Pools Group Calling Form 2c Factory Set Renumber com Description Number to o 70 770 890 771 891 772 892 773 893 774 894 775 895 776 896 777 897 778 898 779 899 780 781 Group Paging 782 Form 7b goons Renumber 783 Group ID HIDEE to 784 793 785 786 794 787 795 788 796 789 797 790 798 799 1 7920 7921 Park Z 2 Factory Set Renumber 7922 Form 6a 7923 Number to Description 7924 881 7925 882 7926 883 7927 884 7928 885 7929 886 887 Listed Directory Factory Set Renumber 889 Number Number to Queue DSS Page Buttons 800 PAGE 1 Beginning extension for range PUE Beginning extension forrange Remote Access 5 Renumber ut 9 9 9 Code Form Number to PAGE 3 Beginning extension for range ARS Dial Out Default Renumber Code to 9 Hybrid PBX mode only T ARS Dial Out Code is Idle Line Preference Code in Key mode t Reserved for AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant System Form 24 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications Sys
108. attendants to tell their system manager when they answer a series of calls where there is silence on the other end or the caller hangs up Advise users who are assigned voice mailboxes to frequently change personal passwords and not to choose obvious passwords Ensure that the system manager advises users with special telephone privileges such as Remote Access Outcalling and Remote Call Forwarding of the potential risks and responsibilities Be suspicious of any caller who claims to be with the telephone company and wants to check an outside line Ask for a callback number hang up and confirm the caller s identity Never distribute the office telephone directory to anyone outside the company be careful when discarding it shred the directory Never accept collect telephone calls Never discuss your telephone system s numbering plan with anyone outside the company MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints Page A 17 Educating Operators Operators and attendants need to be especially aware of how to recognize and react to potential hacker activity To defend against toll fraud operators should follow the guidelines below Establish procedures to counter social engineering Social engineering is a con game that hackers frequently use to obtain information that may help them gain access to your communications system or
109. be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area m Disconnection You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is permanently disconnected from the line s MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Installation and Operational Procedures Page A 4 Installation and Operational Procedures The manuals for your system contain information about installation and operational procedures Repair Instructions If you experience trouble because your equipment is malfunctioning the FCC requires that the equipment not be used and that it be disconnected from the network until the problem has been corrected Repairs to this equipment can be made only by the manufacturers their authorized agents or others who may be authorized by the FCC In the event repairs are needed on this equipment contact your authorized Lucent Technologies dealer or in the USA only contact the National Service Assistance Center NSAC at 1 800 628 2888 Rights of the Local Telephone Company If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the local telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will also be
110. be ensured then nothing else needs to be done gt NOTE In most cases these are loop start lines trunks without reliable disconnect The local telephone company must be involved in order to change the facilities used for RCF to ground start lines trunks Usually a charge applies for this change Also hardware and software changes may be necessary in MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page 15 the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System The MERLIN MAIL MERLIN and MERLIN LEGEND MAIL Automated Attendant feature merely accesses the RCF feature in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Without these changes being made this feature is highly susceptible to toll fraud These same preventive measures must be taken if the RCF feature is active for MERLIN LEGEND Communications System extensions whether or not it is accessed by an Automated Attendant menu Security Risks Associated with the Remote Access Feature Remote Access allows the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System owner to access the system from a remote telephone and make an outgoing call or perform system administration using the network facilities lines trunks connected to the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Hackers scanning the public switched network by randomly dialing numbers with war dialers a device that randomly dials telephone numbers including
111. be used for applications The 016 T R module 517C34 has a REN of gt 4 can ring 16 ports at a time and has no restriction on the number of jacks that can be used for applications Group all 800 DID 100D 800 NI BRI and 400EM modules together according to type this helps save time in system programming gt NOTES 1 Due to limitations in the 391A 39141 and 391A2 power supplies the number of 800 NI BRI modules plus 100D modules in a single carrier cannot exceed three If you have more than three modules you must install the additional modules in an expansion carrier This restriction does not apply to the 391C1 or 391A3 power supply In Release 6 0 or later if the switch is part of a private network and a tandem PRI trunk programmed as Legend PBX or Legend NTWk has some B channels that would bring the total number of trunks over the system limit of 80 the 100D module for that tandem PRI trunk should be placed in the last slot in the carrier In this manner the 100D module will contain the last lines in the system and any B channel over the 80 line trunk limit will be ignored However the D channel will still function even if the 100D module exceeds the line capacity of the system The number of B channels must be the same on each networked system See the Network Reference for additional information MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Co
112. busy 6 Group DID trunks into each block by assigning the DID trunks according to how incoming calls must be routed to reach the proper local and non local extension numbers and transfer the information from Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks to the Trunks Included in Block section of Form 3d Write the logical ID trunk number and telephone number in the applicable columns MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 44 7 Select the disconnect time for each DID trunk by doing one of the following under the Disconnect Time heading m keep the factory setting check 500 ms m To change the disconnect time write the new value 10 to 2550 ms in the Other column Proceed to the next section NI 1 BRI Connectivity NI 1 BRI Connectivity To ensure proper operation of the BRI line features the following options must be set on the MERLIN LEGEND system during system programming m Service Profile Identifier SPID for each BRI line B channel m Directory Number DN for each BRI line B channel m Clock Synchronization for the system m Timers for each BRI module system provides defaults The following affect the operation of the MERLIN LEGEND system However they are programmed on the Central Office CO switch m Service Configuration of the BRI lines IOC S Multiline Hunt m Hunting pattern for a Multilin
113. button Alarm Nite Svc or Snd Rem Meg 4 Assign programmed Loudspeaker Paging buttons by selecting the button and writing Fage on it Proceed to Chapter 4 Features to complete the remaining sections of these forms MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Page 4 1 Features The system offers many optional features This chapter contains instructions for assigning features in the following categories m j Telephone and Extension Features Individual telephones consoles or adjuncts are assigned these features Some features may be assigned to other equipment at an extension m Operator Features All operator consoles are assigned these features m j Group Assigned Features These features used by functional groups of users such as separate departments m Features All or most users on the system use these features Detailed information about all features including the considerations constraints and feature interactions that may impact their use is contained in the Feature Reference You should be familiar with this information before you attempt to perform the procedures in this chapter Since certain features are optional you can simply skip those sections that do not apply to the system Each individual telephone form is a complete record for that specific telephone for planning programming and subsequent reference by
114. by way of an analog line trunk GS LS Tie or DID by way of a dedicated analog line trunk or by way of a DS1 Digital Service Link providing emulated GS LS Tie or DID trunks m On premises ISDN terminal adapter data stations m Connection to off premises digital data stations by way of a PRI NI 1 BRI or T1 Switched 56 facility including T1 Tie trunks using T1 Switched 56 service m Connections between two similar types of data stations m Connection between a digital data station on a B channel and an analog data station by way of 2 stage dialing through a modem ISDN terminal adapter pool This configuration is not described in this book see application note MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Modem Pooling m On premises host computer access m Local area network LAN access by way of a modem or ISDN terminal adapter connected to an RS 232 port on a workstation on the LAN m On and Off premises personal or group video systems by way of a digital PRI NI 1 BRI or T1 Switched 56 facility including T1 Tie trunks using T1 Switched 56 service MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications About Data and Video Communications Page 5 6 Data Stations A data station is a hardware configuration used to send and receive data and or voice depending on the equipment The configuration must include two main components data terminal equipment DTE for inp
115. calls as described earlier in this guide can also be assigned to data stations This section describes these features and how to assign them to each ISDN terminal adapter or modem data station This includes modem data stations with an MLX telephone using an MFM ISDN terminal adapter data stations with a telephone and modem and ISDN terminal adapter data only stations data stations with no telephone gt NOTE Features cannot be independently assigned to modem data stations connected to analog multiline telephones using a General Purpose Adapter GPA The feature assignment for the telephone also includes the modem therefore the following planning instructions are not used for these types of data stations The following optional features can be assigned to data stations Account Code Entry This feature allows tracking of outgoing data calls for billing forecasting or budget reports Auto Answer All This feature allows a modem with automatic answering capability to answer data calls when the user is away from the data station Supports analog voice and modem data stations only Automatic Route Selection Hybrid PBX Mode Only This feature routes calls over outside lines trunks according to the number dialed and the lines trunks available Therefore the system can be programmed to select the least expensive route for each data call over either PRI 1 BRI or T1 Switched 56 facilities Calling Restrictions These featu
116. certain employees m Do any departments such as sales and service receive frequent special calls that should come to them directly bypassing a system operator m Do any departments or extensions need to screen incoming calls You may want to use the Employee Communication Survey form to determine each employee s telecommunications needs copy of this form is in Appendix and is included in the forms package Since a survey form should be completed for each user make as many copies of the form as you need If itis not feasible for each employee fill out a form get the information you need from a knowledgeable person in each department section or work group This person should have sufficient information and authority to make decisions about calling features and coverage assignments for others in the department Use the information in Table 1 3 to interpret and analyze the results of the Employee Communication Survey Numbers for items in the Required Information column correspond to question numbers on the survey MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 1 Before You Begin Obtaining User Information Table 1 3 Required Information Issue 1 August 1998 Page 1 12 Employee Communications Survey Description of Questions Description 1 Types of lines trunks outside lines used Indicates toll calling habits In most cases assigning a button for each line trunk is not
117. clear unrestricted circuit switched data calls per B channel 128 kbps total for 2B Data To assign lines trunks to data stations you decide on the types of line buttons that are assigned to the data communications equipment at each data station The data stations are Analog voice and modem data stations and MLX voice and modem data stations MLX voice and ISDN terminal adapter data stations including telephones Modem data only stations ISDN terminal adapter data only stations Digital data video stations MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Lines Trunks to Data and Video Stations Page 5 30 The system treats each data station except for analog voice and modem data stations as an extension with a 34 button telephone When you choose the mode of operation Key Behind Switch or Hybrid PBX Intercom ICOM or System Access SA buttons are assigned automatically to every extension connected to the control unit However you can customize the system by changing the factory set assignments and reassigning line buttons The number and types of buttons assigned depends on the mode chosen and the type of extension jack you are using gt NOTE Trunks cannot be independently assigned to analog voice and modem data stations The line trunk assignment for the telephone also includes the modem extension therefore these instructions are not u
118. data to any of the analog multiline telephones in the system but you cannot assign both to the same telephone Planning Form Instructions On Form 2a mark the pairs of jacks for analog multiline telephones that have Voice Announce to Busy or voice and data 1 Inthe Log ID column draw a box around the pair of extension jack numbers that you plan to assign to each analog multiline extension with either feature 2 Inthe Person Location or Function column next to the first odd numbered logical ID number of each boxed pair identify the extension by person or location 3 Inthe Person Location or Function column next to the second even numbered logical ID number of each boxed pair do one of the following m For the Voice Announce to Busy feature write voice voice m For voice and data write voice data Proceed to the next section Jacks for Telephones MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 25 Jacks for MLX Telephones Use these instructions only if the system has non operator MLX telephones ISDN terminal adapters such as the Ascend Pipeline 25PX or 50 used to connect a data terminal or digital data video stations such as a videoconferencing station to assign to digital extension jacks on 008 MLX and 408 GS LS MLX modules Otherwise skip to the next section l Jacks for Analog Multil
119. do not display are referred to as Marked System Speed Dial entries You can also assign labels to the System Speed Dial codes These labels are listed in the System Directory so that MLX telephone users can search for them and dial System Speed Dial numbers with the touch of a button Planning Form Instructions gt NOTE As a visual aid to distinguish lines during programming every fourth line on the form is shaded 1 Review the analysis of question 9 on the Employee Communication Survey 2 On Form 10b System Speed Dial a Write the label maximum 11 characters to be displayed for the number in the Name column b Write each telephone number maximum 40 digits in the Telephone Number column display no number Marked System Speed Dial entry check the No box in the Display column the factory setting is Yes gt NOTES 1 Marked System Speed Dial entries entries that do not display are not affected by the Second Dial Tone Timer setting If the Central Office does not immediately supply dial tone when a star code is entered and a Marked System Speed Dial entry uses star codes then the appropriate number of pauses each 1 5 seconds must be programmed in the entry following each star code 2 When a Marked System Speed Dial number the dialed number is suppressed from the display is used to dial a number calling restrictions such as toll or outward restrictions or Allowed and Disallowed Lists assig
120. equipment in the Person or Location space 4 Identify the equipment at each extension see the floor plan a Check the box that describes the telephone console model or type of tip ring equipment b Check the box under Adjuncts that describes the adjuncts at the extension Checking the Data terminal box is informational only MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Assigning Telephone Buttons Page 3 52 Assigning Telephone Buttons This section contains instructions for assigning buttons to Telephones in Hybrid PBX mode m Telephones in Key and Behind Switch mode a DLCs Forms Needed m Form 4b Analog Multiline Telephone m Form 4d MLX Telephone m Form 4e MFM Adjunct Telephone m Form 4f Tip Ring Equipment m Form 5a Direct Line Console DLC Analog m Form 5b Direct Line Console DLC Digital orm 5c MFM Adjunct DLC Telephones in Hybrid PBX Mode This section contains instructions for assigning the following kinds of buttons to telephones or to adjuncts connected to an MLX telephone using an MFM excluding QCC operator positions System Access Ring SA Ring button m System Access Voice SA Voice button m System Access Originate Only SA Orig Only button m Shared System Access SSA button m Personal line button m Pool button m Loudspeaker Paging button The system automatically assigns certain ki
121. extension merely needs to be changed from the default of 3 m Each extension should be assigned the appropriate FRL to match its calling requirements All voice mail port extensions not used for Outcalling should be assigned FRL 0 the default setting in Release 3 1 and later Deny access to pooled facility codes by removing pool dial out codes 70 890 899 or any others on your system Create a Disallowed List or use the pre prepared Disallowed List number 7 Release 3 1 and later systems only to disallow dialing O 11 10 1700 1809 1900 and 976 or 1 wildcard 976 In Release 3 1 and later systems Disallowed List number 7 does not include 800 and 1800 and 411 and 1411 but Lucent Technologies recommends that you add them Assign all voice mail port extensions to this Disallowed List Lucent Technologies recommends assigning Disallowed List number 7 This is an added layer of security in case outward restriction is inadvertently removed In Release 3 1 and later systems voice messaging ports are assigned by default to Disallowed List number 7 If Outcalling is required by voice messaging system extensions Program an ARS FRL of 2 on voice mail port extension s used for Outcalling If 800 and 411 numbers are used remove 1800 800 411 and 1411 from Disallowed List number 7 If Outcalling is allowed to long distance numbers build an Allowed List for the voice mail port extension s used for Outcalling This list should c
122. extension number of each additional DLC in the System Consoles box 6 If the system includes any Call Management Systems write CMS in the Person Location or Function column next to the logical ID for the two DLC positions assigned for each CMS Proceed to the next section Extension Jack Pairs for Analog Telephones MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 24 Extension Jack Pairs for Analog Telephones Use these instructions only if the system has analog multiline telephones Otherwise skip to the next section l Jacks for Telephones MLX telephones can use the Voice Announce to Busy feature or simultaneous voice and data without requiring a second extension jack Analog multiline telephones require an additional extension jack to use Voice Announce to Busy or voice and data The jacks must be an odd numbered analog extension jack and the next higher even numbered analog extension jack The System assigns individual extension numbers to each of the jacks The extension number associated with the first odd numbered extension jack in the pair is the telephones extension number Calls cannot be placed to the extension number associated with the even numbered extension jack For information about renumbering jacks see System Renumbering later in this chapter You can assign Voice Announce to Busy or voice and
123. group Group of analog or digital data stations that share access code Calls are connected a round robin fashion to the first available data station in the group See MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary Issue 1 August 1998 Dialed Number Identification Service dial out code dial plan dial repeating tie trunk DID DID trunk digital Digital Communications Protocol digital data station Digital Signal 0 Digital Signal 1 digital subscriber line digital switch element digital transmission DIP switch direct facility termination Direct Inward Dial Direct Line Console Direct Station Selector Page GL 10 See DNIS Digit usually a 7 or digits dialed by telephone users to get an outside line Numbering scheme for system extensions lines and trunks Tie trunk on which the originating end of the tie trunk transmits an off hook signal to the receiving end and waits for the receiving end to send an off hook signal followed by an on hook signal Also called dial repeating tie trunk Direct Inward Dial Service that transmits from the telephone company central office and routes incoming calls directly to the called extension calling group or outgoing line trunk pool bypassing the system operator Incoming trunk that receives dialed digits from the local exchange allowing the system to connect directly to an
124. illegally using lost or stolen calling cards billing innocent parties clipping on to someone else s line or breaking into someone else s telephone equipment physically or electronically In certain instances unauthorized individuals make connections to the telephone network through the use of the Remote Access features of your system The Remote Access features of your system if you choose to use them permit off premises callers to access the system from a remote telephone by using a telephone number with or without a barrier code The system returns an acknowledgment signaling the user to key in his or her barrier code which is selected and administered by the system manager After the barrier code is accepted the system returns dial tone to the user In Release 3 1 and later Systems barrier codes are by default restricted from making outside calls In prior releases if you do not program specific outward calling restrictions the user is able to place any call normally dialed from a telephone associated with the system Such an off premises network call is originated at and will be billed from the system location The Remote Access feature as designed helps the customer through proper administration to minimize the ability of unauthorized persons to gain access to the network Most commonly phone numbers and codes are compromised when overheard in a public location through theft of a wallet or purse containing access information o
125. in the Other column Use 20 ms increments 8 Under the Disconnect Time heading do one of the following m Tokeep the factory setting check the 300 column Use this setting for private networks m To change to a new value write the new value 140 to 2400 ms in the Other column Use 10 ms increments Proceed to the next section DID Trunks Hybrid PBX Mode Only MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 42 DID Trunks Hybrid PBX Mode Only Use these instructions only if Direct Inward Dial DID trunks are connected to the system Otherwise skip to the next section NI 1 BRI Connectivity A SecurityAlert DID numbers that correspond to the remote access code can be used to make calls on the system s trunks leading to toll abuse and or fraud See Appendix Customer Support Information for more information about security This section contains instructions for setting the following options for DID trunks m Type of DID Trunks m Expected Digits m Delete Digits m Add Digits m Signaling m Invalid Destination m Trunks Included in Blocks These options are assigned to blocks of trunks A maximum of two blocks is permitted If you want to allow remote access on DID trunks one of the telephone numbers assigned by the telephone company must match the remote access dial code The factory setting
126. in addition to the previous number of calls limit If the Overflow Threshold Time option is set to a valid number between 1 and 900 seconds calls that remain in the calling group queue for the set time are sent to the overflow receiver If the overflow threshold time is set to 0 overflow by time is turned off The factory set time limit is 0 seconds off Single Line Telephone Enhancements The following changes enhance the performance of single line telephones Disable Transfer Through centralized telephone programming the system manager can disable transfer by removing all but one SA or ICOM button from the extension m No Transfer Return When a handset bounces in its cradle the system interprets this as a switchhook flash and attempts to transfer a call When the transfer attempt period expires the user s telephone rings Release 4 0 eliminates this unintended ringing by disconnecting the call in situations where a switchhook flash is followed by an on hook state and a dial tone is present m Forward Disconnect All ports on 008 012 and 016 modules now send forward disconnect to all devices connected to them when forward disconnect is received from the CO This enhancement prevents the trunk line from being kept active when one end disconnects from the call If an answering machine is connected to the port it does not record silence busy tones or other useless messages This operation is not programmable Seven Di
127. inside or outside number Choose Ext Prog from the display Plain constant width type indicates text Screen that appears on the telephone display or PC screen To activate Call Waiting dial x11 Constant width type in italics indicates characters you dial at the telephone or type at the PC Product Safety Advisories Throughout these documents hazardous situations are indicated by an exclamation point inside a triangle and the word CAUTION or WARNING A WARNING Warning indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or severe personal injury if the hazard is not avoided A CAUTION Caution indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause minor personal injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 About This Book Security Page Security Certain features of the system can be protected by passwords to prevent unauthorized users from abusing the system You should assign passwords wherever you can and limit knowledge of such passwords to three or fewer people Nondisplaying authorization codes and telephone numbers provide another layer of security For more information see Appendix A Customer Support Information Throughout this document toll fraud security hazards are indicated by an exclamation point inside a triangle and the words SECURITY ALERT A SECURITY ALERT Securit
128. less likely to be easily broken m Use the longest length access codes the system allows m Deactivate all unassigned codes promptly m Ensure that Remote Access users are aware of their responsibility to keep the telephone number and any access codes secure m When possible restrict the off network capability of off premises callers using calling restrictions Facility Restriction Levels FRLs Hybrid PBX mode only and Disallowed List capabilities In Release 3 1 and later Systems a prepared Disallowed List number 7 is provided and is designed to prevent the types of calls that toll fraud abusers often make m When possible block out of hours calling m Frequently monitor system call detail reports for quicker detection of any unauthorized or abnormal calling patterns m Limit Remote Call Forwarding to persons on a need to have basis m Change access codes every 90 days m Use the longest length barrier codes possible following the guidelines for passwords See See Choosing Passwords on page A 19 Toll Fraud Prevention Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by third parties to make long distance telephone calls Under the law you the customer are responsible for paying part or all of those unauthorized calls Thus the following information is of critical importance Unauthorized persons concentrate their activities in two areas with the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System m The
129. module for PRI service proceed to the section entitled PRI Service MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 28 T1 Switched 56 Network Use these instructions only if channels on a 100D module are to be programmed as T1 Switched 56 channels The instructions provided in the T1 Service section must be completed first T1 Switched 56 service provides high speed digital data services up to 56 kbps per channel to the network as well as digital Tie trunk services This allows you to use your T1 facilities for basic digital data and file transfer needs as well as for more sophisticated personal and or group video conferencing gt NOTES 1 T1 Switched 56 service is supported only in Hybrid PBX or Key mode 2 Incoming data calls that attempt to route to busy data endpoints unassigned Dial Plan numbers or ports that are not equipped with data endpoints will not be connected This section contains instructions for configuring those T1 Switched 56 options that apply to the T1 network interface For information specific to digital Tie trunk planning refer to the Tie Trunks section of this chapter The following options are covered in this section m Direction m Incoming and Outgoing Signaling Type m Incoming and Outgoing Signaling Mode m Dial Plan Routing options incoming services After completing the proce
130. must be set to the current date when the system is installed Be sure you checked the Yes box on Form 1 under Set System Date 2 For systems where the majority of lines are PRI facilities the SMDR Call Length should be programmed for one second 3 When SMDR is used with the MERLIN LEGEND Reporter the settings for Call Length and Calls Reported have no effect on SMDR reporting for calling group calls Planning Form Instructions In the SMDR Options section of Form 8a 1 Under the Call Format heading do one of the following m keep the factory set format check the Basic box m change the report format check the ISDN box 2 Under the Call Length heading do one of the following m To keep the factory set call length check the 40 seconds box m To change the factory set call length check the second box and write the number of seconds 0 255 in the space provided 3 Under the Calls Reported non UDP heading do one of the following m To keep the factory setting check the Incoming and outgoing box m change the factory setting check the Outgoing only box 4 Under the Calls Reported UDP heading do one of the following m To keep the factory setting check the Incoming and outgoing box m To change the factory setting check the None box 5 Under Talk Time heading do one of the following m To keep factory setting check the Disable box m To change the factory setting check the Enable box MERLIN LEGEN
131. of up to 8 digits Form 3b 6 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3b Continued Outgoing Tables Outgoing Services Network Selection Table Maximum 4 entries Special Services Table Maximum 8 entries Pattern to Matcht Operator none none Type of No N Nat l 1 Delete Digits 0 4 Defaults Dial Pattern can be up to 8 digits is a wildcard must include at least one number cannot begin with T Pattern can be up to 4 digits no asterisks t Operator Local Operator OP Presubscribed Carrier P No operator none Form 3b 7 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3b Continued Call By Call Service Table Maximum 10 entries Pattern to Match up to 10 entries Call Type Voice Data Both Service Delete Digits 0 8 Pattern to match up to 10 entries Call Type Voice Data Both Service Delete Digits 0 8 Services AT amp T WATS Megacom 800 ACCUNET SDS Software Defined Network SDN MultiQuest Long Distance 5ESS Local OUTWATS 56 64 Digital Virtual Private Network INWATS MCI Toll MCI PRISM MCI Vnet MCI 800 MCI 900 DMS 100 Local DMS Private DMS INWATS DMS OUTWATS DMS Foreign Exchange FX DMS Tie Trunk Other Call by Call Other Form 3b 8 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System
132. only restricted channels are available the call will be rejected See also restricted data channel MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary Issue 1 August 1998 clock synchronization CMS co coaxial cable codec collected digits combination configuration common channel signaling communications system Page GL 7 When digital signals are transmitted over a communications link the receiving end must be synchronized with the transmitting end to receive the digital signals without errors using clock synchronization A system synchronizes itself by extracting a timing signal from an incoming digital stream All the digital facilities in network operate from a single common clock preferably a port connected to a digital PSTN facility on a hub system or a system that connects two network systems In this case all digital facilities specify a loop clock source One system in a network may be specified as a local clock source when no functioning digital facility in the network is connected to the PSTN All other digital facilities then use this clock and specify their clock sources as loop Primary secondary and tertiary clock sources are specified to allow backup synchronization in the event that the primary source is out of service Call Management System DOS based application that simulates the actions of a system operator by answering and distributing calls A
133. or V D voice data hunt group in either the MLHG or Series Comp column under the Service Configuration heading as appropriate gt NOTES 1 IOC package 5 is available on the Lucent Technologies 5ESS Northern Telecom DMS 100 and Siemens SSC EWSD switches 2 Ifconfigured with MLH service the MLHG feature must be used if the CO is a Northern Telecom DMS 100 switch The Series Completion feature must be used if the CO is a Lucent Technologies 5ESS or Siemens SSC EWSD switch 3 The MERLIN LEGEND system does not support Voice Data hunt groups with the Siemens SSC EWSD central office switch 5 If configured with using either the MLHG or Series Completion feature indicate whether the hunt pattern is linear or circular by placing a check in the appropriate column under the Hunt Pattern heading 6 Indicate the features available on each BRI line m If CPN BN is available place a check in the CPN BN column as appropriate Clock Synchronization gt NOTE The following information is for planning clock synchronization in systems that are not part of a private network For planning clock synchronization in a private network configuration see the Network Reference If the system includes both 800 NI BRI and 100D modules clock synchronization planning should be completed at the same time There is only one primary secondary tertiary clock for both 800 NI BRI modules and 100D modules with the same
134. pool Also called DFT direct facility termination Power Failure Transfer Feature that provides continuity of telephone service during a commercial power failure by switching some of the system s line trunk connections to telephones connected to specially designated extension jacks An extension that is not actually plugged into the system but is used for example as a calling group member covered by a voice messaging system In Hybrid PBX mode a group of outside lines trunks that users can access with a Pool button or by dialing an access code on an SA button Also used by the ARS feature when choosing the least expensive route for a call In a private network a line trunk that passes through the PSTN without using the switching capabilities of the PSTN Issue 1 August 1998 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary port Power Failure Transfer power supply module PRI primary system operator position prime line private communications network or private network private network trunks processor module programming port reassignment protocol PSTN PSTN trunk public switched telephone network Page GL 22 Seeljack Also refers to extension or line trunk jacks before these are numbered according to the dial plan during programming The lowest jack on a module is always Port 1 See PFT Device that directs electricity to modules and te
135. revise the floor plan to show the location of the new telephones and the kind of equipment to be used If activating a feature such as System Speed Dial survey employees to identify the numbers that should be programmed into the speed dial file 4 Review security information in Appendix A Customer Support Information for details on how to minimize the risk of toll fraud Adding to the System Adding to the system is defined as increasing its capacity or capability This increase may mean adding more or different kinds of lines trunks connecting auxiliary equipment or installing more telephones consoles or T R equipment Forms Needed m Form 1 System Planning m Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks m Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks Planning Form Instructions 1 Determine the specific type of line trunk auxiliary equipment or telephones to be added Use Table 6 1 to determine the type of line trunk and or extension module needed to support the additional equipment MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 6 Modifications Adding to the System Page 6 3 Table 6 1 Required Line Trunk and or Extension Modules 800 400 800 800 408 NI 400 GS 800 008 GS 008 GS L 408 Module 100D BRI EM 400 LS DID 800 OPT LS S ID 008 MLX 012 016 408 S LS trunks GS trunks Tie trunks DID trunks T1 service Emu
136. section This section contains instructions for selecting any combination of the following options for Night Service m Night Service with Group Assignment m Night Service with Outward Restriction m Night Service with Time Set Night Service with Group Assignment This section contains instructions for setting Night Service so that any call that comes to the operator console while Night Service is in effect rings immediately at each available telephone in a defined group and or at a designated calling group Calls ring immediately even on lines trunks set for Delay Ring or No Ring You can create up to eight Night Service groups and or Night Service calling groups one for each operator There is no limit to the number of telephones or outside lines assigned to each Night Service group and each telephone or outside line can be assigned to more than one Night Service group A calling group can be the Night Service group for more than one operator but only one calling group is allowed for each operator A DID call directed to a calling group will not receive Night Service treatment Private network calls will receive Night Service treatment Planning Form Instructions In each column on Form 9a Night Service Group Assignment do the following 1 Inthe Operator Ext No space write the extension number for the operator whose calls are being answered see Form 2alfor the extension number 2 Inthe Trunk No column write the line tr
137. sections are clearly marked for example Hybrid PBX only Also you are alerted to proceed or skip chapters or sections that do not apply to your particular system Proceed through this book as appropriate 2 A list of forms or information that will be needed for particular procedures appears at the beginning of each chapter and section 3 Where appropriate examples of completed forms are included so you can confirm what you have done MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 About This Book How to Use This Book Page xxxviii Since this book assumes that you are familiar with the system detailed information about equipment features and programming are not included Refer to the following documentation for additional information m System Programming gives procedural instructions for programming System features m User s guides and operator s guides give procedural instructions for programming and using telephone features Related Documents jon page xlii provides a complete list of system documentation together with ordering information In the USA only Lucent Technologies provides a toll free customer Helpline 24 hours a day Call the Helpline at 1 800 628 2888 consultation charges may apply or call your Lucent Technologies representative if you need assistance when installing programming or using your system Outside the USA if you need assistance whe
138. see application note MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Modem Pooling Guidelines Use the following guidelines for the procedure in this section m Members of a DHG must be extension jacks of the same type all analog or all MLX m You can assign up to 32 DHGs or calling groups or a combination of both types Each DHG can have a maximum of 20 members and each data station can be a member of only one DHG m You can designate particular lines trunks or pools Hybrid PBX mode only to ring directly into a DHG However incoming calls on a given line trunk can be directed to only one DHG m Extension numbers 770 791 and 7920 7929 are reserved automatically for calling groups and DHGs If you want to change the extension numbers assigned to a DHG see the information about reassigning extension numbers described in Chapter 2 Control Unit Configuration The same considerations apply to data stations and voice extensions Forms Needed m Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks m Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks m If the system has trunk pools Hybrid PBX mode only Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks m Ifthe system includes voice calling groups Form 7d Group Calling m If you plan to renumber the factory set extensions Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Creating Data
139. station to record your decisions Under the Call Restriction heading do one of the following m Ifyou do not want calling restrictions for this data station check the Unrestricted box m If you want the data station restricted from making any outside calls check the Outward Restrict box factory setting m f you want the data station restricted from making long distance calls intercom and local calls can be made check the Toll Restrict box MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Features to Data Stations Page 5 38 Forced Account Code Entry The Forced Account Code Entry feature is used for billing or for tracking data calls by requiring data extension users to enter account codes 1 to 16 digits for outside calls Assign this feature to data stations so that you can associate outgoing data calls with specific client accounts gt NOTE Account codes cannot be used to track incoming calls to data stations Planning Form Instructions To record your decisions use the Optional Features section of Data Form 1a or 1b for each data station Under the Forced Account Code Entry heading do one of the following m If the user must enter an account code for outgoing calls check the Yes box m If you do not want the feature assigned to the data station check the No box the factory setting ARS Facility Restriction Level Hybrid PBX
140. system managers can control whether calling name calling number or both are shown at MLX display telephone for incoming calls across PRI tandem trunks Toll Savings Private networked trunks may allow you to realize significant cost savings on long distance and toll calls by performing tandem switching in the following two ways Callers on a local system or individuals dialing in to remote access at a local system can reach the public switched telephone network PSTN via outside trunks connected to other systems in a private network avoiding toll charges or decreasing the cost of toll calls No special dialing is required For example an organization might have a main office in Boston and a subsidiary office in New Jersey connected by networked private tandem trunks between two systems A user in the New Jersey office who wishes to make an outside call to the 617 area code Boston can do so through a line trunk connected to the system in Boston For example he or she might dial 725175551211 The local ARS tables would route this call over the private network trunks and use the ARS tables of the remote system in Boston to route this call The system managers at each end of a private network set up ARS and Remote Access features to implement this functionality addition local organizations or incoming DID calls use private networked trunks to make intersystem calls between networked systems which may be geographically dist
141. the list m Local Exchange Tables These tables list 3 digit exchanges within the local area code They can be used to route calls over in state WATS m 1 7 Tables These tables contain a list of exchanges within the local area code that require dialing a 2 but not an area code before the 7 digits Because ARS routing requires care and planning the instructions for filling out the planning forms are presented a few steps at a time with examples of completed forms shown after each group of steps The instructions begin with the programmable tables 1 through 16 and introduce the factory set tables midway through the process Planning Form Instructions Complete Form 3f for each trunk pool listed on the ARS worksheet Form 3e gt NOTE The digits before the blank lines in the Area Code Exchanges section represent the table entry number used during programming On each of Form 3f 1 Write the table number in the Table No space maximum 16 Start with the number 1 and proceed sequentially 2 Check the appropriate box under the Type of Table heading 6 Digit Area Code Exchange or 1 7 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 64 3 Do one of the following m If this is nota 1 7 table skip to Step 4 m If this is 1 7 table do one of the following f users do not need to dial a 2 to reach numbers within their own
142. the person or the location of the equipment 3 Inthe Data Video Type space place a check mark in the 1B or 2B column to indicate whether this endpoint uses one or two B channels MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Digital Data Video Stations Page 5 43 4 Inthe Digital Facilities space enter the method used to access incoming and outgoing facilities a Inthe Digital Facilities In space enter one of the following for incoming data video calls 1 If personal lines are used to receive data video calls enter the line trunk number for each personal line For example 801 802 2 f Dial Plan Routing is used to route incoming data video calls PRI and T1 Switched 56 facilities only enter Dial Plan Routing 3 f Tie Line Routing is used to route incoming data video calls PRI and T1 Switched 56 facilities only enter Tie Line Routing b Inthe Digital Facilities Out space enter one of the following for outgoing data video calls 1 If personal lines are used to place outgoing data video calls enter the line trunk number for each personal line For example 801 802 2 f Pool Access is used to place outgoing data video calls enter the pool access number For example 890 3 If Automatic Route Selection ARS is used to place outgoing data video calls enter the ARS access code The ARS access code factory setting is 9 MERLIN LEGEN
143. the system manager Some features noted on the individual telephone forms are not described in this book for example Abbreviated Ring Call Waiting and Automatic Line Selection For more information about these features see the Feature Reference gt NOTE Except for some telephone specific features for example microphone operation many of the features described in this chapter can be assigned to other equipment such as a data terminal or fax machine Therefore throughout this chapter the more general term extension is often used instead of or in addition to telephone MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 2 Telephone and Extension Features This section contains instructions for assigning some optional features to extensions These features may be used by both system operators and general users ool Dial Out Code Restriction Hybrid PBX mode onl alling Restrictions orced Account Code Entry not QCC E emote Call Forwarding not QCC ax Message Waiting Receiver and Threshold runk to Trunk Transfer otLine single line telephones onl I 24 5 5 2l 5 S 2 2 2 ervice Observing MLX only for Service Observer any telephone for a Service Observing group member except QCC or CTI link gt NOTES 1 Service Observing button is ad
144. the twelfth logical ID but cross off the last four logical IDs since these jacks cannot be used to physically connect telephone equipment The extension numbers of these logical IDs can be used however for applications requiring phantom extensions 2 Inthe Jack Type column of Form 2a do one of the following to indicate the type of each extension jack next to its logical ID m If the jack is analog check m If the jack is digital check D m jack is basic telephone check B You are now ready to match the system telephones and other equipment to these available jacks After calculating touch tone receivers as described in the next section begin matching equipment and jacks with Jack for Primary Operator Position and proceed through the subsequent sections as appropriate for the system Touch Tone Receivers TTRs Use these guidelines for calculating the system requirements for touch tone receivers for systems both with and without a voice messaging system VMS The number of TTRs needed in a MERLIN LEGEND system should be calculated before the system is installed so that you can order the modules required to supply the TTRs However as the volume of calls increases and more applications are added to the system TTRs may also need to be added A system that exhibits one or more of the following symptoms may need more TTRs m Single line telephone users do not get dial tone when they lift the handset to dial out
145. to a data station inside the system The interface for a modem data station is the tip ring T R interface provided by one of the following General Purpose Adapter GPA connected to an analog multiline telephone m A port on a T R module 012 T R 016 T R or 008 m A Multi Function Module MFM adjunct on an telephone There are different types of modem data stations depending on the data station capabilities m Modem voice and analog data analog voice and data m Modem data only m Modem data and voice Each of these use different equipment as described in this section MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications About Data and Video Communications Page 5 8 Analog Voice and Modem Data This type of modem data station includes an analog multiline telephone a modem and a DTE data terminal or PC see Figure 5 1 The modem connects to the control unit through the T R interface of a General Purpose Adapter GPA The telephone connects to the system through an analog port on the control unit The port configuration requires two adjacent odd even extension jacks on a 408 408 GS LS or 008 module in the control unit The even jack is for voice and the odd jack is for data The bridging adapter joins the odd even jack pair for connection to the analog multiline telephone The telephone provides the dialing capability for th
146. voice messaging system m When callers ask for assistance in placing outside or long distance calls ask for a callback extension m Verify the source Ask callers claiming to be maintenance or service personnel for a callback number Never transfer to 10 without this verification Never transfer to extension 900 m Remove the headset and or handset when the console is not in use Detecting Toll Fraud To detect toll fraud users and operators should look for the following Lost voice mail messages mailbox lockout or altered greetings Inability to log into voice mail Inability to get an outside line Foreign language callers Frequent hang ups Touch tone sounds Caller or employee complaints that the lines are busy Increases in internal requests for assistance in making outbound calls particularly international calls or requests for dial tone Outsiders trying to obtain sensitive information Callers claiming to be the phone company Sudden increase in wrong numbers MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints Page A 18 Establishing a Policy As a safeguard against toll fraud follow these guidelines for your MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and voice messaging system Change passwords frequently at least quarterly Changing passwords routinely on a specific date such as the first of the month helps users to r
147. within area code 0 not within area code Area Code Exchanges 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 816 021 333 022 _ 444 __ 023 525 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 copy for each table Table No 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 Automatic Route Selection Tables 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 Issue 1 August 1998 Page 4 65 Figure 4 2 Example 1 Form 3f 6 Digit Table MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 66 Form 3f Automatic Route Selection Tables Maximum 16 Tables Make a copy for each table TableNo 7 Type of Table Q 46 Digit Area Code Exchange Q 1 7 dialing from within area code not within area code Area Code Exchanges 001 021 041 061 081 002 0617 022 042 062 082 003 202 023 043 063 083 004 508 024 044 064 084 005 401 025 045 065 085 006 516 026 046 066 086 007 518 027 047 067 087 008 9 028 048 068 088 009 717 029 049 069 089 010 201 030 050 070 090 011 603 031 051 071 091 012 207 032 052 072 092 013 215 033 053 073 093 014 802 034 054 015 609 035 055 016 036 017 037 018 019 Figure 4
148. works in conjunction with the Call Accounting System Intuity CAS Windows CAS IS CAS CAS Plus V3 and MERLIN LEGEND Reporter or a serial printer connected to the SMDR port on the control unit The SMDR port is the upper RJ 45 jack on the processor module Two SMDR report formats are available the factory set Basic format or the ISDN format The ISDN format is used when the business subscribes to ICLID or to the AT amp T INFO2 automatic number identification service ANI When the system is set for ISDN format the actual number dialed by the caller appears on the report In a PRI private network the ISDN format may be used to show the caller s telephone number The rest of the fields are identical to the Basic format Two options Calls Reported non UDP and Calls Reported UDP determine what calls are included in the SMDR report For calls that are not routed using the non local dial plan the options available are to report both incoming and outgoing calls factory setting or outgoing calls only For calls that are routed using the non local dial plan the options available are to report both incoming and outgoing calls factory setting or none gt NOTES 1 For outgoing UDP calls any call that involves the public network will be logged on the SMDR report regardless of the programmed setting of the UDP SMDR option Examples of this type of call include DID calls that get routed over the private network CO transfers from one swit
149. works the same way as Key mode Table 5 2 Data Forms To Plan New or Modify Existing Systems Use These Forms Trunk assignments 1a Modem Data Station 1b ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Station Feature assignments 1a Modem Data Station 1b ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Station Data hunt groups 2 Data Hunt Groups Digital data and or video stations 3 Digital Data Video Station MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 5 Data Communications Planning Overview Table 5 3 System Forms To Plan August 1998 Page 5 20 Form Needed Extension jack connections Modem data stations ISDN terminal adapter data stations Local host computer connections LAN workstation access connections Modem ISDN terminal adapter pools 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks for all configurations Line Trunk assignments 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks Feature assignment Dial out code Hybrid PBX only ARS Facility Restriction Level Hybrid PBX only Data hunt groups 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts 4d MLX Telephones 4b Analog Multiline Telephone 4e MFM Adjunct MLX Telephone 5b Direct Line Console DLC Digital 5c MFM Adjunct DLC 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks 3f Automatic Route Selection Tables 3g Automatic Rout
150. write the number of rings you want to assign in the space provided 1 15 rings MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Operator Features Page 4 23 Position Busy Backup This section contains instructions to assign another telephone to receive calls when all QCC operator consoles are in a position busy state Only a calling group can be assigned as a backup for a QCC operator position If a backup is not designated the system does not allow the last available operator position to go into the position busy state Planning Form Instructions Under the Backup On heading on Form 6a do one of the following m To indicate that no backup is assigned check the No box factory setting m Todesignate a backup check the second box The extension number of the backup calling group will be completed later Operator Hold Timer This section contains instructions to set the system to track the number of seconds that callers are on hold at an operator console When a caller is on hold longer than the number of seconds programmed for the timer the operator is reminded by a single ring Planning Form Instructions Under the Operator Hold Timer heading on Form 6a do one of the following m To keep the factory setting check the 60 Seconds box factory setting m To change the factory setting check the second box and write the number of seconds from 10 to 255 seconds in the s
151. 0 BUTTON 5 BUTTON j OO N EM 13 0 25 L LI m 14 0 26 E L E 15 0 27 E L 16 0 28 E LI E E 29 o o 3 Note Lines 1 through 8 only default on a telephone when the system is in Key mode Form 4a 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 4b SS 222222222222 Analog Multiline Telephone Make a copy of this form for each telephone Logical ID Extension No Person or Location Copied from Master Ext No Extension Jack Pair Shared Extension No Voice Announce to Busy voice voice Q Ring Simultaneous Voice and Data voice data No Ring Even numbered jack Auto Line Selection Logical ID Ext No ee a Telephone Model Q MLC 5 Q BIS 22D Optional Features O BIS 10 Q BIS 34 Abbreviated Ring BIS 22 Q BIS 34D Off Q Other Q On Adjuncts Auto Callback Q General Purpose Adapter Off Q FAX machine Q On Answering machine Call Waiting Q Data terminal aote Q Other On Q Supplemental Alert Adapter Alert device type Voice Announced Calls One Q Headset off Q Headset adapter Hands free unit Inside Q 089 handset a One Noisy environment D Off Premises Computer Telephony Integrated Client PC O Yes Q Other No Personal Lines Cover Ring Delay Primary Cover Ring Delay cx C M CR 2Rings Q rings 1 6 Secondary
152. 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0002 M NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DNCT NPA 215 DN 6851189 EQN 20 0 00 01 CT VI CAT LCC PKGSV RAX 1 COS ICND COS RND COSDAT SERCOMP 6851289 PIC 222 SP 288 AU3 CRBLIM 1 INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 Issue 1 August 1998 Page H 34 96 01 18 16 22 08 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 22 31 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations CONTINUATION TEXT 0003 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DNCT NPA 215 DN 6851189 EQN 20 0 00 01 CT CMD CAT IBA LCC PKGSD RAX 1 COS ICND COS RND COSDAT SERCOMP 6851289 PIC 222 C56 PIC 288 C64 CRBLIM 1 INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0004 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 50071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DN NPA 215 DN 6851289 EQN 20 0 00 01 BCHDN 2 BCDN SP BCDN AU3 BCDN C56 BCDN C64 BCHCT 2 VI BCHCT 2 CMD BCHCT 0 PMD IBCHCT 2 VI IBCHCT 2 CMD IBCHCT 0 PMD OBCHCT 2 VI OBCHCT 2 CMD OBCHCT 0 PMD CT VI CT CMD INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 Issue 1 August 1998 Page H 35 96 01 18 16 22 1
153. 0A4 terminating resistor adapter is required Data Station MERLIN DTE DCE LEGEND Optical Control Scanner 2 Unit wes Fax Ne Analog or Tip Ring Credit Card Extension Jack Verification PC Terminal MLX Termina __ Extension Jack Digital Adapter Digital 2 Host y 4 Signal Signal Computer Figure 5 5 ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Only MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications About Data and Video Communications Page 5 14 Summary of Data Station Configurations Table 5 1 describes the extension jacks and equipment required for each data station configuration Table 5 1 Data Station Configurations Type of Data Module and Telephone GPA or Modem or ISDN Data Station Jack Type for voice MFM Terminal Adapter Terminal Analog voice and 2 adjacent extension Analog multiline GPA Modem PC Modem data jacks on one ofthe telephone and a following analog BR 241 B1 bridging modules 408 408 adapter GS LS or 008 Modem data only 1 extension jack on None None Modem PC LAN an 008 OPT 016 T R workstation or or 012 T R module local host MLX voice and 1 extension jack on telephone MFM Modem PC or LAN Modem data an 008 MLX or 408 workstation GS LS MLX module MLX voice and 1 extension jack on telephone None ISDN terminal adapter PC LAN ISDN ter
154. 1 D N 649 uorsu21Xq 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 oloi e co i C2 C2 prd Co AR 6 09 ez T O eseo oy urojs g suonvorunumuo ANADAI NITHHIN 2 02 Ulo D Log lt a Type Er te Set Up Renumber Old Wire Person Location Ring CTI ID ws Space to Label Ext No No or Function Freq Appl Link Shaded lines indicate possible operator positions Factory Setting The system capacity for Personal Directories is decreased by one whenever an MLX 20L telephone is connected to an MLX port Use Form 2b for adjuncts connected via Ringing Frequency is programmable on the 016 T R module only The maximum number of VMI ports is 24 The maximum number of CTI links is 1 SurJoquinw 00293845 Syoef uorsu21xq penunuoD BZ WIJO 1 9 9seo oy 1191546 suonveorunurmuo amp CINHOSTI NITHAIA vz Mod Log x EE Type ID A D B Equipment 49 3 Dig Set Up Renumber Old Wire Person Location Ring Space to Label Ext No No or Function Freq t Appl po xxl Shaded lines indicate
155. 1 lt enter type gt 42 USPID lt enter value gt 43 MAXBCHL lt 2 gt 44 USER lt gt Fields that must be populated on Screens 4 5 6 48 CKT TN lt enter TN gt 49 CKT LCC lt enter LCC gt 50 CKT RAX lt enter RAX value gt 55 TERMTYP lt TYPEA gt 56 DISPLAY lt Y gt 60 CSV lt 1 gt 61 CSV CHL lt ANY gt 63 CSV LIMIT lt gt 69 CSD lt 2 gt 70 CSD CHL lt ANY gt 72 CSD LIMIT lt 2 gt 126 CPN SCRN lt Y gt 140 PIC lt enter PIC gt The Calling Number Identification feature is assigned using the standard BRCS preconstructed features LICNDA and CPCOFA If it is possible request CPCPFA for the Calling Number Identification feature as it provides a clearer display of the CPN information The Redirecting Number Delivery RND feature is assigned using the preconstructed RND feature RND These features are assigned to the user in View 23 8 Field 109 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations Page H 5 Series Completion Feature Translations The sample screens shown below illustrate the translations for alternate voice and data hunting on one main DSL and three DNs forming a linear series completion group Voice hunting is provided using Series Completion Field 87 SERHLN Data hunting is provided with Call Forward Data Busy Line
156. 128 kbps total for 2B Data MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Lines Trunks to Data and Video Stations Page 5 29 The 100D module supports any combination of the following AT amp T Switched Network services ACCUNET Switched Digital Service for 56 kbps 64 kbps restricted and 64 kbps clear unrestricted circuit switched data calls PRI only ACCUNET Switched 56 Service for 56 kbps restricted or unrestricted data calls T1 only 800 for incoming domestic toll free voice calls WATS service for outgoing domestic long distance voice calls Software Defined Network SDN for circuit switched voice and data calls at up to 56 kbps 5 Release 4 2 and later systems these MCI services are also available MCI PRISM MCI Vnet MCI 800 MCI 900 In Release 4 2 and later systems these local exchange carrier services are also available DMS Private DMS INWATS DMS OUTWATS DMS DMS Tie Trunk 1 BRI Basic Rate Interface BRI is a protocol within the ISDN standard that provides digital voice data and video connectivity NI 1 BRI facilities connect to a jack on the 800 NI BRI module with each facility providing two B channels per jack total of 16 NI 1 BRI channels per 800 NI BRI module BRI facilities provide data rates of up to 64 kbps
157. 17 7318 7319 7320 7321 7322 7323 7324 7325 7326 7327 7328 7329 7330 7331 7332 7333 7334 7335 7336 7337 7338 7339 Form 2b 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 2b Continued System Numbering Digital Adjuncts Make additional copies of this form as needed Maximum 127 Adjuncts Factory Set T Set Up Person Location Space Renumber to Adjuncts 2B Ext Function and Equipment 7340 7341 7342 7343 7344 7345 7346 7347 7348 7349 7350 7351 7352 7353 7354 7355 7356 7357 7358 7359 7360 7361 7362 7363 7364 7365 7366 7367 7368 7369 7370 7371 7372 7373 7374 7375 7376 7377 7378 7379 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 2b Continued System Numbering Digital Adjuncts Make additional copies of this form as needed Maximum 127 Adjuncts Factory Set Is Person Location i poen Renumber to Adjuncts 2B Ext No Function and Equipment Type 7380 7381 7382 7383 7384 7385 7386 7387 7388 7389 7390 7391 7392 7393 7394 7395 7396 7397 7398 7399 7400 7401 7402 7403 7404 7405 7406 7407 7408 7409 7410 7411 7412 7413 7414 7415 7416 7417 7418 7419
158. 2 m Ifthe system does not use a system programming console skip to Step 5 2 Obtain the logical ID of the extension jack for the system programming console by referring to the System Operating Conditions heading Form 1 page 2 3 Identify the logical ID for the system programming console by writing SPC beside the appropriate logical ID in the Log ID column of Form 2a 4 Write either the name of the person who will program the system or the location of the system programming console in the Person Location or Function column Then proceed to Step 5 5 Do one of the following m indicate the primary QCC operator position for a system with one or more QCCs proceed to Step 6 m To indicate the primary DLC operator position for a system with one or more DLCs skip tolStep 7 6 Toindicate the primary QCC operator position m Locate the first extension jack showing a D digital jack type and write QCC beside the preprinted logical ID number m Write the name or location of the primary QCC operator in the Person Location or Function column m On Form 1 page 2 write the extension of the QCC under System Consoles MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 22 7 indicate the primary DLC operator position m Locate the first extension jack showing a jack type of D digital or A analog and wri
159. 2 F Unit Load Calculation b 6 Unit Load Worksheet Calculate the estimated unit loads Issue 1 August 1998 Page F 4 Unit Module Oty x Load Total 008 12 0 008 MLX 13 25 008 OPT 8 0 012 T R 8 4 016 T R 12 8 100D 0 0 400 LS 0 0 400 EM 8 0 400 GS LS TTR 0 0 408 12 0 408 GS LS 12 0 408 GS LS MLX 13 5 800 0 0 800 GS LS 0 0 800 DID 8 0 800 GS LS ID 8 0 MERLIN LEGEND Mail 0 0 Total Estimated Unit Load Calculate the actual carrier unit load using the table on the next page m Ifthe total actual unit load is less than or equal to 75 391C1 or 391A3 power supplies or less than or equal to 54 39141 or 391A2 power supplies no further calculation is required m Ifthe total actual unit load is more than 75 391 1 or 391A3 power supplies or more than 54 391A1 or 391A2 power supplies continue to Step 7 m Ifthe total is less than 75 for the 391C1 or 391A3 power supplies or 54 for the 391A1 or 391A2 power supplies no further calculation is required m If the total is 75 391C1 or 391A3 power supplies or 54 391A1 or 391A2 power supplies or more continue to Step 6 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 F Unit Load Calculation Unit Load Worksheet Page F 5 Module Qty x Unit Load
160. 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 7c _ _ 22 77 Group Coverage Maximum 32 groups Make additional copies if more than 8 groups are assigned Group No Group No Group No Group No Senders Senders Senders Senders Extension Nos Extension Nos Extension Nos Extension Nos Receiverst Receiverst Receiverst Receiverst Q Group Q Group Group Q Calling Group Or Q QCC EHE 010 6 E OCC VETE queuet 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 8 f a group is the coverage group for AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant System the default is Group No 30 but can be changed write AUDIX FA by the group number and list the extensions of AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant System subscribers see Form 2a T A maximum of 8 multiline telephones can be used as receivers The QCC queue can also be a receiver for Hybrid PBX mode only but it is not counted in the 8 receiver maximum If a calling group is the receiver it must be the only receiver for a coverage group If the system has AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant System you do not need to fill in receivers here Hybrid PBX mode only Form 7c 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 7c Continued Group No Group No Group No Group No Senders Senders Send
161. 2 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Tables Page x PC CS 5 Data Communications 5 1 Data Station Configurations 5 14 5 2 Data Forms 5 19 5 3 System Forms 5 20 5 4 Extension Jack Types 5 21 6 Modifications 6 1 Required Line Trunk and or Extension Modules 6 3 6 2 Adding New Trunks 6 5 6 3 Adding Auxiliary Equipment 6 6 6 4 Adding New Extensions 6 6 7 Upgrading 7 1 Programming Compatibility 7 3 7 2 Planning Forms T System Forms B 1 System Forms B 1 D C Data Forms C 1 Data Forms C 1 A E 051 Connectivity Ordering E 1 Guide to DS1 Connectivity Ordering E 1 Network Engineering Forms 1 Network Forms 1 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Page xi IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The exclamation point in an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product When installing telephone equipment always follow basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of fire electrical shock and injury to persons including Read and understand all instructions Follow all warnings and instructions marked on or packed with the product Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Neve
162. 2 You can design up to eight lists with a maximum of 10 numbers Each number can have up to 11 digits for example a leading 1 if a toll call prefix is required for dialing followed by the area code and telephone number Star codes such as 67 may also be included in the list to block users from accessing special services offered by the Central Office Once you have designed the lists decide which telephones to restrict You can assign up to eight lists for each telephone Disallowed List 7 is the system default list and includes the numbers most frequently associated with fraud The table below lists the factory set entries for Disallowed List 7 Table 4 2 Disallowed List 7 Factory Set Entries 0 10 11 1809 1700 1900 976 1ppp976 gt NOTES 1 Users cannot dial a number on an Allowed List if it matches a number on a Disallowed List assigned to the telephone 2 For a private network environment see the Network Reference for planning Disallowed Lists needed to restrict calls across the private network Planning Form Instructions On Form 1 Write the name of the list the space next to the list number 2 Write the disallowed area codes exchanges and or star codes in the spaces provided a maximum of 10 entries for each list Use the wild card character to restrict an exchange from being dialed any area code For example to prevent users from directly dial
163. 2 to Release 6 1 m From Release 5 0 to Release 6 1 m From Release 6 0 to Release 6 1 MERLIN II Communications System programming cannot be upgraded to this communications system Any upgrades from MERLIN II must be considered a new installation to MERLIN LEGEND MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 7 Upgrading Upgrading to Release 6 1 Page 7 2 Upgrading to Release 6 1 This section contains an overview of upgrading from Releases 1 0 1 1 2 0 2 1 3 0 3 1 4 0 4 1 4 2 5 0 and 6 0 to Release 6 1 Upgrade Overview To upgrade to Release 6 1 you must back up convert and restore system programming information Any version of SPM may be used to perform the system back up To convert and restore the system programming back up file SPM Version 6 25 or later must be used You must also have or install a processor module with a PCMCIA memory card slot and a forced installation PCMCIA memory card with Release 6 1 system software gt NOTE The version of SPM packaged with Intuity does not support conversion The most current version of SPM is available for download from NSAC Perform the following tasks 1 Back up the system programming 2 Install SPM Version 6 25 or later if not already installed 3 Refer to Table 7 1 to determine if the backup file needs to be converted to Release 6 1 format If required convert the backup file Check the warning messages reg
164. 3 Example 2 Form 3f Area Code Table Subpatterns For each table 1 through 16 and factory set Tables 17 and 18 you can select two subpatterns A and B that specify routes to be used at different times You can specify up to six routes for each subpattern For example you may want calls to certain area codes routed over WATS lines trunks during the day after 11 p m when toll rates are less expensive on basic lines trunks you may want the calls routed over the main pool MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 67 For each of the 12 routes six for each subpattern you can specify a Facility Restriction Level FRL The FRL is used to refine the route selection process still further Each route is assigned an FRL from 0 through 6 6 is the most restricted Each telephone is also assigned an FRL from 0 through 6 0 is the most restricted Callers extension or remote access barrier code trunk can use the route only if their FRL is equal to or greater than that specified for the route You assign a value of 0 to the route if you want all users to access the route or 1 through 6 to restrict calling for the route to specific users only The form for a typical Area Code Table illustrated in Figure 4 4 shows a table to route calls to the 13 area codes served by the northeastern band 1 WATS lines beginning at 8 a m with no restrictions The n
165. 3 MLHG 225 T3 __ 237 H 2W LCN ___ 214 TERM 226 WNDSZ 238 L OUT LCN 215 LNR HNT TN 227 NEW TN 239 H OUT LCN 216 HUNT DEACT _ 228 IECP DNIC 240 BUSY LIMIT 217 CHL SEL N 229 PB GRP Hum 241 PMDR GRP 218 5 230 NOTIF 242 PMDR ACT 219 ISCN2 231 T3XX 0 243 DNA m 220 BAND 0 232 ICP N 244 DNA QTY 221 ODB 233 HUNT NOTIF MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations Page H 9 August 1998 SCR 12 OF 14 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT PPB1 gt 245 PPB1 254 RATE 264 H PVC LCN 246 LCC 255 N2 ___ 265 L IN LCN 247 RAX 0 256 266 H IN LCN 2 248 MLHG 257 T3 T 267 L 2W LCN 249 TERM 258 WNDSZ __ 268 H 2W LCN ___ 250 LNR HNT TN 259 NEW TN 269 L OUT LCN 251 HUNT DEACT _ 260 IECP DNIC 270 H OUT LCN 252 CHL SEL N 261 PB GRP 271 BUSY LIMIT ___ 253 ISCN 262 ICP N 272 PMDR GRP 263 HUNT NOTIF 273 PMDR ACT 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 13 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT PPB2 2274 PPB2 283 RATE 293 H PVC LCN 275 LCC ___ 284 N2 __ 294 L IN LCN 276 RAX 0 285 T1 ___ 295 H IN LCN 271 M
166. 3b Continued PRI Options B Channel Groups Maximum 80 groups with up to 23 channels per group B Channel B Channel B Channel B Channel Group No Slot and Port No Trunk No Group No Slot and Port Trunk No PRI must be selected as the Type of DS1 connectivity before PRI options are entered NOTE To ensure optimal performance of the PRI facility the B channels must be assigned to the B channel groups in the order opposite that of the sequence that the inbound calls are delivered by the network service provider Form 3b 3 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3b Continued PRI Services Maximum 3 Modules Make copies of this page for additional modules Module Slot No Incoming Routing B Channel PERT TAM Dial Plan Line Group No Outgoing Services Incoming Services Services AT amp T Toll Megacom WATS Megacom 800 ACCUNET SDS Software Defined Network SDN MultiQuest Long Distance 5ESS Local OUTWATS 56 64 Digital Virtual Private Network INWATS MCI Toll MCI PRISM MCI Vnet MCI 800 MCI 900 DMS 100 Local DMS Private DMS INWATS DMS OUTWATS DMS Foreign Exchange FX DMS Tie Trunk Other Call by Call Other Hybrid PBX mode only If you select Dial Plan Routing complete Dial Plan Routing information on Form 3b 6 If you select Line Appearance complet
167. 5 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 22 19 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations CONTINUATION TEXT 0005 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DNCT NPA 215 DN 6851289 EQN 20 0 00 01 CT LCC PKGSV RAX 1 COS ICND COS RND COSDAT SERCOMP 6852199 PIC 222 SP 288 AU3 CRBLIM 1 INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0006 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DNCT NPA 215 DN 6851289 EQN 20 0 00 01 CT CMD CAT IBA LCC PKGSD RAX 1 COS ICND COS RND COSDAT SERCOMP 6852199 PIC 222 C56 PIC 288 C64 CRBLIM 1 INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 Issue 1 August 1998 Page H 36 96 01 18 16 22 22 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 22 26 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations CONTINUATION TEXT 0007 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 TERMINAL SERVICE PROFILE DATAMASKNO 04328 VIEW TSP EQN 20 0 00 01 USID 1 TSPID 2156851189 TERMLIM 1 TSPCOS CHDBCHR INTERRUPTI
168. 555 661 112 August 1998 E DS1 Connectivity Ordering Page E 1 DS1 Connectivity Ordering After the contract is signed the sales representative or authorized dealer contacts the DS1 connectivity vendor to discuss the T1 PRI service order The vendor needs information about the communications system as well as customer identification Table E 1 describes the kind of information the vendor requires This table should be reviewed with the customer s network representative or dealer so the information will be available when needed Table E 1 Guide to DS1 Connectivity Ordering Communications System Manufacturer AT amp T Model MERLIN LEGEND Type Mode digital PBX Jack Type RJ48C or RJ48X Facility Interface Code Digital D4 Framing Digital ESF Framing Digital ESF and B8ZS Digital PBX O Has the EIA standard CISA transmission path O Is senderized Is the equipment that must be timed O Has an internal stratum clock level of 4 O Provides automatic call distribution through Group Calling feature Provides loopback keep signal alive through CSU MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 E DS1 Connectivity Ordering Page E 2 Channel Service Unit CSU Manufacturer AT amp T Other Model 3150 Reg Number AW2USA 74673 DD E Facility Interface Codes Digital D4 Framing Digital ESF Framing Digital ESF and B8ZS Standard CSU jacks and test point provided Audible
169. 5a Direct Line Console DLC Analog orm 5b Direct Line Console DLC Digital orm 6a Optional Operator Features orm 8a System Features MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Group Assigned Features Page 4 29 Individual Coverage This section contains instructions to allow an arrangement in which calls from one sender are covered by one or more receivers A receiver can provide primary Individual Coverage or secondary Individual Coverage A sender can have calls covered by up to eight receivers and a receiver Such as a secretary can provide Individual Coverage for more than one sender up to eight buttons on one receiver telephone Any type of telephone can be a sender only a multiline telephone with programmable buttons available can be a receiver The receiver must have a programmed Cover button for each sender whose calls are being covered gt NOTE See Coverage in the Feature Reference for additional information Calls on lines programmed for No Ring cannot be covered If a principal user is assigned calls that would be sent to Group Coverage are sent only to the principal s Group Coverage receivers If the principal user has Remote Call Forwarding on calls are sent to an outside number rather than to the coverage receivers Planning Form Instructions 1 Review the Employee Communication Survey analysis and det
170. 6 01 18 16 23 05 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 23 07 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 23 11 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations CONTINUATION TEXT 0021 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 50071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 TERMINAL SERVICE PROFILE DATA VIEW TSP EQN 20 0 05 00 USID 2 TSPID 2156852299 TERMLIM 1 TSPCOS CHDBCHR INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0022 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 ISDN ACCESS DATA VIEW EQN EQN 40 0 02 04 BCHEQN 2 BCEQN SP BCEQN AU3 BCEQN C56 BCEQN 64 CPDDN 21568531 19 VI CPDDN 21568531 19 CMD COE CLASS1 LINKOPT DYNNOPAL NCCSL D1 4 NCCSL D2 4 NPCSL P1 0 NPCSL P2 0 NSL 10 L2TIM T200 10 L2TIM T201 10 L2TIM T203 3 L2COUNT N200 3 L2COUNT OIFDCC 1 L2COUNT OIFDPC 3 CPVDN2 2156853119 CPVDN2 2156853219 INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 Issue 1 August 1998 Page H 43 96 01 18 16 23 13 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 23 16 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations CONTINUATION TEXT 0023 M NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS
171. 6 25 3 1 no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes 4 15 4 0 no no no no no yes 4 25 4 0 yes yes no no no 5 15 4 0 no no no no no yes yes yes no no 6 15 4 0 no no no no no yes yes yes yes no 6 25 4 0 no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes 4 25 4 1 4 2 no no no no no no yes no no no 5 15 4 1 4 2 no no no no no no yes yes no no 6 15 4 1 4 2 no no no no no no yes yes no 6 25 4 1 4 2 no no no no no no yes yes yes 5 15 5 0 no no no no yes 6 15 5 0 yes yes no 6 25 5 0 no no no no no no no yes yes yes 6 15 6 0 no no no no no 6 25 6 0 no no no no no no no no yes yes 6 25 6 1 no no no no no no no no no yes 1 The backup file must be converted before it is restored MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 7 Upgrading Release 6 1 Forms Release 6 1 Forms August 1998 Page 7 5 Changes made to the planning forms for Release 6 1 reflect enhancements made for Release 6 1 Table 7 2 compares the planning forms for each major release Table 7 2 Planning Forms 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 6 1 6 1 Form Title N A N A Employee Communication Survey 1 1 1 1 1 1
172. 800 numbers until a modem or dial tone is obtained can find this feature which will return a dial tone to them They can even employ war dialers to attempt to discover barrier codes Preventive Measures Take the following preventive measures to limit the risk of unauthorized use of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Remote Access feature by hackers The Remote Access feature can be abused by criminal toll fraud hackers if itis not properly administered Therefore this feature should not be used unless there is a strong business need It is strongly recommended that customers invest in security adjuncts which typically use one time passcode algorithms These security adjuncts discourage hackers Since a secure use of the Remote Access feature generally offers savings over credit card calling the break even period can make the investment in security adjuncts worthwhile If a customer chooses to use the Remote Access feature without a security adjunct then multiple barrier codes should be employed with one per user if the system permits The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System permits a maximum of 16 barrier codes The maximum length should be used for each barrier code and should be changed periodically Barrier codes like passwords should consist of a random hard to guess sequence of digits While MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 3 0 permits a barrier code of up to 11 digits systems prior to Release 3 0 permit ba
173. 99 When the system is set up pools are assigned automatically see the Feature Reference If you want any lines trunks grouped in a pool you must manually assign each line trunk to the pool of your choice Use the instructions in this section gt NOTES 1 Pools can be assigned to calling groups and all trunks within the pool are directed to members of the calling group Individual trunks within a pool cannot be assigned to calling groups 2 If the pool contains any dial in trunks such as DID trunks the pool cannot be assigned to a calling group Also pools with private network tandem trunks should not be assigned to calling groups Decide whether to change the dial out codes Apply the same considerations as you do for reassigning extension numbers MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 17 Planning Form Instructions 1 2 3 Use the following guidelines to determine which trunks to group into pools Each pool should contain trunks of the same type basic WATS FX or tie Ground start and loop start trunks of the same type for example WATS or FX can be mixed in the same pool Do not mix different calling areas of WATS or FX trunks to different cities or include both inbound only and outbound only trunks within the same pool DID trunks and or trunks used for auxiliary equipment cannot be grouped in
174. ACTN 69 ICPN 77 ORIG CWN 87 SERHLN2228704 70 SUSON 78 PPN 88 BCK LNKY 71 SUSTN 79 CA PREFI 89 ACD POS NUM 80 AUTO HOLDN 90 CIDIALALLOW 81 ONE TOUCHN 91 PIC 92 PTC 95 E911 PSAPN 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 6 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT 2106 BFGN 109 FEATURE LIST FL A A A A ROW FEATURE A P CR FEATURE AP CR FEATURE AP CR FEATURE AP CR 1 LIDLXA Y NN 10 19 28 2 CPCPFA Y _NN 11 20 29 3 CFDBLAC Y _ N N 12 21 30 4 13 22 31 5 14 23 32 6 1 5 24 33 7 16 25 34 8 17 26 25 9 18 27 36 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations Page H 15 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 7 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT HIGH RUNNER FEATURE PARAMETERS 2134 TG GRPID 0 146 ACSR GRP 158 QALWD 135 MOH ALW _ 147 EDS GRPN 159 PRIORITY OQ 136 IDP NAME 148 BCLID GRP 160 ARSSI E 137 DPAT CAT 0 149 PFA VGRP 161 DIALPLN ___ 138 ICR SFG 0 150 PFA DGRP 162 ALWMDR 139 5 151 ATH VGRP 163 ACSR PINREO _ 140 5 15 152 ATH DGRP 164 DRING 141 SC2NAME 153 MDR GRPN 165 DCW DRING 142 5 25 _ 154 ACCT GRP 166 CWO DRING 143 CPUO SELQ1 0 155 ARS VGRP 167 MWY DRING 144 CPUO SELO2 0 156 ARS DGRP 145 CPUT TPREDOQ 0 157 FRL 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 EN 8 OF 14 RECE
175. August 1998 4 Features Group Assigned Features Page 4 39 6 Under the First Calls in Queue Alarm Threshold heading do one of the following m keep the factory setting check the 1 Call box m To change the factory set number of calls allowed in the queue before members are notified with a flashing LED check the second box and write the number of calls up to 99 in the space provided 7 Under the Second Calls in Queue Alarm Threshold heading do one of the following m To keep the factory setting check the 1 Call box m To change the factory set number of calls allowed in the queue before members are notified with a winking LED check the second box and write the number of calls up to 99 in the space provided 8 Under the Third Calls in Queue Alarm Threshold heading do one of the following m To keep the factory setting check the 1 Call box m To change the factory set number of calls allowed in the queue before members are notified with a steady LED check the second box and write the number of calls up to 99 in the space provided 9 Under the External Alert for Calls in Queue Alarm heading do one of the following m Forno external alert for Calls in Queue Alarm check the No box m designate an external alert when the Third Calls in Queue Alarm Threshold is exceeded check the second box and write the extension number for the alert in the space provided see Form 2b 10 Under the Overflow Covera
176. August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 3 Forms Needed Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks Form 4b Analog Multiline Telephone m Form 4d MLX Telephone m Form 4e MFM Adjunct MLX Telephone m Form 4f Tip Ring Equipment m Form 5a Direct Line Console DLC Analog m Form 5b Direct Line Console DLC Digital m Form 5c MFM Agjunct DLC m Form 5d Queued Call Console QCC m Form 6b Optional Extension Features m Form 6g Call Restriction Assignments and Lists m Form 6h Authorization Codes m Form Pool Dial Out Code Restrictions m Form 11 Service Observing Group Assignment m Floor plan MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 4 Queued Call Console Hybrid PBX Mode Only Use these instructions if the system includes one or more QCCs Otherwise skip to the next section Pool Dial Out Code Restriction Hybrid PBX Mode Only Planning Form Instructions 1 Transfer the user information from Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks to each copy of Form 5d by filling in the Logical ID Extension No and Person or Location spaces Use the Button Diagram on Form 5d as a guide for labeling the operator console buttons You cannot change the button assignments shown However if the QCC Voice Announce feature is enabled the Call 5 button becomes a VA Voice Announce butto
177. BX mode 3 57 button assignments in Key and Behind Switch mode 3 57 Extension Copy feature 4 11 jacks 2 25 language 2 9 MFM adjuncts 4 3 microphone operation 4 6 modules 2 14 Multi Function Module MFM adjuncts 3 50 optional features 4 2 Modem 5 3 Modem Data Stations 5 3 Modem data only stations 5 9 Modem ISDN Terminal Adapter Pool 5 4 Modes of operation 2 8 Modifications to system overview 6 1 preparation 6 2 Modules adding to the system 6 2 line trunk jack types and 3 2 placement in control unit 2 1 touch tone receivers TTRs 2 16 types 2 1 Multi Function Module MFM adjuncts 3 50 assigning buttons 3 52 3 56 Behind Switch mode and 2 25 extension number 2 25 MLX telephone 2 27 MLX telephones 3 50 MultiQuest 3 3 D 1 Music On Hold 3 9 Issue 1 August 1998 Page IN 10 N Netware 2 26 Network selection table 3 36 1 BRI 5 29 connectivity 3 44 Night Service Emergency Allowed List 4 55 Exclusion List 4 55 group assignment 4 54 outward restriction 4 55 time set 4 56 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Index Night Service Coverage Control 4 56 Numbering line trunk jacks 3 2 Numbering plans 2 33 Numbering the system 2 13 Issue 1 August 1998 Page 11 O One Touch Call Handling 442 Operation modes 2 8 Operator features 4 18 Operator hold timer 4 18 4 23 Operator positions 2 22 Outmode s
178. Basic GS 555 1 41 Gs 811 Basic GS 55 O2 12 Gs 812 Basic GS 13 GS 813 14 814 15 GS 815 16 GS 816 Figure3 1 Partially Completed System Form 2c MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Identifying Line Trunk Jacks Page 3 9 Jacks for Auxiliary Equipment Use these instructions only if the system has auxiliary equipment Music On Hold MERLIN Identifier a loudspeaker paging system or a Maintenance Alarm Otherwise skip to the next section Function Information gt NOTE MERLIN Identifier does not require new wiring and is compatible with all system releases Only connect auxiliary equipment to loop start or ground start loop start jack types You cannot use a line trunk jack for auxiliary equipment on an 800 DID 100D 800 NI BRI or 400EM module To make it easier to add incoming trunks in the future connect auxiliary equipment to the last line trunk jack s on the rightmost module with either LS or GS LS line trunk jacks Planning Form Instructions 1 Review the floor plan and Equipment List if available to confirm the auxiliary equipment to be connected 2 Atthe top of Form 2c fill in the line trunk numbers for each type of auxiliary equipment planned m For Music On Hold write the line trunk number of the line trunk jack designated for this equipment and identify the m
179. Behind Switch mode 3 57 Terminal adapters 2 25 2 26 Terminal Equipment Identifier TEI 3 38 Test telephone number 3 33 3 38 Tie trunks 3 39 5 28 barrier codes 3 19 dial tone 3 41 options 3 39 overview 3 39 remote access 3 21 signaling 3 39 slow dial tone and 3 49 Time 2 10 Timers planning considerations 3 48 planning form instructions 3 48 secondary dial tone 2 12 Timers and counters 3 38 Tip ring T R equipment 6 3 assigning trunks 3 50 Delay Announcement Devices 2 30 features 4 3 jacks 2 30 MLX telephones 2 26 optional features 4 3 Toll abuse 3 42 Toll type 3 13 Touch tone receivers TTRs calculating number required 2 20 modules with 2 16 required by prompt based overflow 2 18 required by voice mail auto attendant 2 17 system requirements 2 16 voice messaging system requirement 2 16 Transfer audible 4 43 Trunk to trunk transfer 3 12 4 9 TSAPI GL 27 Issue 1 August 1998 Page IN 15 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Index Issue 1 August 1998 Page IN 16 U Unit load rules 2 Unit load worksheet F 3 Unit loads Key or Behind Switch Mode 2 V Video endpoints 2 3 Video System 5 4 Virtual Private Network D 1 Voice Announce to Busy 2 24 6 3 Voice Mail Centralized 2 32 Voice mail auto attendant fails to transfer calls 2 16 touch tone receivers TTRs required 2 17 Voice Messaging System func
180. C are not eligible for queue control if the call is directed to a calling group designated as Position Busy Backup Remote access calls to a calling group coverage calls directed to a calling group calls directed to calling group through QCC Position Busy backup and all other outside calls are not eligible for queue control MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 6 0 Enhancements February 1998 Page xx Prompt Based Overflow System managers can activate the Prompt Based Overflow option This option allows callers waiting in queue and listening to a delay announcement to press the key in order to reach the overflow receiver for the group which may be the QCC queue or another calling group including a calling group assigned for a voice mail system All three overflow distribution options based on the number of calls the time a caller has waited and according to the caller s prompt may be used at one time In this case time based and number of calls based options take precedence over overflow distribution based on the caller s prompt When prompt based overflow distribution is used an extra TTR must be provided for each delay announcement device assigned to the associated calling group The delay announcement informs the caller of the key option to exit the queue and leave rather than waiting for an agent If no TT
181. C EWSD in a circular hunt group Other configurations are possible but are not guaranteed to work Appendix H NI 1 BRI Provisioning provides sample LEC programming screens of the Series Completion and MLHG features These screens show the fields and parameters for the CO switch and may be forwarded to the local service provider if necessary Once you have determined your Service Configuration do one of the following If your Service Configuration will be IOC S check the box beside the 5 selection under the Service Configuration heading then enter the number of BRI lines that will be provisioned using this package If your Service Configuration will be MLH check the box beside the MLH selection under the Service Configurations heading Check the box for MLHG Northern Telecom DMS 100 or Series Completion Lucent Technologies 5ESS or Siemens SSC EWSD Enter the total number of BRI lines provisioned using MLH the number of BRI lines provisioned as voice only hunt groups the number of BRI lines provisioned as data only hunt groups and the number of BRI lines provisioned as voice data hunt groups in the spaces provided gt NOTE MERLIN LEGEND Release 4 0 does not support voice data hunt groups with the Siemens SSC EWSD CO switch Specify the total number of BRI lines under the Number of BRI Lines Ordered heading If CPN BN is available with the BRI lines ordered check the CPN BN box under the A
182. COM buttons as many lines trunks as possible are assigned to each console Each line trunk appears on a separate button which means that the number of lines trunks assigned is limited to the number of buttons on the console up to a maximum of 32 buttons on the 34 button analog DLC If a DSS is present the system assigns a DSS button for each extension number associated with an extension and special feature buttons that are used by the DLC operator for call handling functions Figure 3 6 and Figure 3 7 show initial line trunk and feature assignments for MLX and analog DLC consoles Refer to the appropriate figure as you select line trunk assignments for DLCs gt NOTE System Access buttons appear on DLCs in Hybrid PBX mode Intercom buttons appear on DLCs in Key or Behind Switch mode C C C C 28 UU UU UU IU DID IB Figure3 6 MLX Direct Line Console MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Assigning Telepho
183. D for its line trunk jack If you do not know the telephone number leave the column blank and enter the information later In the Label column write the label for each line trunk on the appropriate line The labels can contain up to seven characters including capital letters numbers ampersand amp dash space colon asterisk and pound sign The remaining entries on this form are covered in Selecting Line Trunk Options later in this chapter If the system does not have auxiliary equipment for example Music On Hold or a loudspeaker paging system skip to Selecting Line Trunk Options in this chapter shows an example of a partially completed Form 2c MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Identifying Line Trunk Jacks Page 3 8 Incoming Trunk Type Jack Main No Module Type Pool Personal Telephone Type LS GS Dial Re Line Number and Slot 09 010 Tie Trunk Out number WATS or No ID etc No Codett To FX etc Equipment Label 1 495 801 Basic GS 555 1200 1 LOCAL MLX 3 GS 803 Basic GS 555 1202 4 LOCA 01 4 GS 804 Basic GS 555 1203 4 LOCA 5 66 805 Basic GS 555 1204 5 LO 6 GS 806 Basic GS 555 1205 4 7 G5 807 Basic GS 555 1206 7 8 GS 808 Basic GS 555 1207 9 GS 809 Basic GS 555 12C 008 10 ce 810
184. DCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 23 1 On the Control Unit Diagram on Form 1 determine which extension jacks can be used as operator positions by circling the first and fifth extension jacks on digital or analog modules until you have reached the maximum number of eight positions 2 On Form 2a mark the extension jacks to be used as additional operator positions 3 Do one of the following m lf the system has additional QCCs proceed to Step 4 m Ifthe system has additional DLCs skip to Step 5 4 For each additional QCC m Write QCC next to the preprinted logical ID for each additional QCC position Be sure to assign QCCs to only the first and fifth extension jacks on each digital module m Write the name or location of each additional QCC operator in the Person Location or Function column m On Form 1 page 2 write the extension number of each additional QCC in the System Consoles box 5 For each additional DLC m Write DLC next to the preprinted logical ID for each additional DLC position including DLC positions used for calling group supervisors and for the optional CMSs Be sure to assign DLCs to only the first and fifth extension jacks on each digital or analog module m Write the name or location of each additional DLC operator in the Person Location or Function column m On Form 1 page 2 write the
185. DCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 47 Inside Dial Tone This section contains instructions for specifying whether the system uses an inside dial tone that is different from or the same as outside line trunk dial tone The factory setting is for a different inside dial tone How you set the system for dial tone is a matter of preference gt NOTE Regardless of how you set this option VMSs receive outside dial tones Some modems may require outside dial tone to dial out Planning Form Instructions Under the Inside Dial Tone heading on Form 8a do one of the following m To keep the factory set system inside dial tone check the Inside box m change the dial tone to match the outside dial tone check the Outside box Reminder Service Cancel This section contains instructions for assigning a preset time when the system cancels all reminders Although all users can set and cancel reminder calls for their own telephones and DLC system operators can set and cancel reminder calls for any telephone in the system Reminder Service Cancel automatically cancels all reminder calls at the preset time for example at the end of the business day when all users have gone home and are not available to receive reminders Planning Form Instructions Under the Reminder Service Cancel heading on Form 8a do one of the following m To set no reminder service ca
186. DCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 6 Modifications Page 6 1 Modifications This chapter contains instructions for adding trunks auxiliary equipment or more telephones to an existing system It includes the following m The actions that you must take to add to the system m The interrelated options or features that you should consider m The forms that must be revised or completed To modify the system perform the following tasks 1 Decide what to change and identify the programming needed 2 Complete or revise the appropriate planning forms 3 Program the modification using instructions in System Programming gt NOTE If you need to modify a private network such as adding a new switch to the network or modifying one or more switches in the network see the Network Reference for information MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 6 Modifications Preparation Page 6 2 Preparation To prepare for modifying the system 1 Collect the package of completed planning forms Although you may need to revise only one or two forms you should have all completed forms available for reference 2 Review Chapter 1 You Begin for details on preparation for planning activities 3 Before revising the forms analyze and document the changes planned For example m f adding extensions to the system
187. Data and Video Communications MLX Voice and Modem Data Issue 1 August 1998 Page 5 10 This type of analog data station includes an MLX telephone in addition to the DTE and modem see Figure 5 3 The modem connects to the MLX telephone through the T R interface of the Multi Function Module MFM which is installed in the MLX telephone The telephone connects to the control unit through an MLX extension jack The communication capabilities of the MLX telephone and data station can be used simultaneously Data Station FF DTE BCE Optical 2 5 amr QS Fax Nec Digital Analog E Signal Signal Credit Card Verification PC Terminal Digital Signal Host MLX Telephone Computer 1 with Multi Function Module MFM MERLIN LEGEND Control Unit Pana Analog or Tip Ring Extension Jack MLX Extension Jack Figure 5 3 Voice and Modem Data MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications About Data and Video Communications Page 5 11 ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Stations An ISDN terminal adapter data station uses an ISDN terminal adapter as its DCE to send and receive data and connects to a digital extension jack MLX port on the control unit If PRI 1 BRI or 1 Switched
188. Data and Video Stations Page 5 34 To allow the user at an ISDN terminal adapter data station access to the digital network for making and receiving calls to outside digital data stations assign PRI facilities with digital data service such as ACCUNET Switched Digital Service and Software Defined Network SDN NI 1 BRI or T1 Switched 56 facilities to ISDN terminal adapter data stations If these facilities are not available the ISDN terminal adapter data station user can make calls over the regular analog telephone network only by using a digital to analog modem pool described in application note MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Modem Pooling gt NOTE PRI and NI 1 BRI facilities are also used for analog data and voice calls and can be assigned to telephones to allow the voice user to make and receive voice calls using these types of facilities The following line button assignments are factory set for Key mode and are prerecorded on the Button Diagram on Data Forms 1a and 1b Two Intercom Ring ICOM Ring buttons are assigned to the following Data equipment connected to an 012 T R 016 T R or 008 OPT module m All equipment connected to a digital extension jack on an 008 or 408 GS LS MLX module The factory settings can be changed however at least one ICOM button must be assigned to each data station To allow a user to make and receive outside data calls you must assign an outside trunk to the data station To de
189. Digital Subscriber Lines DSLs and six Directory Numbers DNs forming a circular series completion group The screens shown in this section are examples DNs shown on these screens should be replaced with applicable data NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 96 01 18 16 22 05 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY 2816 04328 DISPSDNDAT EQN 20 0 0 1 amp 20 0 5 0 amp 40 0 2 4 EXEC D ISDN ACCESS DATA MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 VIEW EQN EQN 20 0 00 01 BCHEQN 2 BCEQN SP BCEQN AUS BCEQN C56 BCEQN C 4 CPDDN 2156851 189 VI CPDDN 2156851189 CMD COE CLASS1 LINKOPT DYNNOPAL NCCSL D1 4 NCCSL D2 4 NPCSL P1 0 NPCSL P2 0 NSL 10 L2TIM T200 10 L2TIM T201 10 L2TIM T203 3 L2COUNT N200 3 L2COUNT OIFDCC 1 L2COUNT OIFDPC 3 CPVDN2 2156851189 CPVDN2 2156851289 INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations CONTINUATION TEXT 0001 M NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 50071 000 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DN NPA 215 DN 6851189 EQN 20 0 00 01 BCHDN 2 BCDN SP BCDN 3 BCDN C56 BCDN 64 BCHCT 2 BCHCT 2 CMD BCHCT 0 PMD IBCHCT 2 IBCHCT 2 CMD IBCHCT 0 PMD OBCHCT 2 OBCHCT 2 CMD OBCHCT 0 PMD CT Ci CMD INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB
190. F 5 Under the Suppression Line Code heading do one of the following a the factory setting check AMI ZCS b Tochange the factory setting check B8ZS 6 Underthe Signaling Mode heading for all boxes that describe T1 modules do one of the following a Toretain the factory setting of robbed bit signaling check Robbed Bit Signaling RBS b Tochange the factory setting to common channel signaling check Common Channel Signaling CCS 7 Under the Line Compensation heading a Fillin the approximate distance number of cable feet between the 100D module and its channel service unit CSU or other far end connection in the space provided next to Cable Feet b Use Table 3 3 to select the Line Compensation setting needed The factory setting is 1 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 26 Table 3 3 Line Compensation Settings Setting dB Loss Cable Feet 1 factory setting 0 6 0 133 2 1 2 133 266 3 1 8 266 399 4 2 4 399 533 5 3 0 533 655 Based on 22 gauge cable If the system includes both 800 NI BRI and 100D modules clock synchro nization planning should be completed at the same time There is only one primary secondary tertiary clock for both 800 NI BRI modules and 100D modules with the same system programming screens used for both types Plan your clock source admin
191. FEAT RESTRICTIONS NOPMD ONAL ISSUE 2 01 10 02 TEI DYNAMIC MDCSCA SUBGRP NCOS ISDNKSET AS A DNH HUNT MEMBER HUNT MEMBER 2 NOT PILOT N 2257145 URE NONE PILOT DN 22571 GROUP OPTIONS CIR RCVD 41 O RING Y IO DN 2257146 QLT PSATS 146 DN 2257146 TYPE MEMBER OF SNPA 201 HUNT GROUP LTID PSATS LTCLASS BRAFS 22 KEY 1 CUSTGRP OPTIONS SFC PILOT DN 22571 GROUP OPTIONS CIR RCVD SIG LINE CLASS CODE DNH HUNT GROUP N A LNATTIDX N A HUNT MEMBER 1 146 ISDNKSET MDCSCA SUBGRP O NCOS 41 O RING Y LTID PSATS 146 SNPA 201 DIRECTORY NUMBER 2257146 LT GROUP NO 13 LTCLASS BRAFS DEFAULT LOGICAL TERMINAL N 5 BEARER SERVICE RESTRICTIONS NOPMD CS Y PS N V S ERSION FUNCTIONAL ISSUE 2 PID SUFFIX 01 HOST 01 0 07 01 TEI DYNAMIC CUSTGRP MDCSCA SUBGRP O NCOS O RING Y LINE CLASS CODE ISDNKSET MAXKEYS 64 DN IS ASSIGNED AS A DNH HUNT MEMBER NOT PILOT HUNT GROUP 22 HUNT MEMBER 1 OPTIONS SFC KEY DN 1 DN 2257146 KEY FEATURE NONE PILOT DN 2257141 GROUP OPTIONS CIR RCVD QLEN 1 1 10 1 QLEN 1 1 10 2 QLEN 10 7 1 LEN HOST 011 10 01 ISG 0 DCH 1 ISG BRA Channel 21 CARCODE BX27AA PADGRP NPDGP PM NODE NUMBER 32 PM TERMINAL NUMBER 322 TEI LTID CSPSBCH ISG Bd DYNAMIC PSATS 141 Y N DYNAMIC PSA
192. Figure 1 2 Sample Floor Plan MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Page 2 1 Control Unit Configuration After you have completed the preplanning tasks described in Chapter 1 You Begin you can plan the control unit configuration Planning the control unit configuration consists of the following tasks 1 Planning Module Placement Calculate the system s line trunk and extension capacity according to the number of module types then map out the placement of the modules on the Control Unit Diagram 2 Recording System Operating Conditions Note the system s type of programming equipment it s mode and language choice and whether the Automatic Maintenance Busy feature is to be enabled or disabled 3 Numbering the System Decide the order in which to connect the telephones and other equipment to the control unit based on the customer s needs and applications Determine whether the System assigned extension numbers are appropriate for the customer s business or if they need to be renumbered This chapter contains instructions for completing each of these tasks MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Planning Module Placement Page 2 2 Planning Module Placement In addition to the processor module and power supply module the system supp
193. Forms Needed Floor plan Equipment List if available Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 14 Identifying Extension Jacks Identifying extension jacks consists of the following tasks m Determining which extension jack types are available according to the types of modules in the control unit m Matching the telephones and other equipment to the jacks that support them in the following order Primary operator position Additional operator positions CTI link port Extension jack pairs for analog multiline telephones only with Voice Announce to Busy feature and or voice and data telephones Analog multiline telephones Tip ring equipment and applications Planning Form Instructions Before you begin review the floor plan and Equipment List if available to identify the equipment and the number of each kind of connection needed as well as to obtain other information you need to fill in the forms m Number type s and user name and or location of operator consoles m Number and user name and or location of analog multiline telephones that will use the Voice Announce to Busy feature or voice and data m Number of non operator MLX telephones and user names and or locations m Number and u
194. GEND system If the MLX port is programmed as a 2B Data port the video systems can use both of the B channels assigned to the MLX port to provide video Many video applications also support data sharing and or transfer gt NOTE If the video system is connected to the MLX jack through an ISDN terminal adapter unless the ISDN terminal adapter itself supports 2B Data communications it is recommended that the MLX port not be programmed as a 2B Data port MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications About Data and Video Communications Page 5 5 About Data and Video Communications This section provides a high level overview of the system s data and video communications capabilities followed by more detailed information about some of the equipment and concepts introduced in this overview Connectivity Data communications connectivity enables the system to share resources as well as to establish and manage connections between computers and other data devices Video communications connectivity enables users to conduct personal or group video conferences and to share data and applications also known as Video Collaboration The system control unit hardware and software in conjunction with other external hardware devices provides data and video connectivity for the following m On premises analog data stations m Connection to off premises data stations
195. Hunt Groups Page 5 41 Planning Form Instructions Make enough copies of Data Form 2 Data Hunt Groups for the number of data hunt groups you plan For each DHG 1 2 Write the group number 1 32 in the Group Number space Write the name of the group in the Group ID space Write the factory set extension number for the DHG in the space provided gt NOTE Check all pages of Form 7d to be sure that you have not assigned the extension to a voice calling group If you want to reassign the factory set extension number for the DHG write the new number in the Renumber To space Also write the new extension number you want to reassign in the calling group or DHG on Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumber Under the Purpose of Group heading indicate the group use local host computer access workstation LAN access and so forth In the Stations area write the extension number of each member of the group in the Ext No column and the name of the person or location in the Person or Location column In the Trunks or Pool area for each line trunk or pool that you want to ring directly into the DHG write the line trunk number or pool extension number next to the logical ID in the Trunk or Pool column See Form 2b for the line trunk numbers and Form 2c for the pool extension number MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Digital Data Video Stati
196. Information Service 7928 Message Drop 770 Automated Attendant Calling groups can be part of the group assignment for Night 5 described later in this chapter 2 No longer orderable MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 4 Features Group Assigned Features August 1998 Page 4 33 Planning Form Instructions 1 Review the Employee Communication Survey analysis and determine the number of calling groups needed using the following guidelines Assign up to 32 calling groups with up to 20 members for each group Each telephone user can be a member of only one calling group Designate up to 80 lines trunks to ring directly into a calling group Incoming calls on a given line trunk can be directed to only one calling group If the MERLIN LEGEND Mail or other supported VMS is being used either on the local system or a remote system Centralized Voice Messaging reserve one or more calling groups for that feature A calling group may have up to one non local member Release 6 1 and later If a calling group has a non local member that is the only member allowed in the calling group Local and non local members cannot be in the same calling group A calling group containing a single non local member can be used for the same purposes as a calling group containing only local extensions This includes night service group coverage calling group overflow coverage an
197. Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Figures Page viii T 5 Data Communications 5 1 Analog Voice and Modem Data 5 8 5 2 Modem Data Only 5 9 5 3 Voice and Modem Data 5 10 5 4 Voice and ISDN Terminal Adapter Data 5 12 5 5 ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Only 5 13 T1 PRI Planner D 1 Sample DS1 Planning Map D 4 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Tables Page ix Tables 1 Before You Begin 1 1 Environmental Requirements 1 2 1 2 Control Unit Space Requirements 1 3 1 3 Employee Communications Survey Description of Questions 1 12 2 Control Unit Configuration 2 1 Application Ports 2 15 2 2 Modules with Touch Tone Receivers 2 17 2 3 Touch Tone Receivers Required by Voice Messaging Systems 2 17 2 4 System Requirements for Touch Tone Receivers 2 18 2 5 TTRs Required for Primary Delay Announcement Devices 2 19 2 6 TTRs Required for Secondary Delay Announcement Devices 2 19 2 7 Maximum Number of Operator Positions 2 22 2 8 Application Ports 2 31 3 Lines Trunks 3 1 Line Trunk Jack Types 3 3 3 Codes for Line Trunk Jacks 3 5 2 3 3 Line Compensation Settings 3 26 3 4 Line Compensation Settings 3 32 3 5 1 BRI Timers 3 48 3 6 Total Number of TTRs Required 3 49 SSS 4 1 Features That Be Copied 4 11 4 2 Disallowed List 7 Factory Set Entries 4 5
198. L 10 L2TIM T200 10 L2TIM T201 10 L2TIM T203 3 L2COUNT N200 3 L2COUNT OIFDCC 1 L2COUNT OIFDPC 3 CPVDN2 2156852199 CPVDN2 2156852299 INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 Issue 1 August 1998 Page H 38 96 01 18 16 22 38 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 22 40 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations CONTINUATION TEXT 0012 M NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DN NPA 215 DN 6852199 EQN 20 0 05 00 BCHDN 2 BCDN SP BCDN 3 BCDN C56 BCDN 64 BCHCT 2 BCHCT 2 CMD BCHCT 0 PMD IBCHCT 2 IBCHCT 2 CMD IBCHCT 0 PMD OBCHCT 2 OBCHCT 2 CMD OBCHCT 0 PMD CT VI CT CMD INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0013 M NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DNCT NPA 215 DN 6852199 EQN 20 0 05 00 CT VI CAT LCC PKGSV RAX 1 COS ICND COS RND COSDAT SERCOMP 6852299 PIC 222 SP 288 AU3 CRBLIM 1 INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 Issue 1 August 1998 Page H 39 96 01 18 16 22 44 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 22 48 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Pla
199. LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 6e Allowed Lists KR KR O WDIN D O AIIN I oO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Form 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 6e Continued I oO AIIN Allow to Allow to Allow to Allow to Ext Nos Ext Nos Ext Nos Ext Nos Form 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 6f mM o ee Disallowed Lists 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 Disallow to Disallow to Disallow to Ext Nos Ext Nos Ext Nos Form 6f 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 6f Continued a ee
200. LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Contents Page iii Contents New Features and Enhancements xiii m Release 6 1 Enhancements August 1998 xiii Prior Releases Features and Enhancements xvii About This Book xxxvii m Intended Audience xxxvii m How to Use This Book xxxvii m Terms and Conventions Used Related Documents xlii How to Comment on This Book xliii E 1 Before You Begin 1 1 m Reviewing System Components 1 1 Confirming the Location of the Control Unit 1 Requirements for Supporting Applications Obtaining Telephone Company Information Obtaining User Information Obtaining a Floor Plan MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Contents Page iv Lines Trunks Identifying Line Trunk Jacks Selecting Line Trunk Options m Assigning Lines Trunks m Assigning Telephone Buttons 4 Features 4 1 m Telephone and Extension Features 4 2 18 Operator Features 4 Group Assigned Features 4 26 System Features 4 41 Data Communications Terminology About Data and Video Communications m Planning Overview m Assigning Lines Trunks to Data and Video Stations m Assigning Featu
201. LHG 286 T3 m 296 1 2W LCN __ 278 TERM 287 WNDSZ _ 297 H 2W LCN 279 LNR HNT TN 288 NEW TN 298 L OUT LCN 280 HUNT DEACT _ 289 IECP DNIC 299 H OUT LCN ___ 281 CHL SEL N 290 PB GRP 300 BUSY LIMIT ___ 282 ISCN 291 ICP N 301 PMDR GRP 292 HUNT NOTIF _ 302 PMDR ACT 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 14 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 These fields delet DSL BRCS ASSIGN Ej NT WARNING 303 DELFEAT ROW FEATURE 1 2 3 No Messages features currently on the view or in a BFG Deletion of a feature in BFG may invoke BFG reselection SESS SCREEN 1 OF 14 SWITCH LABNSC1 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT 1 DSL 2228701SERVICES AND FEATURES SCREENS 4 MLHG 5 TERM BRCS FEATURE LIST 6 6 DSL OE _ BRCS FEATURE PARAMETERS 7 to 9 9 ASSOC U CKT 4 amp 5 DELFEAT LIST 14 DPKT 10 DSL INFO 2 ODB 11 12 2 13 USER INFO 3 5ESS SWITCH LABNSCI SCREEN 2 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 211 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT DSL INFO OE I 00101209 25 CUT DGTS2228 D ISCN 007096 26 ACSR GRP D SERV SX 27 DFLT SRV B1 SERV DMD B2 SERV DMD NT1 TYPE AULC PM GRP PMDEF DSL CLS STD RSTR MP ACSR INH Y MDPKT 8 MTERM 2 SCREEN 3 OF 14 gt 28 29 30 31 32 33 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 RECENT CHANGE 23 8
202. Line DSL consists of two B channels both of which support voice and data calls In order to have two simultaneous voice or digital data calls each DSL must be assigned two Directory Numbers DNs and two Service Profile Identifiers SPIDs by the CO Basic call handling is supported along with the Calling Party Number Billing Number CPN BN identification feature No packet data capabilities or hunting features are provided gt NOTE On the Lucent Technologies 5ESS switch the Calling Party Number identification feature is assigned using the standard BRCS preconstructed features LICNDA and CPCOFA If it is possible request CPCPFA for the Calling Number Identification feature from your local service provider as it provides a clearer display of the CPN information IOC package S supports a maximum of one call per telephone number DN at any given time If another call comes in on that line the caller gets a busy signal For Canada and those areas of the United States where IOC package 5 is not available the capability package that is ordered must provide alternate voice circuit switched data on both B channels with no packet data capability or supplementary voice features except for the CPN BN feature if available See Appendix 1 BRI Provisioning for detailed information Multiline Hunt MLH This feature is not part of the IOC package S and must be provisioned separately One or more BRI lines
203. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Comcode 108289489 Issue 1 August 1998 Copyright 1998 Lucent TechnologiesDocument 555 661 110 All Rights ReservedComcode 108289000 Printed in USAAugust 1998 Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change See Appendix A Customer Support Information for important information Your Responsibility for Your System s Security Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example persons other than your company s employees agents subcontractors or persons working on your company s behalf Note that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your telecommunications system and if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services You and your System Manager are responsible for the security of your system such as programming and configuring your equipment to prevent unauthorized use The System Manager is also responsible for reading all installation instruction and system programming documents provided with this product in order to fully understand the features that can introduce risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken to reduce that risk Lucent Technologies does
204. MCIA technology introduced in Release 3 0 continues to support these two boards for installation and upgrade in Release 4 0 A Release 3 0 or later processor is required for PCMCIA technology MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 4 0 Enhancements March 1996 Page xxxiii Support for 2B Data Applications A Lucent Technologies certified group and desktop video application can use two B channels to make video data calls when connected to a single MLX extension jack programmed for 2B data The 2B data devices must be equipped with ISDN BRI interfaces NI 1 BRI PRI or T1 Switched 56 facilities support 2B data communications at 112 kbps using two 56 kbps channels or 128 kbps using two 64 kbps B channels This feature is available for Hybrid PBX and Key modes only Support for T1 Switched 56 Digital Data Transmission For Hybrid PBX and Key mode systems Release 4 0 expands support of T1 functionality by providing access to digital data over the public switched 56 kbps network as well as to digital data tie trunk services Users who have T1 facilities for voice services can now use them for video or data calls at rates of 56 kbps per channel 112 kbps for video calls using 2B data The Release 4 0 offering also includes point to point connectivity over T1 tie trunks allowing customers to connect two MERLIN LEGEND Communications Sys
205. Mode Only Use these instructions only if the system is operating in Hybrid PBX mode If the system uses ARS for data calls you can assign a Facility Restriction Level FRL to each data station This value 0 6 corresponds to the FRL assigned to each route and is used to restrict data users from access to specific routes Before restricting a data station review the values assigned to each route To restrict a data station from specific routes assign an FRL value lower than the route s lowest value Values equal to or greater than the route s values allow data extension users to access those routes A value of 0 is the most restrictive and a value of 6 is the least restrictive The factory setting is 3 For example to give a modem data station unlimited use of any ARS route assign a value of 6 If you have ISDN terminal adapter data stations assign a value of 0 to prevent users from inadvertently using ARS to select an analog line for outside data calls MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Features to Data Stations Page 5 39 Planning Form Instructions 1 Using Form Automatic Route Selection Tables and Form 3g Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Numbers Table review the values assigned to the routes 2 Inthe Optional Features section of Data Form 1a or 1b for each data station to record your decisions about Facility
206. N T1 Switched 56 facilities or NI 1 BRI facilities for digital data calls 3 T1 facilities that are not using Switched 56 service can be used for modem data and analog voice calls and can be assigned to telephones to allow the voice user to make and receive voice calls using these types of facilities The following line button assignments are factory set for Hybrid PBX mode and are prerecorded on the Button Diagram on Data Forms 1a and 1b m One System Access Originate Only SA Orig Only button and two System Access Ring SA Ring buttons are assigned to all data equipment connected to an 012 T R 016 T R or 008 OPT module m One System Access Originate Only SA Orig Only button one System Access Ring SA Ring button and a System Access Voice SA Voice button are assigned to all data equipment connected to a digital extension jack on an 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module Remove the SA Voice button see Form 5c page 1 The factory settings can be changed however the settings should be adequate to meet most user needs since System Access lines can be used to make both inside and outside data calls Each data extension must have at least one SA button or two SA buttons for making 2B Data calls If making 2B Data calls with two personal line buttons you must also have two SA buttons If you want an ISDN terminal adapter data station to make and receive outside data calls on a specific outside line trunk assign a personal line
207. NG 143 CPUO SELQ1 0 155 ARS VGRP 167 MWY DRING 144 CPUO SELQ2 0 156 ARS DGRP 145 CPUT TPREDQ 0 157 FRL EN 5ESS SWITCH LABNSCI SCREEN 8 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT HIGH RUNNER FEATURE PARAMETERS gt 172 MESSAGE SERVICE MSS 175 MW DCNDN ROW FEATURE GRPNM 1 2 3 4 5ESS SWITCH LABNSCI SCREEN 9 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT HIGH RUNNER FEATURE PARAMETERS gt 176 CALL FORWARDING FEATURE PARAMETERS CF ROW FEATURE FWD TO DN TIMEOUT BSRING SIMINTER SIMINTRA 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 0 _ 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 E 0 0 6 0 0 0 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Northern Telecom DMS 100 Switch Translations Page H 19 Northern Telecom DMS 100 Switch Translations For the Northern Telecom DMS 100 switch Capability Package 5 includes alternate voice circuit switched data on two B channels It also supports Calling Number Identification on data and voice connections Please note that the assignment of two DNs is required for this package The DMS 100 switch also allows alternate voice and data hunting on one DN through the Multiline Hunt Group feature ISDN Capability Package 5 The information listed below provides the DN translations that define Capability Package S and the commands that must be executed ISDN Ordering Code Capability S Provision DN1 using the following translations D
208. NK 3150 m lf the CSU is not the ACCULINK 3150 check the Other box and write the manufacturer s name and model number in the space provided at the bottom of the page m If no CSU is needed check None d Inthe connection block s describe the DS1 s far end connection by doing one of the following m If connected to the telephone company central office check CO m If connected to another communications system check PBX m If connected to the PRI network check PRI m If the facility s type of service is T1 check the type s of emulated trunks Also check the Services box if the facility includes services such as MultiQuest with DNIS e Describe the clock synchronization sources according to the key at the lower left of the map i Draw acircle and line from the clock source to the appropriate 100D module ii Label the circle P for primary S for secondary or T for tertiary 10 Make acopy of the T1 PRI Planner for your records and forward the original to SDSC As an example the system described in shows a processor module system with two 100D modules MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 D T1 PRI Planner Page D 4 The communications system in Figure D 1 is configured as follows m Module 1 in slot 04 is connected to an ACCULINK 3150 CSU that is approximately 100 cable feet from the control unit The DS1 facility is connected to the PRI network
209. NT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT HIGH RUNNER FEATURE PARAMETERS SCR Gl gt 172 MESSAGE SERVICE MSS 175 MW DCNDN ROW FEATURE GRPNM 1 2 3 4 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 9 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT HIGH RUNNER FEATURE PARAMETERS 2176 CALL FORWARDING FEATURE PARAMETERS CF ROW FEATURE FWD TO DN TIMEOUT BSRING SIMINTER SIMINTRA 1 CFDBLAC2228704 0 Y 1 99 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 _ 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 1 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT 1 DSL TN C 2228704SERVICES AND FEATURES SCREENS 4 MLHG 5 TERM BRCS FEATURE LIST 6 6 DSL OE _ BRCS FEATURE PARAMETERS 7 to 9 9 ASSOC U CKT 465 DELFEAT LIST 14 DPKT 10 DSL INFO 2 ODB 11 PPBl 12 PPB2 13 USER INFO 3 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 2 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT DSL INFO gt 11 OE I 00101221 25 CUT DGTS2228 14 D ISCN 007105 26 ACSR GRP 15 D SERV SX 27 DFLT SRV 16 Bl SERV DMD 17 B2 SERV DMD 18 TYPE 19 20 DSL CLS STD 21 RSTR MP N 22 ACSR INH Y 23 MDPKT 8 24 MTERM 2 5ESS SWITCH LABNSC1 SCREEN 3 OF 14 RECENT CHANGE 23 8 DSL BRCS ASSIGNMENT
210. NT MEMBER 3 LTID PSATS 144 LTCLASS BRAFS LINE CLASS CODE ISDNKSET KEY 1 CUSTGRP MDCSCA SUBGRP NCOS O RING OPTIONS SFC PILOT DN 2257141 GROUP OPTIONS CIR RCVD Y LTID PSATS 144 SNPA 201 DIRECTORY NUMBER 2257144 LT GROUP NO 13 LTCLASS BRAFS DEFAULT LOGICAL TERMINAL N EKTS N CACH N BEARER SERVICE RESTRICTIONS NOPMD CS Y PS N VERSION FUNCTIONAL ISSUE 2 SPID SUFFIX 01 EN HOST 01 1 10 01 TEI DYNAMIC CUSTGRP MDCSCA SUBGRP O NCOS O RING Y LINE CLASS CODE ISDNKSET MAXKEYS 64 DN IS ASSIGNED AS A DNH HUNT MEMBER NOT PILOT HUNT GROUP 22 HUNT MEMBER 3 OPTIONS SFC KEY DN 1 DN 2257144 KEY FEATURE NONE PILOT DN 2257141 GROUP OPTIONS CIR RCVD QDN 2257145 QLT PSATS 145 DN 2257145 TYPE MEMBER OF DNH HUNT GROUP SNPA 201 SIG LNATTIDX N A HUNT GROUP 22 HUNT HENBER 2 LTID PSATS 145 LTCLASS BRAFS LINE CLASS CODE ISDNKSET KEY 1 CUSTGRP MDCSCA SUBGRP NCOS RING Y OPTIONS SFC PILOT DN 2257141 GROUP OPTIONS CIR RCVD LTID PSATS SNPA 201 DIRECTORY NUMBE LT GROUP NO 13 LTCLASS BRAFS EKTS N CACH 145 R 2257145 DEFAULT LOGICAL TERMINAL N N BEARER SERVICE CS Y PS N VERSION FUNCTI SPID SUFFIX EN HOST 011 CUSTGRP LINE CLASS CODE MAXKEYS 64 DN IS ASSIGNED HUNT GROUP 22 OPTIONS SFC DN 1 D
211. Noisy environment B On Off Premises Tel No or Ext No Auto Line Selection Cover Ring Delay mx A c RC Primary Cover Ring Delay Q 2 Rings Button Diagram Q ___rings 1 6 Secondary Cover Ring Delay Q 2 Rings Q rings 1 6 Group Coverage Ring Delay Q 3 Rings Q rings 1 9 Line 1 SA Centralized Programming Requirements Q Remove all but one SA button to disable Orig Only SA Icom Ring SA Icom Ring features such as Transfer and Conference Factory Setting Form 4f 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 5a UE Direct Line Console DLC Analog Make a copy of this form for each telephone Logical ID Extension No Person or Location Copied from Master Ext No Extension Jack Pair Personal Lines Voice Announce to Busy voice voice Simultaneous Voice and Data voice data Even numbered jack Auto Line Selection Logical ID Ext No EE EMEN RN eei Console Model SS EE Q MERLIN II System Display Console Optional Features Q 5 340 Abbreviated Ring O BIS 34 off Q BIS 22D One 4 BIS 22 Auto Callback Adjuncts Off Q General Purpose Adapter Q On Q FAX machine Il Waiti Q Answering machine Waiting Q Data terminal 17 a Other a ee On Q Supplemental Station Alert Ada
212. O Station Message Detail Recording Feature that captures usage information on incoming and outgoing calls Printer used to produce SMDR reports Connected to the system via an RS 232 jack on the processor module See SDN Pause Stop or End of Dialing signal in a programmed dialing sequence such as a speed dial number MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Issue 1 August 1998 Glossary Page GL 25 SPM System Programming and Maintenance DOS UNIX or Windows based application for programming the system square key Configuration in Key mode operation in which all outside star configuration station station jack Station Message Detail Recording Supplemental Alert Adapter switch Switched 56 service switchhook flash switch identifier synchronous data transmission system acceptance test System Access buttons system date and time system programming lines appear on all telephones A private network arrangement where either three or more communications systems are connected with one system acting as the hub system See also series configuration See extension See extension jack See SMDR See SAA See communications system DS1 Switched 56 service is an end to end digital 56 kbps full duplex synchronous circuit switched service offering The service is offered by network service providers and by some Local Exchange Carriers LECs as ci
213. ON TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0008 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 TERMINAL SERVICE PROFILE DATA VIEW TSPDNCT EQN 20 0 00 01 TSPID 2156851189 NPA 215 DN 6851189 CT VI INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0009 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 TERMINAL SERVICE PROFILE DATA VIEW TSPDNCT EQN 20 0 00 01 TSPID 2156851189 NPA 215 DN 6851189 CT CMD INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 Issue 1 August 1998 Page H 37 96 01 18 16 22 29 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 22 32 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 22 35 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations CONTINUATION TEXT 0010 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 TERMINAL SERVICE PROFILE DATA VIEW TSP EQN 20 0 00 01 USID 2 TSPID 2156851289 TERMLIM 1 TSPCOS CHDBCHR INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0011 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 ISDN ACCESS DATA VIEW EQN EQN 20 0 05 01 BCHEQN 2 BCEQN SP BCEQN AU3 BCEQN C56 BCEQN 64 CPDDN 2156852199 VI CPDDN 2156852199 CMD COE CLASS1 LINKOPT DYNNOPAL NCCSL D1 4 NCCSL D2 4 NPCSL P1 0 NPCSL P2 0 NS
214. PBX Mode Only MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 16 QCC Queue Priority Level Hybrid PBX Mode Only The QCC queue priority determines the order in which calls on each line trunk are sent to QCC operator positions You set the priority for each individual line trunk Considerations to be used in deciding the priority level are discussed in the description of Queued Call Consoles in the Feature Reference Since incoming calls on DID and non automatic in tie trunks route to specific extension numbers you cannot assign a QCC queue priority for these types of trunks Also QCC queue priority cannot be assigned to private network tandem trunk types Legend PBX or Legend NTWk However calls received can be directed to the Listed Directory Number LDN which has queue priority set Planning Form Instructions On Form 2c for each line trunk with All or an extension number in the Operator to Receive Calls column write the priority level 1 to 7 in the QCC Queue Priority Level column for each line trunk used for incoming calls A value of 1 indicates the highest priority a value of 7 indicates the lowest The factory set priority for calls received on all trunks programmed to ring in the queue is 4 Pools Hybrid PBX Mode Only The system can have up to 11 pools with factory set dial out codes of 70 and 890 through 8
215. PID planning form instructions 3 45 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Index BRI line options planning 3 44 clock synchronization 0 planning considerations 3 46 Service Profile Identifier SPID planning considerations 3 45 timers planning considerations 3 48 planning form instructions 3 48 Broadcast Music Incorporated BMI 3 3 9 5 assigning 3 55 assigning Behind Switch mode 3 57 assigning in Hybrid PBX mode 3 52 assigning in Key mode 3 57 factory assignments 3 57 Issue 1 August 1998 Page IN 3 C Calculating unit loads 2 Call Management System CMS 2 23 2 34 Call by Call Service Selection 3 3 3 36 Calling Groups and dial in trunks 3 16 4 34 and DID trunks 3 42 and Incoming Call Line Identification ICLID 3 4 and Pools 3 16 and Remote Access 3 19 and Tie trunks 3 40 interaction with Music on Hold and External Page Port trunks 3 4 Calling groups Calls in Queue alarm threshold 4 35 extension number 4 33 Extension Status 4 32 4 44 external alert for 4 36 Hunt type 4 35 MERLIN LEGEND Mail 4 33 Message Waiting receiver 4 35 names 4 33 options 4 35 overflow coverage 4 39 overflow threshold 4 36 overflow time threshold 4 40 overview 4 32 types 4 40 Calling Restrictions 5 37 Calling restrictions 5 35 5 37 overview 4 5 4 53 Calls in Queue alarm threshold 4 35 Calls in Queue alert 4 20 Camp On 4 43 C
216. PURO Auto Line Selection Q Other Button Diagram See Master Extnsions Optional Features Auto Callback Q Off Q On Call Waiting Q Off Q On Coverage Inside Q Off Orig Only a n SA Icom Cover Ring Delay Primary Cover Ring Delay Voice 2Rings SA Icom a rings 1 6 Ring Secondary Cover Ring Delay 2Rings Note Lines 1 through 8 only default on a telephone when Q rings 1 6 the system is in Key mode Group Coverage Ring Delay Q 3 Rings Q rings 1 9 Factory Setting Form 5c 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 5d Queued Call Console QCC Make a copy of this form for each console Logical ID Extension No Person or Location Adjuncts Button Diagram Q Direct Station Selector Q Number 1 or 2 Headset Hearing impaired handset N 2 2 C Noisy environment o tc Message Center Operator 2 w amp 5 i a2 amp G2 2 a Yes a B Q 9 ow 8 Lo a 7 z lt gt N 2 E
217. Page D 5 SDSC also evaluates the complexity of the facility configuration requested Examples of complex configurations are connections into PBX networking applications connections to multiplexing arrangements or applications that involve customer engineering or design SDSC then does one of the following m order is considered complex SDSC directs you to the Business Communications System BCS National Engineering Center NEC m If SDSC notifies you that the order s configuration is not complex Tier Ill General Business System GBS National Technical Service Center NTSC is authorized to approve the configuration The NTSC group s preauthorization review is based in part on information you provide to them Specifically you must send them the following m A copy ofthe planner m Acompleted Non Complex Configuration sheet pages 5 through 10 of the Planner for each 100D module you plan to install Complete one Non Complex Configuration page pages 5 through 10 for each 100D module Label the top right corner of the copies Page 1 of 1 2 or 3 On each page 1 Write the module number 1 2 or 3 Indicate the total number of 100D modules maximum of 3 for each system Fill in the control unit slot number refer to page 1 of In the Services section a Check the box next to each emulated trunk or service that will be connected Check only those services allowed on the type of service T1 AT amp T Toll
218. Privileges Control Unit Assembly 1 System Planning and Operating Conditions System Component 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks Numbering 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers Incoming Line Trunk 3a Incoming Trunks Remote Access Connections 3b Incoming Trunks DS1 Connectivity 100D Module 3c Incoming Trunks Tie Continued on next page MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 B System Forms Issue 1 August 1998 Page B 2 Table B 1 System Forms Continued Used for Planning Form No Form Title Incoming Line Trunk 3d Incoming Trunks DID Connections Continued 3e Automatic Route Selection Worksheet 3f Automatic Route Selection Tables 3g Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Numbers Tables 3h LS ID Delay 3i Incoming Trunks BRI Options 4a Extension Copy Analog Multiline Telephone Template 4b Analog Multiline Telephone 4c Extension Copy MLX Telephone Template 4d MLX Telephone 4e MFM Adjunct MLX Telephone 4f Tip Ring Equipment 5a Direct Line Console DLC Analog 5b Direct Line Console DLC Digital 5c MFM Adjunct DLC 5d Queued Call Console QCC Features for Operators 6a Optional Operator Features Features for User Groups 6b Optional Extension Features 6c Principal User of Personal Line Featur
219. Program Restore on Version Backupfrom 10 11 2 0 2 1 3 0 31 40 4 1 4 2 50 6 0 6 1 1 13 1 0 yes 1 16 1 0 yes 2 09 1 0 yes yes yes no no no no no no no 2 16 1 0 yes yes yes no no no no no no no 3 18 1 0 yes yes yes yes yes no no no no no 4 15 1 0 yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no no 4 25 1 0 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no 5 15 1 0 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no 6 15 1 0 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no 6 25 1 0 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 1 16 1 1 no no no no no no no no no 2 09 1 1 no yes yes no no no no no no no 2 16 1 1 no yes no no no no no no no 3 18 1 1 no yes yes yes yes no no no no no 4 15 1 1 no yes yes yes yes no no no no 4 25 1 1 no yes yes yes yes yes no no no 5 15 1 1 no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no 6 15 1 1 no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no 6 25 1 1 no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 2 09 2 0 no yes no no no no no no 2 16 2 0 no no no no no no no no no 3 18 2 0 no no yes yes yes no no no no no 4 15 2 0 no no yes yes yes no no no no 4 25 2 0 no no yes yes yes yes yes no no no 5 15 2
220. R is available when a calling group call arrives the call is not sent to a delay announcement extension Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding can be used in all system modes of operation to send outside calls to a remote telephone number or another Centrex station In this context the term outside calls refers to calls from outside the communications system which may originate at extensions in the Centrex system but not connected to the local MERLIN LEGEND Communications System An outside call that uses this feature is defined as a call that arrives on an analog Centrex loop start line at the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System It may arrive directly or be transferred without consultation or without transfer supervision in the case of an automated attendant The forwarding call to the outside number is made on the same line trunk on which the call arrived conserving system facilities The following considerations and rules apply Only outside Centrex calls are forwarded using this feature m The system must be equipped with analog loop start Centrex lines and all loop start lines in the system must be Centrex facilities Loop start lines do not have to provide reliable disconnect for use by the Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding feature m transfer calls outside the Centrex system the organization must subscribe to a Centrex trunk to trunk transfer feature Activati
221. Ringing Source Digital PBX Channel Service Testing Service O AT amp T Oo If a CSU other than those listed above is used Lucent Technologies will not accept the responsibility for its installation connection or testing Echo Control Device not used MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 F Unit Load Calculation Page F 1 Unit Load Calculation A unit load is a measure of power 1 9 watts used to determine the electrical load that the following components have on each carrier s power supply Telephones Adjuncts Only the telephones and adjuncts that connect to the analog and digital ports on the control unit require unit load calculation Do not include any equipment with its own power supply in the unit load calculation m Direct Inward Dial DID modules Unit load and power requirements for a new system are computed automatically when the equipment for the system is initially ordered These calculations are based on the assumption that each module is fully utilized that is all jacks are used It may be useful to obtain more accurate calculations for example if the modules are not fully utilized if there is a change in the equipment or if you suspect that a particular carrier has more unit loads than the power supply can handle You can calculate the actual unit load using the worksheet and instructions in this appendix MERLIN LEGENDCommunic
222. S MERLIN LEGEND Networking DESIGN CENTER FAX 303 850 8932 CUSTOMER INFORMATION Name Address City ST Zip LDN if multiple ILs are involved list others below in Scope of Work Cust Contact Name Cust Contact Tel No Mark if Customer Permission for Switch Access has been granted MBO Project No Project Manager Tel No ACCOUNT TEAM INFORMATION Name Title Address City ST Zip Tel No FAX e mail id MBO Code to be Charged if multiple MBO Codes are to be charged list below in Scope of Work Alternate Contact Title Tel No PRE CONTRACT OR POST CONTRACT ATTOMS DOSS Ref No s Please list model and version of ALL Products Switches and Adjuncts both existing and or proposed Also specify the number of nodes in an existing and or proposed network plus hardware connectivity digital analog and attach diagram O New L1 Add Scope of Work O Upgrade RFP Controlled Introduction Written Response Verbal Response Requested Due Date for Technical Assurance Requested Due Date for Floorplans for Specifications other Deliverables MOJ Date Cutover Date MERLIN LEGEND R6 DESIGN IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE Network Map In the space provided below please provide a drawing of your network configuration For ease of
223. System Planning 2a 2a 2a 2a 2a 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks 2b 2b 2b 2b 2b 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts 2c 2c 2c 2c 2c 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks 2d 2d 2d 2d 2d 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers 2e 1 0 form Technician s Run Sheet now included on Form 2c 3a 3a 3a 3a Incoming Trunks Remote Access 3b 1 0 form Incoming Trunks Pools now included on Form 2a 3c 3b 3b 3b 3b 3b Incoming Trunks DS1 Connectivity 100D Module 3d 3c 3c 3c 3c 3c Incoming Trunks Tie 3e 3d 3d 3d 3d 3d Incoming Trunks DID 3e 3e 3e 3e Automatic Route Selection Worksheet 3f 3f 3f 3f Automatic Route Selection Tables 3g 3g 3g 3g Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Numbers Tables 3h 3h 3h 3h 15 Delay 3i 3i 3i Incoming Trunks BRI Options 800 NI BRI Module 4a 4a 4a 4a 4a Extension Copy Analog Multiline Telephone Template 4a 4b 4b 4b 4b 4b Analog Multiline Telephone 4c 4c 4c 4c 4 Extension Copy MLX Telephone Template 4b 4d 4d 4d 4d 4d MLX Telephone 4b 4e 4e 4e 4e 4e MFM Adjunct MLX Telephone 4c 4 4f df 4f 4f Tip Ring Equipment 5a 5a 5a 5a Direct Line Console DLC Analog 5b 5b 5b 5b 5b 5b Direct Line Console DLC Digital 5b 5c 5c 5c 5c 5c MFM Adjunct DLC 5c 5d 5d 5d 5d Queued Call Console QCC Continued on next page MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 7 Upgrading Release 6 1 Forms August 1998 Page 7 6
224. System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 45 MLH service may be configured in either a linear or circular pattern Current testing of the MERLIN LEGEND system with the CO switches supports linear hunting on a Lucent Technologies 5ESS switch and circular hunting on the Northern Telecom DMS 100 and Siemens SSC EWSD switches Other configurations are possible but they are not guaranteed to work with the MERLIN LEGEND system The Service Profile consists of the following m A Service Profile Identifier which is a unique identifier used by the CO to associate an ISDN terminal with a Service Profile m Directory Number DN for each BRI line B channel This DN is usually the local phone number that was assigned by the service provider m If MLH service is not subscribed only one call to a particular DN will be accepted at any given time and any station with the line appearance of the BRI line will alert If MLH is subscribed the CO will automatically hunt for the next available B channel within the hunt group and deliver multiple calls to the same DN If all B channels are in use subsequent calls to the same DN will receive standard CO treatment such as busy tone Optional features Calling Party Number Billing Number CPN BN can also be ordered at subscription time The local telephone company normally provides two SPIDs and DNs for each BRI line also called a D
225. TR Figure 5 6 Personal and Group Video Connections MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Planning Overview Page 5 19 Planning Overview By using the procedures earlier in this book you should have already reserved the following m Trunk jacks for outside lines trunks m Extension jacks for voice telephone users m Extension jacks for either Analog multiline telephones with a modem data station connected to a General Purpose Adapter GPA telephones with either a modem data station connected using an MFM or a digital data station connected using an ISDN terminal adapter Digital data video equipment such as G4 FAX and personal or group video systems connected either directly to an MLX port or connected to an MLX port by way of an ISDN terminal adapter Forms Needed Whether you are planning data options for a new system or modifying an existing System you record data communications planning information by making additional entries on forms already completed earlier in this book and on the appropriate data forms shown in Table 5 2 Duplicate the master data forms in Appendix C Data Forms and work on the copies Use the forms listed in Table 5 3 needed See application note MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Modem Pooling for details gt NOTE Behind Switch mode is not included in these instructions It
226. TS 144 YN LEN HOST 01 1 10 02 ISG 0 DCH 1 ISG BRA Channel 21 CARCODE BX27AA PADGRP NPDGP PM NODE NUMBER 32 PM TERMINAL NUMBER 323 TEI LTID CSPSBCH ISG Bd DYNAMIC PSATS 142 DYNAMIC PSATS 145 X LEN HOST 01007 01 ISG 0 DCH 1 ISG BRA Channel 24 CARCODE BX27AA PADGRP NPDGP PM NODE NUMBER 31 PM TERMINAL NUMBER 226 TEI LTID CSPSBCH ISG Bd DYNAMIC PSATS 143 X DYNAMIC PSATS 146 Y STOP2 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations Page H 30 Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations For the Siemens SSC EWSD switch Capability Package 5 includes alternate voice circuit switched data on two B channels It also supports Calling Number Identification on data and voice connections Please note that the assignment of two Directory Numbers DNs is required for this package The Siemens SSC EWSD switch allows either voice or data hunting on one DN using the Series Completion feature The same provisioning is used for either a voice or data series completion group ISDN Capability Package S The information listed below provides the DN translations that define Capability Package 5 and the screens and fields that must be populated The information provided shows the translations for one DSL and two DNs For multiple DSLs DNs the CO will duplicate these screens and en
227. The system recognizes this module as an 012 module Therefore even though the OPT module has only 8 physical jacks it uses 12 ports of capacity An extension number is assigned to each of the 8 physical jacks This section contains instructions for calculating the system s extension capacity according to the number of certain module types Planning Form Instructions 1 In the table under the Extension Capacity section of Form 1 fill in the number of each type of extension module on the appropriate line of the Number of Modules column m Each 100D module is assigned 24 logical IDs even though the module has only 1 physical trunk jack m Each 800 NI BRI module is assigned 2 logical IDs per physical trunk jack for a total of 16 logical IDs Add the column and record the result at the bottom of the column System Totals line For each module multiply the value in the Number of Modules column by the value in the Physical Jacks per Module column and record the results on the appropriate line in the Physical Jacks by Module Type column Add the column and record the results at the bottom of the column System Totals MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Planning Module Placement Page 2 4 5 determine the number of extensions assigned for each module type multiply the value in the Physical Jacks by Module Type column by the value i
228. Total Hybrid PBX Equipment or Modified Key Network Access Lines DID 1 0 0 0 DS1 0 0 0 0 NI 1 BRI 0 0 0 0 GS LS 0 0 0 0 Tie 1 4 1 4 Telephones MLX 5 0 9 1 2 MLX 5D 0 9 1 2 MLX 10 0 9 1 2 MLX 10D 0 9 1 2 MLX 10DP 0 9 1 2 MLX 16DP 1 5 1 5 MLX 28D 1 2 1 7 MLX 20L 1 1 1 6 BIS 10 0 9 1 1 BIS 22 1 0 1 3 BIS 22D 1 0 1 3 BIS 34 1 1 1 5 BIS 34D 1 1 1 5 MLC 5 0 0 0 0 MDC 9000 0 0 0 0 MDW 9000 0 0 0 0 10 Button Basic 0 9 1 1 10 Button HFAI 1 0 1 2 34 Button Basic 0 9 1 1 34 Button DLX 1 2 1 7 34 Button BIS 1 2 1 4 34 Button BIS DIS 1 2 1 4 Single Line Telephone 0 6 0 7 Optional Equipmentt Direct Station Selectort 0 7 0 9 General Purpose Adapter 0 8 1 0 Hands Free Unit 0 8 1 0 Headset Adapter 0 8 1 0 EICON board 0 0 0 0 Total Actual Unit Load Unitloads are computed for each trunk for trunk type network access lines T TheMFM has its own wall power unit located at the telephone and therefore is not added to the unit load calculation t Uptotwo DSSs one DSS for each MLX 28D or MLX 20L can be powered from each control unit carrier For example a three carrier system can have six system operator positions each with one DSS powered from the control unit MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 F Unit Load Calculation Unit Load Worksheet Page F 6 7 Try to exchange modules between carriers to reduce the unit loads to 75 if a 391C1 or 391A3 power supply is installed
229. URB Cannot be changed OUT TO LUNCH AT HOME OUT SICK IN A MEETING IN CONFERENCE WITH A CLIENT WITH A CUSTOMER AWAY FROM DESK OUT ALL DAY 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 e Form 10a 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee T GOT uuo Name Display Code 11 characters maximum Telephone Number 40 digits maximum Factory Setting If you select No display this indicates a Marked System Speed Dial number which can override calling restrictions poods 45 T O asvapoy waysks suongorunumuo sCINHOST NITIAN 2 407 uoy Dial Name Code 11 characters maximum Telephone Number 40 digits maximum Factory Setting If you select No display this indicates a Marked System Speed Dial number which can override calling restrictions 401 1 0 asvapoy waysks suongorunumuo
230. X If the system will be connected behind a larger system or a Centrex system check Behind Switch and record the host s dial codes for the Transfer Conference and Drop features so users can access these features on the larger system If you check Permanent Key the switch in the back of the processor module must be placed in the Permanent Key position The switch cannot be changed without changing the FCC registration of the system MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Recording System Operating Conditions Page 2 9 Language Selection In Release 1 1 and later versions of the system language specific operation is available in English French and Spanish The language selection affects prompts and displays on user telephones SPM system programming displays SMDR records and printed reports This feature works as follows m The MLX 10D MLX 20L and MLX 28D display telephones and the MLX 10 nondisplay telephones are available in three separate versions each with the factory set buttons in the language of choice m The system can be programmed to operate in one of the languages but an individual with an MLX telephone can override the system language by selecting any one of the three languages for his or her own telephone This section describes how to record the selected language for the system and if desired to set a different language fo
231. a Direct Line Console DLC Digital Make a copy of this form for each console Logical ID Extension No Person or Location Copied from Master Ext No Console Model Voice Announced Calls Q MLX 20L one Q MLX 28D Q off Adjuncts Coverage Inside Q Direct Station Selector Q Off Number 1 or 2 One Q Multi Function Module MFM Extension No Cover Ring Delay FAX machine Primary Cover Ring Delay Q Answering machine Q 2hRings Q Data terminal Q rings 1 6 Q Al i t ee Secondary Cover Ring Delay Q 2Rings Q Other 9 Headset Q _rings 1 6 Q Hearing impaired handset Group Coverage Ring Delay Q 3 Rings Q Noisy environment a rings 1 9 Personal Lines Centralized Programming Requirements Assign Service Observing Button Auto Line Selection Optional Features Abbreviated Ring Off one Auto Callback Q Off Q On Call Waiting O Off Q On Factory Setting Refer td Form 11 assign as a Service Observer Form 5b 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 5b Continued E c Button Diagram Q See Master Extension 28
232. a service must be entered In the Service cell write one of the following m AT amp T Toll for AESS or 5ESS see page 1 Megacom WATS Megacom 800 ACCUNET SDS Software Defined Network SDN MultiQuest and Long Distance m 5ESS Local For switch type 5ESS see Form 3b page 1 OUTWATS 56 64 Digital Virtual Private Network and INWATS m MCI Toll for DMS 250 or DEX600E see Form 3b page 1 MCI Prism MCI VNet MCI 800 and MCI 900 m DMS 100 Local for a DMS 100 3b page 1 DMS Private Network DMS INWATS Inward Wide Area Tele phone Service DMS OUTWATS Outward Wide Area Tele phone Service DMS FX Foreign Exchange DMS Tie Trunk m Other Call by Call Other b Inthe Pattern to Match cell write the exact pattern to match if you have more than one block of incoming numbers If you want to match any pattern leave it blank MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 36 5 c Inthe Total Digits in Dialed Number cell write the total number of digits 0 14 expected in the dialed number 0 is a wildcard that is match any number Contact the service provider for the appropriate number d After the match has been made do one of the following to enable the system to determine where to direct the call m To delete digits write the number of digits to delete 0 14 The system del
233. ables default FRL is 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3f Continued mm ee Table No Type of Table 6 Digit Q Area Code Q Exchange Q 1 7 dialing from Q within area code Q not within area code Area Code Exchanges 001 021 041 061 081 002 022 042 062 082 003 023 043 063 083 004 024 044 064 084 005 025 045 065 085 006 026 046 066 086 007 027 047 067 087 008 028 048 068 088 009 029 049 069 089 010 030 050 070 090 __ Ol 95 uu Oyi e 091 012 032 052 072 092 013 033 053 073 093 014 034 _ O54 __ 094 015 035 055 075 095 016 036 056 076 096 017 037 057 077 097 018 038 058 078 098 019 039 059 079 099 020 040 060 080 100 Subpattern Time of Day Subpattern B Time of Day Other Call Typet Other Call Typet Digits Both Digits Both Factory Setting Select Voice only Data only or Both Local tables default FRL is 2 Form 3f 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3g UEUUUUUUUUUU Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Numbers Tables Table 17 Default Toll Table Subpattern A Time of Day Subpattern B Time of Day Other Other Call Typet Digits Absorb Digits Both Table 18 Default Local Table Subpattern A Time of Day Subpattern B Time of Day Other Call Typet Other Call Typet Digits Absorb Both Digits Both Table 19 Dial 0 Table
234. actory setting m 650 ms m sec Interdigit Timers Rotary Programming for interdigit timers is reserved for Lucent Technologies technical support personnel or authorized dealers Interdigit timers are used by the MERLIN LEGEND system to determine when a user originating an outside call has completed dialing the digits The information is necessary to allow the system to perform subsequent operations You should not change the factory settings for interdigit timers unless instructed to do so by Lucent Technologies technical support or by an authorized dealer This section contains instructions for designating whether dialed digits on rotary dial lines trunks are sent one by one as they are dialed or are stored and sent when dialing is completed Planning Form Instructions Under the Rotary heading on Form 8a check one of the following m store digits and send them when dialing is completed check the Delay factory setting box m To send digits out as they are dialed check the No Delay box MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 50 Allowed Lists A SecurityA lert If you assign 0 zero as the first digit for any entry an Allowed List any toll restrictions assigned for calls to numbers that can be placed by local or toll operators are removed Use the instructions in this section and the next Disallowed Lists
235. age MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 14 Planning Form Instructions 1 On page 1 of Form 4a and or Form 4c write the extension number of the Master Extension and the extensions to which this template will be copied 2 Complete the Button Diagram on page 2 of Form 4a and or Form 4c assigning features to the buttons 3 On the individual telephone forms Forms 4b 4d 4e 5a 5b and 5c do the following a Bythe extension information at the top of each page check Copied from Master Extension No and write the extension number of the Master Extension b Under every form s Button Diagram heading check the See Master Extension box Cover Ring Delay Beginning with Release 4 1 the following ring delay options can be programmed for extensions m The Group Coverage Ring Delay is programmed on individual sender extensions and replaces the Coverage Delay Interval programmed on a systemwide basis in previous releases m When used in conjunction with Secondary Cover buttons consider the following when setting the value When secondary cover buttons are programmed for a sender set the value such that when the Group Coverage Ring Delay is added to the Primary Cover Ring Delay the result is greater than the Secondary Ring Delay plus two rings the fixed Secondary Cover Delay Interval m The Primary Cover Ring Delay
236. ained from the communications system through the PCMCIA interface slot on the processor module Adjunct that allows users to receive store and use information provided by Caller ID A voice messaging system that provides automated attendant call answering and voice mail services It is housed in its own module A voice messaging system that provides automated attendant call answering and voice mail services No longer available A voice messaging system housed in a PC that connects to tip ring ports on the system s modules Messaging 2000 provides voice mail automated attendant call answering and fax messaging Multi Function Module Adapter that has a tip ring mode for answering machines modems fax machines and tip ring alerts and SAA mode for 48 VDC alerts It is installed inside an MLX telephone and is used to connect optional equipment to the telephone The optional equipment and the telephone operate simultaneously and independently MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Glossary MLX telephone mode codes modem modem data station modem pool module monitored extension Multi Function Page GL 19 A multiline button telephone that transmits and receives digital signals Streams of touch tone codes used by voice messaging applications to communicate with the system s control unit Device that converts digital data signals t
237. ake a toll call provides a sample of a completed ARS worksheet Planning Form Instructions 1 Review Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks for the types of lines trunks available Record the number of exchanges in the local calling area in the blank at the top of Form 3e Automatic Route Selection Worksheet If you are not sure how many exchanges there are consult the telephone directory Enter the number of each of the trunk pools factory setting is 70 and 890 899 in the Trunk Pool No column Some trunk pools such as in state WATS trunk pools can be used for both toll and local calls Note that with ARS a local call is any call that doesn t require dialing a 1 If you expect people to use a particular trunk pool for both toll and local calls enter the number of that trunk pool in the worksheet twice and note the reason For each trunk pool number entered a Inthe Trunk Type column record the type of trunk local FX network regional WATS and so on that is in the pool b Underthe Type of Dial heading check the appropriate column Local Toll or Network for the type of call that should be dialed on each trunk pool m Toll Any call that has a series of digits beginning with a 1 followed by an exchange or area code m Local Any call that is not a toll call This includes the seven digit dialed numbers required in most areas m Network Any call that will be routed to a non local switch c
238. al Line MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 8 3 If Remote Call Forwarding is enabled do one of the following m f you wish to disable the Forwarding Delay option enter in the Delay 0 9 column under the Remote Call Forwarding heading on Form 6b This causes incoming calls to be forwarded immediately m If wish to enable the Forwarding Delay option for an extension enter the number of times an incoming call should ring at the called extension 1 9 rings before the incoming call is forwarded gt NOTES 1 If Do Not Disturb DND and Forwarding Delay are both active DND overrides the Forwarding Delay and the call is forwarded immediately 2 Due to the timing of when the ringing signal is applied to a single line telephone and the interval of that ringing signal single line telephones may appear to have their calls forwarded one ring sooner than the programmed number Fax Message Waiting Receiver Use these instructions only when the system has fax machines connected directly to the control unit by way of an 008 OPT 016 T R or 012 T R module or connected to an MLX telephone using a Multi Function Module MFM Otherwise skip to the next section Operator Features Fax machines cannot use General Purpose Adapters GPAs because they cannot auto dial through the GPA This section contains instru
239. and Secondary Cover Ring Delay are programmed on individual sender extensions and replace the Delay Ring Interval programmed on a systemwide basis Forms Needed m Form 4b Analog Multiline Telephone m Form 4d MLX Telephone m Form 4e MFM Adjunct MLX Telephone m Form 4f Tip Ring Equipment m Form 5a Direct Line Console DLC Analog m Form 5b Direct Line Console DLC Digital m Form 5c MFM Agjunct DLC m Form 7c Group Coverage MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 15 Planning Form Instructions 1 After assigning Individual Coverage for each receiver telephone locate the appropriate form for each sender telephone Form 4b 4d 4f 5a or 5b 2 Under the Primary Cover Ring Delay heading do one of the following m Tokeep the factory set delay check the 2 rings box m To change the factory set delay check the second box and write the number of rings 1 6 in the space provided 3 Under the Secondary Cover Ring Delay heading do one of the following m To keep the factory set delay check the 2 rings box m To change the factory set delay check the second box and write the number of rings 1 6 in the space provided 4 After assigning senders to Group Coverage on form 7c locate the appropriate form for each sender telephone Form 4b 4d 4f 5a or 5b 5 Under the Group Coverage Ring Delay headin
240. and is programmed only via Centralized Telephone Programming 3 Any station except QCC or CTI link may be a group member 4 f a station becomes QCC or CTI link it is removed from all Service Observing groups 5 A Service Observer may be a member of another Service Observing group Any station may be a member of more than one Service Observing group 6 The Service Observer and all extensions in a Service Observing group must be on the local switch 7 Data video page and reminder service calls and calls at VMI ports and delay announcement devices cannot be observed Forms Needed Form 4d MLX Telephone m Form 5b Direct Line Console DLC Digital m Form 11 Service Observing Group Assignment MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 17 Planning Form Instructions Determine which stations will be assigned as Service Observers and complete the following on page 1 of Form 4d and 5b In the Centralized Programming Requirements section check the Assign Service Observing Button box for each MLX telephone that will have a Service Observing button assigned Any station with a programmed Service Observing button may be assigned as an Observer station Determine the number of Service Observing groups needed Then for each group complete the following on Form 11 1 2 Write the group number in the Group No
241. ant from one another also resulting in toll savings Service Cost Savings In addition to toll call saving there are two ways that organizations can save on service costs incurred from telecommunications providers that provide public switched telephone network access You order a point to point T1 facility from a service provider then use system programming to set it up for PRI signalling As necessary a service provider can provide amplification on the T1 facility but does not supply switching services You can tailor your use of PRI B channels with drop and insert equipment that allows fractional use of B channels for dedicated data video communications between systems at speeds greater than 64kbps per channel or 128 kbps for 2B data while keeping the remaining B channels for PRI voice traffic The PRI D channel must remain active You can tailor use of T1 channels to support both T1 emulated tandem tie service and T1 Switched 56 service for data communications at 56 kbps per channel allowing 2B data transfers at 112 kbps You can also use drop and insert equipment to provide fractional T1 use MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 6 0 Enhancements February 1998 Page xix m Voice Mail and Auto Attendant Networked systems should have their own local voice mail and or auto attendant applications as well as the
242. apacity lines trunks 2 2 Centralized programming 4 2 Centralized Voice Mail 2 32 CentreVu Computer Telephony Services for Windows NT 2 26 2 28 Centrex 3 3 Channel service unit CSU 3 27 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Index Class of restriction COR with barrier codes 3 22 without barrier codes 3 21 Clock synchronization 0 800 NI BRI and 100D module interaction 3 46 NI 1 BRI service 3 46 px planning considerations 3 46 Primary Rate Interface PRI 3 32 T1 service 3 26 Computer Telephony Integration CTI link 1 6 2 28 Consoles system 2 11 Control unit configuration planning 2 1 2 36 diagram 2 6 extension capacity 2 3 line trunk capacity 2 2 module placement 2 1 2 4 operating conditions 2 7 CONVERSANT 2 31 Conversion requirements for restore 7 4 Cover Ring Delay 4 14 0 0 Coverage 2 16 AUDIX Voice Power Fax Attendant System 4 31 Cover button 4 31 delay interval 4 30 group 4 30 Group Cover button 4 31 Group Coverage calls 4 31 Individual Coverage 4 28 overview 4 28 St primary 4 29 receivers 4 28 4 29 secondary 4 29 senders 4 28 Coverage delay interval 4 30 Coverage VMS 4 56 Issue 1 August 1998 Page IN 4 D Data communications equipment 5 3 Data forms 1 Data Hunt Group 5 4 Data stations 5 3 analog voice and modem data 5 8 buttons in Hybrid PBX mode 5 31 calling restriction
243. apply to calling groups that are programmed as Auto Login or Auto Logout type The SMDR and MERLIN LEGEND Reporter features listed are administrable TALK Field For Auto Login and Auto Logout calling groups the TALK field records the amount of time a calling group agent spends on call DUR DURATION Field For Auto Login and Auto Logout calling groups call timing begins when a call arrives at MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and not after a preset number of seconds Call timing ends when the call is disconnected either the caller or the agent hangs up This allows the system manager to determine how long a caller waited for an agent s attention Coding of Calls on Reports An asterisk appears in the call record when a A call is not answered by an Auto Login or Auto Logout calling group agent and is abandoned while waiting for an agent b Thecallis answered by someone not a member of an Auto Login or Auto Logout calling group An exclamation point signals that an Auto Login or Auto Logout agent handled a call that was answered by someone who was not a member of that Auto Login or Auto Logout with Overflow group An ampersand amp in the call record indicates that the group s overflow receiver answered the call MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 4 2 Enhancements June 1997 Page xxix MERLIN LEGEND
244. appropriate button For ISDN terminal adapter data stations include the line trunk number 2 Ifyou want to assign a pool to the data station write Fool and the pool s extension number from Form 2c on the appropriate button gt NOTE On modem data stations from which the user does not need to make inside calls you can assign only personal lines or pools when going off hook the user or equipment gets a telephone company line trunk by Automatic Line Selection Assigning Line Buttons in Key Mode There are two kinds of line buttons you can assign to data stations used to make and receive data calls m Intercom Ring Used to make and receive inside data calls only m Outside Line Trunk Used to make and receive outside data calls on a specific outside line trunk An outside line trunk can be assigned to a line button on one or more data stations or voice extensions To dedicate an outside line trunk for data calls and have the calls automatically answered at a data station do not assign the same outside line trunk to data stations and to telephones because modems answer voice calls as data calls For digital data stations the outside line trunk can be used to make and receive outside data calls For an outgoing call the user dials the line number 801 880 to select the line trunk MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Lines Trunks to
245. arding Setup Space determine if you want to accept the files as Setup Space or not Power down the system 5 Ifthe system already has a processor module with a PCMCIA memory card slot installed proceed to Step 6 Otherwise install a new processor module in Slot 0 then continue this procedure with Step 7 6 If anew processor module was installed in Step 5 go to Step 7 Otherwise insert a Release 6 1 forced installation memory card into the PCMCIA memory card slot on the processor module 7 Power up the system If the Release 6 1 forced installation card was inserted in Step 6 a frigid start will occur 8 Restore the system programming 9 Program new features For more detailed information and procedures including error conditions and recovery as well as procedures for translation conversion see Maintenance and Troubleshooting System Programming and Maintenance and System Programming MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 7 Upgrading Upgrading to Release 6 1 Compatibility It is important to understand the compatibility between files created on each of the Issue 1 August 1998 Page 7 3 different versions of SPM not only for upgrading but also for programming Table 7 1 summarizes programming compatibility It is assumed that the majority of the programming is done in surrogate mode and backed up on disk Table 7 1 Programming Compatibility SPM
246. are reserved for equipment changes or maintenance A Lucent Technologies representative or authorized dealer computes these values manually MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Planning Module Placement Page 2 5 1 On the Control Unit Diagram of Form 1 page 2 record the type of module to be installed in each slot by writing the module name for example OO amp MLX on the slanted lines at the top of each slot Use the following guidelines m Indicate the power supply module in the far left slot of each carrier m Indicate the processor module in Slot 00 of the basic carrier m Indicate line trunk and extension modules in any order in Slots 01 through 17 with the following conditions Group the modules in each carrier from left to right with no empty slots between modules The system does not recognize modules in slots that follow an empty slot slots to the right of the last module can be left empty Hybrid PBX mode only If the system includes Queued Call Console QCC the first line trunk and or extension module must be a 408 GS LS MLX or 008 MLX module All modes Current 012 T R 008 OPT and 016 T R modules have built in ring generators and are compatible with earlier releases The 012 T R module 51 7J13 28 has a ring equivalency number REN of 2 2 and rings only four ports at a time although eight jacks can
247. arger groups of people to communicate with another group at a different location Personal Videoconferencing A personal videoconferencing system typically consists of a video camera and an audio unit connected to a PC The PC connects directly to any available MLX port on a 408 MLX or 008 MLX module by way of a BRI interface card gt NOTE When using the 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module for data or video you must use Version 28 of the module The MLX port must be configured as a 2B Data port in order to provide the necessary high speed data connection needed to support video applications The network facilities used by the endpoint connected to the MLX port may be PRI T1 Switched 56 both provided by the 100D module or NI 1 BRI provided by the 800 NI BRI module facilities gt NOTE Some applications also provide data and application sharing and transfer capabilities video collaboration in addition to video conferencing This configuration in which the personal video system is the only device connected to the MLX port is called the Standalone configuration Some personal video systems also offer the capability to support a Passive Bus configuration See Figure 5 6 on page 18 for a sample connection diagram MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications About Data and Video Communications Page 5 17 Group Videoconferencing A group videoconf
248. ary announcement can either repeat or play only once after which the caller hears ringback or Music On Hold according to the rules outlined above The primary and secondary announcement options when used together allow the system manager to issue an initial message to callers followed by a repeating announcement that for example urges the caller to stay on the line and wait for a calling group member The external alert designated as a calls in queue alarm can be any alerting device connected through an MFM in the External Alert mode for MLX telephones That alert is tied to the third threshold value The alert stays on as long as the threshold is exceeded Only one external alert can be designated for each calling group Since the signal is continuous you should only use lighted external alerting devices An alert connected to a Supplemental Alert Adapter for an analog multiline telephone should not be used as a calls in queue alarm The Overflow Threshold determines the maximum number of calls 1 99 waiting in the calling group queue before being sent to the Overflow receiver The Overflow Threshold Time determines the maximum amount of time that any call waits in the queue before being sent to the Overflow receiver The Overflow Threshold should be set to a number larger than the third Calls in Queue Alarm Threshold to ensure that the Calls in Queue Alarm will alert before calls are sent MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue
249. associated with the pattern c Inthe Type of No cell indicate whether the pattern is for calling National or International 1 d delete digits write the number of digits to delete 0 4 The system deletes from the first digit forward For all call by call B channel groups to route all outgoing calls over a call by call B channel group you must program the Call by Call Service Table to direct the system to properly route calls Record table entries maximum 10 on Form 3b page 8 a Inthe Pattern to Match cell write the dial pattern to match up to 8 digits No wildcards are permitted MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 37 b Inthe Call Type cell indicate the type s of calls that will be associated with the pattern by doing one of the following m If all outgoing calls will be voice calls for example Megacom WATS write Voice m If all outgoing calls will be data only for example ACCUNET write Data m If outgoing calls may be either voice or data for example SDN write Both gt NOTE If you indicate Both make sure the service can support both voice and data calls c Inthe Service cell write one of the following m AT amp T Toll for 4ESS or 5ESS see page 1 Megacom WATS Megacom 800 ACCUNET 505 Software Defined Network SDN MultiQuest and Long Distance m 5ESS
250. at arrive on line buttons other than SA buttons and or calls that are answered manually at the telephone rather than by the application Screen pop can occur on incoming calls from the following sources m Calling group distribution m ISDN PRI Routing by Dial Plan m An extension on the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System m Remote access gt NOTE In the case of remote access calls the only information that the application can collect about the caller is the remote telephone number m Atransfer of a call that was answered by a voice response unit m Atransfer redirection or conference of a call that was answered at a DLC or ata QCC gt NOTES 1 DLCs Direct Line Consoles may use CTI applications If they do they perform the same way as other extensions A DLC assigned to use a CTI link application is a monitored DLC When a DLC is used as a regular operator console and not using a CTI link extension it is non monitored Calls to a QCC or non monitored DLC do not initiate screen pop at the operator position but when an operator directs a call to an extension using a CTI application caller information does initiate screen pop If the DLC is non monitored screen pops can occur after the DLC releases the call Calls transferred from Cover buttons on non monitored DLCs do not initiate screen pop at the destination extension MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior
251. ations System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 F Unit Load Calculation Unit Load Rules Page F 2 Unit Load Rules A general rule to follow is that if you can distribute the DID modules and telephone modules equally across the carriers you will prevent unnecessary drain on any one carrier Also depending on the system s mode the rules vary This section provides the rules for calculating unit loads for the different modes Unit Loads for the Hybrid PBX Mode The 391A1 and 391A2 power supplies have a maximum rating of 54 unit loads and generally can support six modules of any type in a system in Hybrid PBX mode without exceeding the 54 unit maximum If however both of the following conditions are true the unit loads on a carrier might exceed the 54 unit maximum m All six carrier slots are occupied by or analog multiline telephone modules m The carrier has a total of more than 45 MLX 20L telephones or 34 button analog multiline telephones installed The 391C1 and 391A3 power supplies have a maximum rating of 75 unit loads If your system contains a 391A1 or 391A2 power supply module and the unit loads for that carrier will exceed 54 a 391C1 power supply should be installed in the system Unit Loads for Key or Behind Switch Mode In a Key or Behind Switch system with four or fewer modules no calculation is needed The power supply generally supports four modules of any type in Key or Behi
252. atures Automatic Callback interval 4 44 Camp On return time 4 43 one touch call handling 442 overview 4 41 Park return time 4 43 transfer audible 4 43 transfer options 4 42 4 43 System numbering adjuncts 2 26 extension jacks 2 14 line trunk jacks 3 2 overview 2 13 plans 2 33 renumbering 2 33 System planning form 1 System Programming and Maintenance SPM console 2 7 software 2 7 System Programming and Maintenance SPM software versions 7 3 7 4 System Speed Dial 4 58 5 36 labels 4 58 Issue 1 August 1998 Page IN 14 T T1 service channel service unit CSU 3 27 clock synchronization 3 26 common services 3 3 digital data transmission 3 24 DS1 connectivity 6 3 framing format 3 25 line coding 3 25 line compensation 3 25 overview 3 24 000 signaling mode 3 25 T1 PRI review 3 38 type of service 3 25 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Index T1 Switched 56 service 3 3 3 24 clock synchronization 3 26 dial plan routing 3 29 direction 3 28 framing format 3 25 incoming signaling mode 3 28 incoming signaling type 3 29 line appearance routing 3 29 line coding 3 25 line compensation 3 25 outgoing signaling mode 3 28 outgoing signaling type 3 29 overview 3 28 signaling mode 3 25 type of service 3 25 GL 26 Telephone buttons assigning 3 52 Direct Line Console DLC 3 62 Hybrid PBX mode 3 52 Key and
253. aximum Exclusion List Telephones not restricted during Night Service All AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant System ports are automatically included in the Exclusion List by Integrated Administration However to keep a record of these you may choose to review Form 2a and for all extensions listed as ports copy the extension number to this list Form 9b 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 9b Continued Exclusion List Telephones not restricted during Night Service Form 9b 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 9c Night Service Options Start Time Stop Time Sunday 0 Monday 1 Tuesday 2 Wednesday 3 Thursday 4 Friday 5 Saturday 6 Hours and minutes in 24 hour military time Note Start time is the END of your business day Stop time is the BEGINNING of your business day Coverage Control Enable Q Disable Factory Setting Form 9c 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 10a Label Form Posted Message Revised Message Message No Default Label 16 characters maximum DO NOT DIST
254. button To make calls on a personal line set the Automatic Line Selection to that line Assigning Pools and Lines Trunks Hybrid PBX Mode Only If you want the voice and data station to make and receive outside calls on a specific trunk pool assign a Pool button To dedicate a specific line trunk or pool to receive outside data calls assign a personal line or pool to a data station or DHG To dedicate specific lines trunks for use in data communications only such as PHI channels or other special data lines consider grouping those lines trunks in a pool MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Lines Trunks to Data and Video Stations Page 5 33 If the system uses ARS follow the instructions on ARS earlier in this book to specify routes for outgoing data calls To restrict non data users from dial access to data trunk pools use the Pool Dial Out Code Hybrid PBX Mode Only Jinstructions later in this chapter Forms Needed m Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks m Data Form 1a Modem Data Station m Data Form 1b ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Station Planning Form Instructions Record your decisions for each data station on the Hybrid PBX Mode Button Diagram of Data Form 1a or 1b 1 Ifyou want to assign personal lines to the data station write Fereonal Line and the telephone number from Form 2c of the outside line on the
255. by Call Service Selection AT amp T Toll only MCI PRISM T Q MCI Vnettt MCI Toll QO MCI 8007 Q MCI 9007 MCI Toll DMS Private QO DMS INWATS DMS Local Q DMS OUTWATS Q DMS FX DMS Local DMS Tie Trunk Digital Service PRI only Required fields for presale 14 55 SESS tt DMS 250 or DEX600 DMS 100 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 T1 PRI Planner continued Page Non Complex Configuration Module of Slot No PRIIdentification Service Will SID ANI be used No Q Yes Incoming calls QO ANI Q SID Both Prefer then Outgoing calls QO ANI SID ANI Privacy Q SID ExtensionBased SID Line Based Channel Service Unit Q Mfr AT amp T Paradyne Model 3150 REG AW2USA 74673 DD E If a CSU other than the one listed AT amp T models is used AT amp T will not accept the responsibility for its installation connection or testing Required fields for presale MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Page of T1 PRI Planner Continued Teer EEO Non Complex Configuration Module of Slot No Services Subscribed To Channels Assigned to Service Ground start T1 only Q Loop start T1 only Q Tie Trunk T1 only Q MultiQuest 900 w wo DNIS 1 or AT amp T Toll Q Megacomt OUTWATS T1 or AT amp T To C Megacom 800
256. c List the receivers for the group in the lower block by doing one of the following gt NOTES 1 If you have not yet created calling groups you must defer naming them as receivers until later 2 If the system includes a voice mail system see that system s documentation for completing the receivers In addition if the system is part of a private network with Centralized Voice Messaging see the Network Reference m Designate a calling group as a receiver by checking the Calling Group box see m Designate the QCC queue as a receiver Hybrid PBX mode only by checking the QCC Queue box and or listing the extension numbers of all receivers maximum of eight 5 On each copy of Forms 4b 4d 5a and 5b that describes a specific receiver a Locate an available button on the Button Diagram b Write Group Cover and the coverage group number in the space available 6 If designating the QCC Queue as a receiver Hybrid PBX mode only on the Group Coverage Calls table on Form 6a page 2 a Write the extension s for the QCC operator position s to receive the calls in the QCC Operator to Receive Calls column see b Write the priority level for each coverage group s calls in the Queue Priority Level column Assign a value of 1 highest through 7 lowest the factory setting is 4 1 No longer orderable MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features
257. c dial out patterns MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 35 d Ifthe group has incoming services assigned do one of the following m If the routing will be Dial Plan Routing Hybrid PBX mode only check Dial Plan Routing m If the routing will be by line appearance check Line Appearance 3 For all B channel groups that are programmed to route calls by line appearance assign a telephone number to each line in the B channel group Record the information on Form 3b page 5 a Write the B channel group numbers and the trunk number s from Form 3b page 3 b Inthe Telephone Number column write the unique inbound routing telephone number the directory number of up to 12 digits furnished by the PRI service provider gt NOTE The factory does not preassign a telephone number The telephone number you assign should be the same sent to the system by the network The number should also be unique within the same B channel group and must be different from the associated test telephone number Test telephone numbers are assigned later in this procedure 4 B channel groups you plan to assign to Dial Plan Routing you must program the Dial Plan Routing table to direct the system to properly route calls Record table entries maximum 16 entries on Form 3b page 6 a Forthe entry to be activated
258. cations System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 20 3 Under the Automatic Callback heading at the top of Form 3a check one of the following m If you do not want remote callers to use the Automatic Callback feature check Disable factory setting m To allow remote callers to use this feature check Enable gt NOTE Private network calls to Remote Access cannot use the Automatic Callback feature 4 Under the Barrier Required for Private Network Tie Trunks heading check one of the following m If any of the following conditions apply check Yes You plan to assign barrier codes to these trunks Private network Tie calls are allowed access to PSTN trunks using ARS Private network Tie calls pass through the system use Tandem switching m If no barrier codes are planned for these trunks check No A SecurityA lert To help prevent toll fraud barrier codes should always be assigned The barrier codes should also be the maximum length allowed 5 Under the Barrier Codes Required for Non Tie Trunks DID PRI private network calls and PRI Dial Plan routing heading check one of the following m If any of the following conditions apply check Yes You plan to assign barrier codes to these trunks Private network PRI calls are allowed access to PSTN trunks using ARS Private network PRI calls pass through the sys
259. ccess code American Society of Composers Artists and Producers An ISDN BRI bridge router that enables high speed Internet access over a digital facility It makes outgoing calls only AT amp T Switched Network AT amp T telecommunications services provided through an Integrated Digital Services Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI trunk Accunet Switched digital service Megacom Megacom 800 Software Defined Network SDN Multiquest and Shared Access for Switch Services SASS A method of transmitting a short bitstream of digital data such as printable characters represented by a 7 or 8 bit ASCII code Each string of data bits is preceded by a start bit and followed by a stop bit thus permitting data to be transmitted at irregular intervals See also Syr hronons Application with equipment that connects to one or more tip ring extension jacks and automatically answers incoming calls with a recorded announcement directs calls in response to touch tones MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Issue 1 August 1998 DocumentDelivery System automatic immediate cycling Automatic Line Selection Automatic Number Identification automatic ringdown tie trunk Automatic Route Selection automatic start tie trunk auxiliary power unit Glossary Page GL 3 AT amp T Switched See Network AUDIX Voice A voice processing application part of S that provides
260. ce that produces light when voltage is applied light on a telephone line Connection between extensions within the line and trunk assignment line coding line compensation line trunk line trunk jack line trunk and extension module local dial plan local extension local host computer access communications system often however used synonymously with trunk Assignment of lines and trunks connected to the system control unit to specific buttons on each telephone Pattern that data assumes as it is transmitted over a communications channel Adjustment for the amount of cable loss in decibels dB based on the length of cable between a 100D module and a channel service unit CSU or other far end connection point Refers to inside system lines and outside lines trunks in general terms See also line and trunk Physical interface on a module in the control unit for connecting an outside line trunk to the communications system Also called trunk jack Module on which the jacks for connecting central office lines trunks and or the jacks for connecting the extensions are located In a system that is part of a private network a list of extension ranges that the local system refers to in order to route local intersystem calls via UDP In system that is part of a private network an extension that is listed in the system s ocal dial plan A method for connecting an extension jack to an on site comput
261. cedure in this section to match incoming trunks to the continuous sequence of line trunk jacks on the control unit beginning with the first line trunk jack logical ID 1 gt NOTE Key mode only If the system is registered with the FCC registration number of AS59CM 7914 KF E and the processor module has been modified for Permanent Key mode you can connect loop start trunks to the 5 5 type line trunk jacks With the KF registration number ground start trunks are allowed only when the system includes DS1 connectivity dedicated as a T1 type and the channels are used to emulate ground start trunks This procedure also includes instructions for assigning a label to identify the line trunk being used Planning Form Instructions 1 In the Incoming Line Trunk Type column of Form 2c write the type of line trunk you plan to connect to each line trunk jack T1 channel or BRI channel Main No personal line FX Foreign Exchange WATS include band DID or Tie Contact the local telephone company for line trunk information Use the following guidelines Group trunks together according to type basic loop start or ground start trunks and special purpose loop start or ground start trunks DID PRI T1 BRI and tie trunks are automatically grouped according to type since they require specific types of modules The local telephone company supplies the information you need to identify the specific trunks connected to each line t
262. ch of which provides two TTRs To determine the number of TTRs needed perform a traffic study on the number of outgoing single line telephone calls busy hour and the number of incoming calls busy hour routed to applications such as MERLIN LEGEND Mail Then use Table 3 6 to determine the number of TTRs required Table3 6 Total Number of TTRs Required Calls per Hour Dial Tone Delay 0 sec 15 sec 30 sec 45 sec 60 sec 75 sec 110 4 4 6 6 8 8 180 6 6 8 10 10 10 350 8 10 10 10 14 14 420 8 10 12 14 14 16 610 10 12 14 16 18 20 710 10 14 16 18 20 22 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Assigning Lines Trunks Page 3 50 Assigning Lines Trunks This section contains instructions for assigning lines trunks to telephones and Direct Line Consoles gt NOTE To assign lines trunks to data only stations follow the instructions in Chapter 5 Data Communications Forms Needed Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts m Use the following forms as appropriate for telephones and consoles in the system Make one copy of the appropriate form for each extension Form 4b Analog Multiline Telephone Form 4d MLX Telephone Form 4e MFM Adjunct MLX Telephone Form 4f Tip Ring Equipment Form Direct Line Console DLC Analog 71 Form 5b Direct Line Consol
263. ch to another in the private network and UDP ARS calls 2 For incoming UDP calls with the exception of UDP calling group calls the call will not be logged unless the Calls Reported UDP option is set to Log Incoming Outgoing UDP calling group calls a call made from one switch in a private network to a calling group on another switch in the private network will be logged regardless of the programmed setting of the UDP SMDR option if the Talk Time option is set to Enable The Talk Time option determines whether the SMDR report includes the talk time duration in the Talk field Talk time duration is the amount of time a calling group agent spends on an incoming call If SMDR is used with the MERLIN LEGEND Reporter the Talk Time option must be enabled If SMDR is used with CAS or a serial printer the Talk Time option must be disabled MERLIN LEGEND Reporter and CAS will not operate concurrently MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 46 If Talk Time is enabled an asterisk indicates an abandoned call This occurs when the calling party disconnects a call being directed to an Auto Login or Auto Logout calling group before a member answers even if the call was answered elsewhere in the system unless the call is on a loop start facility that does not have reliable disconnect supervision gt NOTES 1 For accurate reports the system date
264. cidental special reliance consequential or indirect loss or damage incurred in connection with the equipment As used in this paragraph consequential damages include but are not limited to the following lost profits lost revenues and losses arising out of unauthorized use or charges for such use of common carrier telecommunications services or facilities accessed through or connected to the equipment For personal injury caused by Lucent Technologies s negligence Lucent Technologies s liability shall be limited to proven damages to person No action or proceeding against Lucent Technologies or its affiliates or suppliers may be commenced more than twenty four 24 months after the cause of action accrues THIS PARAGRAPH SHALL SURVIVE FAILURE OF AN EXCLUSIVE REMEDY Remote Administration and Maintenance The Remote Administration and Maintenance feature of your telecommunications system if you choose to use it permits users to change the system features and capabilities from a remote location The Remote Administration and Maintenance feature through proper administration can help you reduce the risk of unauthorized persons gaining access to the network However telephone numbers and access codes can be compromised when overheard in a public location or lost through theft of a wallet or purse containing access information or through carelessness for example writing codes on a piece of paper and improperly discarding them
265. clock synchronization needs to be coordinated for the entire network See the Network Reference for information Plan your clock source administration to minimize the need for clock switching which is known to cause noise on active calls Under Priority in the Clock Synchronization section do one of the following If installing only one 100D module To keep the factory setting check Primary that is this module provides synchronization for the system Ifthe synchronization source is other than through the 1000 module check None If installing more than one 100D module decide which module if any provides the primary synchronization If Module 1 provides clock synchronization check Primary in the first box the factory setting If Module 2 or Module 3 provides clock synchronization check Primary in the box that describes that 100D module Ifthe synchronization source is other than through a 1000 module check None MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 33 9 If assigning backup synchronization 12 a Inthe box that describes the 100D module providing secondary synchronization check Secondary b In the box that describes the 100D module providing tertiary back up check Tertiary Under the Source subheading in each box do one of the following m retain the factory setti
266. copies of this page as needed Module Slot No Channel No Type Dial Plan Routing Options d Incoming Exptected Digits Q Outgoing 1 Q Two Way O 2 Incoming Signaling Type Q Wink Q4 Q Auto Delete Digits QO Delay 10 Outgoing Signaling a Wink a Auto a3 Q Delay a4 Incoming Signaling Mode Add Digits Rotary OO digits Touch tone Add these digits Any number from 1 9999 Outgoing Signaling Mode Q Rotary Touch tone Factory Setting T1 must be selected as the Type of DS1 connectivity The T1 Truck Type must be configured as S56 not T1 tie Form 3b 11 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee T 9 WIO Logical Trunk ID No Two Signaling Intype Outtype E amp M RA Wink Dela Immediate Automatic E Dial Tone Answer Supv Disconnect Time Time Factory Setting papeeu se seidoo Auew se IL SsxXunag Sururoou 2 WIOT 1 0 asvapoy waisks suongorunumuo sCNHOST NITIAN Logical Trunk ID No EIER Two me Signaling Inmode Outmode Dial Tone Answer Supv Disconnect Time Time pese 9 ESI ESI m Factory Setting IL sxXunag Sururoou
267. cted to the control unit via an interface See DTE data terminal Special type of extension where data communications take place includes DTE and DCE sometimes a telephone is also part of a data workstation data communications equipment Equipment such as modems or ISDN terminal adapters used to establish maintain and terminate a connection between the system and data terminal equipment DTE such as printers personal computers host computers or network workstations Digital Communications Protocol AT amp T proprietary protocol to transmit digitized voice and data over the same communications link Data channel 16 or 64 kbps channel that carries signaling information or data on a PRI or BRI The imprinted feature buttons on a telephone Conf or Conference Drop Feature HFAI Hands Free Answer on Intercom Hold Message Mute or Microphone Recall Speakerphone or Spkrphone and Transfer Tie trunk or tandem tie trunk on which the originating end of the tie trunk transmits an off hook signal to the receiving end and waits for the receiving end to send an off hook signal followed by an on hook signal Also called dial repeating tie trunk A system application that allows face to face simultaneous video and voice communications between individuals and requires high speed data transmission facilities See also group videoconferencing system direct facility termination See personal line data hunt
268. ctions For each calling group 1 Form 7d page 2 copy the Group No ID and extension number from the front of the form 2 Select the Hunt Type by doing one of the following m To keep the factory set hunting pattern check the Circular box gt NOTE If you choose a Linear hunt be sure you have listed the extension numbers and names in the Extensions section on Form 7d page 1 in the order that you want the group searched If you have not done this go back and correct the front of the form so that the extensions are in the right order To change the factory set hunting pattern to Linear check the Linear box m change the factory set hunting pattern to Most Idle check the Most ldle box MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 4 Features Group Assigned Features 3 4 5 August 1998 Page 4 38 Under the Primary Delay Announcement heading do one of the following If there are no announcement devices check the No box and proceed to Step 4 To designate one or more announcement devices check the second box and write the extension numbers for the devices in the space provided see Form 2a or 2b Under the Secondary Delay Announcement heading do one of the If there is no secondary announcement device check the No box and proceed to Step 5 To designate a secondary announcement device check the second box and write the extension
269. ctions to designate from one to four telephones to receive message waiting indications when a fax is received on a specific fax machine and to specify the length of time before the system assumes a fax has arrived and sends the message waiting indication Planning Form Instructions Use Form 6d to identify up to 16 fax machine extension numbers and up to four receiver extension numbers for each fax number The System Notification Threshold setting can be left at the factory setting of 10 seconds or changed and identified on the line at the top of the form for up to 30 seconds gt NOTE You will fill in the rest of the optional telephone features later MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 9 Trunk to Trunk Transfer This section contains instructions to allow or disallow trunk to trunk transfer at each extension If trunk to trunk transfer is disallowed on an extension in a private network the extension cannot transfer an outside call to a local system trunk connected to the PSTN See the Network Reference for more information Trunk to trunk transfer may only be performed on ground start trunks and loop start trunks with reliable disconnect As of Release 4 0 trunk to trunk transfer may be performed on BRI Tie lines PRI ground start trunks and loop start trunks that have reliable disconnect Trunk to trunk transfe
270. d Delay option 4 7 Framing format 3 25 3 31 FTS2000 network 3 23 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Index Page IN 7 G General Purpose Adapter GPA 5 8 analog multiline telephone connection 2 27 data stations 5 7 feature assignment 5 7 requirement 6 3 Ground start emulation 3 3 lines trunks 5 27 Ground start trunks emulation 3 3 Group Calling and dial in trunks 3 16 4 34 and DID trunks 3 42 and Incoming Call Line Identification ICLID 3 4 and Pools 3 16 and Remote Access 3 19 and Tie trunks 3 40 assigning trunks 3 4 Delay Announcement Device 2 25 interaction with Music on Hold and External Page Port trunks 3 4 options 4 35 overview 4 32 touch tone receivers TTRs required 2 18 Group channel assignments 3 33 Group Cover button 4 31 Group Coverage 4 30 Group ID 4 28 Group name 4 28 Group number 4 27 Group paging 4 27 Group Videoconferencing 5 17 H Hold disconnect interval 3 14 return 4 19 timer 4 18 HotLine 4 10 Hunt type 4 35 Hybrid PBX mode Automatic Maintenance Busy 2 10 buttons for data stations in 5 31 calling restrictions 5 35 setting up 2 8 I Idle Line Preference 5 35 Integrated Solution II IS 11 2 32 Integrated Solution III IS III 2 32 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Index Integrated Voice Power Automated At
271. d QCC queue overflow coverage across a private network to a centralized VMS AA non local calling group QCC queue DLC or any individual extension on a remote MERLIN LEGEND DEFINITY ECS or DEFINITY Prologix system or to the PSTN via UDP routing 2 Foreach calling group make a copy of both sides of Form 7d Group Calling 3 Foreach group on the front of Form 7d list the extensions and lines trunks assigned to the group a Write the group number in the Group No space Start with 1 and number sequentially Write the name of the group in the Group Name space See the survey analysis gt NOTE If the system has MERLIN LEGEND Mail or other supported VMS fill in only the group number and group name here then fill in the rest of the Group Calling information on the applicable forms for that VMS MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Group Assigned Features Page 4 34 c Do one of the following m To use factory set extension number write the number in the space provided 770 for group 1 771 for group 2 and 50 On m To change factory set extension number write the new number in the Renumber to space and then on Form 2d System Renumbering Special Renumbers write the group name in the Group ID Label column up to 7 characters and the new number in the Renumber to column of the Group Calling section of that form gt NOTE Befor
272. d start GS trunks Extension for which one or more CTI applications is receiving call information The CTI application does not have to be directly attached to the equipment at the extension in order to monitor calls The call information may appear on the PC screen of another extension that has been programmed to receive it See also CT link pnd unmonitored extension See MFM Module multiline An analog or digital MLX telephone that provides multiple telephone line buttons for making or receiving calls or programming multiplexing features The division of a transmission channel into two or more independent channels either by splitting the frequency band into a number of narrower bands or by dividing the channel into successive time slots MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Glossary Page GL 20 Music On Hold Customer provided music source or Magic on Hold connected to the system through a oop start jack network Configuration of communications devices and software network interface 1 BRI non local extension non local user non local dial plan non satellite connected for information interchange Hardware software or both that links two systems in an interconnected group of systems for example between the local telephone company and a PBX National Integrated Services Digital Network 1 Basic Rate Interface A t
273. data and analog voice analog data only or analog data and MLX voice ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Station Connects to the control unit through an MLX extension jack and requires an ISDN terminal adapter such as the Ascend Pipeline 25PX or 50 ISDN terminal adapter data stations can support ISDN terminal adapter data and MLX voice or ISDN terminal adapter data only Data Terminal Equipment DTE Data station equipment for example a PC host computer or LAN workstation from which data is input and or output DTE which can also be referred to as a data terminal uses data communications equipment DCE to transmit and receive the digital signals it requires Data Communications Equipment DCE Data station equipment that enables the transmission of data over digital or analog telephone lines and trunks DTE requires DCE as follows Modem A type of data communications equipment that converts the DTE s outgoing digital signals into analog signals for transmission over regular analog telephone company lines Another modem at the receiving data station converts the analog signals back into digital signals for reception by the DTE for example a PC An analog data station uses a modem as its DCE ISDN Terminal Adapter A type of data communications equipment that transmits digital signals over digital telephone company facilities for example PRI A digital data station uses an ISDN terminal adapter such as the Ascend Pip
274. dditional Features heading Make a copy of the NI 1 BRI Planner for your records and forward the original to the technician who will perform the installation MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 NI 1 BRI Planner MEE c 0 For use with Form 3i Incoming Trunks BRI Options 800 NI BRI Module Reference No Customer Name Tel No Address Order Number Account Executive Tel No Systems Consultant Tel No NI 1 BRI Vendor Name Contact Tel No Installation Due Date Materials on Job Date Installation Contacts Implementor Tel No SDSC Manager Tel No NTSC Engineer Tel No DSO Manager Tel No Has order been placed with the network provider for this service Yes Date No Required fields for presale MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 NI 1 BRI Planner Continued i ii of Service m Type of CO Switch m Service Configurations Q IOCS Number of BRI Lines Provisioned ______ LH Q MLHG Series Completion umber of BRI Lines Provisioned umber of Voice Only Hunt Groups Provisioned umber of Data Only Hunt Groups Provisioned ____ umber of Voice Data Hunt Groups Provisioned m zoe Number of BRI Lines Ordered Additional Features Q CPN BN MERLIN LEGEND Release 4 0
275. de calls In this release dialing the pool access code is not necessary for a call going from one networked switch to another Also delay start tie trunks or T1 trunks administered as PHI can act as tandem trunks to connect networked systems Available for Hybrid PBX mode systems the private network features of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 0 provide the following advantages for geographically dispersed organizational sites m Intersystem Calling In a private network users on one local system can call extensions on other systems in the network Release 6 0 can support 2 3 4 or 5 digit dial plans They dial these extensions as inside calls To implement this function the system manager programs the extension ranges of remote networked switches to create a non local dial plan This programming does not actually affect numbering on the remote system To correctly set up systems for transparent calling among non local dial plan extensions the system manager assigns networking tie and or PRI tandem trunks to pools Then he or she programs as many as 20 patterns MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 6 0 Enhancements February 1998 Page xviii associates with routes Facility Restriction Levels FRLs digit absorption and digit prepending This allows ARS like routing of non local dial plan calls In addition
276. des a single interface SA buttons to users for both internal and external calling See also Behind Switch mode and Key mode ICLID ICOM buttons immediate start tie trunk in band signaling inside dial tone Inspect screen Integrated Administration Integrated Services Digital Network Integrated Solution 11 111 Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant Incoming Call Line Identification See Caller ID intercom buttons Telephone buttons that provide access to inside system lines for calling other extensions or receiving calls from them Tie trunk on which no start signal is necessary dialing can begin immediately after the trunk is seized See robbed bit signaling A tone users hear when they are off hook on an SA or ICOM button Display screen on an MLX display telephone that allows the user to preview incoming calls and see a list of the features programmed on line buttons Capability of S that simplifies the programming of common information for the system AUDIX Voice Power and if it is also installed Fax Attendant System See ISDN See S IS Il application that automatically answers incoming calls with a recorded announcement and directs callers to a department an extension or the system operator MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary Issue 1 August 1998 intercom buttons interface intersystem calls Intuity
277. dicate a specific line to receive outside data calls assign an outside line trunk to a data station DHG LAN workstation or local host computer On a digital or analog data station the user selects an outside line trunk by dialing the Idle Line Preference code usually 9 on an ICOM button On an ISDN terminal adapter data station the user can also select lines trunks assigned to the extension by dialing the line number 801 880 assigned to that outside line trunk Itis extremely important that the factory set Idle Line Preference the line to which the user is connected automatically when going off hook not be changed The user must be connected to an intercom line to activate features such as Privacy or to select an available outside line trunk by dialing the Idle Line Preference code Planning Form Instructions Using Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks as reference record your decisions for each data station on the Key mode Button Diagram of Data Form 1a or 1b If you want to assign outside lines trunks to the data station write the telephone number from Form 2c of the outside line trunk on the appropriate button For ISDN terminal adapter data stations include the line trunk number MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Features to Data Stations Page 5 35 Assigning Features to Data Stations Many of the features used for voice
278. discussion please identify each site by a Node Number Usually if a DEFINITY is part of the network it will be identified as Node 1 Please include type of system facilities interconnecting the systems facilities connecting to the PSTN extension numbers etc Customer Name Network Configuration MERLIN LEGEND R6 DESIGN IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE CONTINUED If providing information for more than one site please complete separate Design Implementation Guide pages 2 through 6 for each site Multiple Network Configuration drawings are not required Site Customer Information Node Number Name Address City State Zip LDN IL Customer Contact Name Customer Contact Tel No System Setup Show all pack codes and designations i e 15 05 mlx etc CABINET 1 CABINET 2 CABINET 3 Module Module Module Processor R6 If Legend exists list the current Timing Synchronization DS1 or BRI Pack Location Current Synchronization Primary Secondary Tertiary MERLIN LEGEND R6 DESIGN IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE CONTINUED Customer Name Node Dial Plan information Dial plan numbers for extensions adjuncts lines and calling groups must be unique across the network Numbers will have to be changed if a conflict is encountered MERLIN LEGEND routes Non Local UDP calls by matching number ranges entered into the Non Local UDP tables These number
279. dule MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Extension Jacks Page 5 23 Modem Data Only Stations A modem data only station consists of a data terminal connected to the control unit using an internal or external modem This station does not include a telephone Assign a basic telephone extension jack on an 012 T R 016 T R or 008 OPT module either an on or off premises extension can be connected to an 008 OPT module Planning Form Instructions Record the extension jack assignments for modem data stations on Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks 1 Inthe Jack Type column make sure there is a next to the number for each basic extension jack 2 Inthe Person Location or Function column write modem and then identify each modem data station by person location or function ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Only Stations An ISDN terminal adapter data only station consists of a PC or a data terminal connected to an ISDN terminal adapter Each ISDN terminal adapter data station connects to a digital extension jack on an 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module Planning Form Instructions Record the extension jack assignments for ISDN terminal adapter data stations on Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks 1 Inthe Jack Type column make sure there is a D next to the number for each digital extension jack 2 Inthe Person Location or Fu
280. dure for filling in the module information on Form 3b pages 1 and 2 continue to the next section to fill in T1 Switched 56 options Planning Form Instructions On Form 3b page 11 T1 Switched 56 Options for each T1 channel programmed for T1 Switched 56 service 1 Select the Channel Direction m Select either Incoming Outgoing or Two Way The factory setting is Two Way 2 Select both the Incoming and Outgoing Signaling Mode m Select either Touch tone or Rotary The factory setting is Touch tone MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 29 3 Select both the Incoming and Outgoing Signaling Type 4 Select either Wink Auto or Delay The factory setting is Wink The Incoming Signaling Type selected will determine the Incoming Routing Method If the Incoming Signaling Type is set to Auto the Incoming Routing Method is Line Appearance Routing Incoming data calls are typically terminated at a data extension endpoint that has a personal line appearance The 1B data call may also terminate at a data extension endpoint in a calling group If the Incoming Signaling Type is set to Wink or Delay the Incoming Routing Method is Dial Plan Routing Incoming data calls are routed by dial plan and may terminate to an SA button on any data extension within the system If the switch is part of a private network data calls ca
281. e ties two telephone switching systems together providing access to all telephones or data equipment on each system Analog Tie trunks are used for data communication with modem data stations connected to a system at a different location such as a different floor of a building a different building or a different city or state Analog Tie trunks connect to a jack on a 400EM module in the control unit Video calls are not made over analog Tie lines trunks Digital Tie trunks are used for digital data communications such as G4 fax and videoconferencing with digital data video stations connected to a system at a different location such as a different floor of a building a different building or a different city or state Digital Tie trunks are emulated by T1 facilities connected to a 100D module in the control unit Video and digital data calls may be made over digital Tie lines trunks Direct Inward Dial DID Incoming calls reach specific individuals or facilities in the system without the help of a system operator DID trunks are available only in Hybrid PBX mode A DID trunk is used to receive incoming calls from outside modem data stations It is not used for outgoing calls A DID trunk connects to a jack on an 800 DID module in the control unit Video calls are not made over DID lines trunks Digital Signal 1 DS1 This facility carries digital signals in the DS1 format A DS1 facility can be used for communication with outside di
282. e 4 11 features 4 18 MFM adjuncts 3 50 primary operator position 2 21 Disallowed Lists 4 51 Disconnect signal 3 12 Disconnect time 3 41 3 44 DMS FX services D 1 DMS INWATS services 0 1 DMS OUTWATS services D 1 DMS Private Network services D 1 DMS Tie Trunk services D 1 DMS 100 Local services 3 34 DMS 100 services D 1 DMS 250 services D 1 Issue 1 August 1998 Page IN 5 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Index Issue 1 August 1998 Page IN 6 E E amp M signal 3 40 Elevate priority 4 21 Emergency Allowed List 4 55 Enhanced Service Center 2 30 Enhanced Service Center ESC 2 31 Extension Copy 4 2 Extension jacks data stations 5 1 identifying 2 14 LAN data stations 5 15 numbers 2 4 4 27 pairs 2 24 Extension Status 4 32 4 44 Extensions adding 6 2 6 6 assigning numbers 2 13 capacity 2 3 identifying jacks 2 14 jack pairs 2 24 labels 2 33 module types 2 14 modules required 6 2 numbering plans 2 33 F Facility Restriction Levels FRLs 4 67 Fax machines features 4 8 message threshold 4 8 message waiting receiver 4 8 Features adding 6 2 group assigned 4 26 overview 4 1 system 4 41 telephone 4 2 Federal Communications Commission FCC Key mode registration 3 6 system mode registration 2 8 Forced Account Code Entry 4 6 Forms data 1 system planning 1 Forwar
283. e DLC Digital Form 5c MFM Adjunct DLC Planning Form Instructions 1 1 of Forms 4b 4d 5a and 5b transfer the following user information from Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks to each copy of each of these telephone forms a Write the logical ID in the Logical ID space b Write the extension number in the Extension No space c Write the name of the person or the location of the equipment in the Person or Location space 2 For any voice voice or voice data entries in the Person or Location column of Form 2a indicate the type of extension jack pairs under the Extension Jack Pair heading on Forms 4b and 5a by doing one of the following m Check the Voice Announce to Busy voice voice box and enter the logical ID and extension number under the Even numbered jack heading m Check the Simultaneous Voice and Data voice data box and enter the logical ID and extension number under the Even numbered jack heading MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Assigning Lines Trunks Page 3 51 3 For any adjuncts connected to an telephone using an fill in the following user information from Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts on Forms 4e and 5c in the Connected to MLX extension No space a Write the extension number in the Extension No space b Write the name of the person or the location of the
284. e Incoming column Under the Signaling Type Intype Outtype heading check the appropriate column for either In or Out under the Wink Delay Immediate or Automatic columns for each tie trunk For T1 facilities used for services for example Megacom consider the direction of the tie trunk and how trunk assignments will be made Then select from the following MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 40 gt NOTES 1 Check the same signaling type used by the system to which you are connecting For incoming only or two way tie trunks the incoming type must be the same as the outgoing type of the remote system For outgoing only or two way tie trunks the outgoing type must be the same as the incoming type of the remote system 2 Wink is the factory setting and is the preferred type followed by Delay then Immediate Immediate does not work with touch tone dial mode Use Delay for private networks 3 Automatic incoming signaling is required if the CO switch is a Lucent Technologies 5ESS or Northern Telecom DMS 100 and incoming calls are programmed to route by Line Appearance Immediate Dial outgoing signaling should not be used for digital emulated Tie trunks using T1 Switched 56 service due to the lack of trunk integrity checking 4 Dial in E amp M Tie trunks cannot be assigned to ring into a calling group Only Auto in Ti
285. e Line Appearance Routing information on Form 3b 5 c Form 3b 4 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3b Continued Line Appearance Routing Incoming Services B Channel Trunk Telephone Number Group No No up to12 digits B Channel Trunk Telephone Number Group No No up to12 digits Trunks must be administered to terminate on an internal endpoint for example an extension a Calling Group etc Form 3b 5 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3b Continued Dial Plan Routing Incoming Services Maximum 16 entries Servicet Pattern to Match Total Digits in Dialed Number 0 14 Delete Digits 0 14 Add Digits 0 4 Servicet Pattern to Match Total Digits in Dialed Number 0 14 Delete Digits 0 14 Add Digits 0 4 Hybrid PBX mode only T Services AT amp T Toll Megacom WATS Megacom 800 ACCUNET SDS Software Defined Network SDN MultiQuest Long Distance 5ESS Local OUTWATS 56 64 Digital Virtual Private Network INWATS MCI Toll MCI PRISM MCI Vnet MCI 800 MCI 900 DMS 100 Local DMS Private DMS INWATS DMS OUTWATS DMS Foreign Exchange FX DMS Tie Trunk Other Call by Call Other t Pattern
286. e System can be used as a personal line as long as it is not in a trunk pool Do not assign network trunks to telephones MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Assigning Telephone Buttons Page 3 56 For single line telephones analog modems fax machines or any other device connected to an 012 T R 016 T R or 008 OPT module m The settings for SA buttons be changed see below however factory settings should be adequate to meet most user needs since SA buttons can be used to make and receive both inside and outside calls m Single line telephones cannot have additional SA or SSA buttons However single line telephones connected through an 012 T R 016 T R or 008 OPT module can have SA buttons removed Removing all but one SA button from single line telephones disables features such as Transfer Conference and any other feature that requires more than one SA button m If you want the extension to receive outside calls on a specific line trunk assign a personal line button if you want the extensions to receive outside calls on a line trunk included in a pool assign a Pool button For adjuncts connected using an MFM it is recommended that you change the Button 2 assignment to SA Orig Only and remove the Button 3 assignment Planning Form Instructions 1 Using the guidelines above select the types of buttons to assign to each telephone 2 Compl
287. e module is prevented An earlier or later vintage firmware is supported Basic Call Control A CTI link application on a user s computer can assume basic call control of the user s analog multiline or MLX telephone s SA buttons Basic call control includes m Answering calls arriving on an SA button m Making calls from an SA button m Hanging up calls m Hold and retrieving a call on hold at the user s extension gt NOTE Transfer and three way conference when handled through a CTI link application provide the original caller s calling number information or other information to the transfer receiver or new conference participant if the user has screen pop capability MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 5 0 Enhancements June 1997 Page xxiii Screen Pop Screen pop occurs when the calling number called number or other user defined identifier such as account code that a voice response unit prompts the caller to dial is used to display a screen associated with the far end party For example Caller ID services can be used to support screen pop on a system that includes a CTI link using the calling party number as a database key code information about a caller automatically appears on the user s computer screen when the call arrives at the extension Depending on the application screen pop may be available for calls th
288. e 10 SA buttons including SA Orig Only but no SSA buttons The factory setting for SA buttons is 2 It is recommended that additional SA buttons be added to ensure that the operator can transfer calls On a QCC no buttons can be programmed However if the QCC Voice Announce feature has been enabled the Call 5 button becomes a VA Voice Announce button If you plan to use Automatic Route Selection ARS consider keeping the factory set button assignments Since ARS picks the appropriate route there is no need for Pool buttons Consider assigning SSA buttons to small groups of users who need to answer and distribute each other s calls easily or join conversations Each SSA button you assign corresponds to an SA Ring or SA Voice button on another telephone Therefore to provide complete coverage within the group you must be sure that each SA Ring and SA Voice button assigned to a telephone is also assigned to other members of the group Each SA Ring or SA Voice button on a telephone can be assigned as an SSA button on up to 16 other telephones Assign a Pool button when a specific trunk pool for example BRI WATS or FX is used frequently Also consider assigning Pool buttons if you do not plan to use ARS and the system includes only one or two pools Do not assign network pools to telephones Assign personal line buttons when an exclusive private number is needed for example for a company executive Any line trunk connected to th
289. e Automatic Hold box Calls in Queue Alert This section contains instructions for setting the Calls in Queue Alert option to notify QCC operators with a single beep when a new call enters the QCC queue Planning Form Instructions Under the Calls in Queue Alert heading on Form 6a do one of the following m keep the factory setting QCC operators are not notified when calls are waiting in queue check the Disable box m To specify that particular QCC operators are notified with a single beep when a call enters the queue check the Enable box and in the space provided write the extension number of each QCC position that receives the notification see Form 2a or Form 59 Queue Over Threshold This section contains instructions to specify the maximum number of calls allowed in the QCC queue before operators are notified with a tone through the receiver or headset that calls are waiting Planning Form Instructions Under the Queue Over Threshold heading on Form 6a do one of the following m Tokeep the factory setting operators are not notified check the 0 calls box m Toindicate that operators are notified when calls are waiting in the queue check the second box and write the maximum number of calls in the queue before notification any number from 1 through 99 in the space provided MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Operator Features Page
290. e Hunt configuration Service Profile A Service Profile SP defines the interface on a BRI line between a CO and an ISDN terminal It specifies the parameters and their values necessary to provide services to the terminal There are standardized capability packages called ISDN Ordering Codes IOCs that are configured on the CO at subscription time The IOC contains information necessary for the CO to provide service to the system The MERLIN LEGEND system supports the IOC S capability package which provides alternate voice circuit switched data on two B channels with no packet data capability or supplementary voice features except for the Calling Party Number Billing Number CPN BN feature if available In addition to the IOC S capability package the MERLIN LEGEND system sup ports Multiline Hunt MLH service for a ternate voice and data hunting if the CO is a Lucent Technologies 5ESS or Northern Telecom DMS 100 switch For a Sie mens SSC EWSD switch MLH service must be provisioned as either voice or data hunting MLH service is provided through the Multiline Hunt Group MLHG feature on Northern Telecom DMS 100 switches and through the Series Comple tion feature on Lucent Technologies 5ESS and Siemens SSC EWSD switches gt NOTE The MLHG feature on the Lucent Technologies 5 55 and Siemens SSC EWSD switches is not recommended for use with the MERLIN LEGEND system MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1
291. e Selection Default and Special Numbers Table 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers 7d Group Calling You must make entry for extension jack connections MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Extension Jacks Page 5 21 Assigning Extension Jacks Following some guidelines about digital extension jacks this section contains procedures to plan extension jack connections for the following m Modem data only stations m ISDN terminal adapter data only stations m host computer data stations AN workstations Video systems personal or group For each type of data station planning how the data equipment connects to extension jacks on the control unit involves the following tasks 1 Review Form 2a on which you entered codes A for analog D for digital and B for basic telephone and find the telephone type and the user location or function for each data station to be connected Table 5 4 lists extension jack types the corresponding module types and the equipment that can be connected 2 Addthe extension jack assignments to Form 2a Table 5 4 Extension Jack Types Jack Type Module Type Connects Analog 008 Analog multiline telephones including analog voice and data stations 408 with a modem connected through a GPA 408 GS LS Digital 008 MLX MLX teleph
292. e data station Data Station MERLIN DTE DCE LEGEND Optical Control Scanner Sm Unit SSS Fax Noes Digital Analog SS Signal Signal ras Analog Extension LOF Jacks 2 PC Terminal Host en MLX Computer Analog n B Extension Jack jo Multiline Telephone Figure 5 1 Analog Voice and Modem Data MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications About Data and Video Communications Page 5 9 Modem Data Only This type of modem data station includes only DTE and a modem see Figure 5 2 The modem connects to the control unit through an analog port ona T R module If the modem does not provide dialing capability a single line telephone can be connected to it to provide dial out capability however the data station and the telephone cannot be used simultaneously Data Station MERLIN DCE LEGEND Optical Control Scanner Unit Digital Analog Signal Signal Analog or Tip Ring Modem gt D y Extension Jack DTE Fax S Credit Card Verification MLX Hd Extension Jack Single line E A 4 4 Telephone Host if required for dialing Computer Figure 5 2 Modem Data Only MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 5 Data Communications About
293. e following m system s numbering plan matches the number of digits sent by the telephone company check 0 the factory setting under the Delete Digits and Add Digits headings If the number of digits sent by the local telephone company is more than the number of digits in the system numbering plan specify that one to four digits be deleted from the telephone company digits by checking the appropriate number 1 2 3 or 4 under the Delete Digits heading m If the number of digits sent by the local telephone company is fewer than the number of digits in the system s numbering plan specify the specific digits 1 9999 to be added to the digits sent check the Add these digits box under the Add Digits heading and then write the specific digits to be added in the space provided 4 Underthe Signaling heading do one of the following m To keep the factory set signal check Rotary m To change the setting check Touch Tone You cannot touch tone if you selected Immediate Start 5 Underthe Invalid Destination heading do one of the following The Invalid Destination setting applies to both blocks You cannot specify a different setting for each block m To indicate that calls to unassigned extension numbers to the backup position usually the primary operator check Send to backup position m Toindicate that calls to unassigned extension numbers should receive a fast busy signal check Return to fast
294. e the following preventive measures to limit the risk of unauthorized access by hackers m Provide good physical security for the room containing your telecommunications equipment and the room with administrative tools records and system manager information These areas should be locked when not attended m Provide a secure trash disposal for all sensitive information including telephone directories call accounting records or anything that may supply information about your communications system This trash should be shredded m Educate employees that hackers may try to trick them into providing them with dial tone or dialing a number for them All reports of trouble requests for moving extensions or any other administrative details associated with the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System should be handled by one person the system manager or within a specified department Anyone claiming to be a telephone company representative should be referred to this person or department m No one outside of Lucent Technologies needs to use the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System to test facilities lines trunks If a caller identifies him or herself as a Lucent Technologies employee the system manager should ask for a telephone number where the caller can be reached The system manager should be able to recognize the number as a Lucent Technologies telephone number Before connecting the caller to the administrative port of the MERLIN LEGEND Commu
295. e trunks can be assigned to ring into a calling group One way Outgoing Tie Trunks All outgoing calls are placed using Automatic Route Selection and tie trunks are not assigned to personal line or Pool buttons on telephones Select wink signaling One way Outgoing Tie Trunks Tie trunks are assigned to personal line or Pool buttons on telephones Select immediate signaling One way Incoming Tie Trunks Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS is included Select wink signaling 4 Under the E amp M Signal heading select one of the following signaling types to be used on the tie trunks gt NOTE E amp M Signaling does not apply to digital emulated Tie trunks using 1 Switched 56 service and should not be set during administration of those trunks If the tie trunks are connected to the other system through the local telephone company check 1S the factory setting If the tie trunks are connected directly to a system that uses type 15 signaling and is located near this system check 1C gt NOTE The 1C option assumes that the two systems are connected together without any provisioned facility and without any signaling treatment equipment When connecting a MERLIN LEGEND switch to another MERLIN LEGEND switch use 1C on one switch and 1S on the other MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 41 m If the t
296. e when it is not being used Install a switch in the line to turn it off when it is not being used Keep the Remote Administration and Maintenance telephone number secret Give it only to people who need to know it and impress upon them the need to keep it a secret Do not write the telephone number on the Hybrid PBX or Key system the connecting equipment or anywhere else in the system room If your Remote Administration and Maintenance feature requires that someone in your office transfer the caller to the Remote Administration and Maintenance extension you should impress upon your employees the importance of transferring only authorized individuals to that extension MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 B System Forms Page B 1 System Forms This appendix contains one copy of each system planning form The forms are in numerical order and organized according to planning purpose as shown in Table B 1 You should make copies of these forms and use the copies keeping the originals for future use Planning forms for data communications are contained in Appendix C The T1 PRI Planner is contained in Appendix D The NI 1 BRI Planner is contained in Appendix G The Network Engineering forms are contained Appendix 1 Table B 1 System Forms Used for Planning Form No Form Title Features and Calling N A Employee Communication Survey
297. e you complete the extension number and name entries in Step 4 read Step 2 on page 4 37 of the instructions in the next section Group Options 4 Inthe Extensions section of Form 7d write the extension number of each member of the group in the Ext No column and the name of the person or location in the Person or Location column see Form 2 5 Inthe Trunks Pools table of Form 7d for each line trunk that is to ring directly into the calling group write the line trunk or pool number see gt NOTES 1 When a pool is assigned to a calling group all lines trunks in the pool are assigned to the group Individual trunks within the pool cannot be assigned to a calling group 2 Ifa pool contains any dial in trunks such as DID trunks the pool cannot be assigned to a calling group Also pools with private network tandem trunks should not be assigned to calling groups Pools may be assigned to only one calling group Lines trunks assigned as the system Music on Hold or External Page Port cannot be assigned to a calling group 5 Before adding to a calling group you must first remove lines trunks from the QCC 6 If assigning a calling group as backup for a QCC under the Position Busy Backup heading in the Queued Call Console section of Form 6a Optional Operator Features check yes and write the extension number of the calling group 7 To record information for another calling group repeat this procedure beginning w
298. ea code 505 minus 20 in local calling area 890 for 719 in state WATS 1 area code 891 Crose Co WATS All area codes in U S except 303 and 719 Preferred Trunk Pools For toll calls Table 17 891 For local calls Table 18 70 Figure 4 1 Completed ARS Worksheet Automatic Route Selection Tables MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 63 This section contains instructions for using the information you recorded on the worksheet to prepare the ARS tables The system can have as many as 20 ARS tables 16 are programmed and 4 are factory set Dial 0 Special Number Default Local and Default Toll tables Of the 16 programmable tables each may contain one of the following types of information m 6 Digit Tables If the cost of calls to another area code varies according to the exchange this table can be used to route calls on different trunk pools depending on both the area code and the exchange An area code is the first entry and the remaining 99 entries are exchanges within the area code The system scans the first six digits of the user dialed number area code and exchange to route the call m Area Code Tables These tables are lists of 3 digit area codes Area code tables are useful if just one type of line trunk is used for all calls to each area code on
299. econd box and write in the manufacturer information that describes the unit b Forward all copies of this page along with a copy of the Planner to Tier Ill GBS NTSC MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 T1 PRI Planner Se a For use with Form 3b Incoming Trunks DS1 Connectivity 100D Module Reference No Customer Name Tel No Address Order Number Account Executive Tel No Systems Consultant Tel No T1 PRI Vendor Name Contact Installation Due Date Materials on Job Date Installation Contacts Implementor Tel No SDSC Manager Tel No NTSC Engineer Tel No DSO Manager Tel No Has order been placed with the network provider for this service Q Yes Date No Required fields for presale MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 T1 PRI Planner Continued ee Module 1 Service Ordered or Planned Line Coding Suppression PRI B8ZS Preferred T1 AMI ZCS Frame Format Line Signaling Mode ESF Preferred Common Channel Required for PRI D4 May be used if required by local Local 1900908 Company Synchronization Timing Switch Type PRI Service Only Q Loop Default 4ESS Legend NTWK Local 5bESS Legend PBX DMS 250 DMS 100 DXE600 Module 2 Service Ordered or Planned Line Coding Suppression PRI B8ZS Preferred O AMI ZCS Frame Format Line Si
300. ect only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 DOC Certification No 230 4095A CSA Certification No LR 56260 Load No 6 Renseignements sur la notification du minist re des Communications du Canada et la r paration AVIS L tiquette du minist re des Communications du Canada identifie le mat riel homologu Cette tiquette certifie que le mat riel est conforme certaines normes de protection d exploitation et de s curit des r seaux de t l communications Le Minist re n assure toutefois pas que le mat riel fonctionnera la satisfaction de l utilisateur Avant d installer ce mat riel l utilisateur doit s assurer qu il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l entreprise locale de t l communication Le mat riel doit galement tre install en suivant une m thode accept e de raccordement Dans certains cas les fils int rieurs de l enterprise utilis s pour un service individuel ligne unique peuvent tre prolong s au moyen d un dispositif homologu de raccordement cordon prolongateur t l phonique interne L abonn ne doit pas oublier qu il est possible que la conformit aux conditions nonc es ci dessus n emp chent pas la d gradation du service dans certaines situations Actuellement les entreprises de t l communication ne permettent pas que l on raccorde leur mat riel des jacks d abonn sauf dans les cas pr cis pr vus pas
301. ected to 016 T R modules or 012 T R modules with code 517C13 or higher labeled on the top of the module Modules with code 517413 or 517B13 can be used to connect single line telephones only They do not provide the disconnect signal required by answering machines and applications Do not use the 008 OPT module for applications such as Enhanced Service Center Messaging 2000 or Intuity AUDIX 3 When planning for CONVERSANT refer to the documentation provided with the application and contact the SDSC 1 888 297 4700 and follow the prompts to reach the CONVERSANT split for information on TTRs and ports MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 32 Planning Form Instructions On Form 2a mark the extension jack assignments on the 012 T R 016 T R MERLIN LEGEND Mail and 008 OPT modules 1 In the Jack Type column make sure B is checked next to the logical ID for each basic telephone jack In the Person Location or Function column identify each T R device by the users name or location and by type such as single line telephone fax modem or Delay Announcement Device If the system includes optional applications indicate the application on the appropriate line in the Appl column m indicate MERLIN LEGEND Mail write ML Mail m Toindicate Messaging 2000 write M2000 m To indicate Intuity AUDIX write Intuity
302. ection to off premises extensions requires a USOC RJ11C or RJ14C Connection to 1 544 Mbps digital facilities must be through a USOC RJ48C or RJ48X Connection to DID requires a USOC RJ11C RJ14C or RJ21X These USOCs must be ordered from your telephone company Connection to 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps facilities requires a USOC RJ11C RJ14C or RJ21 Party Lines and Coin Telephones This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines Notification of Local Telephone Company Before connecting this equipment you or your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone company s business office of the following The telephone number s you will be using with this equipment The appropriate registration number and ringer equivalence number REN which can be found on the back or bottom of the control unit as follows If this equipment is to be used as a Key system report the registration number AS593M 72914 KF E If the system provides both manual and automatic selection of incoming outgoing access to the network report the registration number AS593M 72682 MF E If there are no directly terminated trunks or if the only directly terminated facilities are personal lines report the registration number AS5USA 65646 PF E The REN Ringer Equivalence Number for all three systems is 1 5A MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555
303. ed List Access Disallowed List Access Q List Numbers 0 7 Q List Numbers 0 7 Factory Setting Hybrid PBX mode only Form 3a 3 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3a Continued E 20 717 Class of Restriction with Barrier Codes Maximum 16 barrier codes Make copies if more than 4 are assigned Barrier Code Number Digts 0 9 plus Restriction Unrestricted Outward Restrict Q Toll Restrict ARS Restriction Level Barrier Code Number Digits 0 9 plus Restriction Unrestricted Outward Restrict Q Toll Restrict ARS Restriction Level OO 1 O 2 4 EIL O 6 OO 1 O 2 Ej 5 6 Q 3 Disallowed List Access Q List Numbers 0 7 Barrier Code Number Digits 0 9 plus Restriction Unrestricted Outward Restrict Q Toll Restrict ARS Restriction Level Q 3 Disallowed List Access Q List Numbers 0 7 Barrier Code Number Digits 0 9 plus Restriction Unrestricted Outward Restrict Q Toll Restrict ARS Restriction Level OO Ej 1 inim 0m 3 a 4 a5 a6 Disallowed List Access Q List Numbers 0 7 Factory Setting Hybrid PBX mode only Form 3a 4 OO Ej 1 2 3 a 4 5 6 Disallowed List Access Q List Numbers 0 7 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3b Module 1 Slot No
304. efine a new Logical Terminal Identifier LTID using the SLT command SONUMBER cr or gt LTID enter identifier value FUNCTION ADD LTCLASS lt BRAFS gt CS Y PS lt N gt MAXKEYS lt 64 gt TEL TYPE lt DTEl gt ABS lt NOPMD gt ABS lt gt EKTS lt N gt SPIDSFX option SPID_SUFFIX lt enter spid suffix value gt PVC option VERSION lt FUNCTIONAL gt ISSUE lt 2 gt MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 1 BRI Provisioning Northern Telecom DMS 100 Switch Translations Page H 20 Associate new DN with LTID using the NEW command SONUMBER cr or gt DN enter DN gt LCC lt ISDNKSET gt GROUP lt enter group name gt SUBGRP lt enter subgrp value gt NCOS lt enter ncos value gt SNPA lt enter NXX value gt KEY lt gt RINGING lt Y gt LATANAME lt enter value gt LTG lt enter value gt LEN OR LTID enter assigned value DMS 100 normally delivers the Calling Party Number and the Redirecting Number if available Attach LTIDs to LEN using the SLT command SONUMBER lt lt cr gt or gt LTID lt enter value gt FUNCTION lt ATT gt LEN lt enter LEN to which LTID will be attached gt Provision DN2 using the following translations Define a new Logical Terminal Identifier LTID using the SLT command SONUMBER lt lt cr gt or gt LTID lt enter identifier value gt FUNCTION lt ADD gt LTCLASS
305. el Ext No No or Function Freq Appl Link 97 1E 1 N L CO Mm A OIN O NIN NI NM PMO Shaded lines indicate possible operator positions Factory Setting The system capacity for Personal Directories is decreased by one whenever an MLX 20L telephone is connected to an MLX port t Use Form 2b for adjuncts connected via MFM Ringing Frequency is programmable on the 016 T R module only The maximum number of VMI ports is 24 The maximum number of CTI links is 1 quinn WS SUIIO syoef uorsu21Xq penunuoD UIJO 1 0 asvapoy WASS suongorunumuo sCNHOST NITIAN 9 2 D Mod Log Jack Type 1d te Set Up Renumber Old Wire Person Location Ring Type ID A D B Equipment 1 Space to Label Ext No No or Function Freq t Appl BE 121 Shaded lines indicate possible operator positions Factory Setting The system capacity for Personal Directories is decreased by one whenever an MLX 20L telephone is connected to an MLX port Use Form 2b for adjuncts connected via MFM Ringing Frequency is programmable on the 016 T R module only 3t The maximum number of VMI ports is 24 The maximum number of CTI links is 1 quinn uio3js g Sur SLf uorsu21Xxq
306. elecom DMS 100 Switch Translations m Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations I Network Engineering Forms I 1 I GL Glossary GL 1 IN Index IN 1 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Figures Page vii Figures 1 Before You Begin 1 1 System Configuration for Support of CTI Applications 1 7 1 2 Sample Floor Plan 1 14 2 Control Unit Configuration 2 1 Sample Control Unit Diagram 2 B ees Extension Numbers for 2 Digit Numbering Plan 2 34 2 pe 2 3 Extension Numbers for 3 Digit Numbering Plan 2 35 2 4 Extension Numbers for Set Up Space Numbering Plan 2 35 fy 3 Lines Trunks 3 1 Partially Completed System Form 2c 3 8 3 2 Factory Set Assignment Telephones Hybrid PBX Mode 2 53 a Factory Set Assignment Analog Multiline Telephones Hybrid PBX Mode 3 54 3 3 58 3 Key and Behind Switch Modes 5 3 Factory Set Assignment Analog Multiline Telephones Key and Behind Switch Modes 3 59 3 6 Direct Line Console 3 62 3 7 Analog Direct Line Console 3 63 Features 4 1 Completed ARS Worksheet Automatic Route Selection Tables 4 62 4 2 Example 1 Form 3f 6 Digit Table 4 65 4 3 Example 2 Form 3f Area Code Table 4 66 4 4 Subpattern Example 4 68 4 5 Other Digits Example 4 69 4 6 Digit Absorption Example 4 71 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1
307. eline 25PX or 50 as its DCE Data Terminal Data station equipment for example a PC host computer LAN workstation Group IV fax machine or a group video conferencing installation from which data is input and or output A data terminal uses data communications equipment DCE to transmit and receive the digital signals it requires MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Terminology Page 5 4 Modem ISDN Terminal Adapter Pool A special type of hardware configuration that combines one or more pairs of DCEs to enable communication between modems and ISDN terminal adapter data stations A pair consists of one modem and one ISDN terminal adapter Modem ISDN terminal adapter pools are set up in one of two ways depending on the type of data station being used to send data analog to digital or digital to analog For more information about these pools see application note MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Modem Pooling Data Hunt Group DHG A data calling group typically used to distribute calls to modem ISDN terminal adapter pools that have more than one pair of DCEs For more information about DHGs see the application note MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Modem Pooling Video System Equipment that allows desktop or group video conferencing This equipment connects either directly or through an ISDN terminal adapter to an MLX jack on the MERLIN LE
308. em Selecting Line Trunk Options According to the requirements of the customer choose from available options for the incoming trunks connected to the system Assigning Lines Trunks to User Extensions Assign lines trunks to telephones and DLCs Assigning Telephone Buttons Assign buttons to Hybrid PBX mode telephones to Key and Behind Switch mode telephones and to DLCs NOTE If the switch is part of a private network the following tasks must also be performed to plan for lines trunks Labeling the Network Trunks PRI Switch Type Legend PBX or Legend NTWK and Switch Identifiers See the Network Reference for information This chapter contains instructions for completing each of these tasks You should become familiar with line trunk types and options as well as the requirements of the system before you attempt to perform the procedures in this chapter It is also critical that you understand what services the local telephone company can provide MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Identifying Line Trunk Jacks Page 3 2 Identifying Line Trunk Jacks Identifying line trunk jacks consists of the following tasks 1 Determining which line trunk jack types are available according to the types of modules in the control unit 2 Matching incoming trunks to the jacks that support them 3 Designating jacks for auxiliary equipment if any This section c
309. em Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Assigning Telephone Buttons Page 3 58 24 26 C4 eS c 10 cc Ls LL E MLX 28D 78 13 LL C MLX 20L O T C cy O 6 co co MLX 10 or ML X 10DP Key Mode Up to 8 personal line Behind Switch Mode buttons are assigned One prime line button beginning with button 3 is assigned to button 3 Figure 3 4 Factory Set Assignment Telephones Key and Behind Switch Modes MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Assigning Telephone Buttons Page 3 59 D 34 BUTTON 22 BUTTON 10 BUTTON _ 5 BUTTON s L1L1 P1 ET ET EI ESI EI P1 ET ET 0 e 3 L1 DI D L1 DIDI ETE EH EI D ET E D ET ET S N BEI s 8 22 L1 DIEI ETE PH EI D ET E D ET ET Figure3 5 Factory Set Assignment Analog Multiline Telephones Key and Behind Switch Modes Although equipme
310. em is renumbered the AUDIX Voice Power channel assignments should be deleted through AUDIX Voice Power for the extensions being renumbered When the renumbering for the system is complete AUDIX Voice Power channels for the renumbered extensions should be added Figure 2 2 through Figure 2 4 list the extension numbers according to the three numbering plans 2 digit 3 digit and Set Up Space The numbers are arranged in blocks according to the first digit The type of equipment or feature they are assigned is shown in the block The shaded areas of the table indicate extension numbers automatically assigned by the system The unshaded areas indicate the extension numbers available for reassignment Use the appropriate plan specific instructions that follow to mark Forms 2a and 2b with extension number assign ments MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 34 For detailed information about the numbering plans including considerations constraints and feature interactions that may affect selection see the Feature Reference gt NOTE If the system includes Call Management System CMS it assigns extension numbers to agent splits The CMS agent extension numbers must be two digits Therefore use the 2 digit numbering plan for CMS For more information see the CMS documentation 0 Operator Console
311. emember to do so Always use the longest length password allowed Establish well controlled procedures for resetting passwords Limit the number of invalid attempts to access a voice mailbox to five or less Monitor access to the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System dial up maintenance port Change the access password regularly and issue it only to authorized personnel Disconnect the maintenance port when not in use However this eliminates Lucent Technologies 24 hour maintenance surveillance capability and may result in additional maintenance costs Create a communications system management policy concerning employee turnover and include these suggestions Delete all unused voice mailboxes in the voice mail system f a terminated employee had Remote Access calling privileges and a personal authorization code remove the authorization code immediately f barrier codes and or authorization codes were shared by the terminated employee these should be changed immediately Regularly back up your MERLIN LEGEND Communications System files to ensure a timely recovery should it be required Schedule regular off site backups Keep the Remote Maintenance Device turned off when not in use by Lucent Technologies or your authorized dealer Limit transfers to registered subscribers only Use the Security Violations Notification options Mailbox Lock or Warning Message to alert you of any mailbox break in attempts Invest
312. ent often a ine trunk constituting a telecommunications path between the system and the telephone company central office CO Default state of a device feature when an optional setting is not programmed by the user or system manager facsimile Scanning and transmission of a graphic image over a telecommunications facility or the resulting reproduced image or the machine that does the scanning and transmitting Fax handling and processing application available with AUDIX Voice Power Federal Communications Commission Function or service provided by the system Code entered on a dialpad to activate a feature Prior to Release 3 0 a circuit pack inserted into the processor module used to provide system features and replaced when the system is upgraded Display screen on MLX display telephones provides quick access to commonly used features Attachment to the AC power cord and ground wire of the carrier power supply for compliance with FCC part 15 requirements Beginning with Release 3 0 a type of read only memory provided on the processor module used to supply system features Copper foil sheet for power units used to prevent excessive noise on the module Condition of the system during certain programming or maintenance procedures system prevents initiation of new calls See FX A digital transmission facility consisting of at least one and fewer than 24 DSO channels using robbed b
313. er for data only calls through a modem or ISDN terminal adapter MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary local loop local user logical ID loop start line Issue 1 August 1998 Page GL 18 The two way connection between a customer s premises and the central office CO In a private network a person whose extension is connected to the local control unit Unique numeric identifier for each extension and line trunk jack in the system control unit Line on which a closure between the tip and ring leads is used to originate or answer a call High voltage 20 Hz AC ringing current from the central office signals an incoming call Lucent Application with equipment that connects to one or more Technologies tip ring extension jacks and automatically answers Attendant incoming calls with a recorded announcement directs calls in response to touch tones This application is no longer available M Magic on Hold A Lucent Technologies Music On Hold enhancement that promotes a company s products or services Mbps megabits per second Megacom The AT amp T tariffed digital WATS offering for outward calling Megacom 800 memory card MERLIN Identifier MERLIN LEGEND Mail MERLIN MAIL Messaging 2000 MFM The AT amp T tariffed digital 800 offering for inward calling Storage medium similar in function to a floppy disk that allows information to be added to or obt
314. er networks for national and international digital connectivity Data communications device that allows connection between an RS 232 DTE device and the control unit by MLX extension jacks on the 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module Integrated Services Digital Network terminal adapter A device that connects the communications system with data terminal equipment DTE A type of data station that includes an ISDN terminal adapter as its DCE It may also include an MLX telephone for simultaneous voice and data ISDN terminal adapter data only station These data stations connect to MLX extension jack modules for digital transmission of data over 051 facility Physical connection point to the system for a telephone line trunk or other device Also called port MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Glossary Page GL 17 K kbps kilobits per second Key mode One of three modes of system operation in which the system uses personal lines on line buttons for outside calls with a separate interface ICOM buttons for inside calling See also Behind Switch mode Bnd Hybrid PBX mode a L LAN local area network Arrangement of interconnected personal computers or terminals sometimes accessing a host computer sometimes sharing resources such as files and printers LDN Listed Directory Number LED light emitting diode Semiconductor devi
315. er with the customer representative who did You also may want to conduct a premises check to determine whether any additional equipment is required MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 1 Before You Begin Confirming the Location of the Control Unit Page 1 2 Confirming the Location of the Control Unit Before installation a room closet or other area must be designated where the system control unit can be mounted on the wall The area must meet the environmental requirements in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Environmental Requirements Conditions Requirements Distances Within 25 cable feet 7 6 m of the network interface cannot be installed outdoors Within 1000 cable feet 304 8 m of telephones Within 5 cable feet 1 5 m of a dedicated AC power outlet one outlet for every carrier Heat Fully loaded basic carrier 500 Btu hr 35 cal sec Dissipation Fully loaded 2 carrier 1000 Btu hr 70 cal sec Fully loaded 3 carrier 1500 Btu hr 105 cal sec Power Basic carrier 117 VAC 60Hz 5 160W 5 4 amps 2 carrier 117 60Hz 5 320W 10 8 amps 3 carrier 117 60Hz 5 480W 16 2 amps one properly grounded outlet needed for each carrier Additional outlets may be needed if installing printers and PCs Temperature 40 through 104 4 through 40 C optimal temperature 60 F 16 C Humidity 20 through 80 relative humidity Ventilation Allow at least 1 in
316. ere are jacks available on the module for the new line trunk auxiliary equipment or telephone by referring to Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks or Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks Do one of the following m If there are sufficient jacks available on an existing module plan to connect the added line trunk equipment or telephone to them Skip to Step 6 m If no jacks are available proceed to Step 4 Plan the placement of the new module required to support the line trunk auxiliary equipment or telephone by reviewing the guidelines that follow and deciding where the new module should be placed m The power supply module must be placed in the far left slot of each carrier m processor module must be installed in Slot 0 of the basic carrier m Line trunk and or extension modules can be placed in any order in Slots 1 through 17 with two expansion carriers with the following conditions Install the modules in each carrier from left to right with no empty slots between modules Ifthe system includes a the 008 module that supports it must be the first extension module in the control unit Place all older 008 OPT modules Apparatus Codes 517 28 517 28 012 T R modules Apparatus Codes from 517C13 517F13 in carriers with ring generators installed in the power supply module Current versions of 008 OPT modules Apparatus Code 517D28 012 T R modules Apparatus Code
317. erencing system consists of a video camera an audio unit and a display screen such as a television that connect to a coder decoder CODEC The CODEC converts the analog voice and video signals into digital form for transmission and converts the digital signals received back into analog form The CODEC may use either a BRI interface to connect directly to an available MLX port on a 408 MLX or 008 MLX module or a v 35 interface to connect to an ISDN terminal adapter such as the Ascend Pipeline 25PX or 50 which in turn connects to an MLX port gt NOTE When using the 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module for data or video you must not use Version 29 of the module Use an earlier or later version When the group videoconferencing system uses a BRI interface or an ISDN terminal adapter that supports 2B Data the video system may be connected to a single MLX port that has been configured as a 2B Data port This allows the video system to use both B Channels assigned to the MLX port thereby achieving the high speed data connection necessary to support video If the group videoconferencing system uses a v 35 interface to connect to an ISDN terminal adapter that does not support 2B Data then two ISDN terminal adapters are required each connecting to a separate MLX port that has been configured as a 1B Data port in order to achieve a 2B Data connection gt NOTE Do not connect equipment such as an ISDN terminal adapter or G4 fax machi
318. erminal Set Ringing Option to No Ring for each personal line on which calls are not received Enable Ringing Idle Line Preference Q Alert device type Used as Calls in Queue Alarm device for calling groups Ext No les Q Other Auto Line Selection Optional Features Button Diagram Q See Master Extension Auto Callback Q Off Q On Call Waiting OQ Off Q On Coverage Inside Off Orig Only a On ing Del Cover Ring Delay Primary Cover Ring Delay Voice 2Rings SA Icom Q rings 1 6 Ring Secondary Cover Ring Delay 2Rings Note Lines 1 through 8 only default on a telephone when rings 1 6 the system is in Key mode MESE Group Coverage Ring Delay Q 3 Rings rings 1 9 Factory Setting Form 4e 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 4f Ee Tip Ring Equipment Make a copy of this form for each device Logical ID Extension No Person or Location Type Optional Features Single line telephone Auto Callback Answering machine Of Used as delay announcement device for calling groups 4 On Ext No Call Waiting SS Off c ae Q On FAX machine C isiad overage Inside Q Other of Adjuncts O one Speakerphone Ej Hearing red HotLine garing impairs andse o Of Q
319. ermine which users senders need Individual Coverage gt NOTE Single line telephones cannot be receivers and QCCs cannot be senders or receivers 2 Onthe appropriate form for each receiver telephone Form 4b 4d 4f 5a or 5b locate an available button on the Button Diagram and write Ind Cover and the sender s extension number Write to indicate primary or 5 to indicate secondary Individual Coverage MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Group Assigned Features Page 4 30 Group Coverage In Group Coverage senders are organized into groups and calls received by any member of the group are sent to a receiver Any type of telephone excluding QCCs can be a member of a coverage group however no individual sender can be a member of more than one group A maximum of 32 coverage groups can be set up and there is no limit to the number of senders in each group Three types of receivers can be programmed calling groups or the QCC queue and or multiline telephones gt NOTE Group Coverage can be used alone or can be set up to work with either pri mary or secondary Individual Coverage or both This allows callers to get personal attention from the primary and or secondary Individual Coverage receiver and backup from Group Coverage For example a receiver such as a secretary can have a Primary Cover button to provide Individual Cov erage for a sender
320. ers Senders Extension Nos Extension Nos Extension Nos Extension Nos Receiverst Receiverst Receiverst Receiverst Q Calling Group Q Calling Group Q Group Group or or Q QCC queue queuet SEIS EE Bocce 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 Om AI OINI A OIN f a group is the coverage group for AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant System the default is Group No 30 but can be changed write AUDIX FA by the group number and list the extensions of AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant System subscribers see Form 2a maximum of 8 multiline telephones can be used as receivers The QCC queue can also be a receiver for Hybrid PBX mode only but it is not counted in the 8 receiver maximum If a calling group is the receiver it must be the only receiver for a coverage group t Hybrid PBX mode only Form 7c 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 7d Group Calling Maximum 32 groups Make a copy of this form for each group Group Number 1 32 Group ID Factory Set Ext No Renumber to See Form 20 Provide coverage for Coverage Group Numbers Extensions Ext Person or Ext Person or Ext Person or Ext Person or No Location No Location No Location No Location 13 14 16 15 Trunks Pools 3 4 5
321. ersonal line can be used to receive incoming calls A personal line can be used for outgoing calls by selecting the line button on the analog multiline telephone dialing and then activating the modem connected through a GPA On ISDN terminal adapter data stations a personal line can be used to make and receive outside data calls To select the line trunk for an outgoing call the caller dials the line trunk number 801 880 To allow the user at an ISDN terminal adapter data station access to the digital network for making and receiving calls to outside digital data stations assign PRI 1 BRI or T1 Switched 56 including T1 Tie lines using Switched 56 service facilities as personal lines Pool Used when you want the voice and data station to make and receive outside data calls on a specific trunk pool for example a pool with PRI facilities without dialing a dial out code The Pool button is used to make and receive only outside calls Automatic Line Selection should be set to the Pool button in order to place calls on it MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Lines Trunks to Data and Video Stations Page 5 32 gt NOTES 1 Do not assign System Access Voice SA Voice buttons to data communications equipment 2 You must use PRI facilities with a digital data service such as ACCUNET Switched Digital Service a Software Defined Network SD
322. erview 2 33 Set Up Space numbering plan 2 35 Requirements Applications 1 6 Return ring 4 22 Ringing frequency 016 module 2 30 2 32 Issue 1 August 1998 Page IN 13 S Sales and Design Support Center SDSC 3 38 Secondary Cover Ring Delay 4 14 Secondary Dial Tone Timer 2 12 Service Observing 4 16 Service Profile Identifier SPID planning considerations 3 45 planning form instructions 3 45 Set Up Space numbering plan 2 35 Shared Access for Switched Services SASS 3 3 Signaling Direct Inward Dial DID trunks 3 43 Primary Rate Interface PRI 3 31 tie trunks 3 39 Signaling mode T1 service 3 25 Simultaneous voice and data 2 24 Slow dial tone 3 49 Software Defined Network SDN 3 3 Speakerphone 2 27 Special Services Table 3 36 Specifications environmental 1 9 Speed Dial marked system 4 58 marked system and star codes 2 12 4 58 system 4 58 Speed dial marked system and star codes 2 12 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Index Station Message Detail Recording SMDR language 2 9 2 10 options 4 45 Subpatterns 4 66 Supplemental Alert Adapter SAA 2 26 Switchhook flash 3 3 System adding to 6 2 adjuncts 3 9 3 10 consoles 2 7 2 11 date 2 10 extension capacity 2 3 lines trunks capacity 2 2 modifications 6 2 operating conditions 2 7 2 24 2 25 programming 4 2 time 2 10 System Access Ring 5 31 System fe
323. es Support for National ISDN BRI Service This service Hybrid PBX and Key modes provides an alternative to loop start and ground start lines trunks for voice and digital data connectivity to the central office Each of the two B channels bearer channels on a BRI line can carry one voice and one data call at any given time The data speeds on a B channel are up to 28 8 kbps for analog data and up to 64 kbps for digital data which is necessary for videoconferencing and other high speed applications Release 4 0 supports the IOC Package S basic call handling service configuration and Multiline Hunt service configuration on designated CO switches New Control Unit Modules Release 4 0 supports a new NI BRI line trunk module and a higher capacity tip ring module 800 NI BRI Module This new module connects NI BRI trunks to the MERLIN LEGEND system for voice high speed data and video transmission 016 Tip Ring Module This new module supports a 200 extension dial plan by providing 16 ports for tip ring devices Applications that use a tip ring interface can connect to this board All 16 ports can ring simultaneously Four touch tone receivers TTRs are included on the module as well The module s ringing frequency default 20 Hz can be changed through programming to 25 Hz for those locations that require it Downloadable Firmware for the 016 T R and NI BRI Modules The Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PC
324. es and rotary dial pulses Check with the local or long distance telephone company to determine which if any trunks connected to the system are rotary dial trunks Planning Form Instructions In the Outmode Signaling column on Form 2c do one of the following m For touch tone trunks factory setting put a check in the TT column m For rotary dial trunks put a check in R column Toll Type Prefix Required Toll Type allows the system to classify calls as either local or toll based on the number dialed by the user Normally people have to dial a toll call prefix 1 or 0 before dialing the area code and telephone number for a toll call some areas this is not necessary dialing a prefix depends on local telephone company requirements and the type of line trunk used Find out from the local telephone company which trunks require a toll call prefix This information is used by the system when a toll call is placed by an extension on ground start or loop start trunks For reliable toll restriction telephone company trunks must require 1 or O for toll calls Also the Toll Type feature does not apply to tie trunks Planning Form Instructions On Form 2c in the Toll Type Prefix Required for LD column check Yes next to any trunks on which people need to dial a prefix when placing toll calls MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Opt
325. es for Systemwide Use 6d Message Waiting Receivers 6e Allowed Lists 6f Disallowed Lists 6g Call Restriction Assignments and Lists 6h Authorization Codes Pool Dial Out Code Restrictions 7a Call Pickup Groups 7b Group Paging 7 Group Coverage 7d Group Calling 8a System Features 9a Night Service Group Assignment 9b Night Service Outward Restriction 9c Night Service Time Set 10a Label Form Posted Message 10b System Speed Dial 11 Service Observing Group Assignment MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Employee Communication Survey aa Name Room Extension Name of work group Sales Customer Service etc Please answer each question below 1 Doyouregularly use any of the following outside lines Check any that apply Q WATS FX foreign exchange Tie Q None of the above or don t know 2 Are your phone calls covered when you re away from your desk No Yes By whom Doyou want your phone number to appear on another person s phone for screening or covering calls or forany other reasons No Yes Please listthese people 4 Doyou cover phone calls for co workers when they are away from their desks No Yes For whom Which ofthose people should have a button on your phone used exclusively for his or her calls When you are unable to cover calls itis done by Form ECS 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Employee Com
326. etardant backboard Check with the appropriate authorities to ensure that the proper material is provided A template is available 847009206 It shows the layout for mounting equipment It also comes with safety electrical environmental and space requirements for the communications system Table 1 2 Control Unit Space Requirements Carrier Requirements Basic carrier 14 w by 23 h by 12 d 85 6 cm by 58 4 cm by 30 5 cm Basic carrier 1 expansion carrier 25 w by 23 h by 12 d 63 5 cm by 58 4 cm by 30 5 cm Basic carrier 2 expansion carriers 37 w by 23 h by 12 d 94 cm by 58 4 cm by 30 5 cm Backboard Without Systimax 6 w by 3 h by 0 75 d 182 9 cm by 91 4 cm by 1 9 cm With Systimax 7wby4 h 0 75 d 213 4 cm by 121 9 cm by 1 9 cm It is important that the location selected for the control unit meets all of these specifications and that the backboard is in place before installation If the location has already been selected and changes are needed arrange for these changes before installation MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 1 Before You Begin Confirming the Location of the Control Unit Page 1 4 Grounding Requirements Proper grounding of the installation site is essential for correct and safe functioning of the system Grounding protects the system against m Lightning m Power surges m Powercrosses on o
327. ete the Button Diagram page of each copy of Forms 4b 4c 4d 4e and 4f gt NOTE The button diagrams for DLCs Forms 5a and 5b will be completed later a buttons 1 through 27 indicate the types of System Access buttons by circling SA for SA Voice SA Ring or SA Orig Only and writing Ring or Voice or SA Orig Only buttons and writing Shared SA Fool or Fereonal line Then do the following as appropriate m Foran SSA button include the number of the extension with the associated SA button see Form 2a and the button number on that telephone m Fora Pool button include the pool s extension number see m For a personal line button include the telephone number record the line trunk numbers see Form 20 m Indicate whether all but one SA button will be removed from single line telephones on Form 4f b Assign Loudspeaker Page buttons by selecting the button and writing Fage on it If the system includes one or more DLCs proceed to Direct Line Consoles later in this section Otherwise proceed to Chapter 4 to record feature assignments on these forms for each extension MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Assigning Telephone Buttons Page 3 57 Telephones in Key and Behind Switch Mode The line buttons you assign to the telephones or to the adjuncts connected through an MLX telephone using an MFM are the following In
328. etes from the first digit forward m To add digits write the exact digits to enter up to four digits as a prefix for example 7128 The factory setting is blank The system adds the digits to the beginning of the number In the Network Selection Table of the outgoing tables on Form 3b page 7 the dial pattern represents the dial code for specifying a long distance common carrier the asterisks represent the digits in the common carrier identification If the telephone company has directed you to change this information obtain the correct entry from them But note that the dial pattern must come first Entry 1 represents current national standards for specifying long distance carriers asterisks represent the common carrier code wildcard so that anything will match Entry 0 represents the coming national standards The remaining entries are reserved for future use gt NOTE The Network Selection Table and the Special Services Table contain factory settings that reflect U S standards for public telephone network access These factory settings can be modified to conform to other standards However you should not change them unless the telephone company explicitly instructs you to do so In the Special Services Table a Inthe Pattern to Match cell write the exact dial pattern to match No wildcards are permitted b Inthe Operator cell indicate Local Operator OP Presubscribed Operator P or No Operator service none
329. evices in the DHG by dialing one extension number Users access the computer by placing a data call to the extension number for either an ISDN terminal adapter or modem or DHG depending on the user s type of data station that is assigned for communication with the local host computer Planning Form Instructions Record the extension jack assignments for access to a workstation on a LAN on Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks 1 For each digital extension jack used to connect an ISDN terminal adapter Inthe Jack Type column make sure there is a D next to the number for each digital extension b Inthe Person Location or Function column write Terminal Adapter LAN 2 For each basic telephone extension jack you plan to use to connect a modem a Inthe Jack Type column make sure there is a B next to the number for each basic telephone extension jack used to connect a modem b Inthe Person Location or Function column write modem LAN MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Extension Jacks Page 5 26 Video Systems Video systems may connect to an MLX port on the MERLIN LEGEND system either directly through a BRI interface or by way of a v 35 interface and an ISDN terminal adapter Assign each video system that is connected directly to the MLX port or connected to an ISDN terminal adapter that supports 2B Data to
330. f Form 2c do one of the following m Ifajack is used for a special purpose note the purpose For example if the system has Messaging 2000 with fax capability indicate the service by writing one of the following for the appropriate jack For Automated Attendant write AA For Call Answer write CA For Information Service write 15 For Message Drop write MD For Voice Mail write VM For Fax Response write FR m Ifa jack is used for a personal line write the extension number of the telephone Proceed to the next section l Selecting Line Trunk Options MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 11 Selecting Line Trunk Options You can select the following options for the incoming trunks connected to the system QCC Queue Priority Hybrid PBX mode onl m Pools m j Remote Access m 010 Trunks gt NOTE If incoming trunks are part of a private network the Switch Identifier must also be programmed See the Network Reference for information This section contains instructions for selecting line trunk options for incoming trunks In addition because some systems outside of the US have slow dial tones from their local telephone companies this section also includes instructions for compensating for slow dial tone Forms Needed m Form Si Incoming
331. f you select No display this indicates a Marked System Speed Dial number which can override calling restrictions 46 45 penunuoD GOT 170 019184 lt suontorunugulo NITWTAIA 9 401 w104 Code 11 characters maximum Telephone Number 40 digits maximum Name Display Factory Setting If you select No display this indicates a Marked System Speed Dial number which can override calling restrictions penunuoD 401 T O asvapoy urojs s suongorunumuo sCNHOST NITIAN MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 11 Service Observing Group Assignment Make additional copies of this form as needed Maximum 16 Service Observing Groups GepNe copo _ Observer Ext No Observer Ext No Observer Ext No Observer Ext No Warning Tone 0 Yes Warning Tone Q Yes Warning Tone Q Yes Warning Tone O Yes Q No C No No C No Member Member Member Member Name Name Name Name Observer extension must be an MLX telephone but cannot be a QCC or CTI Link The Service Observing button on the Observers telephone must be programmed via Centralized Telephone Prog
332. feature Use Table 2 6 to determine the TTR requirements for the secondary delay announcement devices gt NOTE If no announcement is used on a primary or secondary delay announcement device no TTRs are needed Use Table 2 2 for information on the number of TTRs provided by each type of module and to determine the number of TTRs already supplied Compare the total TTRs needed to the total TTRs already supplied to determine if additional TTRs are required Add a new module if more TTRs are required MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 21 Jack for Primary Operator Position The factory setting for the primary operator position is the lowest extension jack on the first MLX or analog multiline telephone module You cannot change the factory setting for the primary operator position The primary operator position uses two types of operator consoles Direct Line Console DLC Can be assigned to either a digital or analog extension jack Queued Call Console QCC Can be assigned only to a digital extension jack and the MLX 20L is the only telephone that can be used as a QCC If the system includes QCCs the primary operator position must be a QCC Planning Form Instructions Mark jack assignments on Form 2a 1 Do one of the following m Ifthe system uses a system programming console proceed to Step
333. fers a caller to an external telephone number Remote Call Forwarding can be used securely only when the central office provides reliable disconnect sometimes referred to as forward disconnect or disconnect supervision which guarantees that the central office does not return a dial tone after the called party hangs up In most cases the central office facility is a loop start line trunk which does not provide reliable disconnect When loop start lines trunks are used if the calling party stays on the line the central office does return a dial tone at the conclusion of the call enabling the caller to place another call as if it were being placed from your company Ground start trunks provide reliable disconnect and should be used whenever possible Preventive Measures Take the following preventive measures to limit the risk of unauthorized use of the Automated Attendant feature by hackers Do not use Automated Attendant prompts for ARS Codes or Pooled Facility Codes Assign all unused Automated Attendant Selector Codes to zero so that attempts to dial these are routed to the system attendant If Remote Call Forwarding RCF is required MERLIN LEGEND Communications System owners should coordinate with their Lucent Technologies Account Team or authorized dealer to verify the type of central office facility used for RCF If it is a ground start line trunk or ifitis a loop start line trunk and central office reliable disconnect can
334. ffice must match the factory set remote access code 889 or the remote access code assigned to the system in the following procedure 2 Trunks programmed for both remote access and Group Calling will receive remote access treatment only 3 Remote access callers may not log in to a calling group but may call the calling group by dialing the group access number 4 Private network calls may use the Remote Access feature if the remote access code is included in the non local dial plan Planning Form Instructions 1 See Numbering the System in Chapter 2 Review the numbers available in the numbering plan you have selected Before you begin planning remote access to assure that TTRs are available check the Diagram on Form 1 to verify that one or more of the following types of modules are present 400 LS 400 GS LS TTR 008 OPT 800 DID Hybrid PBX mode only 800 GS LS ID 012 T R or 016 T R modules 2 Under the DID and Private Network Tie Trunks heading at the top of Form 3a Incoming Trunks Remote Access do one of the following m keep the factory set access code check Remote Access Code 889 and proceed to Step 3 m To change the factory set access code a Check Renumber to and write the new number on the line provided b Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers write the new number in the Renumber to column of the Remote Access Code section at the bottom of the form Proceed to MERLIN LEGENDCommuni
335. fying existing forms or completing new forms program the modification s following the instructions in System Programming Table 6 2 Adding New Trunks If Adding Complete these Forms Loop start or All columns of Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks ground start trunks DS1 trunks All Columns of Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks and Form 3b Incoming Trunks DS1 Connectivity 100D Module 1 BRI trunks All Columns of Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks and Form 3i Incoming Trunks BRI Options 800 NI BRI Module Tie trunks All columns of Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks and Form 3c Incoming Trunks Tie DID facilities All columns of Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks and Form 3d Incoming Trunks DID Consider revisions to Form 3a Incoming Trunks Remote Access Consider revisions to Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks labels and Forms 3e through 3g for ARS Button Diagram on copies of Forms 4a through 4f and 5a through 5d If a personal line is assigned consider Remote Call Forwarding MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 6 Modifications Adding to the System Page 6 6 Table 6 3 Adding Auxiliary Equipment If Adding Complete Maintenance Alarm Music On Hold Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks Loudspeaker Paging Table 6 4 Adding New Extensions If Adding Co
336. g osition Busy Backup m Operator Hold Timer 3 2 2 e m O O gt P n 9 2 all Types lt Announce Hold Return This section contains instructions to specify whether calls put on hold by a QCC operator stay on hold indefinitely or are returned to the QCC queue after the Hold Timer has expired twice Planning Form Instructions Under the Hold Return heading on Form 6a do one of the following m To indicate that calls stay on hold after the hold timer has expired twice check the Remain on hold factory setting box m To indicate that calls on hold return to the QCC queue after the hold timer has expired twice check the Return to queue box MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Operator Features Page 4 20 Automatic Hold or Release This section contains instructions to specify whether a call that is in progress Call button is automatically put on hold Automatic Hold or disconnected Automatic Release when the operator presses another Call button Planning Form Instructions Under the Automatic Hold or Release heading on Form 6a do one of the following m To specify that calls are automatically disconnected check the Automatic Release box factory setting m Tospecify that calls are automatically put on hold when another Call button is pressed check th
337. g Control Unit Diagram Unit Load ____ Load Total Unit Load Total Power Power Power Supply 9 Supply Supply n Ij t t 9 E 8 ol o ol E N Ir US m 01 02 03 04 05 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 BASIC CARRIER EXPANSION CARRIER EXPANSION CARRIER System Operating Conditions Programming Equipment Language Selection Backup System Programming Console System Automatic Logical ID Ext No English French Spanish Weekly at with SPM software SMDR Daily at Q PCMCIA Memory Card English Q French Spanish Manual System Mode Printer System Consoles Key English Q French Spanish gace s Q Hybrid PBX Automatic Maintenance Busy Behind Switch Q Enable a DLC s Host Dial Codes Disable Transf BEES Maud Set System Date Conference Qv Drop is Second Dial Tone Timer Q Permanent Key 0 5000 ms Factory Setting for system software Factory Setting for hardware Older versions of the 012 and 008 OPT module require a Ring Generator on the carrier power supply module Current versions of the 012 and 008 OPT mod
338. g do one of the following m Tokeep the factory set delay check the 3 rings box m To change the factory set delay check the second box and write the number of rings 1 9 in the space provided MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 16 Service Observing This section contains instructions for setting up Service Observing so that a designated observer can monitor a call at any station that is a member of the Service Observer s group Service Observing is available only in Release 6 1 and later systems gt NOTE Service Observing may be subject to federal state or local laws rules or regulations or require the consent of one or both of the call parties You must check in your jurisdiction and comply with all applicable laws rules and regulations before using this feature Failure to comply may result in severe penalties You can establish up to 16 Service Observing groups on a system Each group consists of one Service Observer and a list of the stations up to the system maximum of 200 that the observer is allowed to monitor A warning tone is programmed on a per group basis to provide an audible indication that a station is being observed gt NOTES 1 Any MLX station except QCC or CTI link may be a Service Observing station 2 A Service Observing button must be assigned to the observers MLX telephone
339. g Conditions Page 2 8 2 Doone ofthe following 3 m If you checked System Programming Console proceed to Step m If you checked PC with SPM Software skip to the next section System Mode To change the factory set system programming jack write in the new logical ID using the information from the Control Unit Diagram If you want the system programming jack to be different from that of system operators change the programming assignment to any one of extension jacks 2 through 5 on the first MLX module in the control unit the lowest jack on the module is extension jack 1 You fill in the extension number of the jack later System Mode The mode of operation determines how outside lines trunks are provided to users the types of operator consoles allowed the features available and how they work Each system is registered with the Federal Communications Commission FCC to operate as a Private Branch Exchange PBX Hybrid or Key system factory setting However you can program the system to operate in any of the three modes Hybrid PBX Key or Behind Switch Planning Form Instructions Under the System Mode heading in the System Operating Conditions section of Form 1 page 2 check one of the following If the system will operate in Key mode check Key This is the factory setting If need be this mode can be changed to Hybrid PBX mode at another time If the system will operate in Hybrid PBX mode check Hybrid PB
340. g desktop video equipment refer to Marketing Announcement Letter GBCS 96 05 001 Multi Vendor Desktop Videoconferencing Offer When using the 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module for data or video you must use Version 28 of the module Following an explanation of the terminology used in this chapter and an overview of data communications this chapter contains instructions for planning data and video communications Some procedures involve making additional entries on the forms already completed earlier in this guide others involve filling out data forms as described in later in this chapter Instructions for using the data and video communications capabilities are contained in the Data and Video Reference MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Terminology Page 5 3 Terminology The following terms are used in this chapter Data Station A hardware configuration used to send and receive data and sometimes voice signals depending on the equipment The configuration includes data terminal equipment DTE for input and output of data and data communications equipment DCE to enable the transmission of data over digital or analog telephone lines and trunks There are two types of data stations Modem Data Station Connects to the control unit through an analog extension jack or a T R jack and requires a modem Analog data stations can support analog
341. ge during the day gt NOTE Private network calls act like outside calls and do not go to voice mail when VMS Coverage Off is activated When the Coverage control option is disabled Night Service status has no effect on programmed VMS Coverage Off buttons Planning Form Instructions In the Coverage Control section of Form 9c Night Service Options do one of the following m keep the factory setting of disabled check the Disabled box m To change the factory setting and enable the Coverage Control option check the Enabled box MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 57 Labeling Labeling enhances the capability of display telephones used with the system The following types of labels appear on display telephones m Extensions and calling groups m Posted Messages m System Directory System Speed Dial Labels for extensions are described in Chapter 2 Control Unit Configuration labels for lines trunks are described in Chapter 4 Features and labels for calling groups are described earlier in this chapter This section contains instructions for assigning labels for Posted Message and System Directory System Speed Dial Posted Message This section contains instructions for allowing users to post a message telling callers who have display telephones why they cannot answer There can be as many as 20 messages Mes
342. ge heading do one of the following m Forno overflow coverage check the No box m Todesignate overflow coverage by another calling group check the second box and write the calling group number of the overflow calling group in the space provided m designate that overflow coverage will be provided by QCC operators check the third box and write the QCC LDN queue extension number in the space provided 11 Under the Overflow Threshold heading do one of the following m Tokeep the factory setting check the 1 call box m To change the threshold check the second box and write the number of calls up to 99 in the space provided MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Group Assigned Features Page 4 40 12 Under the Overflow Threshold Time heading do one of the following m To keep the factory setting and disable the Overflow Threshold Time check the 0 seconds box m To change the threshold check the second box and write the maximum number of seconds 1 900 calls wait in the queue in the space provided 13 Under the Prompt Based Overflow heading do one of the following m To keep the factory setting and disable the Prompt Based Overflow feature check the Disabled box m To enable Prompt Based Overflow check the Enabled box 14 Under the Group Type heading do one of the following m To keep the factory setting of no automatic login check
343. gies or its authorized reseller within one year of the Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order Lucent Technologies will without charge to you repair or replace at its option the system components that are not in good working order Repair or replacement parts may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis If Lucent Technologies determines that your system cannot be repaired or replaced Lucent Technologies will remove the system and at your option refund the purchase price of your system or apply the purchase price towards the purchase of another Lucent Technologies system If you purchased your system directly from Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will perform warranty repair in accordance with the terms and conditions of the specific type of Lucent Technologies maintenance coverage you selected If you purchased your system from Lucent Technologies authorized reseller contact your reseller for the details of the maintenance plan applicable to your system This Lucent Technologies limited warranty covers damage to the system caused by power surges including power surges due to lightning The following will not be deemed to impair the good working order of the system and Lucent Technologies will not be responsible under the limited warranty for damages resulting from Failure to follow Lucent Technologies installation operation or maintenance instructions m Unauthorized syste
344. git Password for SPM Release 4 0 has increased system security by requiring a 7 digit password for system managers or technicians who use System Programming and Maintenance SPM to perform programming or the Trunk Test procedure This password is for use in addition to a remote access barrier code MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 3 1 Enhancements March 1996 Page Release 3 1 Enhancements March 1996 Release 3 1 includes all Release 3 0 functionality plus the enhancements listed below Call Restriction Checking for Star Codes Beginning with Release 3 1 a system manager can add star codes to Allowed and Disallowed Lists to help prevent toll fraud Star codes typically dialed before an outgoing call enable telephone users to obtain special services provided by the central office CO For example in many areas a telephone user can dial before a telephone number to disable central office supplied caller identification at the receiving party s telephone You must contract with your telephone service provider to have these codes activated When users dial star codes the system s calling restrictions determine whether the codes are allowed If they are allowed the system s calling restrictions are reset and the remaining digits that the users dial are checked against the calling restrictions
345. gital or modem data stations including video systems A DS1 facility connects to the jack on a 100D module in the control unit Even though there is only one physical jack the 100D module supports up to 24 logical endpoints for voice and data calls each DSO channel in the DS1 signal corresponds to a trunk or logical ID A 051 facility provides either T1 including T1 Switched 56 for digital data video calls or PRI access T1 factory setting The 24 channels on a T1 facility can be programmed individually in any combination to emulate a loop start ground start E amp M tie DID or Switched 56 digital data trunk so a single 100D module can replace 24 outside lines trunks When T1 Switched 56 service is used high speed video connections at data rates of 56 kbps per channel 112 kbps for 2B Data are possible PRI The standard format for ISDN services provided by connection to a 5ESS central office CO switch or a 4ESS or DEFINITY toll switch PRI facilities provide several benefits including increased speed of data calls to an outside destination INFO 2 automatic call identification ANI service dynamic B channel assignment improved toll restriction reliable indication of far end disconnect and improved SMDR Twenty three channels can be programmed for individual services Channel 24 is reserved for signaling purposes PRI facilities may also be used for high speed video calls at data rates of up to 64 kbps per B channel
346. gnaling Mode Q ESF Preferred Q Common Channel Required for PRI Q D4 May be used if required by local Local telephone company Synchronization Timing Loop Default Q Local Switch Type PRI Service Only Q 4 55 Legend NTWK 5ESS Q Legend PBX DMS 250 DMS 100 DXE600 All fields required for presale MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 T1 PRI Planner Continued HEN Module 3 Service Ordered or Planned Q PRI m Frame Format ESF Preferred Q D4 May be used if required by local telephone company Switch Type PRI Service Only Q 4 55 Legend NTWK 5ESS Q Legend PBX DMS 250 DMS 100 DXE600 Line Coding Suppression Q B8ZS Preferred AMI ZCS Line Signaling Mode Common Channel Required for PRI Local Synchronization Timing Loop Default Q Local MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 1 PRI Planner Continued 100D MODULE 1 SLOT Approximate Distance CSU CONTROL UNIT 100D MODULE 2 SLOT Approximate Distance CSU DS1 Planning Map 100D MODULE 3 SLOT Approximate Distance CSU O Acculink 3150 O Acculink 3150 Acculink 3150 L1 L1 L1 Other None Connection 1 O CO L PBX PRI T1 Emulated Trunks Tie S56 Data Services Digital Transmission Facility gt Primary Synchronization Source Secondary Synchr
347. h as area code state or time of call Device connected to a basic telephone jack and used at an unattended extension or front desk disk operating system A device that can be installed between systems connected by tandem PRI trunks or T1 emulated tandem tie trunks to allow fractional use of the facility that is use of fewer than 23 of the PRI B channels or fewer than 24 of the T1 channels In a PRI facility the equipment must never drop Channel 24 the D channel All channels must still be programmed and all count towards the system maximum of 80 lines Digital Signal 0 Single 64 kbps voice or data channel Digital Signal 1 Bitoriented signaling interface that multiplexes twenty four 64 kbps channels into a single 1 544 Mbps stream Digital Subscriber Line A Digital Subscriber Line provides full duplex service on a single twisted metallic pair 2 wire at a rate sufficient to support ISDN Basic Rate Access Direct Station Selector 60 button adjunct that enhances the call handling capabilities of an MLX 20L or MLX 28D telephone used as an operator console data terminal equipment Equipment that makes the endpoints in a connection over a data connection for example a data terminal personal computer host computer or printer dual tone multifrequency signaling Touch tone signaling from telephones using the voice transmission path DTMF signaling provides 12 distinct signals each representing a dialed digit o
348. he LED lights steadily gt NOTE A DSS Direct Station Selector button that is used as a Calls in Queue Alarm button can only indicate two threshold levels either by flashing or by lighting steadily If a calling group must use this type of Calls in Queue Alarm button only two threshold levels should be programmed If all three thresholds are set to the same value the result is one threshold only with LED state either off or on steady If two values are the same then the result is two alarm levels flash steady The factory setting is one call for all three thresholds with LED states of off and steady An external alert only signals when the number of calls in the queue meets or exceeds the programmed Threshold 3 value MLX 5 and MLX 5D Telephones The MLX 5 nondisplay and MLX 5D display telephones are compatible with all System releases The display telephone includes a 2 line by 24 character display and both telephones come with 5 line buttons In systems prior to Release 5 0 the MLX 5 and MLX 5D telephones are treated as MLX 10 and MLX 10D telephones respectively As of Release 5 0 the system recognizes the MLX 5 and MLX 5D telephones as 5 button telephones If these telephones are connected to communications system releases prior to 5 0 they are recognized by the communications system as 10 button telephones MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases
349. he System Operating Conditions section of Form 1 page 2 do one of the following m Tokeep the factory setting no maintenance busy state check Disable m To enable Automatic Maintenance Busy check Enable Set System Date The system date is the month day and year shown on display telephones and SMDR reports For information on SMDR see System Features in Chapter 4 Error reports used by authorized technicians for maintenance also show the system date and time These sections on the planning form remind you to set the system date when you perform the initial programming for the system Planning Form Instructions Check Yes under the Set System Date heading on Form 1 as a reminder to set the current date MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Recording System Operating Conditions Page 2 11 Backup Backup makes a copy of the customized system data on a translation memory card A backup is made after each system upgrade service technician visit or major system reconfiguration gt NOTE If Automatic Backup is used the customer must ensure that a valid PCMCIA Translation card is in the processor slot at the time of the backup Otherwise the Automatic Backup feature will be canceled and the customer must reset it Planning Form Instructions Check Automatic if weekly or daily backup procedures are planned Record the day a
350. he appropriate feature for the system Planning Form Instructions 1 Form 7a holds the programming information for eight Call Pickup groups Make additional copes of the form if more groups are planned Review the analysis of question 10 on the Employee Communication Survey and determine the number of call pickup groups needed maximum of 30 2 Foreach group write the group number in the Group Number space Start with 1 and number the groups sequentially 3 Write the name of a group such as Customer Service in the Group ID space see the survey analysis 4 Write the extension number for each group member in the Ext No column see 5 Write each group member s name or location in the Person or Location column see Form 2a Group Paging This section contains instructions for setting the system to allow users to make voice announcements that are heard by a particular group of employees with speakerphones or by everyone who has a speakerphone You can assign six paging groups of selected employees such as secretarial pools committee members or departments who need to hear announcements Each group can have as many as 10 extension numbers The seventh paging group is factory set to page all extension numbers This group is useful if the system does not have a loudspeaker paging system The system automatically reserves extension numbers 793 799 for paging groups Extension 799 is the Page All group Decide whether t
351. he digits 0 through 9 in the same row as the pool number in the column under the Other Digits heading See the Other Digits example below in Figure 4 5 These special access or account codes can range from a single digit such as 9 to a maximum of 20 digits Because calls to the 15 area codes shown on Figure 4 4 should be placed on the cross country WATS lines trunks when all the northeastern WATS lines trunks are busy the number of the cross country WATS pool 890 is used in both cases An FRL of 4 is assigned to restrict some users from using cross country WATS lines trunks MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 68 Example If a business uses a different long distance company for calls to nine area codes in Canada accessing the alternate long distance company lines requires getting a local line and dialing seven digits The completed form for the Area Code Table that routes these calls to the alternate long distance company lines is shown in Figure 4 5 Form 3f Automatic Route Selection Tables Maximum 16 Tables Make a copy for each table TableNo 2 Type of Table Q 6 Digit Area Code Q Exchange Q 1 7 dialing from Q within area code Q not within area code Area Code Exchanges 001 413 021 041 061 081 002 617 022 042 062 082 003 2025 023 043 063 083 004 508 024 044 064 084 005 401 025 045 065
352. he network Procedure whereby saved and archived system programming is reinstated on the system from a floppy disk or memory card See Restricted data channels do not allow the transmission of occurrences of more than seven contiguous zero bits See also unrestricted data channel Circuit pack added to the power supply that generates a high voltage 20 30 Hz signal to ring a telephone Cable that runs between floors in a multistory building and connects wiring closets Physical interface specified by the Electronics Industries Association EIA that transmits and receives asynchronous data at distances of up to 50 feet 15 m Signaling in which the least significant bit of every sixth frame per channel is used for signaling in that channel read only memory Computer memory that can be read but cannot be changed MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Glossary Page GL 24 5 SAA Supplemental Alert Adapter Device that permits alerting equipment to be connected to an analog multiline telephone jack so that people working in noisy or remote areas of a building can be alerted to incoming calls SA buttons Telephone buttons that provide access to both inside and satellite system screen pop SDN series configuration Service Observing SID signaling simplex signaling single line telephone slot SMDR SMDR printer Software
353. hed Network ASN Services be provided through a 1 or PRI facility Megacom WATS Megacom 800 Software Defined Network SDN and MultiQuest PRI also supports Call by Call Service Selection and some ACCUNET switched digital services T1 supports Shared Access for Switched Services SASS and ACCUNET Switched Digital Service or other circuit switched data service at 56 kbps Both support Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System supports Centrex service with loop start lines only The system does not support a timed switchhook flash with ground start trunks or ground start emulation on DS1 facilities in any mode of operation Hybrid PBX Key or Behind Switch MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Identifying Line Trunk Jacks Page 3 4 3 The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System does not support timed switchhook flash with NI 1 BRI lines Pressing the Recall button MERLIN LEGEND telephone will be ignored If the Recall button is stored as part of an Auto Dial string it will not be sent out over an NI 1 BRI line or stored for Last Number Dial or Saved Number Dial when calling on an NI 1 BRI line The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System does not support BRI features such as Local Area Signaling Services LASS CO Transfer and other Centrex offerings Trunks used for incoming caller line
354. hone Buttons Page 3 61 Behind Switch Mode Use the following guidelines to assign buttons for a system in Behind Switch mode gt NOTE For adjuncts connected using an MFM you should change the Button 2 assignment to ICOM Orig Only and remove the Button 3 assignment For Behind Switch mode with multiline telephones m You can assign additional lines and any outside lines connected directly to the control unit including special purpose lines m If aloudspeaker paging system is to be connected to the control unit include a programmed Loudspeaker Paging button to make announcements over the loudspeaker system To make an announcement users press the button and speak into the handset They do not need to dial the extension of the loudspeaker paging system For Behind Switch mode with single line telephones analog modems fax machines or any other devices connected to an 012 T R 016 T R or 008 OPT module or to an MFM you can assign additional lines and any outside lines connected directly to the control unit including special purpose lines Planning Form Instructions 1 Using the guidelines above for Key and Behind Switch modes select the types of buttons to assign to each telephone 2 Complete the Button Diagram page of each copy of Forms 4b 4d 4e 4f and 5c by doing one of the following m keep the factory set assignments proceed to Step m To change the factory set assignments skip to Step 4 3 Tokeep
355. ial Plan uninterruptible power supply unit load unmonitored extension non local dial plan A dial plan that allows a caller at any extension in a private network to dial the same number of digits to reach any other extension in the private network even if the originating extension is physically connected to one communications system and the terminating extension is physically connected to a different communications system The practice of numbering of extension ranges remote access codes or other system components to avoid routing conflicts in network or local calling For example Extension 441 is unique when compared to Extension 4410 However it is ambiguous because a system routes as soon as it matches the digits sent for a call with the digits in a local plan or in a non local dial plan extension range When a caller dials 4410 a system routes the call to Extension 441 immediately without considering the last dialed digit See UDP See Measure of the power load drain of a module telephone or adjunct An extension for which no CTI application is receiving call information See also CT link jand monitored extension MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary unrestricted data channel Issue 1 August 1998 Page GL 28 Unrestricted data channels also called clear data channels allow the transmission of occurrences of more than seven contiguous zero bits If an
356. ibuted reports so they do not reveal password or trunk access code information m Keep the voice messaging system Remote Maintenance Device turned off Limiting Outcalling When Outcalling is used to contact subscribers who are off site use the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Allowed Lists and Disallowed Lists or Automatic Route Selection features to minimize toll fraud If the Outcalling feature will not be used outward restrict all voice messaging system ports If Outcalling will be used ports not used for Outcalling should be Outward Restricted for MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging Systems port 2 on a 2 port system port 4 on a 4 port system ports 5 and 6 on a 6 port system for MERLIN LEGEND MAIL Voice Messaging Systems port 7 of the system s module Use Outward Restriction Toll Restrictions Allowed Lists Disallowed Lists and Facility Restrictions Levels as appropriate to minimize the possibility of toll fraud MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability Page A 20 Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability Lucent Technologies warrants to you the customer that your MERLIN LEGEND Communications System will be in good working order on the date Lucent Technologies or its authorized reseller delivers or installs the system whichever is later Warranty Date If you notify Lucent Technolo
357. ictions in this manner Marked System Speed Dial entries entries that do not display are not affected by the Second Dial Tone Timer setting If the Central Office does not immediately supply dial tone when a star code is entered and a Marked System Speed Dial entry uses star codes then the appropriate number of pauses each 1 5 seconds must be programmed in the entry following each star code Planning Form Instructions Under the Second Dial Tone Timer heading enter the desired value Valid entries are 0 5000 ms in increments of 200 ms The factory setting is 0 Applications Several call handling and management applications can be used with the system including voice mail and messaging call accounting and reporting and call management distribution and reporting This section contains instructions for noting those applications that will be used with this system A CAUTION General information about these applications is contained in the Feature Reference However to ensure proper service you must review the documentation provided with the application itself Planning Form Instructions On Form 1 pages 3 and 4 1 Check the name of each application that will be connected to the system 2 For each application name you check you may want to include pertinent information in the Notes section For example you can note the version of the application installed at the customer s site MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release
358. identally Privacy is automatic for data calls on ISDN terminal adapter data stations and on analog voice and modem data stations Privacy is activated manually on modem data only stations System Speed Dial This feature allows quick dialing of numbers that are used often systemwide The dialing sequence requires a dial out code for outside calls The System Speed Dial feature is programmed systemwide for both voice and data stations Follow the instructions earlier in this book to assign System Speed Dial codes to data station users NOTE Certain system voice features interfere with data connections The following system features must be disabled for the data station m Voice Announce m Call Waiting m Automatic Callback For detailed information about these features refer to the Feature Reference For information on planning for features not described in this section use the guidelines presented in the appropriate sections earlier in this book Forms Needed m Form 5c MFM Adjunct DLC MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Features to Data Stations Page 5 37 Pool Dial Out Code Hybrid PBX Mode Only Use these instructions only if the system is operating in Hybrid PBX mode The factory setting is for all extensions including data stations to be restricted from using all dial out access codes You can unrestrict data stations
359. identification ICLID service should not have any equipment other than the MERLIN LEGEND line port connected to them Connecting other equipment such as alarms autodialers and so on may result in distorted or lost ICLID data Trunks assigned as either the system Music on Hold or External Page Port cannot be assigned as a Group Calling trunk LS ID Delay Option The LS ID Delay option is available through the 800 GS LS ID module and is programmed for each trunk It prevents applications and adjuncts from answering before the Caller ID information is processed Use the LS ID Delay option only if the following conditions apply If the adjunct or application cannot be programmed to answer on the second or later ring see the documentation for the adjunct or application If the first option applies as with headsets using Auto Answer All and line buttons receiving Caller ID cannot be programmed for Delay Ring for example auto attendants gt NOTES 1 Itis recommended that trunks with the LS ID Delay option be used as incoming trunks only If no delay is programmed the caller may hear one or two extra bursts of ringback while the person receiving the call has not yet heard a ring If the option is programmed on a two way trunk the system will not seize a trunk from the pool for an outgoing call when that trunk is receiving an incoming call Use the LS ID Delay option if the adjunct or application does not al
360. ie trunks are connected directly to a system that uses type 5 signaling and is located near this system check 5 gt NOTE When connecting a MERLIN LEGEND switch to a DEFINITY switch use the Type 5 signaling type 5 To select dial mode a Under the Inmode heading check either the Touch Tone column or Rotary column factory setting for each incoming only and each two way tie trunk Use Touch Tone for private networks gt NOTES 1 If you have checked the Incoming or two way column for a tie trunk s direction and Immediate for its incoming signaling type you cannot use the Touch Tone setting for Inmode 2 Touch Tone outmode can be used with Outtype Immediate trunks but Touch Tone inmode cannot be used with Intype Immediate Trunks b Under the Outmode heading check either the Touch Tone column or the Rotary column factory setting for each outgoing only and each two way tie trunk 6 Toindicate whether the system provides a dial tone for people calling in on a tie trunk check one of the following for each tie trunk under the Dial Tone heading m Ifthe system provides a dial tone check Remote factory setting Use this setting for private networks m If the system does not provide a dial tone check Local 7 For Answer Supv Time do one of the following m To keep the factory setting check the 300 column Use this setting for private networks m To change to a new value write the new value 20 to 4800 ms
361. ifferent module to provide primary clock synchronization m Enter the slot and or DSL number BRI only under Primary Clock Synchronization m Under the Source subheading check Loop to indicate that the System uses the clock of the far end connection factory setting or Local to indicate the clock is free running 100D modules only gt NOTE The only option for an 800 NI BRI module is loop which is automatically assigned and is not programmable 2 If assigning secondary or tertiary backup synchronization m Enter the slot and DSL number BRI only under Secondary Clock Synchronization and or Tertiary Clock Synchronization m Under the Source subheading in each column check Loop to indicate that the system uses the clock of the far end connection factory setting or Local to indicate the clock is free running 100D modules only gt NOTE The only option for an 800 NI BRI module is loop which is automatically assigned and is not administrable MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Timers Issue 1 August 1998 Page 3 48 Timers ensure that the system takes the appropriate corrective action when the expected response is not received from the network during normal operation A CAUTION Since incorrect settings can hinder the operation of BRI facilities consult with a Lucent Technologies representative
362. igate all incidents Review security policies and procedures and keep them up to date MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints Page 19 Choosing Passwords Passwords should be the maximum length allowed by the system Passwords should be hard to guess and should not contain m All the same numbers for example 1111 666666 m Sequential characters for example 123456 m Numbers that can be associated with you or your business such as your name birthday business name business address telephone number or Social security number m Words or commonly used names Passwords should be changed regularly at least on a quarterly basis Recycling old passwords is not recommended Never program passwords or authorization codes or barrier codes onto a speed dial button Improving Physical Security You should always limit access to the system console or attendant console and supporting documentation The following are some recommendations m Keep the system console and supporting documentation an office that is secured with a changeable combination lock Provide the combination only to those individuals having a real need to enter the office m Keep telephone wiring closets and equipment rooms locked Keep telephone logs and printed reports in locations that only authorized personnel can enter m Design distr
363. igital Subscriber Line DSL ordered The SPID consists of a string of digits 0 through 9 not more than 20 digits in length The DN consists of a string of digits 0 through 9 not more than 10 digits in length Each DSL will use two lines on Form 3i Incoming Trunks BRI Options 800 NI BRI Module Planning Form Instructions 1 Transfer the following information from 2c System Numbering Trunk Jacks to Form 3i Incoming Trunks BRI Options 800 NI BRI Module m Write the logical ID in the Logical ID column Skip a line between each entry m Write the line number in the Line Number column gt NOTE Refer to the information provided by the local telephone company to enter the information below Write the two DNs for each BRI line in the Directory Number column Write the two SPIDs assigned to each BRI line in the Service Profile Identifier column MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 46 Refer to the NI 1 BRI Planner form for the information needed to complete the next sections 4 Indicate the Service Configuration of the Central Office switch m If configured with IOC package S place a check in the IOC S column under the Service Configuration heading m If configured with service indicate the type of hunt group provisioned by entering a V voice only hunt group D data only hunt group
364. ignaling 3 13 OUTWATS D 1 Overflow Prompt based 4 40 threshold 4 36 time threshold 4 40 Overflow coverage 4 36 P Page buttons 4 25 Park return time 4 43 Park zones 4 25 PassageWay Telephony Services for NetWare 2 28 PassageWay Telephony Services for Netware 2 26 PC with System Programming and Maintenance SPM 2 7 PCMCIA card 2 11 Permanent Key mode 2 8 Personal Line 5 31 Personal Lines 5 35 Personal lines 4 7 Personal Speed Dial 5 36 Personal Video Conferencing 5 16 Pickup groups 4 27 Planning forms 1 Pool 5 31 Pool dial out code 3 17 4 4 Pools 3 16 Automatic Route Selection ARS 4 59 4 70 Posted Messages 4 57 Power Failure Transfer PFT telephones jacks 2 6 module placement 2 6 Primary Cover Ring Delay 4 14 Primary operator position 2 21 2 22 Primary Rate Interface PRI 3 3 B channel groups 3 33 Call by Call Service Selection 3 36 clock synchronization 3 32 Dial Plan Routing 3 33 framing format 3 31 incoming services 3 33 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Index Primary Rate Interface PRI continued line appearance routing 3 33 line coding 3 31 line compensation 3 32 network selection table 3 33 3 36 number to send 3 37 options 3 33 outgoing services 3 33 outgoing tables 3 34 overview 3 30 review by Lucent 3 38 signaling mode 3 31 Special Services Selection Table 3 36 Terminal Equipment Identifie
365. igned the FRL value for the Hotline extension number should be set to 6 This ensures that regardless of the FRL value assigned to the route s in the UDP Routing Table connecting two switches in a private network placing a UDP call from switch A directly connected to switch B using the Hotline feature will not fail due to the FRL Planning Form Instructions On Form 4f specify if this device will use the HotLine Feature Under the HotLine heading on Form 4f do one of the following m To set the extension to not use the HotLine feature check the Off factory setting box m To set the extension to be a HotLine extension check the On box Enter the extension or telephone number that the HotLine extension dials when it is taken off hook in the space provided below the On box MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 11 Extension Copy The Extension Copy feature enables you to copy an extension s programmed buttons with some exceptions to one or more extensions The features are individually programmed on one extension to create a template that can then be copied to other extensions in the system You can make additional copies of these forms and have several templates for different groups of users Only similar types of extensions can be copied to each other that is analog to analog and MLX to MLX because both extension ty
366. in a range that determines channel capacity MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Glossary barrier code basic carrier baud rate B channel Basic Rate Interface Bearer channel Behind Switch mode binary code bipolar 8 zero substitution bipolar signal bipolar violation BIS bit bit rate blocking Page GL 4 Password used to limit access to the Remote Access feature of the system In a private network it is especially important that barrier codes be required for all types of remote access Hardware that holds and connects the processor module power supply module and up to five other modules in the system See also expansion carrier Strictly speaking a measurement of transmission speed equal to the number of signal level changes per second In practice often used synonymously with bit rate and bps Bearer channel 64 or 56 kbps channel that carries a variety of digital information streams such as voice at 64 kbps data at up to 64 kbps wideband voice encoded at 64 kbps and voice at less than 64 kbps alone or combined See BRI See B channel One of three modes of system operation in which the control unit is connected to behind another telephone switching system such as Centrex or DEFINITY which provides features and services to telephone users See also Hybrid PBX mode o Electrical representation of quantities or s
367. ine Telephones To plan connections for digital data equipment see Chapter 5 Data Communications gt NOTE When using the 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module for data video or as a CTI link you must use Version 28 of the module The system assigns two extensions although only one logical ID is assigned to each digital extension jack For MLX telephones one extension number is automatically assigned to the MLX telephone physically connected to the digital extension jack The second extension number is reserved for an adjunct such as an analog modem or Delay Announcement Device that can be connected to the MLX telephone through a Multi Function Module MFM For information about renumbering jacks see later in this chapter The system automatically assigns both extension numbers whether or not the extension includes an MFM or ISDN terminal adapter Calls can be placed to both extension numbers independently The MFM can operate as an interface for either a Supplemental Alert Adapter or a tip ring device The Supplemental Alert Adapter SAA setting on the MFM is used when the MFM connects an external alert such as a bell or horn The tip ring T R setting is used when the MFM connects a tip ring device such as an answering machine or an analog modem gt NOTES 1 The system capacity for endpoints is decreased by two whenever an MLX telephone is used 2 In Behind Switch mode the system automatically assigns two prime line
368. ines trunks are reliable or unreliable and the length of the Hold disconnect interval Information the local telephone company can provide includes m Detailed T1 parameters m Detailed NI 1 BRI parameters m number of digits sent on DID trunks m Which lines trunks if any require a toll call prefix m The telephone number for each incoming line trunk m The type s of incoming lines trunks loop start ground start and so on m Which lines trunks if any are rotary dial lines trunks MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 1 Before You Begin Obtaining User Information Page 1 11 Obtaining User Information The features and calling privileges you assign to each employee s telephone ensure that employees get the most benefit from the system If you were not involved in the planning and equipment ordering for the system you should discuss the system s design with the customer representative who took part To determine calling privileges answer the following questions m Does management want to allow both local and toll calls to be made from every telephone m If any telephones are restricted are there any numbers the users should be allowed to call m Are there any specific numbers such as 900 that you want to restrict users from calling m Who if anyone will be given personal lines m Will access to central office lines trunks outside lines be restricted to
369. informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Changes by the Local Telephone Company Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that affect the proper functioning of this equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service Hearing Aid Compatibility The custom telephone sets for this system are compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids as prescribed by the FCC Automatic Dialers WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO EMERGENCY NUMBERS Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call Perform such activities in off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Direct Inward Dialing DID This equipment returns answer supervision signals to the PSTN when Answered by the called station Answered by the attendant Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the customer premises equipment user Routed to a dial prompt MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information DOC Notification and Repair Information Page A 5 This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded back to the PSTN Permissible exceptions occur when call is unanswered busy tone is received A reo
370. ing sequence because the character cannot be dialed at a single line telephone It is also useful when activating Call Forwarding or Remote Call Forwarding at phantom stations or via remote access e g from another switch in the network No other features can be used by entering an authorization code in this fashion MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 5 0 Enhancements June 1997 Page xxii Release 5 0 Enhancements June 1997 Release 5 0 includes all Release 4 2 functionality plus the enhancements listed below Computer Telephony Integration CTI Beginning with Release 5 0 a PassageWay Telephony Services CTI link from the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System to a LAN server running Novell NetWare software allows Lucent Technologies certified telephony applications to control and monitor MLX and analog multiline telephone BIS only operations The physical connection for the CTI link is an MLX port on a 008 MLX or 408 MLX module on the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit and an ISDN link interface card plugged into the customer s server The feature is available for Hybrid PBX mode systems only gt NOTE The NetWare server software version must be 3 12 4 1 or 4 11 The 008 MLX and 408 MLX modules must have firmware vintage other than 29 If the module has firmware 29 programming a CTI link on th
371. ing the 976 exchange in any area code write 1 p p p97 6 gt NOTE On Form 6f page 3 Disallowed List 7 contains factory set entries as shown in Table 4 2 above and is the factory set disallowed list To change the entries in this list cross out the entry and write the new values in the space provided MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 53 3 Write the extension numbers of the telephones that you want to assign to the list the Disallow to Ext Nos column see Form 2 4 Disallowed List Class of Restriction assignments apply to all remote access users and cannot be assigned on an individual basis unless barrier codes are used If barrier codes are used Class of Restriction is assigned to individual barrier codes Use Form 3a Incoming Trunks Remote Access if you planned Remote Access and want to restrict callers through Disallowed Lists For a private network environment see the Network Reference for planning Disallowed Lists needed to restrict calls across the private network a Form page 3 in the Class of Restriction without Barrier Codes section write the list numbers under the Disallowed List Access heading for either or both tie and non tie trunks A SecurityAlert To help prevent toll fraud barrier codes should always be required and should also be set to the maximum length allowed b co
372. ion is deemed appropriate then the A E must obtain the appropriate MERLIN LEGEND Telephony Services Preliminary Survey Return the completed Survey after the sale is made m The A E will coordinate and monitor the relationship between the OEM and the customer m The A E will put the DOSS Order Number on the completed survey m For Phonetastic Fax the completed survey to the Phonetastic Outsource Partner Desk 1 801 984 1120 Attention Phonetastic Outsource Coordinator The OEM will assign an Outsource Partner The OEM will establish an implementation date with the customer m The OEM Outsource Partner will complete the Statement of Work SOW for the customer MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 1 Before You Begin Requirements for Supporting Applications Page 1 7 4 Statement of Work SOW Defines all duties performed by the OEM Outsource Partner m Defines customer expectations m Defines customer responsibilities Once the customer and the Outsource Partner have signed the SOW it will be sent back to the A E to be included in the customer contract package 5 Implementation Considerations for OEM Outsource Partners Application installation requires a six week interval Early coordination will be required to enable a smooth implementation Incoming Outgoing Calls LAN MERLIN LEGEND Client Desktop Release 5 0 or later
373. ions Page 3 14 Hold Disconnect Interval This option allows you to set the number of milliseconds ms before the line trunk is released when a caller on hold hangs up and abandons the call Local telephone companies use either a long 450 ms or short 50 ms interval The factory setting for the system is the long interval since it is the interval used by most telephone companies Check with the local telephone company for the disconnect interval used If the local telephone company uses the short interval you must change the factory setting If you do not change the setting when a caller waiting on hold hangs up the line trunk is not released Planning Form Instructions In the Hold Disc Interval column on Form 2c do one of the following m To change to a short hold disconnect interval 50 ms put a check in the Short column gt NOTE If the local telephone company uses a short hold disconnect interval be sure you have checked No for Loop Start Reliable Disconnect jas described earlier in this section m Tokeep the factory setting a long hold disconnect interval 450 ms put a check in the Long column MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 15 QCC Operator to Receive Calls Hybrid PBX Mode Only Use these instructions only if the system has one or more QCCs Otherwise skip to Remote Access
374. ipment Identifier TEI All channels assigned to a group must be on the same 100D module Also the order of the B channel groups is not important When programmed for PRI the single DS1 jack on the 100D module supports 23 B channels the Channel 24 superframe transmits signaling mode information A CAUTION The order in which channels are assigned within a group must be the exact opposite of the order in which the telephone company s switch hunts through for a channel Consult with the service provider to determine what the correct order should be MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 34 Planning Form Instructions 1 assign B channels to groups determine which channels to group together and then record each group on Form 3b page 3 under the B Channel Groups heading a Write the group number 1 80 under the B Channel Group No heading start with 1 and number sequentially b Write the slot and port number of each B channel assigned to the group see Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks determine the port number assume that port 1 is at the bottom of the module to which you are assigning B channels c Forall channels you plan to associate with the group write the trunk number see Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks 2 assign service to each B channel group complete Form
375. ir own external alerts and Music On Hold sources However a single auto attendant can transfer calls throughout the network It can answer only those calls that arrive on the PSTN facilities of the system where it is connected Although many features are available using tie trunks for network connectivity PRI tandem trunks provide greatly enhanced features and faster call setup For this reason PRI is recommended over tie functionality in private networks Group Calling Enhancements Release 6 0 and later systems include Group Calling features that enhance group calling operations Queue Control The system manager can control the maximum number of calls allowed in the primary calling group queue for calls that arrive on certain facilities often assigned to calling groups When the number of the calls in queue reaches the programmed maximum subsequent callers receive a busy signal Queue control applies to calls received on the following types of facilities m DID Direct Inward Dialing m PRI facilities programmed for dial plan routing m All calls transferred from a VMI voice messaging interface port m Tie Queue control also applies to internal calls to a DGC group and calls to a calling group through the QCC Internal calls that dial 0 or 200 and are directed to a calling group administered as Position Busy Backup are eligible for queue control Calls that come in on a trunk assigned to the Queued Call Console QC
376. is 889 If two way DID service is available from the local telephone company it is typically set up as Tie trunk service gt NOTES 1 If the system will have two blocks make a copy of Form 3d and write the block number in the Block Number space Check with the local telephone company to determine the number of digits sent 2 DID trunks cannot be assigned to ring into a calling group A CAUTION Since the system can have only two blocks of DID trunks when configuring a private network careful planning of both immediate and future needs is essential when ordering DID trunks from the local telephone company See the Network Reference for additional information MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 43 Planning Form Instructions 1 Form 3d under the Type heading do one of the following m Tokeep the factory setting check the Wink Start box m change the type check the Immediate Start box 2 Under the Expected Digits heading on Form 3d do one of the following m show that the telephone company sends the factory set number of digits check the box labeled 3 m show the number of digits sent by the telephone company check one of the boxes labeled 1 2 or 4 3 Compare the number of digits sent by the local telephone company to the number of digits in the system numbering plan and do one of th
377. istration to minimize the need for clock switching which is known to cause noise on active calls gt NOTE The following information is for planning clock synchronization in systems that are not part of a private network For planning clock synchronization in a private network configuration see the Network Reference Under Priority in the Clock Synchronization section do one of the following If installing only one 100D module To keep the factory setting check Primary that is this module provides synchronization for the system Ifthe synchronization source is other than through the 1000 module check None If installing more than one 100D module decide which module if any provides the primary synchronization If Module 1 provides clock synchronization check Primary in the first box the factory setting If Module 2 or Module 3 provides clock synchronization check Primary in the box that describes that 100D module Ifthe synchronization source is other than through a 1000 module check None 9 If assigning backup synchronization a In the box that describes the 100D module providing secondary synchronization check Secondary In the box that describes the 100D module providing tertiary back up check Tertiary MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 27 10 Under the So
378. it signaling and connecting a PBX and a central office or toll office MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary frame framing format Issue 1 August 1998 Page GL 14 One of several segments of an analog or digital signal that has a repetitive characteristic For example a DS7 frame consists of a framing bit and 24 bytes which equals 193 bits Pattern of frames used in transmissions frequency See ring generator generator FRL Facility Restriction Level Calling restriction type that restricts calls to certain specified ARS and UDP routes FX Foreign exchange Central office CO other than the one that is providing local access to the public telephone network NENNEN G General Purpose Adapter glare GPA ground start trunk Group IV G4 fax machine group videoconferencing system See GPA Condition that occurs when a user tries to call out on a loop start line at the same time that another call arrives on the same line General Purpose Adapter Device that connects an analog multiline telephone to optional equipment such as an answering machine or a fax machine Trunk on which the communications system after verifying that the trunk is idle no ground on tip lead transmits a request for service puts ground on ring lead to the telephone company central office CO A fax unit offering 400 by 100 dots per inch DPI in fine mode that can ope
379. ital extension jack MLX port on the control unit Within each type there are several configurations depending on the station s capabilities for example voice and data or data only and therefore what equipment is involved and what type of module it connects to on the control unit This section describes each type of data station and the configurations supported within each type MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications About Data and Video Communications Page 5 7 Modem Data Stations A modem data station uses a modem as its DCE to send and receive data The modem converts digital signals from the DTE at the originating station into analog signals so the data can be transmitted over analog telephone lines trunks At the receiving station the modem converts the analog signals back to digital signals so the DTE at that end can accept them A modem may provide dialing and answering capabilities for a modem data station if not a telephone can be connected to dial out gt NOTE If an analog multiline telephone is connected to the modem data station the telephone and data station can be used at the same time A voice call can be made or received while a data call is in progress A data call cannot be made or received while a voice call is in progress A modem data station can be used to make analog data calls either over the telephone company network or
380. ith Step 3 Juse a blank Form 7d for each group MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Group Assigned Features Page 4 35 Calling Group Options This section contains instructions for the following calling group options Hunt Primary and Secondary Delay Announcements m Message Waiting Receiver m Calls in Queue Alarm Thresholds m External Alert for Calls in Queue Alarm m Overflow Coverage m Overflow Threshold m Overflow Threshold Time m Prompt Based Overflow Release 6 0 and later only m Group Type m Queue Control Release 6 0 and later only The order in which the system searches for available calling group members for subsequent calls can be circular linear or according to which agent is most idle Release 5 0 or later and is called the hunt type The Circular setting searches for an available calling group member starting with the extension after the last extension to receive a call The Linear setting distributes calls starting with the first extension assigned to the group through system programming The Most ldle setting distributes calls according to the most idle queue For some applications this hunt type is more efficient than the circular method because it takes into account the varying duration of calls Up to 10 primary and one secondary delay announcement devices can be designated for each calling group more than one calling group can u
381. ith a Direct Station Selector DSS Otherwise skip to the next section This section contains instructions for changing the factory setting for Directed Call Completion from Automatic to Manual that is the QCC operator must press the Release button when using a DSS button to direct a call gt NOTE If the QCC operator uses the DSS to transfer calls across a private network the operator may want to use manual completion to avoid transfer without return to busy If you subscribe to ANI or ICLID and automatic completion is selected the ANI and ICLID information will be sent but calls will not return on busy Planning Form Instructions Under the Extended Call Completion heading on Form 6a do one of the following m Tokeep the factory setting check the Automatic completion box m To require the operator to use the Release button to direct calls check the Manual completion box Return Ring This section contains instructions to specify the number of rings before an unanswered call is returned from the extension where it was sent to the QCC queue or QCC message center position If the system includes a voice mail system you should increase this number to ensure that the voice mail system gets the call before it is returned Planning Form Instructions Under the Return Ring heading on Form 6a do one of the following m Tokeep the factory setting check the 4 Rings box m To change the factory setting check the second box and
382. k ISDN services broadband Transmission path having a bandwidth greater than a voice grade channel BTMI basic telephone modem interface bus Multiconductor electrical path used to transfer information over a common connection from any of several sources to any of several destinations button Key on the face of a telephone that is used to access a line activate a feature or enter a code on a communications system byte Sequence of bits usually eight processed together Also called octet C Call Accounting System Call Accounting Terminal Caller ID Calling group Call Management System CAS CAT See CAS See CAT A service provided by some local telephone companies if local regulations allow that supplies the calling party telephone number In Release 3 0 and later an 800 GS LS ID module on the system can capture this information and display it on the screens of MLX telephones See also ANT Team of individuals who answer the same types of calls See CMS Call Accounting System DOS or UNIX System based application that monitors and manages telecommunications costs Call Accounting Terminal Standalone unit with a built in microprocessor and data buffer that provides simple call accounting at a low cost MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary Issue 1 August 1998 CCITT ccs centralized telephone programming Centralized Voice Messagi
383. k the 2 Digit the 3 Digit or the Set Up Space box to indicate the numbering plan you re using Be sure to check Selected Extension Numbers under the Renumber System heading on Form 2a page 1 b Write the new extension number s in the Renumber to columns on Form 2a and Form 2b Proceed to the next section Updating Planning Information Updating Planning Information On the floor plan add the extension number beneath the symbol for each telephone and adjunct If you are using a system programming console go to Form 1 System Planning in the System Operating Conditions section and add the new extension number of the console in the space next to Ext No gt NOTE The remaining columns on Form 2a Eqpt Label Old Ext No and Wire No are completed by the technician during installation To complete the forms for lines trunks proceed to Chapter 3 Lines Trunks MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Page 3 1 Lines Trunks Planning for lines trunks consists of the following tasks 1 Identifying Line Trunk Jacks Use the placement of modules in the control unit see the Control Unit Form 1 as a guide to determine in what order to connect trunks to the control unit To do this identify the line trunk jack types available by module and then match trunks and auxiliary equipment with the jacks that support th
384. l Office uses a Lucent Technologies 5ESS or Siemens SSC EWSD switch MLH is available through the Series Completion feature The Multiline Hunt Group MLHG feature on these CO switches is not recommended for use with MERLIN LEGEND The Northern Telecom DMS 100 provides MLH service through the MLHG feature A customer may want to order several BRI lines some assigned as IOC package S and the others as MLH MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 1 BRI Review Page G 2 To properly order and program NI 1 BRI service it may be necessary to contact the local service provider to determine what services are available and the type of switching equipment used See Appendix H NI 1 BRI Provisioning for detailed information that the local service provider may require in order to supply the necessary connections 1 On page 1 fill in the customer name telephone number and address gt NOTE Reference Number is filled in by SDSC 2 Fillin the Order Number 3 Identify the personnel handling the account a Account Executive s name and telephone number b System Consultant s name and telephone number 4 Identify the NI 1 BRI facility vendor by writing the vendor s name under the NI 1 BRI Vendor heading along with the contact person s name and telephone number 5 Under the Installation heading a Write the Due Date on which the installation is scheduled to be co
385. lable assign a test telephone number that is used for maintenance by the service provider For each 100D module with a PRI service type write the test telephone number up to 12 digits used for maintenance next to the module number under the Test Telephone Numbers heading on Form 3b page 10 gt NOTE The factory does not assign a test telephone number You must assign the same number as that furnished by the PRI service provider It must be different from the numbers assigned to other channels associated with the same B channel group Under the Timers and Counters heading do one of the following m To keep the factory setting leave the Change to column blank m To change the factory setting for any timer or counter write the new threshold on the appropriate line in the Change to column Under the Terminal Equipment Identifier TEI heading do one of the following m To keep the factory set TEI check 0 m To change the factory set TEI write a value from 1 to 63 in the space provided NOTE If the system includes DS1 connectivity all local offerings of DS1 configurations must be reviewed by Lucent Technologies Sales and Design Support Center SDSC personnel to ensure compatibility For more information see Appendix D T1 PRI Review Also information required by the facilities vendor is discussed in Appendix E DS1 Connectivity Ordering MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning
386. lated LS trunks Emulated GS trunks Emulated Tie trunks PRI services T1 Switched 56 service NI 1 BRI services Remote Access Loudspeaker Paging Maintenance Alarm Music On Hold MLX DLC QCC Analog DLC MLX telephone Analog multiline telephone Tip ring equipment Off premises telephone gt NOTES DS1 connectivity configured for T1 operation provides 24 channels T1 Tie trunks may be configured to use Switched 56 service NI 1 BRI service provides 16 channels per 800 NI BRI module PON If you are planning for Remote Access at least one module with touch tone receivers TTRs must be installed 5 f analog multiline telephones require either voice and data or Voice Announce to Busy two consecutive telephone jacks are required 6 If you are connecting T R equipment to the 008 408 or 408 GS LS modules a GPA is required MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 6 Modifications Adding to the System Page 6 4 2 On Form 1 page 2 System Planning review the completed Control Unit Diagram and determine whether the module type needed is present Do one of the following m If the module is not in the control unit skip to Step 4 m Ifthe module type needed is already in the control unit proceed to Step 3 Determine whether th
387. lcome your comments both positive and negative Please use the feedback form on the next page to let us know how we can continue to serve you If the feedback form is missing write directly to Documentation Manager Lucent Technologies 211 Mount Airy Road Room 2W226 Basking Ridge NJ 07920 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 1 Before You Begin Reviewing System Components Page 1 1 Before You Begin You should perform several tasks before you begin filling out the planning forms for the system 1 2 3 4 5 Review the system s hardware features and operation as defined at the time of purchase Confirm the location of the control unit Obtain the required information from the local telephone company Obtain information about telephone users and their needs Obtain or develop a floor plan of the customers site Each of these preplanning tasks is described in this chapter Reviewing System Components To tailor the system to the customer s business you must know the number and types of telephones outside lines trunks and adjuncts that were ordered You also need to know how the equipment will be used for example which type of telephone is assigned to each employee which consoles operators will be using and where adjuncts will be located Review the list of equipment ordered If you did not participate in the ordering process you may want to conf
388. le only The maximum number of VMI ports is 24 The maximum number of CTI links is 1 quinn uo3js g Sur SLf uorsu21Xxq BZ 1 0 eseo oy 1545 suoneorunuruo o sGNADAT NITWAIA 6 2 WHOS Mod Log Jack Type E Set Up Renumber Old Wire Person Location Ring CTI Type ID A D B Equipment No No Space to Label Ext No No or Function Freq t Appl Link N A N A Shaded lines indicate possible operator positions Factory Setting The system capacity for Personal Directories is decreased by one whenever an MLX 20L telephone is connected to an MLX port Use Form 2b for adjuncts connected via MFM Ringing Frequency is programmable on the 016 T R module only The maximum number of VMI ports is 24 The maximum number of CTI links is 1 SurJoquinw ur3js g syoef uorsu21Xq penunuoD UIJO 1 0 asvapoy urojs s suongorunumuo sCINHOST NITHAIA MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts Make additional copies of this form as needed Networked Switch Maximum 127 Adjuncts No Yes Factory Set Person Location i 5 Renumber to Adjuncts 2B Ext Function and Equipment 7300 7301 7302 7303 7304 7305 7306 7307 7308 7309 7310 7311 7312 7313 7314 7315 7316 73
389. lephones by removing all but one SA button via Centralized Programming Hybrid PBX mode only Form 8 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 9a Night Service Group Assignment Operator Ext No Operator Ext No Operator Ext No Operator Ext No Ext No Ext No Group No Group No or Trunk or Trunk or Trunk or Trunk No No No No f the system has AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant System for each operator that will use Night Service with that system fill in the operator s extension number and the calling group number for Automated Attendant The information will be programmed using Integrated Administration Form 9a 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 9a Continued Operator Ext No Operator Ext No Operator Ext No Operator Ext No Group No Name Group No Name Group No Name or Trunk or Trunk or Trunk No No No Form 9a 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 9b Night Service Outward Restriction Password To keep the password private do not fill in the blank Emergency Allowed List Telephone No 12 digits maximum Item No Telephone No 12 digits m
390. lephones on the system One power supply module is needed for each carrier and an auxiliary power unit is added if needed Primary Rate Interface Standard interface that specifies the protocol used between two or more communications systems As used in North America it provides twenty three 64 kbps B channels for voice and or data and one 16 kbps D channel which carries multiplexed signaling information for the other 23 channels First jack on the first MLX or analog multiline extension module in the control unit that is the extension jack with the lowest logical ID in the system Individual extension number assigned to a telephone in a system operating in Behind Switch mode Each telephone user has his or her own prime line and is automatically connected to that line when he or she lifts the handset An interconnected group of communications systems which may consist of MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Servers ECS and or DEFINITY ProLogix Solutions The facilities that connect communications systems in a private network See also tandem tie trunks and tandem PHI trunks Module in the second slot of the control unit Slot 0 to the right of the power supply module Includes the software and memory that runs the system Reassignment of the system programming jack position to any of the first five extension jacks on the first MLX module in the control unit Set of conventions gover
391. les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises Les r parations de mat riel homologu doivent tre effectu es par un centre d entretien canadien autoris d sign par le fournisseur La compagnie de t l communications peut demander l utilisateur de d brancher un appareil la suite de r parations ou de modifications effectu es par l utilisateur ou cause de mauvais fonctionnement Pour sa propre protection l utilisateur doit s assurer que tous les fils de mise la terre de la source d nergie lectrique des lignes t l phoniques et des canalisations d eau m talliques s il y en a sont raccord s ensemble Cette pr caution est particuli rement importante dans les r gions rurales MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la notification du ministere des Communications du Canada Page A 7 AVERTISSEMENT L utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui m me il doit avoir recours un service d inspection des installations lectriques ou un lectricien selon le cas L indice de charge IC assign chaque dispositif terminal indique pour viter toute surcharge le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut tre raccord e un circuit t l phonique boucl utilis par ce dispositif La terminaison du circuit boucl peut tre constitu e de n importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs pour
392. lines such as WATS or FX Remove or rearrange the eight factory set line assignments if desired For all types of telephones for which you want the extension user to receive outside calls on a specific line assign a personal line to a button on the telephone or adjunct Consider assigning a Loudspeaker Paging button to make announcements over an optional loudspeaker connected to the control unit To make an announcement users press the button and speak into the handset They do not need to dial the extension of the loudspeaker paging system For Key mode with single line telephone users analog modems fax machines or any other device connected to an 012 T R 016 T R or 008 OPT module or to an MFM You can assign a combination of up to 10 ICOM Ring or ICOM Orig Only buttons to each extension At least one intercom button must be assigned to each single line telephone or adjunct connected to an MLX telephone using an MFM ICOM Voice buttons should not be assigned on single line telephones If you want the extension user to receive outside calls on a specific line assign a personal line to a button on the telephone or adjunct The extension user is automatically connected to the intercom line when the receiver is lifted and the user can select an outside line by dialing the dial out code usually a 4 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Assigning Telep
393. ll Services for DMS 250 or DEX600E MCI Prism MCI VNet MCI 800 MCI 900 Local Exchange Carrier Services for DMS 100 DMS Private Network DMS INWATS Inward Wide Area Telephone Service DMS OUTWATS Outward Wide Area Telephone Service DMS FX foreign exchange DMS Tie Trunk Miscellaneous Call by Call other For more information on the particular services see the Feature Heference MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 D Planner Page D 2 Form Needed T1 PRI Planner Planning Form Instructions 1 On page 1 fill in the customer name telephone number and address gt NOTE Reference Number is filled in by SDSC Fill in the Order Number Identify the personnel handling the account a Account Executive s name and telephone number b System Consultant s name and telephone number Identify the DS1 facility vendor by writing the vendor s name under the T1 PRI Vendor heading along with the contact person s name and telephone number Under the Installation heading a Write the Due Date on which the installation is scheduled to be complete b Write the date the equipment is scheduled for delivery to the customer in the Materials on Job Date space Under the Installation Contacts heading list the names and telephone numbers of the personnel responsible for the equipment order and its installation a Order Implemento
394. llow Me and Remote Call Forward features are enhanced to remove the requirement that a call be ringing at an extension before it can be forwarded With the Forward on Busy enhancement a call to an extension with no available SA System Access or ICOM Intercom buttons is forwarded immediately to the programmed destination preventing the caller from hearing a busy signal from the intended call recipient s extension Maintenance Testing for BRI Facilities that Are Part of Multiline Hunt Groups MLHGs Beginning with Release 4 1 the NI 1 BRI National Integrated Services Digital Network 1 Basic Rate Interface Provisioning Test Tool is enhanced to include testing for BRI facilities that are part of Multiline Hunt Groups MLHGs The NI 1 BRI Provisioning Test Tool is used by Lucent Technologies maintenance personnel on MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems that include an 800 NI BRI module Technicians use the tool during system installation and maintenance to test the functionality of the BRI lines and to report analyzed results MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 4 0 Enhancements March 1996 Page xxxii Release 4 0 Enhancements March 1996 Release 4 0 includes all Release 3 1 functionality plus the enhancements listed below Support for Up to 200 Extensions An expanded dial plan supports up to 200 tip ring devic
395. lls to Unassigned Extensions heading on Form 8a do one of the following To keep the factory setting check the Extension box To change from the factory set redirect to the primary operator check one of the following To redirect calls to a QCC operator Hybrid PBX only check the QCC queue box and write the extension number in the space provided see To redirect calls to another telephone check the Extension box and write the extension number in the space provided see redirect calls to a calling group check the Calling Group box and write the calling group extension number in the space provided see MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 49 Recall Timer This section contains instructions for designating the length of the switchhook flash sent when Recall is used to disconnect a call and receive a new dial tone without hanging up The interval of the switchhook flash and how Recall works depends on the type of telephone being used For multiline telephones the factory setting is 450 ms If users experience difficulty with Recall the interval can be changed to a longer or shorter interval The single line telephone Flash or Recall button transmits a timed switchhook flash of about half a second Planning Form Instructions Under the Recall Timer heading on Form 8a check one of the following m 350 ms m 450 ms f
396. low line buttons to be set for Delay Ring If the option is programmed on a trunk programmed as a Group Calling trunk the system will not dispense the call to either the Group Calling queue or to any calling group member until either the LS ID Delay timer expires or the system software is informed that ICLID information is unavailable MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Identifying Line Trunk Jacks Page 3 5 Planning Form Instructions Refer to the completed Control Unit Diagramjon Form 1 to mark line trunk jack types on Form 2c 1 For each module with line trunk jacks noted in the Control Unit Diagram beginning with Slot 01 write in the type of module and its slot number in the Module Type and Slot No column of Form 2c after the appropriate Log ID number draw a line to indicate the logical IDs and therefore the line trunk jacks that correspond to that module If the system has 100D DS1 modules keep in mind that even though the module has only one physical jack the 100D module supports up to 24 endpoints Therefore 24 logical IDs and associated line trunk numbers are assigned to each module The 800 NI BRI module supports up to 16 endpoints therefore 16 logical IDs and associated line trunk numbers are assigned to each 800 NI BRI module even though the module has only eight physical jacks In the Jack Type column of Form 2c for all mod
397. lso produces reports for call analysis central office Location of telephone switching equipment that provides local telephone service and access to toll facilities for long distance calling Cable consisting of one conductor usually a small copper tube or wire within and insulated from another conductor of larger diameter usually copper tubing or copper braid coder decoder Device used to convert analog signals such as speech music or television to digital form for transmission over a digital medium and back to the original analog form Digits that a caller dials in response to an integrated voice response application s menus also called prompted digits collected digits may be used to initiate screen pop ata system extension See also CTI link A private network arrangement that combines characteristics of Virtual Private Network VPN a series configuration and a star configuration See Software controlled processor complex that interprets dialing pulses tones and or keyboard characters and makes the proper interconnections both inside and outside Consists of a computer software a storage device and carriers with special hardware to perform the actual connections Provides voice and or data communications services including access to public and private networks for telephones and other equipment Also referred to in this guide as system short for MERLIN LEGEND Communications System MERLIN LEGENDComm
398. ly default on a telephone when the system is in Key mode Form 4c 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 4c Continued Key Mode Up to 8 personal line Behind Switch Mode buttons are assigned One prime line button beginning at button 3 is assigned to button 3 Behind Switch Mode One prime line is assigned to button 3 Form 4c 3 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 4d aa MLX Telephone Make a copy of this form for each telephone Logical ID Extension No Person or Location Copied from Master Ext No Wall Mount Telephone Model Optional Features d MLx 20L Abbreviated Ring Q MLX 28D Q Off Q MLX 16DP One MLX 10D Auto Callback Q MLX 10DP t a Off CQ MLX 10 On EL MERSSDPS Call Waiting Q MLX 5 a Off Adjuncts Q On O Headset Voice Announced Calls Hearing impaired handset One Q Noisy environment O Off Q Multi Function Module MFM Not supported insi the MLX 5 and MLX 5D Extension No Q FAX machine Q An
399. m Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations DISPSUB DN 6855919 DN 6855919 NPA 215 BCHDN 2 BCDN SP CT VI LCC BVCE BCHCT 2 IBCHCT 2 OBCHCT 2 0288 5 amp 0288 AU3 CHRG FRSA1 COS ICND amp RND CRBLIM 2 CT CMD LCC 1 2 2 2 0288 C56 amp 0288 C64 CHRG FRSA1 COS amp RND CRBLIM 2 amp AU3 RAX 1 Issue 1 August 1998 EQN 20 0 5 4MASKNO 03800 amp C56 DISPTSP TSPID 215685591 901 EQN 20 0 5 4 USID 1 TSPID 215685591901 TERMLIM 1 DN 6855919 CT VI DN 6855919 CT CMD amp C64 MASKNO 03774 MASKNO 03798 MASKNO 04535 MASKNO 04396 MASKNO 03785 MASKNO 06282 MASKNO 06288 MASKNO 06291 MASKNO 04398 MASKNO 03775 MASKNO 03777 MASKNO 03798 MASKNO 04396 MASKNO 03785 MASKNO 06282 MASKNO 06288 MASKNO 06291 MASKNO 04398 MASKNO 03775 MASKNO 03777 MASKNO 03798 MASKNO 04383 MASKNO 04386 MASKNO 04382 MASKNO 04385 MASKNO 04382 MASKNO 04385 Page H 32 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations Page H 33 Series Completion Feature Translations The information listed below provides the translation for either voice or data hunting on three
400. m modification movement or alteration m Unauthorized use of common carrier communications services accessed through the system m Abuse misuse or negligent acts or omissions of the customer and persons under the customer s control m Acts of third parties and acts of God LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES OBLIGATION TO REPAIR REPLACE OR REFUND AS SET FORTH ABOVE IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES ITS AFFILIATES SUPPLIERS AND AUTHORIZED RESELLERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Remote Administration and Maintenance Page A 21 Limitation of Liability Except as provided below the liability of Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers for any claims losses damages or expenses from any cause whatsoever including acts or omissions of third parties regardless of the form of action whether in contract tort or otherwise shall not exceed the lesser of 1 the direct damages proven or 2 the repair cost replacement cost license fee annual rental charge or purchase price as the case may be of the equipment that gives rise to the claim Except as provided below Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers shall not be liable for any in
401. mbers DNs forming a circular hunt group This hunting is provided using the Multiline Hunt Group feature The screens shown in this section are examples DNs shown on these screens should be replaced with applicable data QDN 2257141 DN 2257141 TYPE PILOT OF DNH HUNT GROUP SNPA 201516 LNATTIDX N A HUNT GROUP 22 HUN EMBER LTID PSATS 141 TCLASS BRAFS INE CLASS CODE ISDNKSET EY 1 USTGRP MDCSCA SUBGRP O NCOS O RING Y PTIONS FC ROUP OPTIONS IR RCVD EMBER INFO 2257146 2257145 2257144 2257143 2257142 EOouoQm a oe w PN rp PSATS 141 LTID PSATS 141 SNPA 201 DIRECTORY NUMBER 2257141 LT GROUP NO 13 LTCLASS BRAFS DEFAULT LOGICAL TERMINAL N 5 BEARER SERVICE RESTRICTIONS NOPMD CS Y PS N VERSION FUNCTIONAL ISSUE 2 SPID SUFFIX 01 LEN HOST 011 10 01 TEI DYNAMIC CUSTGRP MDCSCA SUBGRP O NCOS ORING Y LINE CLASS CODE ISDNKSET MAXKEYS 64 DN IS ASSIGNED AS A DNH HUNT PILOT HUNT GROUP 22 HUNT MEMBER O OPTIONS SFC KEY DN DN 2257141 KEY FEATURE NONE 6ROUP OPTIONS CIR RCVD MEMBER INFO 1 2257146 2 2257145 3 2257144 4 2257143 5 2257142 PSATS 142 LTID SNPA PSATS 201 142 DIRECTORY NUMBER 2257142 LT GROUP NO 13 LTCLASS BRAFS KTS N CACH EARER SERVIC 5 Y PS ERSION FUNCTI PID SUFFIX
402. mer premises to provide 057 facility terminations and signaling compatibility Computer Telephony Integration link A hardware software feature that is part of the PassageWay Telephony Services application It allows the use of Lucent Technologies certified software applications on a LAN running Novell NetWare software in a Hybrid PBX mode system These applications may provide special features for client control of such calling activities as power dialing See also screen See CRC D4 framing format Data channel Framing format consisting of a sequence of individual frames of 24 eight bit slots and one signal bit 193 bits ina 12 frame superframe See also See MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Issue 1 August 1998 Glossary Page GL 9 data See DCE communications equipment data module A type of ISDN terminal adapter that acts as the DCE ata data workstation that communicates over high speed digital facilities data rate See bps data station data terminal data terminal equipment data workstation DCE DCP D channel dedicated feature buttons delay start tie trunk desktop videoconferencing system DFT DHG dial access Special type of extension where data communications take place includes DTE and DCE sometimes a telephone is also part of a data station An input output device often a personal computer that can be conne
403. minal an 008 MLX or 408 workstation local adapter data GS LS MLX module host or video conferencing ISDN terminal 1 extension jack None None ISDN terminal adapter PC LAN adapter data only an 008 MLX or 408 If using a 7500B data workstation local GS LS MLX module module a 440A4 host or video terminating resistor conferencing adapter is also required Digital Data Video 1 extension jackon None None None if station is G4 FAX video an 008 MLX or 408 connected by a BRI conferencing GS LS MLX module interface One ISDN set as a 2B Data port terminal adapter if the or 2 jacks set as 1B TA supports 2B Data Data portst Two ISDN terminal adapters if the TAs support only 1B Data An analog telephone may be connected t A digital data video station that connects directly to an MLX port using either a BRI interface or a v 35 interface and an ISDN terminal adapter that supports 2B Data requires only one MLX port programmed as a 2B Data port A digital data video station that connects to an MLX port using a v 35 interface and an ISDN terminal adapter that does not support 2B Data requires two 1B Data MLX ports When using the 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module for digital data or video you must not use Version 29 of the module MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications About Data and Video Communications Page 5 15 Other Supported Data Terminals
404. ministrable only via centralized telephone programming Service Observing may be subject to federal state or local laws rules or regulations or require the consent of one or both of the call parties You must check in your jurisdiction and comply with all applicable laws rules and regulations before using this feature Failure to comply may result in severe penalties The system programmer and or network administrator assigns these features There are additional extension features noted on the forms but not covered in this book Individuals normally program these features at their telephones although the system manager may also program these features using centralized telephone programming You may however want to complete the information on the forms so they can serve as a complete summary of features for each extension Detailed information about these and all features is contained in the Feature Reference Instructions for using centralized telephone programming are included in System Programming For users who want to program features on their own telephones information and procedures are contained in the user and operator guides You may choose the Extension Copy feature to create a template that can then be copied to other similar extensions whose users require the same features This feature is also described later in this section MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112
405. mplete b Write the date the equipment is scheduled for delivery to the customer in the Materials on Job Date space 6 Under the Installation Contacts heading list the names and telephone numbers of the personnel responsible for the equipment order and its installation a Order Implementor b SDSC Manager c National Technical Service Center NTSC Engineer d Data Services Organization DSO Manager 7 Under the question about whether the order has been placed m If the order has been placed check the Yes box and fill in the expected service turn on date m If the order has not been placed check the No box 8 On page 2 enter the type of BRI service to be ordered Since MERLIN LEGEND Release 4 0 supports only National ISDN 1 BRI 2B D service enter NI 1 BRI in the space provided under the Type of Service heading 9 Contact the local service provider and determine what type of CO switch serves your area such as Lucent Technologies 5ESS Northern Telecom DMS 100 or Siemens SSC EWSD Enter this information under the Type of CO Switch heading on page 2 of the form MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 1 BRI Review Page G 3 10 Determine which type of configuration is best suited for your system Some guidelines for selecting the service configuration are shown below capability package 5 Each BRI line also called a Digital Subscriber
406. mplete New Extensions All columns of Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks Copy of appropriate telephone operator Forms 4a through 4f and 5a through 5d Consider revisions to Group Assigned Features Forms 7a through 7d Allowed and Disallowed List assignments Forms 6e and 6f Night Service assignments Forms 9 through 9c Extension Labels Form 2a Operator console Consider revisions to Optional Operator Features Form 6a Extension Status assignment Form 8a MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 7 Upgrading Page 7 1 Upgrading A WARNING The following procedures are to be used by qualified technicians or service personnel only Installation or maintenance of this product by anyone other than qualified personnel may damage or impair the product your limited warranty does not cover such damage For details see your limited warranty fustomar Support Information Hazardous electrical voltages are present inside this product This chapter contains information about upgrading the system to Release 6 1 You can perform the following upgrades From Release 1 0 to Release 6 1 m From Release 1 1 to Release 6 1 m From Release 2 0 to Release 6 1 m From Release 2 1 to Release 6 1 m From Release 3 0 to Release 6 1 m From Release 3 1 to Release 6 1 m From Release 4 0 to Release 6 1 m From Release 4 1 to Release 6 1 m From Release 4
407. munication Survey a 5 Isthere agroup of people with whom you share responsibilities such that is would be convenient if you could answer each other s calls No Q Yes With whom 6 Would you say your phone use is O Heavy Q Average Q Light Do you need to handle more than two calls at time If yes howmany 7 Doyouhavea dataterminalor personal computer at your workstation No Do you expectto getone within the next year No O Yes 8 Doyouuse account codesfor charge back of calls O No O Yes Please list all the codes you use attach another sheetif necessary 9 Are there numbers that you and other people in your organization dial over and over every day O No O Yes Please list these numbers 10 Do you wantto be able to pick up other people s calls when you hear their phones ring O No O Yes Please listthese people Form ECS 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Employee Communication Survey a 11 Do youneed to view incoming caller information No Yes For what purpose Form ECS 3 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Employee Communication Survey ee Form ECS 4 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 1 System Planning Line Trunk Capacity Trunks Total Trunks Module Number of Supported by Module Type Modules by Module Type 400 LS TTR 800 408 400 GS LS TTR 800 GS
408. n Refer to the Operator Features section later in this chapter 2 Checkthe box under the Adjuncts heading that applies to the equipment at the extension see the floor plan 3 Under Message Center Operator check No if the QCC will not be a message center or Yes if it will be a message center gt NOTE If a calling group member is programmed as a QCC the station is removed from the calling group If a Service Observing group member is programmed as a QCO the station is removed from the Service Observing group If a Service Observer station is programmed as a the station is removed as a Service Observer Proceed to the next section Pool Dial Out Code Restriction Hybrid PBX Mode Only Pool Dial Out Code Restriction Hybrid PBX Mode Only This section contains instructions to tailor the use of dial out access codes by restricting extensions from making calls on specific trunk pools for example those consisting of special purpose lines trunks such as WATS or FX or to reserve trunk pools for data communications only Planning Form Instructions Use Form 6i to identify those extensions that are restricted from using some dial out access codes The factory setting is for all extensions to be restricted from using all dial out access codes This form only identifies extensions that are to remain restricted Extensions that are not listed on this form must have their restrictions removed through system administ
409. n be assigned to a HotLine extension Generally the HotLine telephone does not receive calls and its lines should be set to No Ring A SECURITY ALERT If a HotLine extension accesses a loop start line that line should provide reliable disconnect and be programmed for reliable disconnect Otherwise a user at the extension may be able to stay on the line after a call is completed and then make a toll call Group Calling Enhancements Release 5 0 and later systems include Group Calling features that enhance group calling operations MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 5 0 Enhancements June 1997 Page xxv Most Idle Hunt Type In addition to the Circular factory setting and Linear hunt types supported in earlier releases a third hunt type distributes calling group calls in an order based on which agent has waited the longest since transferring or hanging up on an incoming calling group call For some applications this hunt type is more efficient than the circular type because it takes into account the varying duration of calls The system distributes calls based on when an agent last completed a call not on when he or she last received one This hunting method ignores non calling group calls For example if an agent transfers a call that arrived on a line not assigned to the calling group the calling group member s most idle
410. n be routed to another switch in the network T1 emulated tie lines need to be assigned to a pool and programmed to a route The route must be marked as Data Only If the Incoming Signaling Type is programmed as Wink or Delay and incoming data calls are routed by dial plan you may have to manipulate the incoming digits by deleting or adding digits This is because in many cases the digits that are sent by the service provider may not match the programmed dial plan See the Network Reference for more information Enter the following Dial Plan Routing options Expected Number of Digits Check the expected number of digits 1 4 The factory setting is 3 Number of Digits to Delete Check the number of digits to delete 0 4 in order to match the Dial Plan The factory setting is 0 Specific Digits to Add Enter the specific digits to add 1 9999 to the collected digits in order to determine a routing pattern If no digits are to be added check 0 The factory setting is 0 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 30 PRI Service Use these instructions only if the type of service on a 100D module is PRI Otherwise skip to the next section gt NOTE For private PRI network trunks see the T1 Service section earlier in this chapter and the Network Reference Do not use the PSTN PRI service PRI is a standard acce
411. n installing programming or using your system contact your Lucent Technologies authorized representative MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 About This Book Terms and Conventions Used Issue 1 August 1998 Page Terms and Conventions Used The terms described here are used in preference to other equally acceptable terms for describing communications systems Lines Trunks and Facilities Facility is a general term that designates a communications path between a telephone system and the telephone company central office Technically a trunk connects a switch to a switch for example the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System to the central office Technically a ine is a loop start facility or a communications path that does not connect switches for example an intercom line or a Centrex line However in actual usage the terms ine and trunk are often applied interchangeably In this guide we use ines trunks and line trunk to refer to facilities in general Specifically we refer to digital facilities We also use specific terms such as personal line ground start trunk DID trunk and so on When you talk to personnel at your local telephone company central office ask about the terms they use for the specific facilities they connect to your system Some older terms have been replaced with newer terms The following list shows the old term and the new term Old trunk m
412. n the Extensions Assigned column and write the results in the appropriate row in the Total Extensions Assigned column gt NOTE Since the system assigns an additional four extensions to each 008 OPT module you must first calculate the Extensions Assigned by multiplying the number of 008 OPT modules noted in the Number of Modules column by 4 and then add this subtotal to the number noted in the Physical Jacks by Module Type column 6 Add the column and record the result at the bottom of the column System Totals Control Unit Diagram Module Placement This section describes how to use the Control Unit Diagramlon Form 1 page 2 to map the placement of the modules according to certain guidelines Figure 2 1 on page 6 provides an example of a Control Unit Diagram for a system with 32 lines trunks and 52 extensions In addition this section describes how to identify each jack on each module with respect to type line trunk or extension and its associated logical ID Each physical jack on the control unit is numbered sequentially from bottom to top and left to right with logical IDs as follows m Extension jacks are numbered from 1 to 200 m Line trunk jacks are numbered from 1 to 80 This sequence of logical IDs is the basis for connecting components to the control unit as well as for the assignment of extension numbers and line trunk numbers Planning Form Instructions gt NOTE The Unit Load blocks above the diagram
413. n the Trunks Supported by Module column write the results in the appropriate row under Total Trunks by Module Type 4 Addthe column and record the total line trunk capacity of the system at the bottom of the column on the System Totals line MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Planning Module Placement Page 2 3 Capacity for Extensions Extension capacity is the number of extensions that can be connected to the control unit In most cases the number of physical jacks on the modules indicates capacity Most loop start and ground start modules have one or two power failure transfer PFT jacks used to connect a single line telephone in case of a power failure and not counted in system capacity Every four line jacks has one associated PFT jack One extension number is automatically assigned to each extension jack whether or not equipment is connected to it except for the 008 MLX 408 GS LS MLX and 008 OPT modules 008 MLX and 408 GS LS MLX Modules Two extension numbers are assigned to each physical jack the first for an MLX telephone and the second for any equipment connected to the telephone through an MFM ISDN terminal adapter such as the Ascend Pipeline 25 or 50 or any 2B data desktop video endpoint gt NOTE When using the 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module for data or video you must use Version 28 of the module 008 OPT Module
414. nce feature set the system Transfer Type to Ring and not Voice This will minimize the possibility of broadcasting a conference over an unattended speakerphone 3 If the DLC operator uses the DSS to transfer calls across a private network the operator may want to use manual completion to avoid transfer without return to busy If you subscribe to ANI or ICLID and automatic completion is selected the ANI and ICLID information will be sent but calls will not return on busy Planning Form Instructions 1 Under the Return Time Interval heading in the Transfer Options section of Form 8a do one of the following m Tokeep the factory setting check the 4 rings box m To indicate no return for transferred calls check the 0 rings box m change the factory set number of rings check the third box and write the number of rings 1 9 in the space provided 2 Under the One Touch Call Handling heading do one of the following m keep the factory setting check the One Touch Transfer box and do one of the following Check the Automatic Completion box to keep the factory set automatic completion of transfers Check the Manual Completion box to change the factory setting to manual completion m change from One Touch Transfer to One Touch Hold check the One Touch Hold box MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 43 3 U
415. ncel time check the No box m Toseta time to cancel all reminders in the system check the second box and write the time of day in the space provided MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 48 Calls to Unassigned Extensions This section contains instructions for designating that calls made to unassigned extension numbers by remote access users or on DID or dial in tie trunks are redirected to another extension number the QCC queue or a calling group instead of to the primary operator gt NOTE When an Automated Attendant transfers a call to a non local extension the transferring MERLIN LEGEND system monitors the call to ensure that it is answered If the non local extension is not available or the call is not answered within the transfer redirect timeout period fixed at 32 seconds the call stops ringing at the non local destination and is redirected to the extension on the same system as the Automated Attendant that is programmed to receive redirected calls This redirect extension can be a QCC queue a calling group or an individual extension A SecurityAlert DID numbers that correspond to pool dial out codes or facility access codes can be used to avoid toll restriction leading to toll abuse and or fraud See Customer Support Information for more information about security Planning Form Instructions Under the Ca
416. ncement device A primary delay announcement device can be administered as a secondary delay announcement device MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 5 0 Enhancements June 1997 Page xxvi Enhanced Calls in Queue Alarm Thresholds Three Calls in Queue Alarm thresholds can be set to more clearly indicate the real time status of the calls waiting in the queue according to the behavior of programmed Calls in Queue Alarm buttons In earlier releases only one Calls in Queue Alarm Threshold setting is available to activate the LEDs at programmed Calls in Queue Alarm buttons for a calling group Using all three levels the system manager sets Threshold 3 to the highest value Threshold 2 to a middle value and Threshold 1 to the lowest value A Calls in Queue Alarm button indicates the severity of the alarm conditions in the following ways m If the number of waiting calls is less than the value programmed for Threshold 1 or drops below that level the LED is unlit If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the Threshold 1 value but less than the Threshold 2 value the LED flashes If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the Threshold 2 value but less than the value for Threshold 3 the LED winks m If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the highest value Threshold 3 t
417. nction column write ISDN TA and identify each ISDN terminal adapter data station by person location or function 3 Fill in Form 2b with the extension number of the ISDN terminal adapter MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Extension Jacks Page 5 24 Local Host Computer Data Stations A local host computer data station consists of a local host computer a data terminal for that computer and one or more ISDN terminal adapters and or modems Assign each ISDN terminal adapter used for access to a host computer to a digital extension jack on an 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module Assign each modem to a basic telephone extension jack on an 012 T R 016 T R or 008 OPT module If you have a limited number of ISDN terminal adapters or modems to share among many users assign some or all of the modems or ISDN terminal adapters to a DHG In this way users can access all the devices in the DHG by dialing one extension number Users access the computer by placing a data call to the extension number for either an ISDN terminal adapter or modem or DHG depending on the user s type of data station that is assigned for communication with the local host computer Planning Form Instructions Record the extension jack assignments for local host computer access extensions on Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks gt NOTE Before you assign e
418. nd Switch mode Calculating Unit Loads Use the worksheet and instructions in the remainder of this appendix to calculate unit loads for each carrier Make a copy of all pages of the worksheet for each carrier MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 F Unit Load Calculation Unit Load Worksheet Unit Load Worksheet 1 Number of modules in carrier excluding power supply and processor m f fewer than 5 no further calculation is required m f 5 6 continue to Step 2 Key or Behind Switch mode only Indicate the configuration of lines then go to Step 5 Hybrid PBX mode only Do all modules in the carrier have MLX and or analog multiline telephone jacks m If no no further calculation is required m f yes continue to Step 4 Hybrid PBX mode only Calculate the total number of MLX and analog multiline telephones Number of MLX 20L telephones connected to modules in the carrier Number of MLX 28D telephones connected to modules in the carrier Number of 34 button analog multiline telephones connected to modules in the carrier Total of MLX 20L MLX 28D and 34 button analog telephones m Ifthe total is less than 45 no further calculation is required m If the total is 45 or more continue to Step 5 Issue 1 August 1998 Page F 3 O Key O Modified O Yes No MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 11
419. nd configured using the Automatic setting These configurations include m GPA connected to an answering machine and an analog multiline telephone with Auto Answer All button programmed m GPA connected to an answering machine and an analog multiline telephone programmed as a member of a calling group gt NOTE The answering machine may be used as either a primary or secondary Delay Announcement Device provided it hangs up when the announcement has finished m GPA connected to an analog multiline telephone programmed for voice and data gt NOTE An MLX telephone with an MFM installed is preferred for these applications When these configurations are used lift the handset before activating features that automatically turn on the speakerphone Examples of features that automatically turn on the speakerphone are Authorization Codes Auto Dial Last Number Dial and Saved Number Dial MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 28 Assign analog extension jacks for all remaining non operator analog multiline telephones in the system Planning Form Instructions On Form 2a mark the extension assignments for the remaining analog multiline telephones 1 Inthe Jack Type column make sure is checked next to the logical ID for each analog extension jack 2 Inthe Person Location or Function column identify each
420. nd time in the blank space for weekly backups or the time of day for daily backups Check Manual if you plan manual backup procedures System Consoles To make programming easier use this section to summarize information about the consoles in the system Planning Form Instructions Under the System Consoles heading check the type s of consoles m For Queued Call Consoles check the QCC s box and enter the extension numbers if known m For Direct Line Consoles check the DLC s box and enter the extension numbers if known MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Recording System Operating Conditions Page 2 12 Second Dial Tone Timer In some instances after dialing a star code the CO responds with a second dial tone as a prompt to enter additional digits Once a star code is accepted by the communications system the Second Dial Tone Timer is activated and set to the programmed value If dialing is attempted before the Second Dial Tone Timer expires the call is treated as though it had violated calling restrictions and is not completed A SecurityA lert If the Second Dial Tone Timer is set to 0 ms and a caller begins dialing additional digits before the second dial tone system restrictions may be bypassed and a restricted call may be routed Careful administration of the Second Dial Tone Timer prevents the caller from bypassing call restr
421. nder the Transfer Audible heading do one of the following gt NOTE If programmed for Music On Hold and a music source is provided outside callers who are transferred to a calling group are waiting in the queue or outside callers who are parked or camped on will hear music while they are waiting If the system uses the Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding feature it is recommended that Transfer Audible be set to Ringback If the system should play music while callers are on hold for transfer check the Music On Hold box m If the system will not provide music check the Ringback box 4 Under the Type of Transfer heading do one of the following m For the system to select a Ring button for transferred calls check the Ring button box factory setting m For the system to select a Voice button for transferred calls check the Voice button box Camp On Return Time This section contains instructions for designating the number of seconds a caller waits when transferred to a busy extension by way of the Camp On feature If the telephone is still busy at the end of the programmed interval the call returns to the person who transferred the call Planning Form Instructions Under the Camp On Return Time heading on Form 8a do one of the following m To keep the factory set interval check the 90 seconds box m To change the factory set interval check the second box and write the number of seconds 30 300 in the space
422. nds of line buttons depending on the type of equipment For nonoperator multiline telephones the system assigns SA Ring SA Voice and SA Orig Only buttons see Figure 3 2 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Assigning Telephone Buttons Page 3 53 co a ES C EA C ie Cc ea 28 c c3 i 20 C c LC Figure 3 2 Factory Set Assignment MLX Telephones Hybrid PBX Mode Although equipment such as single line telephones analog modems and fax machines do not have buttons the system treats these as multiline telephones with 34 buttons The system assigns one SA Ring one SA Voice and one SA Orig Only button to every adjunct connected through an MFM to an MLX telephone For equipment connected to an 012 T R 016 T R or 008 OPT module the system assigns two SA Ring buttons and one SA Orig Only button MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Augus
423. ne that does not support 2B Data to an MLX port that has been configured as a 2B Data port This wastes system resources and may cause other system errors The network facilities used by the endpoint connected to the MLX port may be any combination of PRI T1 Switched 56 both provided by the 100D module and or NI 1 BRI provided by the 800 NI BRI module facilities however it is recommended that you use two B channels of the same type to ensure the best possible connection See Figure 5 6 a sample connection diagram gt NOTE See the Network Reference for information on group videoconferencing over private network tandem trunks MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 5 Data Communications About Data and Video Communications BRI BASED DESKTOP MDEOCONFERENCING 20 Ga Passive Bus ISDN ExpressRoute V35 BASED GROUP 1000 VIDEOCONFERENCING ExpressRoute 1000 ExpressRoute 1000 ATL i TR J G4 FAX NI 1 BRI PRI or T1 Tie Trunk MERLIN LEGEND TR MERLIN LEGEND Issue 1 August 1998 ExpressRoute 1000 5 18 BRI BASED DESKTOP MNO VIDEOCONFERENCING E voce 8 1 zs HE Passive Bus T SDN TA ExpressRoute 1000 V 35 BASED GROUP VIDEOCONFERENCING ExpressRoute 1000
424. ne Buttons Page 3 63 DISPLAY CONSOLE WITH DSS 34 BUTTON 22 BUTTON 20 oft Ojo volte 00 0000 Ojo Voice OSA Icom O Ring OSA Icom 00000000000000 o00o0 00000000000000 000000 o0oo00g00p00000000000000 0000 a 21 SEU 33 T Trnstr LI Recall Li Conf L1 g Drop L1 end tM B 20022 remove s E shit 2 JE shits E Seg 1 Note Alarm Night Service and Send Remove Msg will be replaced with Lines 30 31 and 32 if the system has that many lines Figure 3 7 Analog Direct Line Console gt NOTE If the system has more than 29 lines Alarm Night Service and Send Remove Message are replaced with lines 30 31 and 32 The system assigns lines trunks to buttons on DLCs in the order in which the lines trunks are connected to the control unit You can change the factory set assignments by removing adding or changing the order in which lines trunks are assigned to buttons for each DLC operator If the system has more than the number of factory assigned lines tr
425. ne company s services if available and must be subscribed to MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 1 Before You Begin Obtaining a Floor Plan Page 1 13 Obtaining a Floor Plan You may want to use a floor plan to make planning more manageable and to ensure that the correct telephone equipment is assigned to each employee If the customer does not already have a floor plan showing the location of system equipment you should create one Use the symbols shown in Figure 1 2 and the following instructions 1 Use a large sheet of paper and sketch the office layout The location of office walls and other partitions is important when features are assigned to telephones that must be within hearing range of each other For example pickup group members must be able to hear each others telephones ringing Indicate the location of each employee s telephone other locations that will have a telephone such as a conference room and the locations of data terminals PCs and host computers Indicate the type of telephone at each location using an abbreviation that includes the number of programmable buttons For example write MLX 1O at 10 button MLX telephones MLX 2OL at 20 button MLX display telephones BIS 34 at 34 button analog multiline telephones and so on Indicate the type of adjunct at each location For example write FAX ana modem analog modem headeet or othe
426. necessary the use of Automatic Route Selection Hybrid PBX mode only ensures that the preferred line trunk is selected 2 Calls covered by someone Suggests that this employee should be assigned as a else sender sender in either an Individual or a Group Coverage arrangement particularly if calls are covered by someone other than the operator 3 Shares lines telephone Identifies Shared System Access buttons and or common numbers personal line appearances 4 Covers someone else s Suggests assignment as a receiver in someone else s calls receiver Individual or Group Coverage arrangements Shares incoming calls Identifies calling group needs 6 Frequency of use Identifies heavy and light telephone users Heavy users may benefit from additional System Access buttons and or an additional System Access Originate Only button 7 Data needs Identifies existing and potential data terminal and personal computer users 8 Use of account codes Identifies current account codes used for charge back of calls if there is a programmed Account Code button on the telephone and if the system includes Call Accounting System CAS 9 Frequently dialed numbers Identifies useful numbers for the System Speed Dial list 10 Picks up calls Identifies need for a Pickup group 11 View incoming caller Identifies which telephone users need call screening information capabilities This service may be part of the local telepho
427. ned to that extension are overridden When an unmarked System Speed Dial or a Personal Speed Dial number is used to dial a restricted number the call cannot be completed unless the number is on the Allowed List for that extension MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 59 Automatic Route Selection Hybrid PBX Mode Only A SecurityA lert ARS should always be used for the best security protection This section contains instructions for using Automatic Route Selection ARS to allow the most cost effective use of lines trunks connected to the system which can mean significant savings for the customer s business Routing calls efficiently is especially important when the business has several different types of lines trunks such as local WATS FX or tie or uses more than one long distance company If the system is pooled you can use ARS to specify which trunk pool should be used for each call based on the telephone number the caller dials ARS tables can be used to route calls across a private network and out to the PSTN using a remote system s trunks See Network Reference for information on how to set up ARS for the private network With ARS users must dial a J before dialing any 10 digit toll number even if the local telephone company does not require a toll call prefix You can define up to 16 ARS tables each divided into two subpat
428. next section T1 Service For T1 Switched 56 service you must also complete 1 Switched 56 section b To select settings for PRI skip to PRI Service T1 Service T1 service allows the emulation of different analog lines You can also order services such as Megacom 800 over the channels The capacity however is limited to voice calls and data calls using a modem In addition beginning with Release 4 0 of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System T1 supports ACCUNET Switched Digital Service or other circuit switched data service at 56 kbps when the T1 channel or T1 Tie trunk is configured as T1 Switched 56 Release 6 0 and later systems allow T1 service to provide PRI or T1 Tie service in a private network The planning form instructions below apply to both T1 and T1 Switched 56 service except where noted If you are configuring channels for T1 Switched 56 service complete these instructions then proceed to the T1 Switched 56 Network section that immediately follows If configuring T1 Tie trunks for T1 Switched 56 service proceed to the Tie Trunks section after completing these instructions If you are planning to use T1 service as PRI trunks in a private network check the PRI box under Type of Service on Form 3b page 1 and proceed to the PRI IService section See the Network Reference for more information regarding configuration for use in a private network MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1
429. nfiguration Planning Module Placement Page 2 6 2 For each line trunk and extension jack of each module write the type of jack X extension and L T line trunk and the associated logical ID keeping in mind the following m Each 100D module is assigned 24 logical IDs even though the module has only 1 physical trunk jack m Each 800 NI BRI module is assigned 2 logical IDs per physical trunk jack for a total of 16 logical IDs m The 008 OPT module is assigned 12 logical IDs even though the module has only 8 physical extension jacks m Power failure transfer PFT jacks not assigned logical IDs gt NOTES 1 If the system will have one or more PFT telephones maximum 20 indicate on the Control Unit Diagram the modules that will have PFT telephones connected to their PFT jacks write PFT in the modules A PFT telephone can be connected to a PFT jack on a 400 LS 400 GS LS TTR 800 800 GS LS 800 GS LS ID 408 408 GS LS or 408 GS LS MLX module Touch tone PFT telephones must be connected to jacks with touch tone lines trunks 2 You need a ground start button on a PFT telephone connected to a ground start trunk lt lt 9 yy SAM A A GS VY YY sq Power Power Leld Power oe Supply 1 23 72 Supply Ur urzad ura LIT7 umn LirzilL 129 Ure 20 Lr L T9 umalma LTIA L TIe L T28 725 X45 X42 X41
430. ng central office Centrex channel channel service unit checksum circuit switched data call class of restriction clear data channel Page GL 6 International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee common channel signaling Signaling in which one channel of a group of channels carries signaling information for each of the remaining channels permitting each of the remaining channels to be used to nearly full capacity In the system s 100D module channel 24 can be designated as the signaling channel for channels 1 23 Programming of features on individual telephones performed at a central location by the system manager See also system programming hnd extension programming The sharing of a voice messaging system by two or more directly connected MERLIN LEGEND systems in a private network Available beginning in Release 6 1 See CO Set of system features to which a user can subscribe on telephone trunks from the local telephone company Telecommunications transmission path for voice and or data See Sum of ones in a sequence of ones and zeros used to detect or correct errors in data transmission Data call made through an exclusively established and maintained connection between data stations 5 Clear data channels also called unrestricted data channels allow the transmission of occurrences of more than seven contiguous zero bits If a clear data channel is requested and
431. ng that is the system uses the clock of the far end connection check Loop m To change the setting the clock is free running check Local The typical setup for the primary synchronization source is Active and other modules are set to Not Active Under the Activation subheading in each box do one of the following If loop clock synchronization is taking place check Active factory setting m If the clock is free running check Not Active Under the Channel Service Unit heading check Foreign Exchange PRI Options If the switch is part of a private network the PRI options are automatically set If the switch is not part of a private network after you have completed the module information on pages 1 and 2 of Form 3b Incoming Trunks DS1 Connectivity 100D Module use the instructions in this section to record these PRI options Assigning B channels to groups Associating outgoing and incoming services to the groups For groups with incoming services selecting an incoming routing method Dial Plan Routing or Line Appearance and providing routing information For groups with outgoing services completing the Network Selection Special Services and Call by Call Service tables Identifying the trunk and telephone numbers sent to the network for caller identification Assigning a test number used for maintenance by the service provider changing timers and counters from the factory settings and assigning the Terminal Equ
432. ng Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding is just like activating regular Remote Call Forwarding and requires that Remote Call Forwarding be enabled for the extension However the user dials x instead of a dial out code and a Pause character may be required after the x The Centrex service provider determines whether the Pause is needed MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 6 0 Enhancements February 1998 Page xxi Pause cannot be originated from a single line telephone or a remote access user A multiline telephone user in the local system must enter an authorization code to activate the feature A remote access user may activate the feature without using an authorization code Barrier code requirements do apply however Authorization Codes and Remote Call Forwarding In Release 6 0 and later Key or Hybrid PBX mode systems forwarding features including Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding but excluding Follow Me can be activated or deactivated at a multiline telephone by entering the authorization code for the extension from which calls are to be forwarded The user enters the authorization code then activates or deactivates the forwarding feature in the normal fashion This is especially useful for a single line telephone user who must include a Pause character in a Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding dial
433. nications System the system manager should feel comfortable that a good reason to do so exists In any event it is not advisable to give anyone access to network facilities or operators or to dial a number at the request of the caller m Anytime call appears to be suspicious call the Lucent Technologies BCS Fraud Intervention Center at 1 800 628 2888 fraud intervention for System 25 PARTNER and MERLIN systems MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A 12 Customers should also take advantage of Lucent Technologies monitoring services and devices such as the Net PROTECT family of fraud detection services CAS with HackerTracker and CAT Terminal with Watchdog Call 1 800 638 7233 to get more information on these Lucent Technologies fraud detection services and products Security Risks Associated with Transferring through Voice Messaging Systems Toll fraud hackers try to dial into a voice mailbox and then execute a transfer by dialing 7 The hacker then dials an access code either 7 for Automatic Route Selection or a pooled facility code followed by the appropriate digit string to either direct dial or access a network operator to complete the call gt NOTE In Release 3 1 and later systems all extensions are initially and by default restricted from dial access to pools In order for an extension to
434. ning a single non local member can be used for the same purposes as a calling group containing local extensions including m Night Service Night Service coverage can be provided across a private network to a centralized Automated Attendant a non local calling group a QCC queue a DLC or any individual extension on the remote system such as a night bell m Group Coverage Group Coverage can be provided across a private network to a VMS a non local calling group a QCC queue a DLC or any individual extension on the remote system MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 New Features and Enhancements Release 6 1 Enhancements August 1998 Page xv m Calling group overflow coverage Calling group overflow coverage can be provided by a centralized VMS a non local calling group QCC queue a DLC or any individual extension on the remote system m Calls directed to another system Lines connected to remote systems can be answered by any extension programmed to answer the call such as a centralized Automated Attendant or a system operator QCC or DLC Transfer Redirect When an Automated Attendant transfers a call to a non local extension the transferring MERLIN LEGEND system monitors the call to ensure that it is answered If the non local extension is not available or the call is not answered within the transfer redirect timeout period fixed at 32 seconds the call stops
435. ning the format and timing of message exchanges between devices such as an MLX telephone and the control unit Network that is commonly accessible for local or long distance calling Also called public network or public switched network In a private network a facility that connects a networked system to the public switched telephone network See PSTN MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary August 1998 Page GL 23 Q Queued Call Console MLX 20L telephone used by a system operator in Hybrid PBX mode only Used to answer outside calls directed to a system operator position and inside calls direct inside and outside calls to an extension or an outside telephone number serve as a message center make outside calls for users with outward calling restrictions set up conference calls and monitor system operation RAM read only memory Remote Access restore restricted data channel ring generator riser cable RS 232 robbed bit signaling ROM random access memory Computer memory in which an individual byte or range of bytes can be addressed and read or changed without affecting other parts of memory See ROM System feature that allows an outside caller to gain access to the system almost as if at a system extension Ina private network remote access settings are used to control calls routed via ARS or UDP routing across t
436. nitored non attendant transfers a call the recipient will not get the ANI or Caller ID information at the application even though it may be seen on the telephone s display Extensions that interact with a CTI capable program on a computer extensions marked Computer Telephony Integrated Client PC should not have Microphone Disable programmed The CTI link must be connected to an extension that is on an MLX port module 008 MLX or 408 MLX However the extension cannot be on a module of firmware vintage 29 the console programming port or a potential operator position in the first or fifth port on the module CTI link programming removes 2B Data programming for a port If you want to keep a port programmed as a 2B data port do not assign it as a CTI link port The CTI link extension must directly connect to the CTI card on the CTI Server Adapters MFMs and passive bus arrangements are not supported on this port Planning Form Instructions On Form 2a mark the box under the CTI Link column for the extension that will connect the control unit to the CTI Server The CTI link cannot be on an extension that is a potential operator gray on the planning form or a console programming port If you want to keep a port programmed as a 2B data port do not assign it as a CTI link port On form 4b or 4d check the Yes box under Computer Telephony Integrated Client PC or on form 5a or 5b check the CTI PC adjunct box if a computer at the same l
437. nning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations CONTINUATION TEXT 0014 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DNCT NPA 215 DN 6852199 EQN 20 0 05 00 CT CMD CAT IBA LCC PKGSD RAX 1 COS ICND COS RND COSDAT SERCOMP 6852299 PIC 222 C56 PIC 288 C64 CRBLIM 1 INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 CONTINUATION TEXT 0015 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 50071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DN NPA 215 DN 6852299 EQN 20 0 05 00 BCHDN 2 BCDN SP BCDN AU3 BCDN C56 BCDN 64 BCHCT 2 VI BCHCT 2 CMD BCHCT 0 PMD IBCHCT 2 IBCHCT 2 CMD IBCHCT 0 PMD OBCHCT 2 OBCHCT 2 CMD OBCHCT 0 PMD CT VI CT CMD INTERRUPTION TEXT JOB 0959 Issue 1 August 1998 Page H 40 96 01 18 16 22 51 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 96 01 18 16 22 55 MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations CONTINUATION TEXT 0016 NAVK1 BELLCORNJRB APS 13 0 PS0071 000 M 0959 OMT 00 LEONLY2816 04328 SUBSCRIBER VIEW DNCT NPA 215 DN 6852299 EQN 20 0 05 00 CT VI LCC PKGSV RAX 1 COS ICND COS RND COSDAT SERCOMP 68531 19 PIC 222 SP 288 AU3 CRBLIM
438. non default tables complete all copies of Form 3f Repeat Steps 1 through 6 for each table Tables 1 through 16 that you need 8 If you have not completed the factory set tables do so now a For Tables 17 Default Toll and 18 Default Local repeat Steps 1 through 6 to complete the subpattern and pool routing sections For the Dial 0 table Table 19 complete the Pool routing Facility Restriction Level FRL and Other Digits entries following Steps 2 through 4 If the switch is part of a private network and the private network needs to use the Dial 0 table see the Network Reference for information A WARNING C In the next step assigning a restrictive FRL could impair the ability to dial 911 If users need to dial an access code to call the special numbers 411 611 811 and 911 record that code on the Special Number Table 20 under the Other Digits heading Assign the FRL as shown in Step 3 If the switch is part of a private network and the private network needs to use the Special Numbers table see the Network Reference for information MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 73 9 If restricting extensions private network calls and remote access users from specific routes locate Form 6g Call Restriction Assignments and Lists a Under the ARS Restriction Level heading on each telephone form write the value 0 t
439. not flexible 0 1 Extensions 10 19 2 Extensions 20 29 3 Extensions 30 39 4 Extensions 40 49 5 Extensions 50 59 6 Extensions 60 66 Extra Extensions 6849 Terminal Adapters 6999 6700 6842 6850 6992 Main Pool MFMs 767 Calling Groups Paging 70 Terminal Adapters 769 770 791 7920 7929 Groups 710 766 793 799 Trunks 801 880 Park 889 Pools 881 888 890 899 9 ARS Access Hybrid PBX Mode Idle Line Access 9 Listed Directory Number QCC Queue t Remote Access NOTE 0 and 10 are the same station Figure 2 2 Extension Numbers for 2 Digit Numbering Plan MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 35 0 Operator Console not flexible 0 1 Extensions 100 199 Extensions 200 299 MFMs Terminal Adapters 300 399 MFMs Terminal Adapters 400 499 500 599 600 699 Calling Groups 770 791 7920 7929 Park 881 888 ARS Access Hybrid PBX mode Idle Line Access Listed Directory Number QCC t Remote Access NOTE 0 and 100 are the same station Figure 2 3 Extension Numbers for 3 Digit Numbering Plan 0 Operator Console not flexible 0 100 199 2 200 299 3 300 399 4 400 499 5 500 599 6 600 699 7 Main Pool Extensions MFMs Terminal 7500 7699 Calling Group Paging 70 7100 7299
440. not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of common catrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unau thorized use For important information regarding your system and toll fraud Support Information Federal Communications Commission Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense For further FCC information see Appendix Customer Support Information Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le Pr sent Appareil Num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passan
441. nt such as single line telephones analog modems and fax machines do not have buttons the system treats these as multiline telephones with 34 buttons In both Key and Behind Switch modes the system assigns no outside lines to this type of equipment The system assigns two ICOM Ring buttons to equipment connected to an 012 T R 016 T R or 008 OPT module The system assigns an ICOM Ring and an ICOM Voice button to every adjunct connected through an MFM You MUST remove the ICOM Voice button MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Assigning Telephone Buttons Page 3 60 Guidelines for Button Assignments This section contains guidelines for assigning buttons in Key or Behind Switch mode Key Mode Use the following guidelines to assign buttons for a system in Key mode gt NOTE When assigning buttons in Key mode keep in mind that BRI lines are not automatically assigned to telephones or DLCs For Key mode with multiline telephone users You can assign ICOM Voice ICOM Ring or ICOM Orig Only buttons to each extension Assign additional ICOM Ring ICOM Voice or an ICOM Orig Only button for people who frequently receive or make transferred calls The ICOM Orig Only button ensures that if all intercom buttons are busy at least one is still available to make a call or to transfer the current call Assign additional outside lines including special purpose
442. number for the device in the space provided see Form 2a or 2b Also do the following Write in the desired Delay Interval between the primary announcement and the secondary announcement in seconds The Delay Interval is also the time between repeats of the Secondary Announcement if the Repeat Announcement option is set gt NOTE As arule the Delay Interval should never be set less than the length in seconds of the secondary announcement Ideally the Delay Interval should be a multiple of the secondary announcement s length based on the anticipated number of calls in the queue For example if the secondary announcement length is 10 seconds and five calls are expected to be in the queue during busy times then the Delay Interval should be 50 seconds For more information on optimizing the settings for announcements see the Feature Reference If you want the secondary announcement to repeat continuously after the Announcement Delay Interval then check the Yes box next to Repeat Announcement Otherwise check the No box To designate a telephone to receive message waiting indications for the group do one of the following under the Message Waiting Receiver heading on Form 7d page 2 To assign no receiver check the No box To assign a receiver check the second box and write the extension number of the message waiting receiver see MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112
443. o uo 2 2 4 og lt lt zu ui ul zu o a a 2 2 S o N lt 2 55 5 8 zo LE aa o r a02 lot l l a a 21 lt lt 5 5 4 o 9 9 fo 9 N T Hybrid PBX mode only Form 5d 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 6a Optional Operator Features Direct Line Console Operator Hold Timer DLC Automatic Hold 60 seconds Q Disable seconds 10 255 Q Enable Queued Call Console Hold Return Message Center Remain on hold Q No Q Return to queue Yes Operator Extension No Automatic Hold or Release Extended Call Completion Q Automatic Release Automatic completion Q Automatic Hold Manual completion Calls in Queue Alert Return Ring Q Disable Q 4rings Enable Operator Extension No s d rings 1 15 NN m Position Busy Backup Queue Over Threshold Q No Q calls operators not Q Yes Extension no of calling notified when calls are in queue group backup Operator Hold Timer Elevate Priority Q 60 seconds 0 seconds calls are not a seconds 10 255 automatically reprioritized TA oice Announce seconds 5 30 Disable Q Enable Direct Station Select
444. o 6 you want to assign b Under the ARS Restriction Level heading on pages 3 and 4 of Form 3a check the value 0 to 6 you want to assign Extension and Remote Access FRL values must be equal to or greater than the FRL value assigned to routes in order for users to access those routes A value of 0 is the most restrictive and a value of 6 is the least restrictive The factory set FRL value assigned to extensions is 3 To restrict an extension from specific routes assign an FRL value to the extension that is lower than the route s value For example if you want to limit a user from making calls on pools with special use lines trunks such as WATS assign a value of 0 If you want a telephone used by a top executive to have unlimited use of any ARS route assign a value of 6 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Page 5 1 Data Communications In addition to voice communications capabilities the system also supports data and video communications to enable users to send or receive data or establish group or personal video conferences gt NOTE To configure the switch to support data communications across a private network see the Network Reference for information Planning for data and video communications consists of the following tasks 1 Planning how the data and or video equipment connects to extension jacks on the control unit Thi
445. o analog signals for transmission over a telephone line and analog signals received on a telephone line to digital signals A type of data station that includes a modem as its DCE It may also include an MLX telephone for simultaneous voice and data MLX voice and modem data station an analog multiline telephone analog voice and modem data station or a single line telephone for dialing only modem data only station These data stations connect respectively to MLX analog or tip ring extension jack modules They provide analog transmission of data Pair or group of pairs of modems and data modules with interconnected RS 232 interfaces that converts digital signals to analog or analog signals to digital thereby allowing users with ISDN terminal adapter data stations to communicate with users who have analog modem data stations Circuit pack in the control unit that provides the physical jacks for connection of telephones and or outside lines trunks to the communications system In the name of a module the first digit indicates the number of ine trunk jacks it contains the last digit indicates the number of extension jacks it contains If no letters appear after the number line trunk module provides oop start lines or an extension jack module provides analog or tip ring jacks For example a 408 GS LS MLX module contains four line trunk jacks and eight digital MLX extension jacks and provides either loop start LS or groun
446. o keep or to reassign the factory set extension numbers Keep in mind that you can provide one touch use of Group Paging to operators with DSSs if you renumber to extensions within the Page 1 2 or 3 button ranges or set the Page 1 2 or 3 buttons so the operators can access them MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Group Assigned Features Page 4 28 Planning Form Instructions 1 Determine the number of paging groups needed 2 For each group write the name of the group such as Sales in the Group ID space on Form 7b 3 To change the factory set extension numbers a Write the new numbers in the Renumber to space b Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers write the new numbers in the Renumber to column of the Group Paging section of that form 4 Write the extension number for each group member in the Ext No column see 5 Write each group member s name or location in the Person or Location column see Form 2a Coverage Coverage allows calls to extensions called senders to be covered by one or more other extensions called receivers Coverage can be individual or group assigned This section contains instructions for both types See Call Restriction earlier in this chapter for more information Forms Needed orm 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks orm 4b Analog Multiline Telephone orm 4d MLX Telephone orm
447. ocation as the extension will have a CTl capable program client installed MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 30 Jacks for Tip Ring Equipment and Applications Use these instructions only if the system includes 012 T R 016 T R or 008 OPT modules Otherwise skip to the next section Assign the basic telephone jacks on the 012 T R 016 T R or 008 OPT modules to any tip ring equipment such as single line telephones fax machines analog modems or Group Calling Delay Announcement Devices The hardware design of the 008 OPT module includes an interface for off premises telephones which supplies increased gain levels and protection If assigning basic telephone jacks on an 016 T R module the Ringing Frequency may be set to either 20 Hz Type A or 25 Hz Type E The Ringing Frequency is programmable on each 016 T R module and affects all ports on that module Several optional applications if used with the system require basic jacks on a 012 T R or 016 T R module Enhanced Service Center Messaging 2000 Intuity AUDIX Lucent Technologies Attendant AUDIX Voice Power Integrated Solution II IS II or Ill IS III and Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant IS or IS Do not use the 008 OPT module for these applications The system can accept up to eight application ports extension jacks for applica
448. odule trunk jack station station jack analog data station 7500B data station analog voice and data station digital voice and analog data station analog data only station 7500B data only station MLX voice and 7500B data station New line trunk module line trunk jack extension extension jack modem data workstation ISDN terminal adapter data workstation analog voice and modem data workstation MLX voice and modem data workstation modem data only workstation ISDN terminal adapter data only workstation MLX voice and ISDN terminal adapter data workstation MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 About This Book Terms and Conventions Used Page Typographical Conventions Certain type fonts and styles act as visual cues to help you rapidly understand the information presented Example Purpose Itis very important that you follow these Italics indicate emphasis steps You must attach the wristband before touching the connection The part of the headset that fits over Italics also set off special terms one or both ears is called a headpiece If you press the Feature button onan The names of fixed feature fac display telephone the display lists tory imprinted buttons appear in bold telephone features you can select The names of programmed buttons are programmed Auto Dial button gives printed as regular text you instant access to an
449. of a telephone at a glance The lights next to the buttons on a DSS or next to Auto Dial buttons programmed with extension numbers indicate the status of the telephone In Hotel mode Extension Status ES affects a station s calling restrictions Only an ES operator can use a DSS to turn off states ES1 or ES2 to remove calling restrictions In CMS mode Extension Status does not affect calling restrictions gt NOTE In Hotel mode an ES restricted station can call a remote private network extension Decide on the configuration and assign operator positions to monitor extension status Planning Form Instructions Under the Extension Status heading on Form 8a 1 Checkthe Assign to operator positions box and write the extension number for each operator position in the space provided See the appropriate copy of Form ba or bb 2 Dooneofthe following m To keep the factory set configuration check the Group Calling CMS box m To change the configuration check the Hotel box MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 45 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Use these instructions only if connecting a Station Message Detail Recording SMDR device or call accounting application Otherwise skip to the next section Inside Dial Tone This section contains instructions for setting up SMDR to keep track of telephone usage SMDR
450. of system components such as modules and their vintages and the creation of MLX telephone button labels appear on Win SPM Win SPM also provides a DOS emulator mode to program tasks not currently supported by the GUI and to program a MERLIN LEGEND system of Release 6 0 or earlier Win SPM is available on CD ROM and is supported in Windows 95 Windows NT and Windows 98 Windows NT Driver Now available is the MERLIN LEGEND Windows NT PBX driver When coupled with the CentreVu Telephony Services application the driver provides true server based Computer Telephony Integration CTI The new driver requires a MERLIN LEGEND system of Release 5 0 or later and servers and PCs that support the applications MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 6 0 Enhancements February 1998 Page xvii Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 6 0 Enhancements February 1998 Release 6 0 includes all Release 5 0 functionality plus the enhancements listed below Private Networks In Hybrid PBX mode systems only MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems can be networked with one another or with DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server ECS and Communications Systems private networks In previous releases this functionality is available using tie lines but users handle calls between networked switches as outsi
451. off at the times and on the days of the week you specify This ensures that after hours calls are handled properly even if an operator forgets to turn on Night Service Operators can still override the timer and turn Night Service on or off manually The feature can also be deactivated through system programming for special conditions such as a midweek holiday Planning Form Instructions On Form 9c Night Service Time Set write the time of day you want Night Service turned on Start Time and off Stop Time for each day of the week Use 24 hour numbering called military time for example 5 30 p m is 1730 in 24 hour numbering If Night Service is to remain on throughout the day for example on Sunday do not enter on and off times Night Service with Coverage Control As of Release 4 1 Night Service Coverage Control automatically controls the status of programmed VMS Coverage Off buttons When the Coverage Control option is enabled a transition into Night Service either by pressing a Night Service button or automatically by the Time Set option automatically deactivates the VMS Coverage Off Release 2 0 or later buttons LED is off and allows outside calls to go to VMS Coverage at night When the system is taken out of Night Service either by pressing a Night Service button or automatically by the Time Set option programmed VMS Coverage Off buttons are activated LED is on and outside calls are prevented from going to VMS Covera
452. omatic Route Selection Worksheet 9a 9a 9a 9a Night Service Group Assignment 9b 9b Automatic Route Selection Tables 9b 9b 9b 9b Night Service Outward Restriction 9c 9c Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Numbers Tables 9c 9 9c 9c Night Service Time Set 10a 10a 10a 10a Label Form Posted Message 10b 10b 10b 10b System Speed Dial 11 Service Observing Group Assignment MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Support Telephone Number Page A 1 Customer Support Information Support Telephone Number In the USA only Lucent Technologies provides a toll tree customer Helpline 1 800 628 2888 24 hours a day If you need assistance when installing programming or using your system call the Helpline or your Lucent Technologies representative Consultation charges may apply Outside the USA if you need assistance when installing programming or using your system contact your Lucent Technologies representative Federal Communications Commission FCC Electromagnetic Interference Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio fre
453. omestic toll free incoming voice calls MCI 900 service numbers m LEC services for DMS 100 switch types DMS Virtual Private Network service for calls between the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and another communications system such as another MERLIN LEGEND Communications System DMS INWATS Inward Wide Area Telephone Service for domestic toll free incoming voice calls DMS OUTWATS Outward Wide Area Telephone Service for domestic outgoing long distance voice calls DMS FX foreign exchange to provide local call rating for calls from the local exchange to the area serviced by the foreign exchange DMS tie trunk service to provide private exchange call rating for calls placed on a dedicated central office facility between the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and another communications system such as another MERLIN LEGEND Communications System MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 4 2 Enhancements June 1997 Page xxviii Improvements to Station Message Detail Recording SMDR and Support for MERLIN LEGEND Reporter Application The SMDR feature is enhanced to provide more details about calling group agent activities and to help system managers assess the effectiveness of call centers in terms of both agent performance and the adequacy of facilities to handle inbound calls These improvements
454. one digital jack configured as a 2B Data port on an 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module Assign each video system that is connected to an MLX port by way of an ISDN terminal adapter that does not support 2B Data to two separate digital jacks configured as 1B Data ports on an 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module Planning Form Instructions Record the extension jack assignments for video systems on Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks 1 Inthe Jack Type column make sure there is a D next to the number for each digital extension 2 Inthe Person Location or Function column enter the type of equipment connected MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Lines Trunks to Data and Video Stations Page 5 27 Assigning Lines Trunks to Data and Video Stations The following types of outside lines trunks are used to make and receive data calls to and from data stations outside of the system Loop Start LS This is the standard line trunk for homes and small businesses and can be used to communicate with outside modem data stations Video calls are not made over loop start lines trunks Loop start lines trunks are the least expensive lines trunks in some areas but have the following disadvantages They do not protect against glare a condition that occurs when an outside call is made at the same time that an incoming call arrives on the same line
455. ones including MLX voice modem data stations 408 GS LS MLX MLX telephones including MLX voice and ISDN terminal adapter stations ISDN terminal adapter data terminals such as PCs Video systems personal or group Basic 012 T R equipment 016 Single line telephones Adjuncts such as fax or answering machines Modem data only stations 008 OPT Tip ring equipment in another building or offsite Before you assign extension jacks for ISDN terminal adapter data stations review the guidelines in the next section Guidelines for Digital Extension Jacks MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Extension Jacks Page 5 22 Guidelines for Digital Extension Jacks Although only one logical ID is assigned to each digital extension jack the system automatically assigns two extension numbers The first extension number shown on Form 2a is assigned to an MLX telephone connected to the extension jack The second extension number assigned to each jack is reserved for an adjunct such as an ISDN terminal adapter data terminal or desktop video endpoint connected to the MLX telephone If a personal or group video system is connected to the MLX port extension numbers are assigned to the video system for use in 2B Data connections Both extension numbers are assigned automatically whether or not the extension includes an ISDN terminal adapter Call
456. onization Source Tertiary Synchronization Source Other None Connection 2 O CO L PBX O PRI T1 Emulated Trunks Tie S56 Data Services Other O None Connection 3 O CO PBX PRI T1 Emulated Trunks Tie S56 Data Services Other model numbers The switching equipment of the service provider must be 4ESS Generic 13 or later or 5ESS G6 or later MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Page of T1 PRI Planner continued Ter Ei Non Complex Configuration Module of Slot No Services Subscribed To Channels Assigned to Service Q Ground start T1 only Q Loop start T1 only Q Tie Trunk T1 only Q MultiQuest 900 w wo DNIS 1 or AT amp T Toll Q Megacomt OUTWATSt 1 or AT amp T To C Megacom 800 INWATSt w wo DNIS t T1 or AT amp T To Megacom Q OUTWATS Megacom 800T INWATS 1 or AT amp T Toll SDNT Q VPNT T1 or AT amp T Toll ACCUNET Switched Q 56 64 Digital Digital Service AT amp T Toll only Q ACCUNET Switched 56 Digital Data Service T1 only Q DID T1 only Q Call by Call Service Selection AT amp T Toll only MCI PRISM MCI Vnet MCI Toll Q MCI 8007 MCI 9007 MCI Toll Q DMS Private Q DMS INWATS DMS Local Q DMS OUTWATS QO DMS FX DMS Local Q DMS Tie Trunk Digital Service PRI only
457. only if calling restrictions are assigned to any telephones Otherwise skip to the section This section contains instructions to designate an Allowed List of telephone numbers that a restricted telephone can dial You can design up to eight lists each with a maximum of 10 numbers Each number can have up to six digits for example an area code followed by an exchange If a toll call prefix is required you can include a leading 1 which the system doesn t count as one of the six digits Star codes such as 67 may also be included in the list to allow users to access special services offered by the Central Office CO Once you have designed the lists decide which restricted telephones have access to the lists Each restricted telephone can have up to eight lists A SecurityAlert In some instances after dialing a star code the CO responds with a second dial tone as a prompt to enter additional digits If a caller begins dialing additional digits before the second dial tone system restrictions may be bypassed and a restricted call may be routed Careful administration of the Second Dial Tone Timer prevents the caller from bypassing call restrictions in this manner Refer to thel Planning Form Inetuuctions ict follow for information If foreign exchange FX or tie trunks are connected to the system you can enter the exchange in the Allowed List to allow people with restricted telephones to dial numbers to the area code for the FX
458. onnect supervision Toll fraud can occur when loop start lines trunks are used with unreliable disconnect If the calling party stays on the line after the called party hangs up the central office will return a dial tone at the conclusion of the call enabling the caller to place another call as if it were being placed from your company Remote Call Forwarding and the Forwarding Delay option are programmed for each extension Assign these features to selected extensions for example for people who often work away from the office Remote Call Forwarding cannot be assigned to QCCs If there is a personal line assigned to a telephone you can specify that calls on that line be forwarded to an outside number if the extension is the principal user of the personal line Ensure that the number of rings for Remote Call Forwarding is less than the Coverage Delay or call will not forward Planning Form Instructions 1 Under the Remote Call Forwarding heading on Form 6b do one of the following m prevent users from forwarding calls to outside numbers factory setting check the Not Allowed column and proceed to the next section Fax Message Waiting Receiver m To provide Remote Call Forwarding check the Allowed column then proceed to Step 2 2 Ifyou want a user to be able to forward the incoming calls on a specific line or lines to another number write the extension number in the spaces provided on Form 6c Principal User of Person
459. ons Page 5 42 Digital Data Video Stations Use these instructions if the system has digital data video endpoints gt NOTE See the Network Reference for information on digital data video stations on a private network Digital data video endpoints provide access to voice as well as high speed digital data and video services over PRI NI 1 BRI or T1 Switched 56 facilities Incoming data video calls may be received using m Dial Plan Routing PRI and T1 Switched 56 Data m Tie Line Routing PRI and T1 Switched 56 Data m Personal Lines Outgoing data video calls may be placed using m Pool Access m Automatic Route Selection ARS m Personal Lines For more information see the l Planning Overview earlier in this chapter Forms Needed m Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks m Data Form Digital Data Video Stations Planning Form Instructions Make enough copies of Data Form 3 Digital Data Video Stations for the number of digital data video stations you plan For each 1 From Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks obtain the identification information for each digital data video station 2 Record the information on Data Form 3 Digital Data Video Stations a Inthe Logical ID space write the logical ID for each extension b Inthe Extension No space write the extension number for each extension c Inthe Equipment Person Location space write the type of data video endpoint and the name of
460. ontain the area code and the first three digits of the local exchange telephone numbers to be allowed Additional general security for voice messaging systems Use a secure password for the General Mailboxes The default administration mailbox 9997 must be reassigned to the system manager s mailbox extension number and securely password protected All voice messaging system users must use secure passwords known only to the user MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A 14 Security Risks Associated with the Automated Attendant Feature of Voice Messaging Systems Two areas of toll fraud risk associated with the Automated Attendant feature of voice messaging systems are the following Pooled facility line trunk access codes are translated to a menu prompt to allow Remote Access If a hacker finds this prompt the hacker has immediate access In Release 3 1 and later systems dial access to pools is initially factory set to restrict all extensions to allow pool access this restriction must be removed by the system manager If the Automated Attendant prompts callers to use Remote Call Forwarding RCF to reach an outside telephone number the system may be susceptible to toll fraud An example of this application is a menu or submenu that says To reach our answering service select prompt number 5 and trans
461. ontains instructions for completing all of these tasks Forms Needed m Form 1 System Planning m Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks You also need the local telephone company s line trunk information Module Types and Line Trunk Jack Types The line trunk jack type is determined by the type of module Table 3 1 lists the line trunk jack types and the incoming line trunk or auxiliary equipment that can be connected to these jacks MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Identifying Line Trunk Jacks Page 3 3 Table 3 1 Line Trunk Jack Types Line Trunk Number of Module Type Jack Jacks Used to Connect 400 Loop start LS 4 Line Trunk Types Basic 800 8 Special Purpose FX WATS 408 4 Auxiliary Equipment Music On Hold Loudspeaker paging system Maintenance Alarm MERLIN Identifier 400 GS LS Ground start 4 Line Trunk Types Basic 800 GS LS loop start 8 Special Purpose FX WATS 408 GS LS GS LS 4 408 GS LS MLX 4 Auxiliary Equipment Music On Hold 800 GS LS ID 8 Loudspeaker paging system Maintenance Alarm MERLIN Identifier 800 DID DID 8 DID Hybrid PBX 800 NI BRI 1 BRI 8 16 channels NI 1 BRI 400EM Tie 4 Tie 100D DS1 1 24 channels 1 T1 Switched 56 Data PRI gt NOTES 1 You cannot mix T1 and Primary Rate Interface PRI service on the same 100D module Any of the following AT amp T Switc
462. ool they need to reach Calls to the group are distributed among group members in a circular pattern The system hunts for the first available modem or ISDN terminal adapter starting with the one that received the last call If all group members are unavailable the caller hears a ringback tone Guidelines for creating DHGs are contained in Creating Data Hunt Groups later in this chapter MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications About Data and Video Communications Page 5 16 Data Hunt Group Configurations The following DHG configurations work on the system ISDN Terminal Adapters Allows communications with the local host computer or a workstation gateway to a LAN Modems Allows communications with the local host computer or a workstation gateway to a LAN Video Systems A video system is a hardware configuration that provides video teleconferencing The video systems use both B channels 2B Data associated with an MLX port to achieve data rates of up to 128 kbps when using PRI or NI 1 BRI facilities and 112 kbps when using T1 Switched 56 facilities There are two basic types of video teleconferencing m Personal Video Conferencing This type also referred to as Desktop Video Conferencing typically is a single user communicating with another individual using their PC m Group Video Conferencing This type as the name implies allows l
463. or Page Buttons Page Button 1 2 3 Beginning extension for range Enter first extension number for range of 50 1 DSS or 100 2 DSSs extensions for each Page button Call Park Codes See Form 29 orm Form 24 Factory Set Factory Set Extension No Renumber to Extension No Renumber to Factory Setting Hybrid PBX mode only Form 6a 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 6a Continued Call Types QCC Queue Priority Level Call Types QCC Operator to Receive Calls 4 Dial 0 Call Follow Forward Unassigned DID Listed Directory Number QCC Extension Returning Group Coverage Calls QCC Queue QCC Queue QCC Operator to Receive Priority Level QCC Operator to Receive Priority Level 4 Calls 4 L L L L ale OINI Factory Setting Hybrid PBX mode only Form 6a 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 6b Optional Extension Features Forced Account Microphone 5 Language UE TN Extension Code aes orwarding Transfer Nos Yes Enables Disable Disable Allowed Be english French English French Factory Setting T Single line telephones are restricted from completing a trunk to trunk transfer MLX telephones only
464. or authorized dealer before making changes The factory set thresholds are standard settings and should rarely be changed The timers descriptions factory settings and allowable thresholds are shown in Table 3 5 Planning Form Instructions On Form 3i Incoming Trunks BRI Options 800 NI BRI Module under the Timers and Counters heading on page 2 1 For each timer m Tokeep the factory setting check the first box under the timer name m To change the factory setting check the second box under the timer name and write the new threshold in the space provided Table 3 5 1 BRI Timers Factory Allowable Name Description Setting Threshold T200 The minimum time which Layer 2 must wait 1 000 ms 500 5 000 ms in for an acknowledgment of a link establishment increments of 500 ms frame an information frame or a polling supervisory frame before initiating retransmission procedures T203 The maximum time for which the Layer 2 33 seconds 10 255 seconds in link can remain inactive increments of 1 second T303 The delay in CO response after the system 4 seconds 2 10 seconds has sent SETUP message to initiate an increments of 1 second outgoing call T305 delay in response from the CO after the 30seconds 2 60 seconds system has initiated DISConnect message increments of 1 second for call clearing T308 delay in response from the CO after the 4 seconds 2 10 seconds
465. or tie trunk As you design each list consider which numbers need to be called by specific groups of restricted users Ina private network restricted telephones can dial non local UDP extensions The non local extension ranges do not need to be put on an Allowed List MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 51 Planning Form Instructions On Form 6e 1 Write the name of the list in the space next to the list number 2 Write the allowed area codes exchanges and or star codes in the spaces provided a maximum of 10 entries for each list 3 If star codes are included in the Allowed List the Second Dial Tone Timer must also be programmed This timer induces a time delay before the user may dial additional digits after a star code and is activated once a star code has been accepted The dialing of any digits before this timer expires is treated as if normal restrictions have been violated and the call is not completed The timer may be set from 0 to 5000 ms in increments of 200 ms The factory setting is 0 On Form 1 page 2 System Planning write the desired setting for the Second Dial Tone Timer 4 Write the extension numbers of the telephones that need access to the list in the Allow to Ext Nos column see Farm 2 5 If you planned Remote Access with restrictions and want to permit Allowed List numbers to be called by remote access users
466. ormation about Centralized Voice Messaging Centralized Voice Messaging offers the following benefits m Private networked MERLIN LEGEND systems do not need a local VMS Having systems use a centralized VMS instead of separate VMS s is more economical Users that travel between sites can dial the same digits anywhere in the private network to access the voice messaging system For example a salesperson headquartered in Cincinnati can dial the same four digits at the company s Los Angeles office to retrieve voice messages m Productivity is enhanced because messages be forwarded and broadcasted to all personnel within the private network m Calling groups on networked systems can send overflow coverage to a shared VMS so that an incoming caller can leave a message instead of waiting in a queue m The VMS can light the Message Waiting lights on multiple MERLIN LEGEND systems in a private network This greater efficiency saves time because a user only has to look at his or her telephone to determine if he or she has a message Group Calling Enhancements A calling group can have a single non local member that is defined by the Uniform Dial Plan and exists on another MERLIN LEGEND Communications System connected by a tandem trunk to the local system If a calling group contains a non local member the non local member must be the only member in the calling group See the Network Reference for details A calling group contai
467. orts several types of line trunk and extension modules Deciding how to place the modules in the carriers consists of the following tasks 1 Calculating the system s line trunk capacity according to module types 2 Calculating the system s extension capacity according to module types 3 Mapping out module placement on the Control Unit Diagram according to specific guidelines This section contains instructions for each of these tasks For information about calculating unit load requirements see Unit Load Calculation For detailed information about modules and their specifications including line trunk and extension capacity see the descriptions of hardware components contained in the Pocket Reference Forms Needed m Equipment List if available m Form 1 System Planning Capacity for Lines Trunks Line trunk capacity is the number of lines trunks that can be connected to the control unit This section contains instructions for calculating the systems capacity for lines trunks according to the system s module types Planning Form Instructions 1 Inthe table in the Line Trunk Capacity section of Form 1 System Planning fill in the number of each type of line trunk module on the appropriate line of the Number of Modules column 2 Add the column and record the result at the bottom of the column on the System Totals line 3 Foreach module type noted multiply the value in the Number of Modules column by the value i
468. overage while waiting in a calling group queue requires TTRs for primary and secondary delay announcement devices that present the option to callers Table 2 5 shows the TTRs required for primary delay announcement devices when using the Prompt Based Overflow setting MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 19 Table 2 5 Required for Primary Delay Announcement Devices Number of Devices Number of TTRs Required 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 4 6 5 7 5 8 or more 6 Table 2 6 shows the TTRs required for secondary delay announcement devices when using the Prompt Based Overflow setting Table 2 6 TTRs Required for Secondary Delay Announcement Devices Number of Devices Number of TTRs Required 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 or more 4 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 20 To calculate the total number of TTRs that are required by the system do the following 1 If the system has a VMS use Table 2 3 to find the number of TTRs required by the system to support the VMS Estimate the hourly call volume for all calls originating from single line telephones incoming calls including private network tandem tie trunks on Remo
469. ower supply module at the factory Ferrite cores are also compatible with earlier releases MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 1 Before You Begin Requirements for Supporting CTI Applications Page 1 6 Requirements for Supporting CTI Applications If your site will take advantage of the Computer Telephony Integration capabilities of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5 0 or later each Client Desktop must have one extension associated with a computer that is networked to a Telephony server which in turn is connected to the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System through a CTI link Figure 1 1 page 7 shows the system configuration for support of CTI applications Use the following resources and procedures to implement a CTI application 1 Complete the appropriate MERLIN LEGEND Telephony Services Preliminary Survey for the application being sold m The Preliminary Survey is available from the SDSC Techni Fax 1 888 297 4700 select the appropriate prompts or from IntraWorks at http www bcs lucent com tech_info sdsc forms m The survey is completed by the A E and Customer Contact the Sales and Design Support Center SDSC for CTI pre sale support m The should contact the SDSC 1 888 297 4700 select the appropriate prompts to reach the MERLIN LEGEND split to discuss customer requirements and potential solutions If the CTI solut
470. pace provided MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Operator Features Page 4 24 Call Types This section contains instructions to assign a QCC operator to receive certain types of calls and to set the QCC queue priority level Planning Form Instructions The Group Coverage Calls section on the back of Form 6a will be completed later in this chapter Under the Call Types heading on Form 6a page 2 1 Inthe QCC Operator to Receive Calls column for each call type do one of the following m If QCC operators are not to receive the call type write None m f one more QCC operators are to receive the call type write any combination of the extension number s See Form 2alor 5d gt NOTE You cannot assign an operator to either Follow Me calls or calls to QCC operator extensions 2 Inthe QCC Queue Priority Level column write the level for each call type Assign a value of 1 high priority through 7 low priority The factory setting is 4 Voice Announce This section contains instructions to enable a QCC operator to originate Voice Announce VA calls When enabled the Call 5 button on the QCC can originate Voice Announce calls gt NOTE QCCs cannot receive Voice Announce calls Planning Form Instructions Under the Voice Announce heading on Form 6a do one of the following m To prevent QCC operators from originating Voice Announce call
471. pes have different button layouts For a system that has both telephone types you would need at least two templates one for analog and one for MLX gt NOTE A Multi Function Module MFM extension can be copied to or from another MFM extension An analog DLC extension can only be copied to another analog DLC extension An MLX DLC extension can only be copied to another MLX DLC extension Single line telephones and QCCs cannot use the Extension Copy feature Table 4 1 contains a list of the features that can be copied and whether the features apply to analog telephones MLX telephones or both Following the table is a list of operator features that can be copied Table 4 1 Features That Can Be Copied Analog MLX Feature and MLX Analog Only Only Account Code Entry v Authorization Code Auto Answer All Y Auto Answer Intercom Auto Dial Inside dd Auto Dial Outside Y Barge In 2 Conference Coverage Off v v Coverage VMS Off Behind Switch mode only Continued on next page MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 12 Table 4 1 Features That Can Be Copied Continued Analog and MLX Feature MLX Analog Only Only Data Status Direct Voice Mail Do Not Disturb Drop Extension Status 2 Non operator E Extension S
472. pies keeping the originals for future use The system planning forms are contained in Appendix The T1 PRI Planner is contained in Appendix D The NI 1 BRI Planner is contained in Appendix G The Network Engineering forms are contained in Table C 1 Data Forms Form No Form Title 1a Modem Data Station 1b ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Station 2 Data Hunt Groups 3 Digital Data Video Station MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Page___of Data Form 1 oO Modem Data Station Logical ID Extension No Person or Location Data Station Use Call Restriction Q Individualuse Unrestricted Q Local host computer Q Outward Restrict LAN workstation Toll Restrict Modem Pool Member Q Allow List s No Yes PoolNumber_ J Disallowed List s Assigned to Data Hunt Group No Yes DHG Extension __ E Forced Account Code Entry OptionalFeatures No Pool Dial Out Code Restriction Yes Unrestricted from following codes Facility Restriction Level 13 Restricted from following codes Button Diagram Key Mode Hybrid PBX Mode SAO O Icom R SA Icom R SAR Ringing Options 2 Idle Line Idle Line Preference Preference Factory Setting t Only one SA Ring button assigned 008 or A Factory setting is rest
473. pies of Form page 4 Class of Restriction with Barrier Codes write the list numbers under the Disallowed List Access heading for each barrier code Call Restriction Summary After the individual telephone forms have been completed Form 6g Call Restriction Assignments and Lists can be used as a summary and telephone programming aid for telephone calling restrictions as designated in this chapter Planning Form Instructions On Form 6g 1 Inthe Ext No column do one of the following m Transfer the extension number from the individual telephone forms If copying from another extension write the new extension number and then in the Copy From column write the extension from which calling restrictions for this extension will be copied 2 Inthe Restriction Type column check the appropriate column Out for Outward Restriction Toll for Toll Restriction or No Rest for No Restriction 3 Inthe Allowed List No and Disallowed List No columns write the appropriate list numbers from Forms 6e and 6f respectively 4 Inthe ARS Restriction Levels FRL column write the Facility Restriction Level FRL value noted in the ARS Restriction Level heading on Form 6g MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 54 Night Service Use these instructions only if Night Service is used for after hours telephone operation Otherwise skip to the next
474. planned make the appropriate number of copies of Form 3a page 4 A maximum of 16 barrier codes is allowed A SecurityAlert Barrier codes of at least 11 digits should be assigned to help prevent toll fraud For Class of Restriction with Barrier Codes on Form 3a page 4 do the following for each barrier code a Write the barrier code number in the space provided numbering them sequentially beginning with 1 b Write the 4 to 11 digit barrier code in the Digits space The star is added to the end of the barrier code For security reasons you may want to record the code elsewhere c For Restriction check one of the following three boxes Unrestricted Outward Restrict to keep the factory setting or Toll Restrict d Under the Disallowed List Access headings check the boxes if you plan to assign disallowed lists gt NOTE Instructions for filling in the ARS Restriction Level and Disallowed List numbers are included in Chapter 4 Features Proceed to the next section 051 Connectivity 100D Module MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 23 DS1 Connectivity 100D Module Use these instructions only if the system has a 100D module Otherwise skip to Tie Trunks Digital Signal 1 DS1 connectivity involves the transmission of digital signals in DS1 format The interface that enables
475. pools T1 Switched 56 data lines should not be mixed with trunks used for voice calls If you plan to assign Pool buttons on telephones do not group dial in only tie trunks in pools In typical pooled systems all the trunks are grouped in pools except those mentioned previously single special purpose trunks and any basic trunks that are needed as personal lines assigned to a button on a telephone Group the trunks for the main pool first This should be the local trunks capable of accepting 411 911 and so on If your system includes ground start basic trunks reassign them from the dial 890 extension pool to the main pool After these trunks are assigned to the main pool decide how to arrange the rest of the trunks in the remaining pools For private network systems refer to the Network Reference for additional information Indicate the dial out code in the Pool Dial Out Code column on Form 2c by doing one of the following To keep the factory set dial out code write the code To change the factory set dial out code Write the new number in the Renumber to column On Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers write the new number in the Renumber to column of the Pools section of the form On Form 2c use the Function column to identify different calling areas of WATS trunks and different destinations of FX trunks Proceed to the next section MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661
476. possible operator positions Factory Setting The system capacity for Personal Directories is decreased by one whenever an MLX 20L telephone is connected to an MLX port t Use Form 2b for adjuncts connected via MFM Ringing Frequency is programmable on the 016 T R module only 1 The maximum number of VMI ports is 24 The maximum number of CTI links is 1 SurJoquinw 6 sypoef uorsu21Xq ez 1 0 asvapoy waysks suongorunumuo NITIAN p ez D Mod Log Jack Type ET te Set Up Renumber Old 5 Person Location Ring Type ID A D B Equipment s Space to Label Ext No 5 or Function Freq t Appl be 7 Shaded lines indicate possible operator positions Factory Setting The system capacity for Personal Directories is decreased by one whenever an MLX 20L telephone is connected to an MLX port Use Form 2b for adjuncts connected via MFM Ringing Frequency is programmable on the 016 T R module only The maximum number of VMI ports is 24 The maximum number of CTI links is 1 quinN uojs g Sur syouf uorsu21Xxq BZ T O osvajay 91546 suonrorunuwoD NITHAIA vz woy Mod Log Jack Type go ud Set Up Renumber Old Wire Person Location Ring CTI Type ID A D B Equipment No No Space to Lab
477. provided Call Park Return Time This section contains instructions for designating the number of seconds a caller waits when a person uses the Call Park feature to put a call on hold If the call is not picked up at the end of the programmed interval the call returns to the person who parked the call Planning Form Instructions Under the Call Park Return Time heading on Form 8a do one of the following m keep the factory set interval check the 180 seconds box m To change the factory set interval check the second box and write the number of seconds 30 300 in the space provided MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 44 Automatic Callback This section contains instructions for setting the number of rings the system should use to alert a caller about a callback attempt After the specified number of rings the system abandons the callback attempt Planning Form Instructions Under the Automatic Callback Interval heading on Form 8a do one of the following m keep the factory set interval check the rings box m To change the factory set interval check the second box and write the number of rings 1 6 in the space provided Extension Status This section contains instructions to set Extension Status to allow an operator a calling group supervisor or a Call Management System CMS supervisor to determine the status
478. pter Data This type of ISDN terminal adapter data station includes an MLX telephone in addition to the DTE and ISDN terminal adapter see Figure 5 4 The ISDN terminal adapter connects to the control unit through an MLX port The MLX port is shared by both the telephone and the data station but they operate independently of each other and can be used simultaneously gt NOTE In an MLX voice and ISDN terminal adapter data station the MLX telephone cannot contain an MFM Data Station Wo 0 1 NN MERLIN DTE DCE LEGEND Optical Control Unit Scanner Sm2 5 5 Nec Ew Analog or Tip Ring Credit Card Extension Jack Verification PC Terminal Terminal L p Extension Jack Digital _ Adapter Digital Host 1 Signal Signal Computer MLX Telephone Figure 5 4 Voice and ISDN Terminal Adapter Data MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications About Data and Video Communications Page 5 13 ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Only This type of digital data station includes only the DTE and ISDN terminal adapter The ISDN terminal adapter connects the DTE to the system through an MLX extension jack on the control unit see Figure 5 5 Since the configuration does not include an MLX telephone if a 7500B data module is used as the ISDN terminal adapter a 44
479. pter Voice Announced Calls Alert Device type one Q Headset Q Off C Headset adapter Coverage Inside Q Hearing impaired handset a Off Q Noisy environment one CTI PC DLC must be a BIS set Cover Ring Delay Q Other Primary Cover Ring Delay Q 2Rings a rings 1 6 Secondary Cover Ring Delay Q 2Rings a rings 1 6 Group Coverage Ring Delay Q 3 Rings Q rings 1 9 Factory Setting Form 5a 1 2 96 UJOJ Button Diagram Q See Master Extension DISPLAY CONSOLE WITH DSS N m 34 BUTTON m 22 BUTTON 10 11 0 23 O 1010 20 O 30 O 40 m m r1 0 4 0 12 0 11 21 31 41 Oooo N OO 25 o oO sR OO 0 00 N 0000 0000 S AR mE wo wo wo wo lt a 9 95 3 3 am MEME O Alarm 20 0 32 5 29 39 5 Night f E E Msg Note Alarm Night Service and Send Remove Msg will be replaced with Lines 30 31 and 32 if the system has that many lines 000 00 00 o o D D D LBDLB OO un Assignment of outside trunks to console buttons begins with button number 3 BS 1 0 asvapoy urojs s suongorunumuo sCNHOST NITIAN MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 5b S
480. ptions 3 11 outmode signaling 3 13 planning overview 3 1 pools 3 16 Primary Rate Interface PRI 3 23 QCC operator to receive calls 3 15 QCC queue priority 3 15 remote access 3 18 required 6 2 T1 service 3 23 3 24 T1 Switched 56 service 3 28 tie 3 39 toll type 3 13 Voice Messaging System 3 10 Local Area Networks LANs host computer data stations 5 15 5 25 workstation data stations 5 15 5 25 Logical IDs 2 4 Loop Start disconnect signal 3 12 lines trunks 5 27 reliable disconnect 3 12 trunk to trunk transfer 3 12 Loudspeaker paging jacks 3 9 LS ID Delay 3 4 um Issue 1 August 1998 Page IN 9 M Magic on Hold 3 9 Maintenance Alarm jacks 3 9 Marked System Speed Dial 4 58 Marked system speed dial and star codes 2 12 4 58 Master extensions 4 14 MCI 800 services D 1 MCI 900 services D 1 MCI Prism services D 1 MCI Toll services 3 34 MCI VNet services D 1 Megacom 800 services 3 3 3 24 D 1 Megacom WATS services 3 3 D 1 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Index MERLIN LEGEND Mail 2 31 4 33 calling groups 4 33 MERLIN MAIL voice messaging system 2 31 Message center 4 21 Message waiting receiver 4 35 Messaging 2000 2 30 2 31 Microphone operation 4 6 MLX telephones and Delay Announcement Devices 2 25 as programming equipment MLX 20L telephone 2 7 assigning trunks 3 50 button assignments in Hybrid P
481. quency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information Page A 2 Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le Pr sent Appareil Num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la classe A pr scrites dans le r glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique edict par le minist re des Communications du Canada FCC Notification and Repair Information This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its rules In compliance with those rules you are advised of the following Means of Connection Connection of this equipment to the telephone network shall be through a standard network interface jack USOC RJ11C RJ14C RJ21X Connection to E amp M tie trunks requires a USOC RJ2GX Conn
482. r TEI 3 38 test telephone number 3 38 timers and counters 3 38 type of service 3 30 Principal user 4 7 Privacy 5 36 Programming centralized 4 2 equipment 2 7 Extension Copy feature 4 11 system 4 2 Prompt Based Overflow setting 2 18 Issue 1 August 1998 Page IN 12 Q Queue over threshold 4 20 Queued Call Console QCC additional operator positions 2 22 adjuncts 44 call types 4 24 Direct Station Selector DSS 4 19 features 44 4 19 identification information 4 4 Message Center 4 21 MFM adjunct features 4 4 operator to receive calls 3 15 optional features 4 4 Position Busy Backup 4 23 primary operator position 2 21 queue priority 3 16 4 20 4 31 Voice Announce 4 24 R Release 1 0 3 23 Release 1 1 3 23 Release 2 0 3 23 Release 3 1 xxxv Release 4 0 xxxii Release 4 1 xxx 3 23 Release 4 2 xxvii 3 23 Release 5 0 xxii MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Index Release 6 0 xvii Release 6 1 xiii Remote Access barrier codes 3 18 dial in tie trunks 3 18 Direct Inward Dial DID trunks 3 18 3 42 modifying 6 3 overview 3 18 Private network tandem trunks 3 18 shared access 3 18 slow dial tone and 3 49 Remote access Direct Inward Dial DID trunks 3 19 Remote Call Forward 3 49 4 7 forward delay option 4 7 Renumbering 2 digit numbering plan 2 34 3 digit numbering plan 2 35 AUDIX Voice Power 2 33 ov
483. r b SDSC Manager c National Technical Service Center NTSC Engineer d Data Services Organization DSO Manager Under the question about whether the order has been placed m If the order has been placed check the Yes box and fill in the date m If the order has not been placed check the No box On page 2 complete one box for each 100D module by transferring the options information for each module from the corresponding box on Form 3b page 1 a Service Ordered or Planned Type of Service Frame Format Switch Type Line Coding Suppression Line Signaling Mode Synchronization Timing Clock Synchronization Source MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 D Planner Page D 3 9 To ensure that the synchronization integrity of the DS1 network both this communications system and its far end connections is protected prepare the DS1 Planning Map on page 4 for review by SDSC Describe the entire network of DS1 facilities by summarizing the following for each 100D module a Fill in the control unit slot number s of the 100D modules connected to the CSU s b Write the approximate number of cable feet between each module and its CSU or far end connection refer to the Line Compensation entry on Page 1 c For the model number s of the CSU s do one of the following Ifthe CSU is the ACCULINK 3150 check the box for the ACCULI
484. r SMDR and printers gt NOTE If you plan to set a different language for an individual telephone record the language selection on Form 6b as described in Chapter 4 Features Planning Form Instructions Under the Language Selection heading in the System Operating Conditions section of Form 1 page 2 1 To select a systemwide language check one of the following English the factory setting French or Spanish 2 Toset a different language for SMDR check one of the following English the factory setting French or Spanish 3 Toset a different language for printed reports check one of the following English the factory setting French or Spanish MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Recording System Operating Conditions Page 2 10 Automatic Maintenance Busy The factory setting for Automatic Maintenance Busy is Disable which means that faulty lines trunks are not automatically put in a maintenance busy state In Key and Behind Switch modes Automatic Maintenance Busy usually remains disabled If you plan to group lines trunks into pools in Hybrid PBX mode enable Automatic Maintenance Busy to provide optimal system performance For a detailed description of this feature including considerations and feature interactions see the Feature Reference Planning Form Instructions Under the Automatic Maintenance Busy heading in t
485. r character and each composed of two voiceband frequencies MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary August 1998 Page GL 12 E amp M signaling EIA EIA 232 D Electronic Switching System endpoint Enhanced Service Center ESF ESS expansion carrier ExpressRoute 1000 extended superframe format extension extension jack Trunk supervisory signaling used between two communications systems in which signaling information is transferred through two state voltage conditions on the Ear and Mouth leads for analog applications and through two bits for digital applications See also Electronic Industries Association Physical interface specified by the EIA that transmits and receives asynchronous data at speeds of up to 19 2 kbps over cable distances of 50 feet 15 m See ESS Final destination in the path of an electrical or telecommunications signal An application that sends calls to available agents in a calling group The Enhanced Service Center places calls in queue plays announcements tracks agent activity and availability and provides real time reports extended superframe format PRI framing format consisting of individual frames of 24 eight bit slots and one signal bit 193 bits in a 24 frame extended superframe Electronic Switching System Class of central office CO Switching systems developed by Lucent Technologies in
486. r install a telephone jack in a wet location unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone wiring has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Use only Lucent Technologies manufactured MERLIN LEGEND Communications System circuit modules carrier assemblies and power units in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit Use only Lucent Technologies recommended approved MERLIN LEGEND Communications System accessories If equipment connected to the analog extension modules 008 408 408 GS LS or to the MLX telephone modules 008 MLX 408 GS LS MLX is to be used for in range out of building IROB applications IROB protectors are required Do not install this product near water for example in a wet basement location Do not overload wall outlets as this can result in the risk of fire or electrical shock The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is equipped with a 3 wire grounding type plug with a third grounding pin This plug will fit only into a grounding type power outlet This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact an electrician to replace the obsolete outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding plug MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Page xii
487. r is configured as Legend NTWK See the Network Reference for more information Under the Frame Format heading change the factory setting by checking the Extended Superframe ESF box Under the Suppression Line Code heading change the factory setting by checking the B8ZS box Under the Signaling Mode heading check Common Channel Signaling CCS gt NOTE CCS is automatically assigned when PRI is selected Also Channel 24 cannot be used for voice or data transmissions MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 32 7 Under the Line Compensation heading a Fill in the approximate distance number of cable feet between the 100D module and its CSU or other far end connection in the space before Cable Feet b Use Table 3 4 to select the line compensation setting needed The factory setting is 1 Table3 4 Line Compensation Settings Setting dB Loss Cable Feet 1 factory setting 0 6 0 133 2 1 2 133 266 3 1 8 266 399 4 24 399 533 5 3 0 533 655 Based on 22 gauge cable If the system includes both 800 NI BRI and 100D modules clock synchro nization planning should be completed at the same time There is only one primary secondary tertiary clock for both 800 NI BRI modules and 100D modules with the same system programming screens used for both types If the switch is part of a private network
488. r is factory set to disabled and may be enabled for a specific extension Single line telephones are restricted from completing a trunk to trunk transfer Planning Form Instructions Use Form 6b to identify extensions permitted to perform trunk to trunk transfers Under the Trunk to Trunk Transfer heading on Form 6b do one of the following m To block an extension from completing a trunk to trunk transfer check the No factory setting box m allow an extension to complete trunk to trunk transfers check Yes MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 10 HotLine The HotLine feature is available only for single line telephones and devices connected to a port on an 008 OPT 012 T R or 016 T R module A single line telephone connected to an MFM cannot use the HotLine feature This feature enables you to set up a telephone to dial one specific number once the telephone goes off hook The number that is dialed is the first personal speed dial code 01 programmed on the single line telephone using centralized telephone programming or extension programming Extension programming is only available before the HotLine feature is activated A HotLine extension can call a private network extension See the Network Reference for information gt NOTE In Release 6 0 and later systems after the Hotline extension number has been ass
489. r the disconnect signal is Unreliable Before you change the setting check with the telephone company to determine whether the disconnect signals for the loop start trunks are reliable and to obtain the length of the hold disconnect interval If you select Reliable disconnect you can set the interval after which the line trunk is released as described in Hold Disconnect Interval later in this section Trunk to trunk transfer is programmed on a per extension basis and should remain disabled even if the loop start trunk has reliable disconnect See the Trunk to Trunk Transfer section in Chapter 4 Planning Form Instructions At the top of Form 2c under the Loop Start Reliable Disconnect heading choose one of the following m If the loop start trunks have an unreliable disconnect signal check the No box the factory setting m If the loop start trunks have a reliable disconnect signal check Yes MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 13 Outmode Signaling The system is factory set to generate touch tone signals when users dial outside calls Identify any rotary dial trunks that are connected to the system so that rotary dial signals can be used for these trunks gt NOTE Touch tone single line telephone users cannot make calls using rotary dial trunks unless their phones allow them to switch between touch ton
490. r through carelessness for example writing codes on a piece of paper and improperly discarding it Additionally hackers may use a computer to dial an access code and then publish the information to other hackers Enormous charges can be run up quickly It is the customer s responsibility to take the appropriate steps to properly implement the features evaluate and administer the various restriction levels protect access codes and distribute access codes only to individuals who have been fully advised of the sensitive nature of the access information Common carriers are required by law to collect their tariffed charges While these charges are fraudulent charges made by persons with criminal intent applicable tariffs state that the customer of record is responsible for payment of all long distance or other network charges Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A 10 To minimize the risk of unauthorized access to your communications system m Use an unpublished Remote Access number m Assign access codes randomly to users on a need to have basis keeping a log of a authorized users and assigning one code to one person m Use random sequence access codes which are
491. r type of adjunct beneath the symbol Indicate any additional equipment such as a Station Message Detail Recording SMDR printer Call Accounting System device equipment required for off site telephones and so on Indicate the locations where AC power is available and or required for example for a Multi Function Module MFM a console with two Direct Station Selectors DSSs or an Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN terminal adapter such as the Ascend Pipeline 25 or 50 The floor plan does not need to be elaborate or to scale Keep the floor plan on hand Refer to it during planning and complete it by filling in extension numbers when you get to Numbering the System in Chapter 2 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 1 Before You Begin Obtaining a Floor Plan PLANT AREA PLANT MANAGER S OFFICE L1 Ae ANS MACH SALES DEPARTMENT eg x WAREHOUSE A ANS MACH DRAFTING DEPARTMENT AAA SUPPLY ee oO ROOM SHIPPING amp RECEIVING Single line Telephone Telephone A Analog 9 Operator Multiline Position Telephone Issue 1 August 1998 Page 1 14 PRESIDENT S OFFICE m oa VICE PRESIDENT S PRESIDENT S SECRETARY SECRETARY FAX PRESIDENT S OFFICE RECEPTION ENCE EREI vss ACCOUNTING DEPARTMENT HEEB FAX O Computer or Data Terminal A Adjunct
492. ramming T Member extensions may be any telephone type but cannot be a QCC or CTI Link The number of members in a Service Observing Group may equal the maximum number of system extensions Factory Setting Form 11 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 11 Service Observing Group Assignment Make additional copies of this form as needed Maximum 16 Service Observing Groups GN GroupNo Observer Ext No Observer Ext No Observer Ext No Observer Ext No Warning Tone Q Yes Warning Tone Q Yes Warning Tone Q Yes Warning Tone O Yes C No C No C No C No Member Member Member Member Name Name Name Name Observer extension must be an MLX telephone but cannot be a QCC or CTI Link The Service Observing button on the Observers telephone must be programmed via Centralized Telephone Programming Member extensions may be any telephone type but cannot be a QCC or CTI Link The number of members in a Service Observing Group may equal the maximum number of system extensions Factory Setting Form 11 2 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 C Data Forms Page C 1 Data Forms This appendix contains one copy of each data form The forms are listed in Table 1 You should make copies of these forms and use the co
493. ranges can consist of 2 to 4 digit numbers 4 digit dial plans are recommended for MERLIN LEGEND If a DEFINITY is in the network and has a 5 digit dial plan MERLIN LEGEND routes the call on 4 digits but will send 5 digits Pool numbers and line numbers will be made unique across the network This will be transparent to the customer What extension range is desired for this location any additional extension ranges does this range allow for growth What adjunct range is desired for this location any additional extension ranges does this range allow for growth Automatic Route Selection ARS e It is strongly recommended that each system in the network have at least 1 local CO line for emergency use i e 911 calls power failure use etc Traffic must be considered when routing ARS calls across the network to assure that enough lines are available to handle call volume ARS access code The same ARS access code is recommended on all systems Will ARS be used to access the facilities on another system on the network for making local calls long distance calls Will other systems on the network being using this systems ARS for making local calls long distance calls 27 Have ARS tables been administered or are only the default tables used Default only Other tables are used NOTE There are additional engineering charges when Design Center engineers the custom ARS tables 1 16
494. rate at any speed for communication with a Group III G3 fax machine or another Group IV G4 fax machine A system application that allows face to face simultaneous video and voice communications between groups and requires high speed data transmission facilities See also desktop videoconferencing system 1 H Hands Free See HFAI Answer on Intercom hands free unit headset See HFU Lightweight earpiece and microphone used for hands free telephone operation MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Issue 1 August 1998 Glossary Page GL 15 HFAI Hands Free Answer on Intercom Feature that allows a user to answer a voice announced call HFU Hands Free Unit Unit for analog multiline telephones that Home screen host hub system Hybrid PBX mode allows users to make and receive calls on the speakerphone without using the handset Display normally shown on an MLX display telephone shows time date and call information and shows when some features are in use Telephone company or other switch providing features and services to the system users usually when the system is operating in Behind Switch mode In private network that is arranged in a star configuration the communications system through which all calls across the network pass One of three modes of system operation in which the system uses line trunk pools and ARS in addition to personal lines Provi
495. ration All extensions should be restricted from dialing private network pools MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 5 Calling Restrictions This section contains instructions to restrict selected extensions from making outside calls for example for telephones in a reception area and to control toll call abuse but still allow local and intercom calls A SecurityA lert Calling restrictions for example Disallowed Lists toll restriction Facility Restriction FRL Levels should be programmed as appropriate to minimize toll fraud abuse Refer to thel Calling Restrictions bection in the Feature Reference for additional information on programming calling restrictions Planning Form Instructions If these restrictions are too limited use Allowed Lists and Disallowed Lists as described later in this chapter Use Form 6h to identify Authorization Codes for use by the users of certain extensions After Form 6h is filled in remove it from the forms set and keep it in a secure place Use Form 6g Call Restriction Assignments and Lists to identify the extensions with calling restriction assignments List the extensions with calling restrictions in the Ext No column and the type of restriction in the Restriction Type column The factory setting is Restricted gt NOTE Setting this option to Outward Restric
496. rator is reminded of the call by a single ring Planning Form Instructions Under the Operator Hold Timer heading on Form 6a do one of the following m keep the factory setting check 60 Seconds m To change the factory setting check the second box and write the number of seconds 10 to 255 seconds in the space provided DLC Automatic Hold This section contains instructions to set DLC Automatic Hold to place calls on hold automatically when the operator presses another line button Planning Form Instructions Under the DLC Automatic Hold heading on Form 6a do one of the following m To keep the factory setting no DLC Automatic Hold check Disable m To automatically put calls on hold when another line button is pressed check Enable If the system includes one or more QCCs proceed to the next section Otherwise skip to the following section Direct Station Selector MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Operator Features Page 4 19 Queued Call Console Hybrid PBX Mode Only Use these instructions only if the system has one or more QCCs Otherwise skip to the next section l Direct Station Selector This section contains instructions to set the following QCC operator features m Hold Return utomatic Hold or Release alls in Queue Alert ueue Over Threshold levate Priorit utomatic or Manual Directed Call Completion eturn Rin
497. rcuit switched 56 kbps service T1 emulated tandem tie trunks in a private network can be programmed for data Momentary 320 ms to 1 second on hook signal used as a control may be directed to the control unit or to a host switch outside the system Also called Recall or timed flash A number assigned to a tandem trunk in a private network It identifies the system connected to the far end of the trunk Switch identifiers are based on the type of system and its distance from the system where the identifier is assigned See also satellite system and non satellite Method of transmitting a continuous digital data stream in which the transmission of each binary bit is synchronized with a master clock See Test of all trunks telephones data terminals and features after installation to ensure that they are working correctly See SA buttons Date and time that appear on MLX display telephones and SMDR reports Programming of system functions and features that affect most users performed from an MLX 20L telephone or a computer using SPM See also extension programming and centralized telephone programming MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary Issue 1 August 1998 System Programming and Maintenance system renumbering Page GL 26 See SPM Procedure used to change the numbers assigned to telephones adjuncts calling groups
498. rder tone is received Allowing this equipment to be operated in such a manner as not to provide proper answer supervision signaling is in violation of Part 68 FCC rules New Network Area and Exchange Codes The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System software does not restrict access to any new area codes or exchange codes established by a local telephone company If the user has established toll restrictions on the system that could restrict access then the user should check the lists of allowed and disallowed dial codes and modify them as needed Equal Access Codes This equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of access codes Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990 DOC Notification and Repair Information NOTICE The Canadian Department of Communications DOC label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain protective operational and safety requirements of the telecommunications network The DOC does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to connect it to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company
499. re You Begin Confirming the Location of the Control Unit Page 1 5 Electrical Noise Radio Frequency Interference In most cases electrical noise is introduced to the system through lines trunks or telephone cables However electromagnetic fields near the control unit may also induce noise in the system Therefore the control unit and cable runs should not be placed in areas where a high electromagnetic field strength exists Radio transmitters AM and FM television stations induction heaters motors with commutators of 0 25 horsepower 200 watts or greater and similar equipment are leading causes of interference Small tools with universal motors do not generally cause a problem when operated on separate power lines Motors without commutators generally do not cause interference Field strengths below 1 0 volt per meter are unlikely to cause interference Estimate the field strength produced by radio transmitters by dividing the square root of the emitted power in kilowatts by the distance from the antenna in kilometers This yields the approximate field strength in volts per meter and is relatively accurate for distances greater than about half a wavelength 492 feet or 150 m for a frequency of 1000 Hz To comply with FCC Part 15 requirements each power supply on a newly installed system must have a ferrite core installed around the AC power cord and ground wire Beginning with Release 2 1 this ferrite core is packaged with the p
500. reated to allow Lucent Technologies technicians or authorized dealers to automatically determine if each end of the PRI tandem trunks has been programmed correctly Service Observing Service Observing allows one extension to listen in on observe a call at another extension A typical application of this feature is that of a Customer Service supervisor observing how a Customer Service representative handles calls The Service Observing group can consist of from one extension to all extensions in the system including other Service Observers Up to 16 Service Observing groups can be programmed The Service Observer and the observed extension must be on the same system The observer activates Service Observing either by pressing a Service Observing button and then dialing an extension number or by pressing a DSS or Auto Intercom button The Service Observer must use an MLX telephone to observe an extension the telephone at the observed extension can be of any type A warning tone that alerts the observer the observed extension and the caller that Service Observing is occurring can be set to On or Off through System Programming The factory setting is On Win SPM The System Programming and Maintenance SPM software is now available in a Windows format called Win SPM For Release 6 1 and later systems Win SPM provides a graphical user interface GUI for those tasks must commonly performed by the system manager Pictorial representations
501. res inhibit line access and allow companies to control and manage communications costs for outgoing data calls Data Status This button allows monitoring of station activity busy not busy at any data station Although this feature is similar to having an Inside Auto Dial or Signaling button because it lights the green LED to indicate extension busy status pressing the button has no effect It does not dial the data extension number Thus the button does not interfere with a data call in progress unlike an Auto Dial button which dials its programmed number Personal Lines This feature provides direct access from an ISDN terminal adapter data station to outside lines that support the PRI NI 1 BRI or T1 Switched 56 interface Idle Line Preference This feature automatically selects the first available line for data calls Last Number Dialed This feature automatically places a call to the last number dialed from that data station The dialing sequence must include dial out code for outside calls MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Features to Data Stations Page 5 36 m Personal Speed Dial These 2 digit numbers are programmed for quick dialing of frequently used numbers The dialing sequence requires a dial out code for outside calls Privacy This feature prevents loss of data by ensuring that data transmis sion is not interrupted acc
502. res that the switching equipment be a 4ESS Generic 13 through Generic 16 switch Release 4 2 and later systems require that the service provider s switching equipment may be any of the above systems or a DMS 100 DMS 250 or DEX600E If DS1s are to be used for private networks see the Network Reference before you begin this section and as you work through these instructions MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 24 Planning Form Instructions On Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks 1 For all trunks listed as PRI in the Jack Type column gt NOTE You cannot use Channel 24 for services a Write the kind of service to be connected to each channel in the Incoming Line Trunk Type column If the PRI channel is being used in a private network write NTWK and the switch identifier in this column b Write unequipped in the Incoming Line Trunk Type column for any channel not used at this time 2 For all trunks listed as T1 Tie that do not show an unequipped entry in the Incoming Line Trunk Type column write the kind of service connected to each channel in the Incoming Line Trunk Type column gt NOTE If you use common channel signaling you cannot use Channel 24 and program the module for tie trunk emulation 3 Doone ofthe following a select settings for T1 and T1 Switched 56 continue to the
503. res to Data Stations m Creating Data Hunt Groups m Digital Data Video Stations MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Contents Page v 2 7 6 Modifications 6 1 m Adding to the System 6 2 7 Upgrading 7 1 m Upgrading to Release 6 1 T2 m Release 6 1 Forms 7 9 Customer Support Information 1 m Support Telephone Number 1 Federal Communications Commission FCC Electromagnetic Interference Information A 1 m Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information A 2 FCC Notification and Repair Information A 2 Installation and Operational Procedures 4 DOC Notification and Repair Information 5 Renseignements sur la notification du minist re des Communications du Canada et la r paration A 6 Toll Fraud Prevention A 10 Remote Administration and Maintenance B System Forms B 1 C Data Forms C 1 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Contents Page vi sy D T1 PRI Planner D 1 2 DS1 Connectivity Ordering E 1 F Unit Load Calculation F 1 Calculating Unit Loads 2 m Unit Load Worksheet F 3 G NI 1 BRI Review G 1 NI 1 BRI Provisioning m Lucent Technologies 5ESS Switch Translations m Northern T
504. ricted for all codes 408 GS LS MLX module Pool dial out code access must be programmed Form 1a 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Page of Data Form 1 A MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 ____ Data Form 1b o ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Station Logical ID Extension No Person or Location Data Station Use Call Restriction Individual use Unrestricted Q Local host computer Q Outward Restrict LAN workstation Q Toll Restrict Modem Pool Member Q Allow List s O No Yes Pool Number Disallowed List s Assigned to Data Hunt Group Q No Yes DHG Extension oe Forced Account Code Entry Optional Features No Pool Dial Out Code Restriction Yes Unrestricted from following codes Facility Restriction Level 13 Restricted from following codes Button Diagram Key Mode Hybrid PBX Mode SAO O Icom R SA Icom R SAV Ringing Options BN Idle Line Idle Line Preference Preference Factory Setting t Only one SA Ring button assigned on 008 MLX or A Factory setting is restricted for all codes 408 GS LS MLX module Pool dial out code access must be programmed Form 1b 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Data Form 1b
505. ringing at the non local destination and is redirected to the extension on the same system as the Automated Attendant that is programmed to receive redirected calls This redirect extension can be a QCC queue a calling group or an individual extension Direct Station Selector Now users can press a Direct Station Selector DSS button for a non local extension to make or transfer calls to that extension However no busy indication is displayed by the DSS for non local extensions Call Forwarding SMDR The Forward feature now can be used to send calls to non local extensions across the private network In addition to SMDR options for non network calls placed to and from the local system system managers now can program SMDR to log incoming and outgoing UDP calls or they can choose to log no UDP calls The factory setting is to record all UDP calls Customers who use a call accounting system may not want to fill the database with calls coming and going across the private network These customers may choose not to log UDP calls Decrease in Call Set Up Time The set up time for a call across a private network has been reduced by programming the number of UDP digits expected MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 New Features and Enhancements Release 6 1 Enhancements August 1998 Page xvi PRI Switch Type Test A new maintenance test the PRI Switch Type Test has been c
506. rogrammed for voice or data tandem Primary Rate Interface trunk A private network trunk Telephony Application Programming Interface An application programming interface that allows computer telephony applications to be used TAPI is not yet supported by the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System See also TSAPl ana Equipment that provides power to an individual telephone See ISDN terminal adapter Private trunk directly connecting two telephone switches See switchhook flash MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Issue 1 August 1998 Glossary Page GL 27 tip ring Contacts and associated conductors of a single line telephone plug or jack touch tone See TTR receiver T R See tip ring trunk Telecommunications path between the communications system and the telephone company central office CO or another switch Often used synonymously with ine trunk jack See ine trunk jack trunk pool Telephony Services Application Programming Interface An application programming interface that allows computer telephony applications to be used TSAPI is supported by the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5 0 See also TAP lana CT1 TTR touch tone receiver Device used to decode DTMF touch tones dialed from single line or Remote Access telephones U UDP Uniform Dial Plan Composed of the ocal dial plan and unambiguous numbering Uniform D
507. roup Number Group Number Group ID Group ID Ext No Person or Location Ext No Person or Location i 1 L L L Form 7a 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 7b Group Paging See Form 2d Group No 1 Group ID Group No 2 Group ID Factory Set Ext No 793 Renumber to Factory Set Ext No 794 Renumber to Ex No Person or Location Ext No Person or Location IN IN EN Group No 3 Group ID Group No 4 Group ID Factory Set Ext No 795 Renumber to Factory Set Ext 796 Renumber to Ext No Person or Location __ Ext No Person or Location AnA IW O0 Form 7b 1 i MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 7b Continued Group No 5 Group ID Group No 6 Group ID Factory Set Ext No 797 Renumber to Factory Set Ext No 798 Renumber to ExtNo Person or Location Group No 7 Page All Factory Set Ext No 799 Renumber to TEN AA IN ak Form 7b
508. rrier codes of up to only four digits If Remote Access is used an upgrade to MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 3 0 is encouraged to take advantage of the longer barrier code MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints Page A 16 Other Security Hints Make sure that the Automated Attendant Selector Codes do not permit outside line selection Multiple layers of security are always recommended to keep your system secure Following are a number of measures and guidelines that can help you ensure the security of your communications system and voice messaging system Educating Users Everyone in your company who uses the telephone system is responsible for system security Users and attendants operators need to be aware of how to recognize and react to potential hacker activity Informed people are more likely to cooperate with security measures that often make the system less flexible and more difficult to use Never program passwords or authorization codes onto Auto Dial buttons Display telephones reveal the programmed numbers and internal abusers can use the Auto Dial buttons to originate unauthorized calls Discourage the practice of writing down barrier codes or passwords If a barrier code or password needs to be written down keep it in a secure place and never discard it while it is active Instruct operators and
509. rs need to make after hours calls and prefer not to enter a password you can set up an Exclusion List that exempts those extensions from the password requirement Extensions assigned to the Exclusion List keep the normal calling restrictions if any are assigned when Night Service is in effect However these extensions are not protected in any other way from unauthorized after hours use Planning Form Instructions On Form 9b Night Service Outward Restriction 1 The password must be 4 digits and can include the numbers 0 9 in any combination To keep the password private record it on a separate paper and not on the form A SecurityA lert Additional steps must be taken to maintain security on ports such as use of Disallowed Lists Outward Restriction and so on Refer to Appendix A Customer Support Information for more information 2 Write the numbers to be included in the Telephone No list in the Emergency Allowed List section 3 To exclude users from the password requirement complete the Exclusion List section a Inthe Ext No column write the extension number for each telephone see b Inthe Name column write each user s name see Form 2a MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 56 Night Service with Time Set This section contains instructions for setting the system to automatically turn Night Service on and
510. runk jack on each DID and tie trunk module and each channel on each 100D or 800 NI BRI module m Use line trunk jacks at the beginning of the sequence for basic ground start and or basic loop start trunks Use jacks later in the sequence for special purpose trunks such as WATS or FX m If aline trunk such as WATS is only inbound or only outbound not two way include that information along with the line trunk type MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Identifying Line Trunk Jacks Page 3 7 2 Ifthe jack type shown in the Jack Type column is GS LS then write either GS or LS to indicate the line trunk type in the Incoming Line Trunk Type column For a T1 or NI 1 BRI trunk not used at this time write unequipped For other T1 or PRI facilities the kind of service connected such as Megacom 800 will be filled in later gt NOTE In the next step be sure the line trunk type associated with each telephone number matches the jack type Also if you have 800 NI BRI modules or have dedicated 100D module channels to emulate loop start ground start and or tie trunks the local telephone company will supply the telephone number associated with each of the channels on the BRI 051 facility In the Telephone Number or Equipment column write the telephone number for each incoming line trunk as supplied by the local telephone company on the row with the logical I
511. ry setting box m To require users to enter an account code check the Yes box Microphone Operation This section contains instructions to disable the microphones on MLX telephones when they are used in areas where use of the speakerphone is disruptive Extensions that interact with a CTI capable program on a computer extensions marked Computer Telephony Integrated Client PC on forms 4b or 4d should not have their microphones disabled gt NOTE The microphones on analog multiline telephones cannot be disabled Planning Form Instructions Under the Microphone heading on Form 6b do one of the following m To allow speakerphone use factory setting check Enable m To prevent speakerphone use check Disable MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 7 Remote Call Forwarding This section contains instructions to allow users to forward calls to outside numbers and to allow users to screen their calls through use of the Forwarding Delay option With the Forwarding Delay option activated incoming calls ring at the called station a specified number of times from 1 to 9 rings before the call is forwarded A SecurityA lert Remote Call Forwarding can only be used securely when used on grouna start line trunks or loop start lines trunks with reliable disconnect sometimes referred to as forward disconnect or disc
512. s 5 35 extension jacks 5 1 extension jacks for 5 1 GPA 5 7 ISDN terminal adapter data only 5 11 LAN host computer 5 15 5 25 LAN workstations 5 15 5 25 modem data only 5 9 Data Status 5 35 Data Terminal 5 3 Data Terminal Equipment DTE 5 3 Date 2 10 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Index Delay Announcement Devices connected to tip ring jacks 2 30 MLX telephone adjunct 2 25 Delay announcement devices 2 18 Delay Announcement Units Connected to analog multiline telephones 2 27 TTRs required 2 20 Delay option 3 49 Delay Ring interval 4 30 DEX600 D 1 Dial plan routing 3 33 Dial tone 2 17 3 41 3 49 secondary dial tone timer 2 12 Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS 3 3 Digital adjuncts assigning trunks 3 51 features 4 3 jacks 2 25 user information 3 51 Digital Signal 1 DS1 configurations summary 3 38 ground start emulation 3 3 1 6 3 Direct Inward Dial DID trunks 5 28 blocks and 3 43 dial 3 42 disconnect time 3 44 expected digits 3 43 invalid destination 3 43 options 3 42 planning 3 42 remote access 3 19 3 42 signaling 3 43 type 3 43 Direct Station Selector DSS buttons 3 62 park zones 4 25 ranges 4 25 Directed call completion 4 22 Direct Line Console DLC assigning trunks 3 50 Automatic Hold 4 18 button assignment 3 62 3 63 button assignments 3 62 definition 2 11 Extension Copy featur
513. s Group Assigned Features Page 4 26 Group Assigned Features The system offers the following features to facilitate the call handling responsibilities of groups of users m Group Calling This section contains instructions for recording information about these features To determine whether any of the group assigned features are appropriate for System users see the analysis of the Employee Communication Survey Forms Needed m Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks m Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers orm 4b Analog Multiline Telephone orm 4d Telephone orm 5a Direct Line Console DLC Analog 56 Direct Line Console DLC Digital m Form Optional Operator Features m Form 7a Call Pickup Groups orm 7b Group Paging orm 7 Group Coverage cH orm 7d Group Calling MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Group Assigned Features Page 4 27 Call Pickup Groups This section contains instructions for assigning this feature to employees who work in a common area and who do not have a support person for coverage You can assign up to 30 call pickup groups with up to 15 telephones for each group Each telephone can be assigned to only one group gt NOTE This feature is similar to the Coverage feature presented later in this chapter Compare these features before choosing t
514. s check the Disable box factory setting m To allow QCC operators to originate Voice Announce calls check the Enable box MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Operator Features Page 4 25 Direct Station Selector Use these instructions only if the system has Direct Station Selectors DSSs connected to MLX operator consoles Otherwise skip to the next section Group Assigned Features This section contains instructions for recording the range of extensions assigned to the Page buttons and for renumbering the extensions for Park so that the extensions fall within the Page button ranges DSS Page Buttons This section contains instructions for recording the range of extensions assigned to each of three Page buttons The three Page buttons should be set to reach ranges of numbers that include the extension numbers in the extension numbering plan including non local extensions if the system is in a private network configuration and reflect the number of extensions available m If one DSS is connected to an operator console set each Page button for a range of 50 numbers matching the 50 available extensions m If two DSSs are connected set each Page button for a range of 100 numbers The Page buttons then control 100 extensions 50 on each DSS gt NOTE If two DSSs are used the Page buttons on the second DSS not active Planning Form In
515. s to each port on an MLX module one for the MLX telephone and one for the device connected to the MFM If an MFM is not connected to an MLX telephone or the MLX port is not used the prime line for the MFM can be removed The prime line can then be assigned to another user When PRI NI 1 BRI or T1 Switched 56 lines trunks are assigned to an MLX jack digital data video stations may use two B channels simultaneously 2B Data to place or receive high speed data video calls For more information on planning for video applications see Chapter 5 Data Communications MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 26 In Release 5 0 and later if you want Computer Telephony Integration CTI capability you must assign an MLX jack port as the CTI link In Release 5 0 and later the CTI link communicates with the PassageWay Telephony Services for Netware product implemented on a server running Netware 3 12 or 4 1 or later In Release 6 1 and later the CTI link may communicate with either the CentreVu Computer Telephony Release 3 1 or later on a server running Windows NT 4 0 Server or Windows NT 4 0 Workstation or PassageWay Telephony Services for Netware to provide CTI services These CTI services enable a desktop computer running a certified PC application to provide computer based features to users The CTI link port must be selec
516. s can be placed to both extension numbers independently Note that an MLX extension cannot have both an ISDN terminal adapter and an MFM Also when configuring digital data equipment connections to an MLX port the following requirements and or restrictions must be applied If using a 7500B data module as an ISDN terminal adapter and it is the only ISDN terminal adapter data station on the MLX port no MLX telephone is connected a 440A4 terminating resistor adapter must be configured to provide 100 ohm termination for each transmission pair The 7500B data module does not provide termination An MLX telephone is independent from the ISDN terminal adapter however the telephone may cause channel conflict between the telephone and the ISDN terminal adapter when the telephone is voice signaled while active on a call If a slight chance of data call blocking is unacceptable an MLX telephone should not be connected to an ISDN terminal adapter used in a data station configuration The maximum cord length from an MLX telephone to an ISDN terminal adapter is 80 feet 24 meters This should be considered if you plan to use the voice capability of a port by connecting an MLX telephone far from the ISDN terminal adapter Do not connect an ISDN terminal adapter that does not support 2B Data to an MLX port that has been programmed as a 2B Data port When using the 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module for data or video you must use Version 28 of the mo
517. s depends on the type of data stations or video systems 2 Creating modem ISDN terminal adapter pools pairs of modems and ISDN terminal adapters to enable calls between the two types of data stations modem data stations and ISDN terminal adapter data stations 3 Assigning lines trunks to data stations and video systems gt Assigning features to data stations e Creating data hunt groups DHGs that is data calling groups if there are modem ISDN terminal adapter pools with more than one data communications equipment pair a modem and an ISDN terminal adapter or to designate a group of either modems or ISDN terminal adapters to receive calls to communicate with a local host computer or local area network LAN workstation gt NOTE Modem ISDN terminal adapter pools are not described in this book For information see application note MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Modem Pooling MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Page 5 2 6 Configuring MLX jacks for 2B Data 2 B channel connectivity This allows video systems to use both B channels on a single MLX jack to establish high speed video connections at data rates of up to 128 kbps gt NOTE For additional information on 2B Data Video and for information on connecting video systems to the MERLIN LEGEND system refer to the Data and Video Reference For information on orderin
518. s follows a Under the Network Calls heading check one of the boxes using the following information Ifthe switch is not part of a private network check None Ifthe switch is part of a private network and tandem calls will pass through this system check Tandem Ifthe switch is part of a private network and network calls will be allowed to access PSTN trunks check ARS gt NOTE If Tandem or ARS is selected under Network Calls the Restriction should be set to Unrestricted For additional information on private networks see the Network Heference b ForRestriction check one of the following three boxes Unrestricted Outward Restrict to keep the factory setting or Toll Restrict A SecurityAlert It is recommended that Outward Restrict be set at all times otherwise toll fraud can occur If the switch is part of a private network and restrictions need to be changed from Outward Restricted barrier codes should be required MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 22 c Under the Disallowed List Access heading check the box if you plan to assign disallowed lists gt NOTE Instructions for filling in the ARS Restriction Level and Disallowed List numbers are included in Features 8 Form 3a page 4 identifies programming information for four barrier codes If more barrier codes are
519. s inside wiring for single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or any equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la notification du ministere des Communications du Canada Page A 6 A CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or electrician as appropriate To prevent overloading the Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop used by the device The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subj
520. s more than one QCC operator position and the customer wants one centralized location where employees retrieve messages Usually only one message center position is necessary but there can be several QCCs in one room sharing messaging duties The Message Center option allows you to designate a QCC as a message center with the following options automatically set m The only incoming calls that go to the message center QCC are calls to the extension number of the QCC and calls sent to the QCC using Forward or Follow Me m Returning calls such as those sent to an extension operator parked and camp on calls go to the message center QCC This means that the message center position is different from that of the system operator who originally answered the call m Group Coverage calls go to the QCC message center m DID calls to invalid destinations unassigned extension numbers go to the QCC message center MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Operator Features Page 4 22 Planning Form Instructions Under the Message Center heading on Form 6a do one of the following m Toindicate that no message center operator is assigned check the No box m Toassign a message center check the second box and write the extension of the QCC operator position in the space provided see Form 2a or ba Directed Call Completion Use these instructions only if the system has a QCC w
521. s put into Night Service all programmed Coverage VMS Off buttons are automatically turned off LED is unlit and all eligible outside calls are sent to the assigned voice messaging system calling group with normal ringing delay When Night Service is deactivated during the day all programmed Coverage VMS Off buttons are automatically turned on LED is lit and voice mail coverage is disabled for outside calls Users can override the Coverage VMS Off button status at any time by pressing the programmed Coverage VMS Off button to turn the LED on or off Night Service Group Line Assignment Beginning with Release 4 1 a system manager can assign lines to Night Service groups to control handling of after hours calls received on individual lines This capability replaces the automatic assignment to Night Service groups of only those lines that ring on the Night Service operator console An outside line must be assigned to a Night Service group to receive Night Service treatment With this enhancement Night Service can be activated and deactivated on lines that do not appear on operator consoles for example personal lines and lines appearing at operator positions can be excluded from Night Service MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 4 1 Enhancements June 1997 Page xxxi Forward on Busy Beginning with Release 4 1 the Forward Fo
522. sages 1 through 10 shown on Form 10a are already programmed in the system and 10 more can be added for a total of 20 In a Release 2 0 or later system Messages 2 through 9 can be changed In a Release 1 0 or 1 1 system all 10 of the preprogrammed messages can be changed Planning Form Instructions Posted messages can contain as many as 16 characters including capital letters numbers ampersand amp dash space colon asterisk and pound sign 8 On Form 10a Label Form Posted Message do one of the following m To add posted messages for Messages 11 through 20 for example CUSTM MSG 11 write each new message next to its message number 11 through 20 in the Revised Message column m To change existing messages cross out the message and write the new message in the Revised Message column gt NOTE In Release 2 0 and later Message 1 DO NOT DISTURB cannot be changed MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 58 System Speed Dial This section contains instructions for designating systemwide frequently used numbers You can assign and store up to 130 three digit System Speed Dial codes To call one of these numbers a caller presses the Feature button and dials a three digit code Assign System Speed Dial codes to telephone numbers that shouldn t be displayed on telephones such as access codes Entries that
523. se the same announcement devices The announcement devices should not be assigned as group members and they are outward restricted to prevent unauthorized calls Each calling group can have only one telephone assigned as its message waiting receiver The same telephone can be assigned as the message waiting receiver for more than one calling group Three Calls in Queue Alarm thresholds can be set to more clearly indicate the real time status of the calls waiting in the queue according to the behavior of programmed Calls in Queue Alarm buttons In Release 4 2 and earlier only one Calls in Queue Alarm Threshold setting is available to activate the LEDs at programmed Calls in Queue Alarm buttons for a calling group Using all three levels the system manager sets Threshold 3 to the highest value Threshold 2 to a middle value and Threshold 1 to the lowest value A Calls in Queue Alarm button indicates the severity of the alarm conditions in the following ways MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Group Assigned Features Page 4 36 m If the number of waiting calls is less than the value programmed for Threshold 1 or drops below that level the LED is unlit m If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the Threshold 1 value but less than the Threshold 2 value the LED flashes m If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the Threshold 2 val
524. sed for these types of data stations Forms Needed m Data Form 1a Modem Data Stations m Data Form 1b Data Stations m 4e Adjunct Telephone m Form 5c MFM Adjunct DLC Planning Form Instructions You should have already filled out preliminary information on Forms 4e and 5c when you planned voice communications The lines trunks for MLX telephones have already been assigned There are two different forms for data stations m Data Form 1a Use this form for modem data only stations and for modems used to communicate with the local host computer and to communicate with a workstation on a LAN m Data Form 1b Use this form for ISDN terminal adapters and ISDN terminal adapter data stations used to communicate with the local host computer or with a workstation on a LAN Make enough copies of each data form so that you can complete one form for each data station Complete each form 1 From Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks obtain the identification information for each data station MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Lines Trunks to Data and Video Stations Page 5 31 2 Record the information on the appropriate data form 2a or 2b for each data station and for each modem and ISDN terminal adapter used to communicate with a local host computer or with a workstation on a LAN a Inthe Logical ID space
525. ser name and or location of analog multiline telephones m Number and user name and or location of tip ring equipment m Names of optional applications Module Types and Extension Jack Types The module type determines the type of extension jack used For example the 016 T R module has 16 basic telephone jacks Table 2 1 lists the extension jack types and the equipment that can be connected to these jacks MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Issue 1 August 1998 Page 2 15 Table 2 1 Application Ports Ext No Module Jack Type of Jacks Used to Connect 008 Analog 8 Analog multiline telephones 408 8 TransTalk Wireless telephones 408 GS LS 8 Call Management System CMS 008 MLX Digital 8 MLX telephones with or without PassageWay Direct Connect Solution 408 GS LS MLX 8 CTI link Desktop video endpoints and or Group Video endpointst Digital data devices such as an ISDN terminal adapter 012 Basic 12 equipment such as 016 Telephone 16 Single line telephones Delay Announcement Devices Adjuncts such as analog modems or fax machines or MERLIN Identifier Optional applications Enhanced Service Center Messaging 2000 Intuity AUDIX VS MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System AUDIX Voice Power IS I or 008 OPT 8 equipment in another building or off premises Off Premises Range Extender
526. sion MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 4 1 Enhancements June 1997 Page xxx Release 4 1 Enhancements June 1997 Release 4 1 includes all Release 4 0 functionality plus the enhancements listed below There are no hardware changes in Release 4 1 Coverage Timers Programmed for Individual Extensions Beginning with Release 4 1 coverage timers which control the duration of the delay before calls are sent to each level of coverage are changed as follows The Group Coverage Ring Delay 1 9 rings is programmed on individual extensions and replaces the Coverage Delay Interval programmed systemwide in previous releases m The Primary Cover Ring Delay 1 6 rings and Secondary Cover Ring Delay 1 6 rings programmed on individual extensions replace the Delay Ring Interval programmed systemwide in previous releases These enhancements allow the system manager to customize coverage call delivery to match individual extensions call handling requirements Night Service with Coverage Control Beginning with Release 4 1 a system manager can enable the Night Service Coverage Control option to automatically control the status of telephones programmed with Coverage VMS voice messaging system Off buttons according to Night Service status When Coverage Control is enabled and the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System i
527. space Write the extension number for the group Observer in the Observer Ext No space The Observer s station must have a Service Observing button Check the appropriate option under the Warning Tone heading m keep the factory set option and provide a warning tone to indicate that the station is being monitored check the Yes box m warning tone will not be provided when a station is being monitored check the No box Write the extension number for each group member in the Member Ext No column Write each Service Observing group member s name in the Member Name column MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Operator Features Page 4 18 Operator Features Operator features apply only to DLCs QCCs and any Direct Station Selectors DSSs connected to them Forms Needed a Optional Operator Features 7A Direct Line Console Use these instructions only if the system has one or more DLCs Otherwise skip to the next section Queued Call Console Hybrid PBX Mode Only This section contains instructions for the Operator Hold Timer and DLC Automatic Hold features Operator Hold Timer This section contains instructions to set the operator hold timer to track the number of seconds callers are on hold for an operator When a caller is on hold longer than the number of seconds programmed for the timer the ope
528. ss arrangement of Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN service that may be used to connect the system to another switch over a DS1 facility This section contains instructions for recording decisions about the following options for each PRI facility B channel groups PRI services incoming and outgoing according to B channel group Line Appearance Routing incoming services Dial Plan Routing incoming services Hybrid PBX mode only Outgoing Tables Network Selection Table Special Services Table and Call by Call Service Table Telephone Number to Send station identification or automatic numbering information SID ANI information Test Telephone Number s Timers and Counters Terminal Equipment Identifier TEI After completing the procedure for filling in the module information on Form 3b pages 1 and 2 continue to thelnextisectonfto fill in PRI options gt NOTES 1 The PRI service type must be selected before entering the PRI information during system programming 2 Because of the complexity of the timer counter and terminal equipment identifier information the factory settings should rarely be changed Incorrect settings can have an adverse affect on the operation of PRI facilities 3 If there is more than one 100D module set up for PRI service or you have more than eight B channel groups assigned to a module make copies of Form 3b page 4 as necessary MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Iss
529. ssue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 3 1 Enhancements March 1996 Page xxxvi Default Pool Dial Out Code Restriction for All Extensions The default setting for the pool dial out code restriction Hybrid PBX mode only is restricted No extension or remote access user with a barrier code has access to pools until the restriction is removed by the system manager Default Outward Restrictions for VMI Ports Ports assigned for use by voice messaging systems generic or integrated VMI ports are now assigned outward restrictions by default If a voice messaging system must be allowed to call out for example to send calls to a user s home office the system manager must remove these restrictions A SECURITY ALERT Before removing restrictions it is strongly recommended that you read Customer Support Information Default Facility Restriction Level FRL for VMI Ports The default Automatic Route Selection ARS FRL for VMI ports is 0 restricting all outcalling Default for the Default Local Table The default Automatic Route Selection Hybrid PBX mode only FRL has changed to 2 for the Default Local table System managers can easily change an extension default of 3 to 2 or lower in order to restrict calling No adjustment to the route FRL is required New Maintenance Procedure for Testing Outgoing Trunks Technicians must enter a password in order to perform tr
530. status is unaffected Delay Announcement Devices The system manager can designate as many as ten primary delay announcement devices per group rather than the single device for each group that is available in Release 4 2 and earlier systems Furthermore an additional secondary delay announcement device can be specified for a total of ten primary device extensions and one secondary device extension per group A primary delay announcement device operates in the same fashion as a single delay announcement device playing once as soon as it is available for the caller who has waited the longest for a calling group agent and has not heard a primary delay announcement If a secondary announcement device is used it can use the factory setting which plays the announcement once or it can be set to repeat the announcement after a certain amount of time The system manager programs the time 0 900 seconds between announcements This setting controls both the interval between primary and secondary announcements and the interval between repetitions of the secondary announcement if it is set to repeat See Group Calling Options in Chapter 4 for guidelines on setting the delay The primary and secondary announcement options when used together allow an initial message to play for callers followed by a repeating announcement that for example urges callers to stay on the line and wait for a calling group member Two or more groups may share an annou
531. stem Systems that are part of a private network need to use these instructions to modify Remote Access so that users can access remote trunks Otherwise skip to the next section DS1 Connectivity 100D Module The Remote Access feature allows people to use the system from a remote location It also allows remote system programming and maintenance by a qualified technician You can assign remote access to any incoming line trunk connected to the system except T1 Switched 56 data facilities DID and dial in tie trunks and private network tandem trunks For DID the routing digits supplied by the central office must match the remote access code This section contains instructions for m Renumbering the remote access code from the factory setting m Allowing access to the Automatic Callback feature m Designating trunks for remote access m Specifying shared or dedicated access m Assigning barrier codes and class of restriction for security m Allowing access to private network tandem trunks MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 19 For detailed information about these options see the Feature Reference You may want to assign remote access to only a few trunks and increase the number later if more are needed gt NOTES 1 If you want to allow remote access on DID trunks the routing digits supplied by the central o
532. stem Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Network Engineering Forms Page 1 Network Engineering Forms This appendix contains one copy of each of the network planning forms used by the Network Engineering Group to plan and configure a MERLIN LEGEND Release 6 0 or later private network The forms are listed in Table 1 You should make copies of these forms and use the copies keeping the originals for future use gt NOTE To contact the Network Engineering Group call 1 888 297 4700 The system planning forms are contained in Appendix B Planning forms for data communications are contained in Appendix C The T1 PRI Planner is contained in Appendix D The NI 1 BRI Planner is contained in TableI 1 Network Forms Form Used for No Form Title Requesting assistance from the Sales and 1154 Request for Sales and Design Design Support Center Support Center Services Preliminary network planning N A MERLIN LEGEND R6 Design Implementation Guide Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations REQUEST FOR SALES AND DESIGN SUPPORT CENTER SERVICES E 1154 Check each service being requested and describe in Scope of Work below Technical Assurance DEFINITY L1 AUDIX Intuity Check products GENERAL INFORMATION Complete all fields Installation Specifications Floorplan Other Sys Mgmt CAS CONVERSANT O UPS DC Power L CM
533. structions In the Page Buttons table under the Direct Station Selector heading of Form 6a page 1 write the beginning extension for the range of the 50 or 100 extension numbers for each Page button Assign the lowest extension numbers in the plan to the first Page button the middle range of numbers to the second Page button and the highest extension numbers to the third Page button Use the information from Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks to assign the range of extensions for each Page button Also record this information on Form 2d under the DSS Page Buttons heading Park Zones This section contains instructions to enable operators with a DSS to have one touch use of Park The system automatically reserves eight extensions 881 888 for system operator park zones only system operators can use these park zone extensions to park calls Consider changing these factory set extensions to numbers that fall within the Page button ranges The same considerations apply as those used during reassignment of extension numbers Planning Form Instructions In the Call Park Codes table under Direct Station Selector on Form 6a m Write the new Zone numbers assigned in the Renumber to columns m Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers write the new numbers in the Renumber to column of the Park Zone section of that form MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Feature
534. supervision time 3 41 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Index Applications AUDIX Voice Power Fax Attendant 2 30 CONVERSANT 2 31 Enhanced Service Center ESC 2 31 Integrated Solution Il IS II 2 32 Integrated Solution III IS 2 32 Intuity AUDIX 2 31 jacks 2 30 Lucent Attendant 2 31 MERLIN LEGEND Mail 2 31 MERLIN MAIL voice messaging system 2 31 Messaging 2000 2 31 planning for 2 12 AT amp T Switched Network ASN 3 3 AT amp T Toll 3 34 AUDIX Voice Power Fax Attendant System 008 OPT module 2 15 coverage group 4 31 ports 2 30 renumbering 2 33 reserved extensions 4 32 Auto Answer All 5 35 Autodial 3 49 Automatic backup 2 11 Automatic Callback 3 18 3 20 444 Automatic Hold or Release 4 20 Automatic Maintenance Busy 2 10 Automatic Route Selection ARS 5 35 absorb digits setting 4 72 area code exchanges 4 59 button assignments 3 55 call types 4 72 description 4 59 Facility Restriction Levels FRLs 4 67 other digits setting 4 72 pools 4 70 preferred trunk pools 4 59 slow dial tone and 3 49 subpatterns 4 66 tables 4 63 type of dialing 4 59 worksheet 4 59 Auxiliary equipment 6 4 Issue 1 August 1998 Page IN 2 B Backing up the system system programming 2 11 Barrier codes 3 18 3 20 B channel groups 3 33 Behind Switch mode button assignments 3 57 features 2 8 BRI line options Service Profile Identifier S
535. supports only National ISDN 1 BRI 2B D service t MERLIN LEGEND Release 4 0 does not support Voice Data Hunt Groups with the Siemens SSC EWSD Central Office Switch MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Page H 1 NI 1 BRI Provisioning This appendix provides detailed information concerning the features and translations that make up the ISDN Ordering Code standardized capability package S as well as the Multiline Hunt MLH feature The MLH feature is provisioned using either the Multiline Hunt Group or the Series Completion feature depending on the CO switch type Specific translations are provided for the following switches jLucent Technologies 5ESS m Northern Telecom DMS 100 SSC EWSD After determining that the local service provider offers National ISDN 1 service the information contained in this appendix should be given to the local service provider if necessary gt NOTE The programming screens shown in this appendix are representative samples only The local service provider will need to enter applicable data such as the telephone numbers where necessary Also note that the programming covered in this appendix does not take place on the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System All programming is performed by the local service provider on the CO switch MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1
536. swering machine Q On Q Data terminal Cover Ring Delay Alert device type 9 Other Primary Cover Ring Delay Q 2Rings Q Off Premises m rings 1 6 Q Passageway Secondary Cover Ring Delay Personal Lines 2Rings a rings 1 6 Group Coverage Ring Delay Shared Extension No 3Rings Q Ring rings 1 9 Q No Ring Computer Telephony Integrated Client PC Auto Line Selection Q Yes SS SSS ee No Centralized Programming Requirements Assign Service Observing Button Factory Setting The system capacity for Personal Directories is decreased by one whenever an MLX 20L telephone is connected to MLX This telephone is the same as the MLX 10D except it has an adjunct plug in the back for connection to a PC when programming telephone features using the PassageWay Direct Connect Solution software application This telephone is available with Release 2 1 and later Refer to form 11 assign as a Service Observer Form 4d 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 4d Continued Button Diagram See Master Extension
537. system programming screens used for both types Plan your clock source administration to minimize the need for clock switching which is known to cause noise on active calls MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 47 The primary secondary and tertiary clock sources all three of which should be programmed if possible should be set in the following order 1 The loop clock sources on BRI ports with DSLs in service If at all possible all three clock sources should be on the same 800 NI BRI module 2 The loop clock source on any 100D module connected to the CO and in service loop clock source any 100D module T1 mode operating in a tie trunk configuration 4 The local clock source any 100D module If no administration has been performed upon Frigid Start system start up the first 100D or NI 1 BRI port that is in service will be the default primary loop clock source gt NOTE Extra BRI DSLs which are not in service should never be programmed as clock sources Planning Form Instructions Refer to Form 1 System Planning Control Unit Diagram Complete the following information on Form 3i Incoming Trunks BRI Options 800 NI BRI Module page 2 1 keep the factory setting the first slot and port found in the system provides synchronization for the system or if assigning a d
538. t 1998 3 Lines Trunks Assigning Telephone Buttons Page 3 54 34 BUTTON 22 BUTTON 10 BUTTON m 5 BUTTON 11 23 OO N Er DD nr e A N o N OOjOO oOojoojoojoojoo a D N I N oo 0 o D 19 oO 31 0 o 2 0 z 32 0 i 22 34 OO OO Figure 3 3 Factory Set Assignment Analog Multiline Telephones Hybrid PBX Mode MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Assigning Telephone Buttons Page 3 55 Guidelines for Button Assignments Use the following guidelines for assigning buttons to telephones or to adjuncts connected to an MLX telephone gt NOTE When assigning buttons to telephones or adjuncts keep in mind that BRI lines are not automatically assigned to telephones or DLCs For multiline telephone users For non operator multiline telephones you can assign SA Voice SA Ring and SA Orig Only buttons to the first 10 buttons on each telephone and up to 27 SSA buttons to each telephone However it is recommended that the factory setting of 3 SA buttons be used to ensure that when each user is busy on a call at least one additional button is available to receive a call and another is available to make a call This leaves the rest of the buttons on multiline telephones free for customizing On a DLC there can b
539. t ISA slot for the ISDN BRI card System software Release 5 0 or later installed on the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System configured in Hybrid PBX mode An MLX port board using firmware version 28 or later except Version 29 installed in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System gt NOTE If you have Version 29 replace the board with an appropriate version or for a replacement card call the TSO at 1 800 628 2888 If the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System has only one MLX port board you will also need System Programming and Maintenance SPM software Version 5 15 or later to program your CTI link One port on an MLX port board is used for the link Select from ports 2 3 4 6 7 or 8 The CTI link port cannot be the potential operator port or the console programming port MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 1 Before You Begin Requirements for Supporting Applications Page 1 9 m Fora NetWare 3 12 installation ensure that NWSNUT NLM Version 4 11 or later and TUI NLM Version 1 04 or later is obtained from Novell and installed in the SYSASYSTEM directory gt NOTE To obtain these NLMs from Novell access either the Novell web site http Nwww novell com or the Novell FTP site ftp novell com First download IPXRT4 EXE and follow the directions in the associated readme file Then download NWSNUT NLM and TUI
540. t les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la classe pr scrites dans le r glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada Trademarks SESS AUDIX DEFINITY HackerTracker CONVERSANT Lucent Technologies Attendant Fax Attendant System MERLIN MERLIN LEGEND MERLIN MAIL MERLIN PFC MLX 10 MLX 10D MLX 10DP MLX 16DP MLX 20L MLX 28D PassageWay PARTNER and Voice Power are registered trademarks and 4ESS Intuity Lucent Technologies MLX 5 MLX 5D and ExpressRoute 1000 are trademarks of Lucent Technologies in the US and other countries NetPROTECT is a service mark of Lucent Technologies in the US and other countries Supra StarSet and Mirage are registered trademarks of Plantronics Inc MEGACOM ACCUNET AT amp T Magic on Hold and MultiQuest are registered trademarks of AT amp T Pipeline is a trademark of Ascend Communications Inc Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation PagePac is a registered trademark and PagePal a trademark of DRACON a division of Harris Corporation UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories Inc NORTEL is a registered trademark and DMS a trademark of Northern Telecom MCI Prism and Vnet are registered trademarks of MCI Communications Corp Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Ordering Information Call BCS
541. t or Toll Restrict does not allow reliable toll restriction on telephone company lines trunks that do not require 1 or 0 for toll calls The Toll Type setting of 1 or 0 allows the system to classify calls as either local or toll based on the number a user dials Dialing a prefix depends on local telephone company requirements and the type of trunk being used The system must be programmed to designate whether or not to restrict users from dialing calls to certain areas The Toll Type feature does not apply to DID trunks or private network tandem trunks To restrict the extension from making outside calls so only intercom or private network calls can be made check the Outward Restriction column To restrict the extension from making toll calls so only intercom local or private network calls can be made check the Toll Restriction column MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 6 Forced Account Code Entry This section contains instructions for setting up the system to associate calls with corresponding accounts clients or projects for billing and accounting purposes Planning Form Instructions Use Form 6b to identify extensions requiring Forced Account Code Entry Under the Forced Account Code Entry heading on Form 6b do one of the following m To allow users to make calls without entering an account code check the No facto
542. tatus 1 Non operator Feature Button Forward Group Calling Group Paging Headset Auto Answer Headset Hang Up Headset Status NOS S lt Headset Handset Mute Last Number Dialt v Messaging Delete Message d Leave Message v Message Light Off 4 Next Message v Posted Message Return Call v Scroll v Park Y Behind Switch mode only T Number is not copied Continued on next page MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Telephone and Extension Features Page 4 13 Table 4 1 Features That Can Be Copied Continued Analog and MLX Feature MLX Analog Only Only Pickup Group General Extension Line Privacy 44 44 US Recall Reminder Service Set Cancel Saved Number Dialt Selective Callback SS SS S Signaling System Access t SA Originate Only Voice Attribute on Button Ring Attribute on Button System Speed Dial S S SS S Transfer Behind Switch mode only Number is not copied t Ringing options No Delay and Immediate Ring are copied with the button The following are operator features that can be copied m Alarm m Extension Status Off m Extension Status 1 m Extension Status 2 m Missed Reminder Night Service m Operator Park Send Remove Mess
543. te Access and DID lines all calls on tie lines and calls routed to the VMS Use Table 2 4 to find the system requirements for TTRs based the estimated hourly call volume and whether Account Codes are used gt NOTE You must consider the call traffic across a private network when estimating the number of required TTRs This includes calls on analog tandem tie trunks and T1 emulated tandem tie trunks In addition if your private network includes Centralized Voice Messaging you must consider the call traffic coming across the private network for the voice messaging system and the TTRs required for the updating of Message Waiting lights Release 6 1 or later systems For this updating a TTR is required at the sending end and the receiving end If the systems in the private network are connected by PRI trunks no additional TTRs are needed Add the number of TTRs obtained in Step 1 and Step 2 If the Group Calling Prompt Based Overflow setting Release 6 0 and later systems is not being used go to Step 6 If the Group Calling Prompt Based Overflow feature is being used add the number of TTRs needed for the primary delay announcement devices that are assigned to those calling groups UselTable 2 5 determine the TTR requirements for the primary delay announcement devices If applicable add the number of TTRs needed for the secondary delay announcement devices that are assigned to calling groups using the Prompt Based Overflow
544. te DLC beside the preprinted logical ID number m Write the name or location of the primary DLC operator in the Person Location or Function column m On Form 1 page 2 write the extension of the DLC under System Consoles Proceed to the next section Jacks for Additional Operator Positions Jacks for Additional Operator Positions Use these instructions only if the system has more than one operator position Otherwise skip to the next section Extension Jack Pairs for Analog Telephones The maximum number of operator positions is shown in Table 2 7 Table 2 7 Maximum Number of Operator Positions Position Telephone Maximum QCC MLX 20L 4 DLC MLX 20L 8 MLX 28D DLC Analog multiline 8 telephones Any combination of operator positions can be assigned as long as no more than four are QCCs and the total combined number is no more than eight For example a system can have a combination that consists of four QCCs two MLX DLCs and two analog DLCs The Call Management System CMS equipment connects to analog extension jacks assigned as DLC positions You must assign two DLC positions for each CMS maximum of two connected to the system on analog multiline modules Planning Form Instructions gt NOTE For each CMS connected to the system you must assign two analog DLC positions These two DLCs do not need to have the factory setting extension numbers but do need to be on the same module MERLIN LEGEN
545. ted from ports 2 3 4 6 7 or 8 The CTI link port cannot be the potential operator port or the console programming port Planning Form Instructions Use the floor plan and Equipment List if available to verify the location of any video stations and all remaining MLX telephones and adjuncts connected to them 1 Form 2 mark the extension jack assignments for the video stations and the remaining MLX telephones a Inthe Jack Type column make sure D is checked next to the logical ID for each digital extension jack b Inthe Person Location or Function column identify each video station or MLX telephone by the user s name location or function c If an extension port will be a CTI link Write CTI Link the Person Location or Function column and Label column and put a check mark in the CTI Link column If this is a CTI link skip to Step 3 The CTI link port must be selected from ports 2 3 4 6 7 or 8 The CTI link port cannot be the potential operator port or the console programming port 2 Using the information from Form 2a mark the digital extension adjuncts and video stations on Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts a Dooneofthe following Ifthe jack does not have an adjunct connected write None in the Adjuncts column and skip to Step 3 f an adjunct is connected to the telephone proceed to Step b b adjunct is connected to the MLX telephone enter the type of adj
546. tem use Tandem switching m If no barrier codes are planned for these trunks check No A SecurityA lert To help prevent toll fraud barrier codes should always be assigned The barrier codes should also be the maximum length allowed MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 21 6 Remote access should not be assigned to DID trunks and private network tandem trunks that are used for incoming customer calls However for all trunks to which you are assigning remote access a Transfer the information from Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks to Form 3a 1 Write the logical ID and line trunk number in the applicable columns 2 Check either the DID or Priv Net Tie Trunk column or the Non Tie Trunk column 3 Complete the Line Trunk Type and Description column Include the different calling areas of WATS trunks and different destinations of FX trunks If a private network trunk write Network b For each line trunk check the Dedicated column to indicate that it is always used for remote access or the Shared column to indicate that it is used for remote access when the system is in Night Service operation Do not check either column for private network trunks 7 For Class of Restriction without Barrier Codes on Form 3a page 3 complete the DID and Private Network Tie Trunks and Non Tie Trunks sections a
547. tem Release 6 1 Form 3a Sa Incoming Trunks Remote Access DID and Private Network Tie Trunks Barrier Codes Required for Private Network Tie Trunks Q Remote Access Code 889 Yes Q Renumber to No Automatic Callback Barrier Codes Required for Non Tie Trunks Q Enable Yes Disable No Number of Digits in Barrier Codes Q 4 11 74 DID or Priv Logical Trunk Non Tie Trunk Type and Factory Setting Form 3a 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 3a Continued Incoming Trunks Remote Access DID or Priv Logical Trunk Non Tie Trunk Type and WES Yom TERRY Form 3a 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form Continued 7 Class of Restriction without Barrier Codes DID and Private Network Tie Trunks Non Tie Trunks Network Calls Network Calls Q None None Q Tandem Q Tandem Q ARS Q ARS Restriction Restriction Unrestricted Unrestricted Outward Restrict Outward Restrict Toll Restrict Toll Restrict ARS Restriction Level ARS Restriction Level E 0 4 Q0 4 O 5 Q mS 2 Q6 2 Q6 O3 a 3 Disallow
548. tems or a MERLIN LEGEND Communications System with a Lucent Technologies DEFINITY G1 1 Communications System or DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server The two communications systems can be co located or at different sites Forwarding Delay Option Each user can program a Forwarding Delay setting for the Forward Remote Call Forwarding or Follow Me features The forwarding delay is the number of times that a call rings at the forwarding extension before the call is sent to the receiver The delay period gives the original call recipient time to answer or to screen calls by checking the displayed calling number if available The delay can be set at 0 9 rings The factory setting for the forwarding delay is 0 rings no delay Voice Announce on Queued Call Console The system manager can enable the fifth Call button on a QCC console Hybrid PBX mode only to announce a call on another user s speakerphone providing the destination telephone has a voice announce capable SA button available A QCC cannot receive voice announced calls they are received as ringing calls The factory set status for the fifth Call button is voice announce disabled MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Prior Releases Features and Enhancements Release 4 0 Enhancements March 1996 Page Time Based Option for Overflow on Calling Group Release 4 0 has added a time limit for calls in queue
549. tendant 2 32 Interdigit timers 4 49 Intuity GL 16 Intuity AUDIX 2 30 2 31 INWATS D 1 ISDN Terminal Adapter 5 3 Issue 1 August 1998 Page IN 8 J Jacks additional operator positions 2 22 analog multiline telephones 2 27 applications 2 30 auxiliary equipment 3 9 applications 2 28 data terminals 2 25 identifying for extensions 2 14 lines trunks 3 1 MLX 2 24 2 25 operator position maximum 2 22 primary operator position 2 21 system programming 2 7 tip ring T R equipment 2 30 type 2 15 K Key mode data stations 5 33 FCC registration 3 6 permanent 2 8 setting up 2 8 L Labeling display telephones 4 57 extensions 2 33 Posted Messages 4 57 System Speed Dial 4 58 Language selection 2 9 Line coding Primary Rate Interface PRI 3 31 T1 service 3 25 Line compensation settings 3 25 3 32 1 3 25 Line options planning BRI Line Options 3 44 Service Profile Identifier SPID 3 45 clock synchronization 3 46 timers 3 48 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Index Lines trunks adding to the system 6 4 assigning 3 50 capacity 2 2 connecting components with 24 Direct Inward Dial DID 3 42 DS1 connectivity 3 23 hold disconnect interval 3 14 identifying jacks 3 1 incoming types 3 6 jacks 3 2 labels 3 7 loop start disconnect 3 12 modules and jack types 3 2 NI 1 BRI connectivity 3 44 o
550. ter the applicable DSL and DN values as needed ISDN Ordering Code Capability S DISPACCESS EQN 20 0 5 4 EXEC D ACCESS DATA MASKNO 04328 MASKNO 00000 EQN 20 0 5 4 CLOSS 0 BCHEQN 2 BCEQN SP amp AU3 amp C56 amp C64 CPDDN 2156855917 V amp 2156855917 CMD CPVDN2 2156855917 COE CLASS1 LINKOPT DYNNOPAL BAPROF 0 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 NI 1 BRI Provisioning Siemens SSC EWSD Switch Translations Page H 31 DISPSUB DN 685591 7 NPA 215 DN 6855917 EQN 20 0 5 4MASKNO 03800 CAT MASKNO 03774 BCHDN 2 MASKNO 03798 BCDN SP amp 0 amp C56 64 MASKNO 04535 CT VI MASKNO 04396 LCC BVCE 1 MASKNO 03785 BCHCT 2 MASKNO 06282 IBCHCT 2 MASKNO 06288 OBCHCT 2 MASKNO 06291 PIC 0288 SP MASKNO 04398 amp 0288 AU3 CHRG FRSA1 MASKNO 03775 COS ICND amp MASKNO 03777 CRBLIM 2 MASKNO 03798 CT CMD MASKNO 04396 LCC 1 MASKNO 03785 BCHCT 2 MASKNO 06282 IBCHCT 2 MASKNO 06288 OBCHCT 2 MASKNO 06291 PIC 0288 C56 MASKNO 04398 amp 0288 64 CHRG FRSA1 MASKNO 03775 COS ICND amp RND MASKNO 03777 CRBLM 2 MASKNO 03798 DISPTSP TSPID 215685591 701 MASKNO 04383 EQN 20 0 5 4 USID 5 TSPID 215685591701 TERMLIM 1 MASKNO 04386 DN 6855917 MASKNO 04382 CT MASKNO 04385 DN 6855917 MASKNO 04382 CT CMD MASKNO 04385 MERLIN LEGENDCommunications Syste
551. tercom Ring ICOM Ring button Intercom Voice ICOM Voice button Intercom Originate Only ICOM Orig Only button Loudspeaker Paging button Personal line button Key mode only Prime line button Behind Switch mode only NOTE In Behind Switch operating mode the system automatically assigns two prime lines to each port on an MLX module one for the MLX telephone and one for the device connected to the Multi Function Module MFM If an MFM is not connected to an MLX telephone or the MLX port is not used the prime line for the MFM can be removed The prime line can then be assigned to other users Factory Assignments The system automatically assigns certain kinds of line buttons depending on the type of equipment and the mode of operation In Key mode the system assigns an ICOM Ring button and an ICOM Voice button the first eight outside lines connected to the control unit are assigned to each nonoperator multiline telephone beginning with Button 3 In the Behind Switch mode the system assigns an ICOM Voice button an ICOM Ring button and one prime line button Button 3 to every nonoperator multiline telephone For either mode the line trunk assignment is the same for both analog multiline and MLX telephones illustrates the factory set button assignments for MLX telephones illustrates the factory set button assignments for analog multiline telephones MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 Syst
552. terns based on the time of day Four additional tables are factory set and are designed to save programming time In this section you define a set of ARS tables This set includes a list of area codes and exchanges associated with each table the preferred and alternate routes if any for each subpattern and the Facility Restriction Level FRL for each route As the system manager becomes more familiar with the calling patterns of the company and with the intricacies of ARS he or she may want to change these patterns to suit the particular installation ARS Worksheet This section contains instructions for completing the ARS worksheet Form 3e to decide how to best route calls For each trunk pool you identify the trunk pool number type of trunk local FX regional WATS and so on whether the calls are toll or local calls and the number of area codes or exchanges the pool should serve When placing a toll call using ARS callers dial one of the following m 11 Digits 1 3 area code 3 exchange 4 last 4 digits of the number m 8 Digits 1 3 exchange 4 last 4 digits of the number m 7 Digits 3 exchange 4 last 4 digits of the number MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 60 Keep in mind that for 10 digit toll calls callers must dial 1 before dialing the area code even if they don t normally need to dial a prefix to m
553. the Auto Logout box m To change the factory setting from Auto Logout do one of the following Check the Auto Login box to indicate automatic login for an extension that should never be logged out such as a data extension Check the Integrated VMI box to indicate automatic login for a VMS that requires special signaling for integrated operation Check the Generic VMI box to indicate automatic login for a VMS that does not require special signaling 15 To specify the number of calls allowed into the group calling queue under the Queue Control heading do one of the following m To keep the factory setting check the 99 calls box m To change the threshold check the second box and write the number of calls 0 98 in the space provided gt NOTE Specifying a Queue Control threshold of 0 indicates that no calls are allowed into the queue Queue Control is turned off Proceed to the next section l System Features MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 41 System Features System features affect all users and all or most telephones For more information on system features see the Feature Reference This section contains instructions for assigning the following system features ransfer of calls amp On Return Time all Park Return Time utomatic Callback D xtension Statu tation Message Detail Recording
554. the factory set assignments m For multiline telephones in Key mode fill in the telephone number on Buttons through 10 Record the line numbers see Form 2c m For multiline telephones in Behind Switch mode fill in the extension number of the prime line on Button 3 4 To change the factory set assignments a Buttons 1 through 10 indicate the type of intercom button by circling ICOM for ICOM Voice ICOM Ring or ICOM Orig Only and writing King Voice or Orig Only b Fillin the telephone numbers or prime line extension numbers to be assigned or changed Start with Button 3 and record the line numbers on the diagram see Form 3b Assign programmed Loudspeaker Paging buttons by selecting the button and writing Fage on it MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Assigning Telephone Buttons Page 3 62 Direct Line Consoles Use these instructions only if the system has one or more DLCs Otherwise proceed to Chapter 4 Features to record feature assignments on the forms for each extension gt NOTE For more information on DLCs see the Feature Reference The number of line Direct Station Selector DSS and programmed feature buttons assigned to a DLC depends on the type of telephone and the number of lines trunks connected to the system The factory setting for DLCs is that in addition to an SA Voice and an SA Ring button or I
555. the system to allow DS1 connections is the 100D module The system can have up to three 100D modules Each 100D module supports up to 24 logical endpoints IDs or ports one for each channel even though the module has only one jack The 100D module can be configured to operate with either of the following types of service factory setting To transmit and receive voice and analog data with T1 Switched 56 service digital data m PRI Primary Rate Interface To transmit and receive voice analog and digital data To ensure the proper protocol between both ends of the DS1 connection the following options should be set for both types of service m of Service m Frame Format m Suppression Line Code m Signaling mode m Line Compensation Clock Synchronization Channel Service Unit CSU setting Additional settings must be entered for both services especially for PRI and T1 Switched 56 service Appropriate settings are determined by the transmission facility to which the module is connected and or is supplied by the service provider This section contains instructions for both T1 and PRI services gt NOTE PRI service for Release 2 0 through Release 4 1 systems requires that the service provider s switching equipment be either a 4ESS Generic 13 through 16 5ESS Generic 6 or a 5ESS serving the FTS2000 federal government only network PRI service for a Release 1 0 or Release 1 1 system requi
556. ting Hybrid PBX mode only t Select Voice only Data only or Both Local Tables Default FRL is 2 Figure 4 5 Other Digits Example MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 70 5 Ifthe system must absorb certain leading digits dialed by users to place calls on a particular pool enter a number in the same row as the pool number in the Absorb column Use the number 0 if you do not want absorption Assign a value of 1 through 11 according to the number of digits you want absorbed starting with the first digit dialed Example If a company has FX lines trunks for the 686 exchange in the 901 area code and wants to allow people to dial those calls the same way they dial toll calls to other area codes an absorption number of 4 is assigned to the FX trunk pool Pool 893 The completed form for the 6 Digit Table that routes calls to the FX trunk pool is shown in Figure 4 6 After ARS is programmed people in the company illustrated in Figure 4 6 dial 1 701 b b XXXX to make these calls The system absorbs the leading 1 and the area code and dials only the seven digit number to place these calls on one of the FX lines trunks MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 4 Features System Features Form 3f Automatic Route Selection Tables Maximum 16 Tables Make a copy for each table
557. ting end transmits an off hook signal and waits for the remote end to send back a signal a wink that it is ready for transmission MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Index Index Issue 1 August 1998 Page IN 1 Numerics 008 MLX module 2 3 2 5 008 module 6 3 008 OPT module 2 30 AUDIX Voice Power 2 30 2 31 extension capacity 2 3 MERLIN MAIL voice messaging system 2 31 016 T R module 2 5 2 30 ringing frequency 2 30 2 32 100D module 3 3 3 22 2 digit numbering plan 2 34 3 digit numbering plan 2 35 408 GS LS MLX module 6 3 jacks 3 2 Power Failure Transfer PFT feature 2 6 408 GS LS MLX module 6 3 ports 2 15 408 module 6 3 4ESS 3 23 D 1 SESS 3 23 D 1 5ESS Local 3 34 800 NI BRI module 2 5 3 3 3 5 A Absorb digits 4 70 Account Code Entry 5 35 ACCUNET Switched Digital Services 3 3 ACCUNET Switched Digital Services SDS D 1 Adding to the system 6 2 Adjuncts system assigning buttons 3 56 features 4 3 numbering 2 26 Queued Call Console QCC 4 4 Alert external 4 36 Allowed Lists 4 50 American Society of Composers Artists and Producers ASCAP 3 9 Analog multiline telephones and Delay Announcement Units 2 27 button assignments Hybrid PBX mode 3 57 button assignments Key Behind Switch mode 3 59 Extension Copy feature 4 11 jacks 2 27 trunk assignment 3 50 Analog voice and modem data stations lines trunks 5 8 Answer
558. tions 3 10 services 3 10 Voice messaging systems 2 16 Windows NT 2 26
559. tions using the 012 T R module All 16 ports on the 016 T R module may be used for applications Table 2 8 shows by application the number of ports used the number of TTRs required and the number of additional single line telephones that can be added to the modules Use this table as a guideline 1 No longer orderable MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 31 Table 2 8 Application Ports Application Ports TTRs Telephones MERLIN LEGEND Mail 2 1 NA 4 1 6 2 Messaging 2000 4 2 2 6 3 1 8 4 0 12 5 0 16 6 0 Intuity AUDIX 4 2 2 6 3 1 8 4 0 10 5 0 12 6 0 Enhanced Service Center ESC 12 8 0 16 8 0 CONVERSANT see Note 3 MERLIN MAIL 2 1 3 1 for the modem 4 2 2 1 for the modem Lucent Technologies Attendant 1 1 6 1 for programming 2 1 5 1 for programming 3 2 4 1 for programming 4 2 3 1 for programming AUDIX Voice Power 2 1 6 4 2 4 6 3 2 8 4 0 1 No longer orderable gt NOTES 1 Older versions of the 012 T R module apparatus codes 517 13 517 13 if one or more applications are used only four tip ring devices may be assigned to the module where the application is assigned regardless of how many jacks are open 2 The applications in Table 2 8 do not work properly with 012 T R modules manufactured for older MERLIN II systems These applications must be conn
560. tious company McHale and Associates of Denver Colorado area code 303 McHale has a local trunk pool an in state WATS pool and a cross country WATS pool Because Colorado has three area codes 303 719 and 970 the in state WATS line trunk can be used for both toll and local calls Figure 4 1 shows an example of two entries for the 303 and 719 area codes for Pool 890 on the worksheet The cross country WATS trunk pool serves the greatest number of different area codes every area code in the country except the two in Colorado Therefore it is the preferred trunk pool for toll calls The in state WATS trunk pool serves the greatest number of different exchanges It is the preferred trunk pool for calls to every exchange in area code 303 except the 20 exchanges in the local calling area Therefore it is the preferred trunk pool for local calls and some of these are toll calls If the local switch will use PSTN lines on a remote switch see the Network Reference for the steps necessary to implement this MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 62 Automatic Route Selection Worksheet Number of exchanges inthe callingarea_ 2 Type of 2 Number of Area Codes Exchanges or Network Destinations for whic Trunk Pool No Trunk Type Trunk Pool is Used 70 Local 20 Exchanges in local area 890 for 303 in state WATS All exchanges in ar
561. to allow the User access to one or more trunk pools by dialing the pool dial out code The dial out code restriction places data calls only on specific trunk pools For example you may want to restrict users to trunk pools that are made up of special data lines such as PHI channels used for data services or to reserve other trunk pools for voice communications only Planning Form Instructions Use the Optional Features section of Data Form 1a or 1b for each data extension to record your decisions 1 Inthe Optional Features section under the Pool Dial Out Code Restriction heading Check Unrestricted from following codes and list the codes in the space provided for unrestricted use Check Restricted from following codes and list the codes in the spaces provided for restricted use The factory setting is restricted for all codes 2 Use Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks to locate the dial out codes for each pool that the data station is restricted from using Write the dial out codes on the lines below the Yes box Calling Restrictions When the system is first set up all data stations are restricted This means that only inside intercom calls may be made local and long distance calls may not be placed from any data station However you can unrestrict selected data stations to allow local and long distance calls Planning Form Instructions Use the Optional Features section of Data Form 1a or 1b for each data
562. trunk They may not provide reliable far end disconnect for toll restriction A SecurityA lert Toll fraud can occur when loop start lines trunks are used with unreliable disconnect If the calling party stays on the line after the called party hangs up the central office returns a dial tone at the conclusion of the call enabling the caller to place another call as if it were being placed from your company Ground Start GS This line trunk is preferred for communication with outside modem data stations Ground start lines trunks provide improved signaling and reliable far end disconnect for secure toll restriction Video calls are not made over ground start lines trunks The following kinds of outside ground start or loop start lines trunks can be used for data communications Basic lines trunks Wide area telecommunications service WATS 800 service inbound WATS Foreign exchange FX Ground start loop start lines trunks connect to ground start loop start jacks on the following types of modules in the control unit 800 65 15 400 GS LS TTR 408 LS lines trunks only 408 GS LS 400 LS lines trunks only 800 LS lines trunks only 408 GS LS MLX 800 GS LS ID MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Lines Trunks to Data and Video Stations Page 5 28 m Analog Digital Tie This trunk typ
563. ue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Selecting Line Trunk Options Page 3 31 Module Information Use the procedure in this section to fill in module information on pages 1 and 2 of Form 3b Incoming Trunks DS1 Connectivity 100D Module Then proceed to the next section PRI Options Planning Form Instructions On Form 3b page 1 Incoming Trunks DS1 Connectivity 100D Module for each 100D module with PRI service 1 In the module Slot No space write the number of the control unit slot that contains the module see the Control Unit Diagramjon Form 1 gt NOTE If more than one 100D module is used complete the first box Module 1 to show the options assigned to the 100D module in the lowest numbered control unit slot Use the second box for the second lowest numbered slot and the last box for the highest numbered slot Under the Type of Service heading check PRI During programming PRI must be selected here before the PRI options information is entered When it is selected the system restarts Under the Switch Type PRI Service Only heading check the PRI switch type If the switch is part of a private network check either Legend PBX or Legend NTWK gt NOTE If the switch is part of a private network and is connected to a DEFINITY switch select Legend PBX If the switch is connected to another MERLIN LEGEND system one switch must be configured as Legend PBX and the othe
564. ue but less than the value for Threshold 3 the LED winks m If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the highest value Threshold 3 the LED lights steadily If all three thresholds are set to the same value the result is one threshold only with LED state either off or on steady If two values are the same then the result is two alarm levels flash steady The factory setting is one call for all three thresholds with LED states of off and steady In Release 5 0 and later systems the primary delay announcements function like the single announcement available in prior releases After the delay announcement the primary delay announcement in Release 5 0 and later systems an inside caller hears a special ringback a transferred inside caller hears regular ringback and an outside caller including a transferred outside caller hears special ringback or Music On Hold if programmed until the call is answered by a calling group member The delay announcement or primary delay announcement is played only once while the call is in queue In Release 5 0 and later systems the system manager can specify the extension for an optional secondary delay announcement and use system programming to set the interval 0 900 seconds between announcements This setting determines the time before a waiting caller hears the secondary announcement or if it is set to repeat the interval between replays of the secondary announcement The second
565. ugust 1998 Glossary Page GL 21 OPT off premises telephone Single line telephone or other tip ring device connected to the system via a 008 OPT module in the control unit Appears as an inside extension to the system but may be physically located away from the system OPX off premises extension out of band Signaling that uses the same path as voice frequency signaling transmission and in which the signaling is outside the band used for voice frequencies parity PassageWay Direct Connection Solution PBX PC PCMCIA memory card peripheral system personal line PFT phantom extension pool point to point facility The addition of a bitto a bit string so that the total number of ones is odd or even used to detect and correct transmission errors Set of software applications that provides an interface between a personal computer and an MLX telephone private branch exchange Local electronic telephone switch that serves local stations for example extensions within a business and provides them with access to the public network personal computer Personal Computer Memory Card International Association memory card See memory card In a private network a system that does not connect to more than one other system sometimes called an end node Central office line trunk that terminates directly at one or more extensions In Hybrid PBX mode a personal line cannot be part of a line trunk
566. ules and the 016 module do not require a Ring Generator Both types can reside together in the system Form 1 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 1 Continued UmE O eee Applications Q Lucent Technologies Attendant Notes Automated Document Delivery System ADDS Notes Call Accounting System CAS for Plus V3 Notes Q Call Accounting System for Windows Notes Call Accounting Terminal Q Business Hospitality Notes Call Management System CMS Notes Q Centrex Notes CONVERSANT Notes MERLIN Identifiert Notes Q MERLIN LEGEND Mail MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging Systemt Notes MERLIN PFC Telephone Notes MERLIN LEGEND Reporter Notes CAUTION General information about these applications is in the Feature Reference But to ensure proper operation you must review the documentation provided with the applications Not orderable Orderable only as an upgrade to existing CAS installations Form 1 3 Refurbished only MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 1 Continued TO Group IV Fax Primary Rate Interface PRI QBasic Rate Interface BRI Notes Q System Programming and Maintenance SPM Notes Video Conferencing Notes Q ISII IVP Auto Attendant AUDIX Voice Po
567. ules except 100D modules write the jack type for each logical ID Use the codes shown in Table 3 2 Table3 2 Codes for Line Trunk Jacks Jack Type Code Line Trunk Type LS Loop start GS LS Ground start loop start DID DID Tie Tie T1 GS DS1 connectivity used to emulate GS T1 LS DS1 connectivity used to emulate LS 1 DS1 connectivity used to emulate tie or for digital data service T1 DID DS1 connectivity used to emulate DID T1 S56 DS1 connectivity used for digital data PRI DS1 connectivity used for PRI service BRI 1 BRI 1 T1 Switched 56 digital data is also available using T1 Tie trunks See the Tie Trunks section later in this chapter 3 For systems that include a 100D module do one of the following in the Jack Type column m If the module will emulate trunks or will be used for digital data transmission write the appropriate jack type code see Table 3 2 for the channels being used for example T1 L5 or T1 556 or write T1 if the channels are not being used at this time m If the module will connect services such as Megacom and Megacom 800 write PRI for all 24 logical IDs of PRI type modules You may now match incoming trunks to the available jacks as described in the next section MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Identifying Line Trunk Jacks Page 3 6 Incoming Line Trunk Type Use the pro
568. umber of the northeastern WATS pool 891 is on the first line in the Subpattern A section The time 8 00 a m is in the Time of Day space and an FRL of 0 indicates no restrictions The 11 p m in the Time of Day space for Subpattern B and Pool 70 in the Pool column indicates that calls to these area codes are to be routed over the main pool after 11 p m Planning Form Instructions In the Subpattern sections on Form 3f and Form 3g 1 To direct calls differently according to time of day write a starting time for each subpattern in the Time of Day space for example 8 a m 2 complete the Pool column for each subpattern write the number of the preferred trunk pool next to the number 1 This is the pool to which calls to the area codes or exchanges listed in the Area Code Exchanges section of this form should be directed If you want to designate a backup pool in case all the lines trunks in the first choice pool are busy write the number of the backup trunk pool next to the number 2 and so on 3 complete the FRL column enter a value of O through 6 Assign a value of 0 if you want all users to access the route or 1 through 6 to restrict calling for the route to specific users only For all except the Default Local Table the factory setting is 3 The Default Local Table factory setting is 2 4 f extra digits at the beginning of the dialed number may be required for the system to place a call on a particular pool enter t
569. unct such as MFM SAA MFM T R MFM DA ER1OOO 7500B ASC 25 50 or ASC V9SX in the Adjuncts column MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Numbering the System Page 2 27 c Ifa digital data or video station will be connected to the jack and the equipment supports 2B Data such as a videoconferencing system using a BRI interface or a v 35 interface and an ISDN terminal adapter that supports 2B Data check the box in the 2B column gt NOTE Do not connect equipment that does not support 2B Data such as G4 FAX or a videoconferencing system using a v 35 interface and an ISDN terminal adapter that does not support 2B Data to an MLX jack configured as a 2B Data port d Ifa digital data or video system is connected to the jack enter the extension number in the MLX Telephone Ext No column 3 Identify the type of equipment connected to the jack or the ISDN terminal adapter connected to the jack Also record the person location or function if desired Proceed to the next section Jacks for Analog Multiline Telephones Jacks for Analog Multiline Telephones Use these instructions only if the system includes 408 408 GS LS or 008 modules Otherwise skip to the next section Jacks for Tip Ring Equipment and Certain features should be used differently when a General Purpose Adapter GPA is connected to an analog multiline telephone a
570. unications System Release 6 1 ee 1 22 uuoj Music On Hold Line Trunk No Source Loudspeaker Page Line Trunk No s Maintenance Alarm Line Trunk No Loop Start Reliable Disconnect L ra re e No 1 Yes Incoming Line Trunk Type Main Toll Type Module No Personal Telephone Outmode Prefix Req d Hold Disc Type i i Line WATS Number ignali Interval and Slot Tie number FX NI BRI or No i Equipment Label TT R Yese No Short Long Function 2 e 2 3 4 2 5 6 5 7 S 8 10 4 1 4 2 13 2 4 lt z gt 16 7 8 9 Factory Setting If the system has AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant System Integrated Administration will automatically set Loop Start Reliable Disconnect to Yes T Hybrid PBX mode only Maximum 11 pools with up to 80 trunks per pool Factory settings 70 main 891 dial in tie 892 automatic in tie 27 1 0 asvapoy waysks suongorunumuo sCNHOST NITIAN 2 22 WO Module Type No Incoming Line Trunk Type Main Toll Type No Personal Telephone Outmode Prefix Req d Hold Disc Re Line WATS Number ignali Interval and Slot Log DID Tie number EX NI BRI or Paci Eupen Tre veee
571. unications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary control unit console CONVERSANT conversion resource coordinating system manager COR Coverage CRC CSU CTI link cyclic redundancy check Issue 1 August 1998 Page GL 8 Processor module power supply module other modules carriers and housing of the system Telephone and adjuncts if any at operator or system programmer extension Entry level voice response application that automatically answers and routes calls and executes telephone transactions See modem poor In a private network that includes more than two systems the system manager who acts as a clearinghouse for any changes made on local systems that effect the network assuring that all system managers work together and that local system changes do not have undesirable effects on the network as a whole class of restriction Various types of restrictions that can be assigned to remote access trunks or barrier codes These restrictions consist of calling restrictions ARS Facility Restriction Levels FRLs Allowed Lists Disallowed Lists and Automatic Callback queuing Set of system features that can determine how extensions calls are covered when the person at the extension is busy or not available cyclic redundancy check An error detection code used on 051 facilities with the extended superframe format ESF channel service unit Equipment used on custo
572. unk number for each outside line that is a member of the Night Service group see Form 2c for the line trunk number 3 Inthe Ext or Calling Group No column write the extension number for each member of the Night Service group or for a calling group see 2a for the extension number 4 Inthe User or Calling Group Name column write each Night Service group member s name or the name of the calling group see Form 2alfor the group number MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features System Features Page 4 55 Night Service with Outward Restriction This section contains instructions for setting Night Service so that only authorized users can place non emergency calls when Night Service is in effect This prevents unauthorized after hours use of telephones Calls to non local UDP extensions can be made even while Night Service restricted Calls to non emergency numbers do not go through unless a password is entered first You can include up to 10 telephone numbers on the Night Service Emergency List If a HotLine extension dials an outside number that telephone number should be on the Night Service Emergency List or the extension should be on the Exclusion List Each number can have a maximum of 12 digits Once you specify that a password is required the password applies to all telephones in the system when Night Service is activated at any operator position If use
573. unk tests A SECURITY ALERT The enhancements in Release 3 1 help increase the security of the MERLIN LEGEND System To fully utilize these security enhancements be sure to read and understand the information in the upgrade notes and in the relevant system guides MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 About This Book Intended Audience Page xxxvii About This Book The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is an advanced digital switching system that integrates voice and data communications features Voice features include traditional telephone features such as Transfer and Hold and advanced features such as Group Coverage and Park Data features allow both voice and data to be transmitted over the same system wiring Intended Audience This book provides detailed information about system planning It is intended for use by anyone who works with customers to plan coordinate and implement a system including support personnel sales representatives and account executives It is also intended for technicians who are responsible for system installation maintenance and troubleshooting How to Use This Book This book has been designed to provide optimal assistance to you in completing the planning forms for example 1 Since some chapters and or sections apply to one or another of the configurations Key or Behind Switch Hybrid PBX or data communications these
574. unks to operator consoles be sure to change the line trunk assignment so that all lines trunks you want answered by a DLC operator appear on at least one operator position Decide which lines trunks should appear on each DLC operator console based on each operator s call handling responsibilities All operators may not need the same assignments DLC operators who are responsible for answering calls for specific groups usually need only the lines trunks used by group members MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Assigning Telephone Buttons Page 3 64 If the system includes a loudspeaker paging system consider assigning a programmed Loudspeaker Paging button to DLC positions for one touch access to the paging equipment If the system has fewer than 30 lines the operator only features Alarm Night Service and Send Remove Messages are factory assigned as shown in Figure 3 6 factory assignments can be changed through centralized telephone programming or by a DLC operator Planning Form Instructions Complete the Button Diagram page on each copy of Form 5a and Form 5b 1 Ring and Voice buttons circle SA or Icom 2 Write the telephone number of the line trunk you want to assign in the space on the Button Diagram page Record each line trunk number see 3 Assign Alarm Night Service or Send Remove Message buttons by labeling the appropriate
575. unrestricted data channel is requested and only restricted channels are available the call will be rejected See also restricted data UPS uninterruptible power supply Device that connects to the system to provide 117 VAC to the equipment when the commercial power source fails NENNEN V VAC alternating current voltage VDC direct current voltage VMI voice messaging interface An enhanced tip ring port videoconferencing System virtual private network VPN voice band channel voice mail voice messaging interface System application that allows face to face meetings with voice and video to occur between individuals or groups This application requires high speed data transmission facilities See also desktop videoconferencing Bnd group See VPN virtual private network A type of private network that uses the switching capabilities of the PSTN rather than tandem switching to direct calls between connected communications systems A VPN may constitute a part of a private network A transmission channel generally in the 300 3400 2 frequency band Application that allows users to send messages to other System extensions forward messages received with comments and reply to messages See VMI WATS wink start tie trunk Wide Area Telecommunications Service Service that allows calls to certain areas for a flat rate charge based on expected usage Tie trunk on which the origina
576. urce subheading in each box do one of the following m retain the factory setting check Loop that is the system uses the clock of the far end connection m To change the setting check Local that is the clock is free running gt NOTE The MERLIN LEGEND system must be set to Loop if the clock Source is coming from the network The Local setting is generated from the MERLIN LEGEND system and must be used whenever connecting two MERLIN LEGEND systems or a MERLIN LEGEND system and a DEFINITY system Tie trunk In a Tie trunk configuration one system MUST have the clock Source set to Local and the other MUST be set to Loop 11 Under the Activation subheading in each box do one of the following If loop clock synchronization is taking place check Active factory setting m clock is free running check Not Active gt NOTE Normally the primary synchronization source is set to Active and other modules are set to Not Active 12 If incoming ground start or loop start trunks are to be emulated then record the CSU setting under the Channel Service Unit heading by doing one of the following a Toretain the factory setting check Foreign Exchange b Tochange the factory setting check Special Access set up T1 channels for T1 Switched 56 service continue with the next section To set up T1 Switched 56 service on T1 Tie trunks proceed to the section entitled Tie Trunks To set up a 100D
577. use a pool to access an outside line trunk this restriction must be removed Preventive Measures Take the following preventive measures to limit the risk of unauthorized transfers by hackers Outward restrict all MERLIN LEGEND Communications System voice mail port extension numbers This denies access to facilities lines trunks In Release 3 1 and later systems voice mail ports are by default outward restricted As an additional security step network dialing for all extensions including voice mail port extensions should be processed through ARS using dial access code 1 A SECURITY ALERT The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System ships with ARS activated with all extensions set to FRL 3 allowing all international calling To prevent toll fraud ARS FRLs should be established using m FRL 0 for restriction to internal dialing only m FRL 2for restriction to local network calling only m FRL 3 for restriction to domestic long distance excluding area code 809 for the Dominican Republic as this is part of the North American Numbering Plan unless 809 is required m FRL 4 for international calling MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A 13 m n Release 3 1 and later systems default local and default toll tables are factory assigned an FRL of 2 This simplifies the task of restricting extensions the FRL for an
578. usic source tape player radio or Music On Hold on the Music On Hold line gt NOTE If the system uses equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials the customer may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay license fees to a third party such as the American Society of Composers Artists and Producers ASCAP or Broadcast Music Incorporated BMI The Magic on Hold system which does not require such a license can be purchased from a Lucent Technologies representative m For Loudspeaker Paging on the appropriate row write the line trunk numbers maximum of 3 of the line trunk jack s designated for the paging equipment m For Maintenance Alarm on the appropriate row write the line trunk number of the line trunk jack designated for the Maintenance Alarm external alert gt NOTE The last item Loop Start Reliable Disconnect refers to a line trunk option and is completed later in this chapter MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 3 Lines Trunks Identifying Line Trunk Jacks Page 3 10 Function Information If the system has a Voice Messaging System such as Messaging 2000 you can use the Function column to indicate which service is available for those jacks You can also use this column to indicate whether a jack connects a personal line and therefore has an owner Planning Form Instructions In the Function column o
579. ut or output of data along with data communication equipment DCE to enable the transmission of data over analog or digital lines trunks Depending on the station configuration it may or may not include a telephone either analog or an MLX telephone The DTE is usually a PC but can be a host computer a LAN workstation a printer an optical scanner or a video system or other equipment used for data input and or output The DCE which is either a modem or an ISDN terminal adapter such as the Ascend Pipeline 25PX or 50 allows data from the DTE to be transmitted over digital or analog telephone lines trunks The DCE which has capabilities similar to a telephone also may make the data call maintain the connection and terminate the data call gt NOTE The DCE and DTE may have hardware and or software options that can be set for transferring and receiving data such as parity and bit rate For more information refer to the DTE and DCE documentation for configuration compatibility requirements options and guidelines for changing options There are two types of data stations m Modem Data Station This type of data station sends and receives analog data It includes a modem as its DCE and is connected to an analog extension jack or T R jack on the control unit m ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Station This type of data station sends and receives digital data It includes an ISDN terminal adapter as its DCE and is connected to a dig
580. utside lines trunks m Electrostatic discharge ESD The telephone company is responsible for providing protection of outside lines trunks at the entrance to the site The protection should consist of m Carbon blocks or gas discharge tubes connected to an approved ground m Adequate bonding of the outside line trunk protector ground and the power company ground A CAUTION Improper ground can result in equipment failures and service outages Verify that the AC power uses an approved ground for its primary ground and that all voltage limiting devices are attached to an approved ground Approved grounds are as follows m The metal frame of the building m metal water pipe connected to an underground water pipe that is in direct contact with earth m An electrode encased by at least 2 inches 5 cm of concrete and located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing in direct contact with earth m A copper ring that encircles a building and is in direct contact with earth For most surge occurrences the following standard grounding requirements provide adequate lightning and power surge protection m Properly wired grounded and bonded outside line protectors m Properly wired and grounded AC outlet m Properly grounded single point ground bar m Properly wired connection between single point ground and power supply MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 1 Befo
581. vice must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Complies with Part 68 FCC Rules See the SystemReference Manual for proper FCC Classification FCC Reg Nos MF AS593M 72682 MF E KF AS593M 72914 KF E AS5USA 65646 PF E REN 1 5A approved CANADA ext rieures np sep 5 GN3931 BPEURD np sep INS 8 uoneuuoju WOddns WV 211 199 666 15 5 1 9 aseajay 15 suoneojunuuo2qN3931 NITHIN 8661 15 enss MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Security of Your System Preventing Toll Fraud Page A 9 Security of Your System Preventing Toll Fraud As a customer of a new telephone system you should be aware that there is an increasing problem of telephone toll fraud Telephone toll fraud can occur in many forms despite the numerous efforts of telephone companies and telephone equipment manufacturers to control it Some individuals use electronic devices to eliminate or falsify records of these calls Others charge calls to someone else s number by
582. ving the module cover of your telephone may expose you to dangerous voltages SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 New Features and Enhancements Release 6 1 Enhancements August 1998 Page xiii New Features and Enhancements Release 6 1 Enhancements August 1998 Release 6 1 includes all Release 6 0 functionality plus the enhancements listed below Private Networking Release 6 1 enhances the functioning of the networked MERLIN LEGEND Communications System in a number of ways Centralized Voice Messaging Group Calling Enhancements Transfer Redirect Direct Station Selector Call Forwarding SMDR Decrease in Call Set Up Time PRI Switch Type Test MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 New Features and Enhancements Release 6 1 Enhancements August 1998 Page xiv Centralized Voice Messaging One or more MERLIN LEGEND systems Release 6 1 or later can share the voice messaging system VMS of another MERLIN LEGEND system provided the systems are directly connected to the system with the VMS In this configuration the system containing the VMS is known as the hub This sharing of the VMS is called Centralized Voice Messaging Centralized Voice Messaging includes the functions of voice mail Automated Attendant and fax messaging See the Network Reference for detailed inf
583. vu que la somme des indices de charge de l ensemble des dispositifs ne d passe pas 100 No d homologation 230 4095A No de certification CSA LR 56260 L indice de charge 6 MERLIN LEGEND Lucent Q Model 511A Control Unit c mme Gee MADE IN U S A Use only circuit modi the Instal serviceable parts inside Contact your authorized agent for service and repair This digital noise emis Canadian Department of Communications Le pr sen Lucent Technologies manufactured MERLIN LEGEND ules carrier assemblies and power units as specified in ation Manual in this product There are no user out of building Installation Manual apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio sions set out in the radio interference reguations of the pour des appareil num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passani classe A radio lectri les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la prescrites dans le R glement sur le brouillage ique dict par le minist re Communications du Canada WARNING If equipment is used for applications secondary protectors are required See AVERTISSEMENT Si l equipment est utilis applications l installation d un protector secondair est requise Voir le manuel d Installation This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this de
584. wer CAS SPM Notes Q ISII VP Auto Attendant AUDIX Voice Power CAS SPM FAX Attendant System Notes Q PassageWay Direct Connect Solution Notes Computer Telephony Integration NetWare Q Windows NT Telephony Application Notes Messaging 2000 Notes Q Enhanced Service Center ESC Notes Intuity AUDIX O CAS Q SPM Q Lotus Notes Q Internet Messaging Q Fax Messages Q Message Manager Notes Q Other Notes Form 1 4 Not Orderable tez woy Renumber System Networked Switch Centralized Voice Messaging 2 Digit Selected Extension Numbers 3 Digit Set Up Space Q No Yes Q No Yes Mod Log Jack F d Er Set Renumber Old Wire Person Location Ring CTI Type ID _ Space to Label Ext No No or Function Freq t Appl Link Shaded lines indicate possible operator positions Factory Setting The system capacity for Personal Directories is decreased by one whenever an MLX 20L telephone is connected to an MLX port Use Form 2b for adjuncts connected via MFM Ringing Frequency is programmable on the 016 T R module only The maximum number of VMI ports is 24 The maximum number of CTI links is 1 i L 1 i 4 re L 5 SULJOquINN 093845 L D re w
585. which the control functions are performed principally by electronic data processors operating under the direction of a stored program Carrier added to the control unit when the basic carrier cannot house all of the required modules Houses a power supply module and up to six additional modules Data communications device that allows connection between an RS 232 DTE device and the control unit using MLX extension jacks on the 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module See ESF An endpoint on the internal side of the communications system An extension can be a telephone with or without an adjunct Also called station See also data workstation An analog digital or tip ring physical interface on a module in the control unit for connecting a telephone or other device to the system Also called station jack MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary extension programming August 1998 Page GL 13 Programming performed at an extension to customize telephones for personal needs users can program features on buttons set the telephone ringing pattern and so on See also centralized telephone programming and system 9 facility Facility Restriction Level factory setting fax Fax Attendant System FCC feature feature code feature module Feature screen ferrite core Flash ROM foil shield forced idle foreign exchange Fractional T1 Equipm
586. who is also a member of a coverage group Planning Form Instructions 1 Form 7c holds information for eight coverage groups Make additional copies of the form if more groups are planned Review the Employee Communication Survey analysis and determine the senders to be grouped Form 8a is used to identify system features Under the Coverage Delay Interval heading at the top of Form 8a do one of the following m keep the factory set interval check the rings box m To change the factory set interval check the second box and write the number of rings 1 9 in the space provided Under the Delay Ring Interval heading Release 4 0 and earlier systems only do one of the following m To keep the factory set interval check the 2 rings box m To change the factory set interval check the second box and write the number of rings 1 6 in the space provided MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 4 Features Group Assigned Features Page 4 31 4 On Form 7c a Write the group number in the Group No space Start with 1 and number the groups sequentially gt NOTE If a group is the coverage group for AUDIX Voice Power the factory setting is Group No 30 but can be changed write AUDIX by the group number and list the extensions of AUDIX Voice Power subscribers see b List the extension numbers of all senders in the group in the upper 1 block see
587. will be automatically set by Integrated Administration to defaults assumed by the AUDIX Third Calls in Queue Alarm Threshold Voice Power system and not necessarily those 1 listed on this form Changing the assumed defaults could affect how the AUDIX Voice Power system calls 2 99 works If you change them DO SO WITH CAUTION and record the settings on this form For more External Alert for Calls in Queue Alarm information see the AUDIX Voice Power documentation Q No Any port programmed as a VMI port is by default Q Yes Extension No restricted from making outgoing calls Form 7d 2 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6 1 Form 8a Transfer Options Return Time Intervalt Q 4 rings Q O rings Q rings 1 9 One Touch Call Handling One Touch Transfer System Features SMDR Options Call Report Format Q Basic ISDN Calls Reported non UDP Q Incoming and outgoing Q Outgoing only Call Length 40 seconds a seconds 0 255 Calls Reported UDP Q Incoming and outgoing LY None Manual Completion Talk Time Q Automatic Completion Q Enabled Q One Touch Hold Disabled Transfer Audible Q Music On Hold Q Ringback Inside Dial Tone Q Inside Outside Type of Transfer Q Voice button Q Ring button Reminder Service Cancel Q No Yes time of day Camp On Return Time 90 seconds a seconds 30 300
588. xe x24 x22 x7 5 x23 xoi x22 x30 5 xz x29 x12 x20 x28 x27 x2 x26 xo x17 x25 x33 X45 i al n J HH J J J 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 BASIC CARRIER EXPANSION CARRIER EXPANSION CARRIER x40 x52 x39 x51 x38 X50 57 9 X56 X48 l x35 x34 x46 11 Ring Generator amp Ring Generator Ring Generator gt lt O L LJ mum C Figure2 1 Sample Control Unit Diagram MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 2 Control Unit Configuration Recording System Operating Conditions Page 2 7 Recording System Operating Conditions This section contains instructions for recording the following system operating conditions Programming equipment to be used and its extension jack assignment Mode of operation anguage choice nable and disable Automatic Maintenance Bus reminder to set the system date ackup schedule dentifying system console extensions econd Dial Tone Timer E E NH E E E E E E dentifying system applications Forms Needed Form 1 System Planning
589. xtension jacks for a local host computer review the guidelines in Guidelines for Digital Extension Jacks earlier in this section 1 For each digital extension jack used to connect an ISDN terminal adapter Inthe Jack Type column make sure there is a D next to the number for each digital extension b Inthe Person Location or Function column write Terminal Adapter host 2 For each basic telephone extension jack you plan to use to connect a modem a Inthe Jack Type column make sure there is a B next to the number b Inthe Person Location or Function column write modem host MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 5 Data Communications Assigning Extension Jacks Page 5 25 LAN Workstations A Local Area Network LAN consists of workstations PCs connected together to share resources The system connects to the LAN through a workstation that functions as a gateway providing ports for modem and ISDN terminal adapter connections Assign each ISDN terminal adapter used for access to a LAN workstation to a digital jack on an 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module Each modem must be connected to a basic telephone extension jack on an 012 T R 016 T R or 008 OPT module If you have a limited number of ISDN terminal adapters or modems to share among many users assign some or all of the modems or ISDN terminal adapters to a DHG In this way users can access all the d
590. y Alert indicates the presence of toll fraud security hazard Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system or use by an unauthorized party e g persons other than your company s employees agents subcontractors or persons working on your company s behalf Be sure to read Your Responsibility for Your System s Security on the inside front cover of this book and Security of Your System Preventing Toll Fraud in Appendix Customer Support Information MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 About This Book Related Documents Issue 1 August 1998 Page xlii Related Documents The documents listed below are part of the MERLIN LEGEND documentation set Within the continental United States these can be ordered from the Lucent Technologies Customer Information Center by calling 1 800 457 1235 Document No Title System Documents 555 661 100 Customer Documentation Package 555 661 110 Feature Reference 555 661 111 System Programming 555 661 112 System Planning 555 661 113 System Planning Forms 555 661 116 Pocket Reference 555 661 118 System Manager s Guide 555 661 150 Network Reference 555 661 800 Customer Reference CD ROM Telephone User Support 555 660 120 Analog Multiline Telephones User s Guide 555 660 122 MLX Display Telephones User s Guide 555 660 124
591. y try to transfer out of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System to gain access to an outgoing trunk and make long distance calls m They try to locate unused or unprotected mailboxes and use them as drop off points for their own messages The following is a discussion of how toll fraud is often perpetrated and ways to prevent unauthorized access that can lead to toll fraud MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 Issue 1 System Planning 555 661 112 August 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A 11 Physical Security Social Engineering and General Security Measures Criminals called hackers may attempt to gain unauthorized access to your communications system and voice messaging system in order to use the system features Hackers often attempt to trick employees into providing them with access to a network facility line trunk or a network operator This is referred to as social engineering Hackers may pose as telephone company employees and employees of Lucent Technologies or your authorized dealer Hackers will go through a company s trash to find directories dialing instructions and other information that will enable them to break into the system The more knowledgeable they appear to be about the employee names departments telephone numbers and the internal procedures of your company the more likely it is that they will be able to trick an employee into helping them Preventive Measures Tak
592. ymbols expressed in the base 2 number system which includes zeros and ones See B8zS Digital signal in which pulses ones alternate between positive and negative See also AMI B8ZS and bipolar violation Condition occurring when two positive or two negative pulses are received in succession See also and 825 Built In Speakerphone Part of the model name of some analog multiline telephones binary digit One unit of information in binary notation it can have one of two values zero or one Speed at which bits are transmitted usually expressed in bps Also called data rate Condition in which end to end connections cannot be made on calls because of a full load on all possible services and facilities See alsolg are Broadcast Music Incorporated MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Glossary board board assignment board renumbering Issue 1 August 1998 Page GL 5 A module for example 1000 408 GS LS that allows you to connect lines trunks and extensions to the communications system System Programming and Maintenance SPM procedure for assigning line trunk and extension modules to slots on the control unit System programming procedure for renumbering boards that have already been assigned to specific slots on the control unit BRI Basic Rate Interface A standard protocol for accessing Integrated Service Digital Networ
593. ype of digital facility that carries the equivalent of three lines Two are called B channels and provide voice and data communications services A third D channel controls signaling and maintains operations on the B channels In a system that is part of a private network an extension that is in the non local dial plan In a private network a user who is connected to another system in the network and not to the local system In a system that is part of a private network a list of extension ranges that the local system references in order to route non local intersystem calls via UDP In a private network a communications system that is system directly connected to and located more than 200 miles from the local system NENNEN O off hook Telephone is said to be off hook when the user has lifted off premises telephone ones density on hook the handset pressed the Speakerphone button to turn on the speakerphone or used a headset to connect to the communications system or the telephone network Requirement for channelized 057 service to the public network that eight consecutive zeros cannot occur in a digital data stream Telephone is said to be on hook when the handset is hung up the speakerphone is turned off and the user is not using a headset to connect to the communications system or the telephone network MERLIN LEGENDCommunications System Release 6 1 System Planning 555 661 112 Issue 1 A

Lucent Technologies Marine Radio 6.1 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents